SEOTips.ws

Sponsored Video

Cora SEO Software measures 520 on-page and off-page SEO factors for your keywords

The Best SEO is Human-Based SEO

by Rebecca Gill @ Web Savvy Marketing

This last weekend I the pleasure of speaking at WordCamp Miami. While I was fortunate enough to participate on two business panels, my main presentation was a solo one focused on search engine optimization. If you’d like to review my presentation, you can download the presentation on Sideshare, as well as view the livestream video... Read More

The post The Best SEO is Human-Based SEO appeared first on Web Savvy Marketing.

Why Facebook Marketing Matters

by seo_admin @ SEO Chat

Focusing on a single traffic source is never wise. The good news, there are more ways to build leads, aprt from Google! Have you been reluctant to learn how to market your business on Facebook? Whether you’re an SEO who thinks search engine optimization and AdWords will carry the day, or a website owner who […]

The post Why Facebook Marketing Matters appeared first on SEO Chat.

4 Tips to Improve Your YouTube Marketing

4 Tips to Improve Your YouTube Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you marketing on YouTube? Could you use some new ideas to improve your YouTube results? Perhaps you should reconsider your YouTube approach. In this article you'll discover four tips to make your YouTube marketing more effective. Listen to this article: #1: Pique Curiosity With Unconventional Video People aren't going to click on your video to see a boring infomercial. They may be willing to tolerate a dry tutorial if it offers unique advice that they won't find elsewhere. The most successful YouTube videos, though, tell an original and interesting story. This ad from Android is a good example. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=vnVuqfXohxc&feature=youtu.be It may be easier to come up with great content ideas if you don't limit yourself to videos that relate directly to your product or business. This is particularly important if you're in an industry that's hard to get people excited about (such as asphalt contracting). Consider this video of a young girl dancing, which was used to promote the Samsung Galaxy 580 phone. The video is seemingly unrelated to the product, yet still reflects positively on the company. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=lK7IzfLmyco The video conveys the excitement that Samsung wants its customers to feel about its phone. It helps set the mood for people to take the next step, which is to visit the URL at the end to learn more about the product. Your goal is to keep viewers engaged long enough to soften them up for your call to action. Don't go overboard with this type of content, though. You've probably seen some commercials and had no idea what the message was until the very end, which left you confused about the company. Make sure that your videos evoke the emotions you want customers to feel about your company, even if there isn't a direct connection between your video content and the product you're ultimately promoting. #2: Support Customer Research With Keywords When marketing on YouTube, it's important to recognize and consider your audience's stage in the buying process. Some marketers try to cold-sell to customers and prospects who might be interested in their products. The problem is that people who find your videos on YouTube are usually in the discovery stage and aren't ready to commit to a purchase. For this reason, it's important to choose keywords that are relevant to people who are looking for new information and to provide video content that educates based on those keywords. You can use the AdWords Display Planner tool to research keywords for your video descriptions and ad targeting. What types of keywords should you look for? Consider words and phrases that are relevant to both your industry and products. For example, if you have a car repair shop, you could target keywords such as "how to change oil" and "auto mechanic." Testing Keyword Performance in YouTube Ads Your keywords need to receive enough exposure for you to properly test them. Choose keywords with at least 1,000 monthly impressions, and you should be able to gather enough data to gauge their effectiveness. During the initial keyword testing phase, you want to collect data on the performance of keywords in your ads in a cost-effective way. Some of the keywords you're bidding on may generate more volume than you expect, especially if you're bidding competitively. YouTube is a massive site, so it's easy to quickly blow your ad budget, especially if you choose high-volume targeting options. Unless you're working with a big budget to start with, set your budget low enough to ensure you don't spend too much on a single keyword target. You can always raise your budget after you've had a chance to optimize your campaign and know which keywords offer the best ROI. #3: Qualify Leads With YouTube Video The goal of your video should be to prequalify viewers and send fully interested prospects on to your website to learn more about your products and services.

Three Reasons You Should Pay More For Your SEO In 2017

by @ Search Engine Optimization Specialists affordable search engine optimization effective search engine optimization search engine optimization

As Google’s core algorithm for ranking web pages continues to improve upon itself, we are seeing SEO get exponentially more difficult. Search engine optimization (SEO) is evolving rapidly, just like the internet. As Google’s core algorithm for ranking web pages continues to improve upon itself, we are seeing the art of perfecting SEO get exponentially […]

7 Ways to Use Facebook Native Video to Better Connect With Your Fans

7 Ways to Use Facebook Native Video to Better Connect With Your Fans

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you create videos to connect with your audience? Are you using Facebook native video? When you publish videos to Facebook, the result is high visibility and a greater likelihood of engagement. In this article I'll share seven ways to connect with your audience using Facebook native video. Listen to this article: #1: Preview Long-Form Content An effective use of Facebook native video is long-form content previews. If you have a long video you plan to share, choose a highlight to use as a preview to post on Facebook. This little chunk of video gives your audience a taste of what they'll get in the complete video.   A 10- to 15-minute video is too long to capture the attention of the average Facebook user. A 1- to 2-minute preview video is the perfect length for Facebook consumption. If viewers are intrigued, they're directed to your YouTube channel to watch the full video. #2: Share Daily Tips, Tactics and Advice When building an audience, consistency is incredibly important. Your audience appreciates your perspective, experience and expertise. The more often you can deliver value to your audience, the more often you'll get value back from them.   Since engagement with a Facebook page is often cited as a relevancy factor in Facebook's EdgeRank algorithm, daily videos that inspire interaction from fans can drastically improve audience reach. Remember, however, that value is the most important factor. #3: Record Videos on Location The ability to easily upload and share videos from a smartphone to Facebook leads to an incredible opportunity. Record and share reports, news and updates from conferences and other events instantly with your Facebook audience. While Facebook native video doesn't have the streaming capabilities of Periscope and Meerkat, the ease of capture, upload and distribution from your smartphone makes Facebook video nearly real-time.   Immediately publishing conference interviews, on-location tours or other behind-the-scenes content to Facebook also gives your non-attendees an experience that's the next best thing to being there. #4: Answer Audience Questions Create a more engaging experience for your Facebook audience by answering their questions in a video and posting it directly to Facebook. Fans and customers frequently reach out to you as an industry expert. Sometimes a video is a more effective way to communicate than a blog post, especially if it's a question you get asked over and over again.   Answering the question in video takes less time than writing a blog post and allows you to explain in a clear, direct manner. Using video also provides a personal and thoughtful touch that a few sentences of text never could. #5: Create Brief Explainer Videos Short videos work well on Facebook. Think of how average Facebook users consume content on the platform. They keep scrolling until something interesting gets them to stop. Even then, viewers want something quick and easy to consume before they move on to the next thing. A 45- to 90-second explainer video is a great piece of content to attract attention and awareness to your brand without detracting from the Facebook experience. Don't expect Facebook users to take direct action from an explainer video they consume in their news feed. But that's not really the point. This is just one more branded touch point on the path to conversion that cuts down on time during the sales cycle. #6: Create Video Ads The Facebook advertising platform provides marketers the ability to generate ads with Video Views as the goal. Using Facebook’s Power Editor, marketers can build entire ad campaigns using video and optimize the advertising spend for increased video views. Video ads can include a direct call to action (CTA) such as Shop Now, Learn More and Sign Up. As a best practice, make your CTA relevant to the experience they'll get after clicking the button. For example,

The Conversion Rate Conundrum: Common Mistakes and What to Do Instead

by Today's Industry Insider @ The Kissmetrics Marketing Blog

In real estate, the axiom is location, location, location. It’s first and foremost. The number one consideration. For your digital efforts – email, web pages, eCommerce platforms – an argument could be made for a few different ones: search engine optimization (SEO), the user experience (UX), conversion rate optimization (CRO), or perhaps something else entirely. […]

6 Ways to Use Advanced Twitter Search for Increased Influence

6 Ways to Use Advanced Twitter Search for Increased Influence

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to be a recognized expert in your industry? Looking for relevant conversations to weigh in on? Using Twitter's Advanced Search to monitor keywords and conversations can help you connect with influencers and uncover opportunities for thought leadership. In this article you'll discover six ways to use Twitter's Advanced Search to increase your influence in your industry. Listen to this article: #1: Find Conversations to Participate In Doing a keyword search on Twitter is a quick and easy way to find out what people in your industry are talking about, identify accounts to follow, and discover new business opportunities. With Twitter's Advanced Search, you can create complex searches with keywords that are relevant to your industry. To start, choose three or four keywords that are relevant to your industry and use the Boolean search operator "OR" to create a single search for all of your terms. For example, search for "digital marketing" OR "digital marketing advice." Look at the search results to find conversations in your niche. Then join relevant discussions to offer expert advice and build meaningful connections with people in your industry. Use the OR operator to ensure that every key phrase or search term is relevant to your mission. Keep this list updated and weed out the keywords that aren't helping you find the best results. Soon you'll have a filtered list of conversations to review on a daily basis. You can also add keywords like "recommend" to find prospects looking for services you offer. You can also use a keyword search to optimize your own Twitter profile. Add keywords to your bio to help other users find you. Including key phrases (such as "public speaker" and "charity worker") may help you uncover new opportunities. #2: Monitor Hashtags for Media Opportunities You can follow specific hashtags and keywords to discover people who are looking for thoughtful comments or quotes. For example, the hashtag #journorequest is popular among journalists and industry writers. You can create an advanced search that pairs both #journorequest and your key industry terms ("skincare expert" or "facial expert," for example) to find opportunities for free coverage in print and online. Once you've uncovered opportunities through hashtag monitoring, reach out to users to share your expert insights. This helps you get media coverage for your business and create meaningful connections. #3: Connect and Converse With Industry Peers Your influence is often measured by the network you keep. Use Twitter's Advanced Search filters to find key contacts and people to follow in your industry. Filter Results by Account In Twitter's search box, search for a keyword (or group of keywords). Then to filter your results, click More Options and select Accounts to see only those accounts that contain your keywords. Once you create a tailored list of key industry contacts, follow those users, add them to a list, or use a monitoring tool like TweetDeck to track what they're saying. Filter Results by People You Follow You can also limit your search to only the users you follow. To do this, enter your search term (for example, "social media data"). Then filter your results by clicking More Options and selecting From People I Follow. Your search results will only include tweets that match your search query and are from the accounts you follow. Filter Results by Date You can add a date range to find conversations relevant to your topics of interest and occurring within the last few weeks from users you follow. This gives you the opportunity to add comments, share your insights, and show thought leadership within your online peer group. Filter Results by People You can also use Twitter search to find previous conversations you've had with your contacts. This is a great way to revive relationships and build camaraderie.

How to Maximize Your Content Exposure on LinkedIn

How to Maximize Your Content Exposure on LinkedIn

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you taking advantage of all of LinkedIn's content marketing features? Do you know what types of content work best on LinkedIn? With a few tweaks to what you post on LinkedIn, you can build brand awareness, generate leads, and drive more revenue. In this article you'll discover how to maximize your LinkedIn content exposure. Listen to this article: #1: Share From Your Company Page Your LinkedIn company page is where you can catch the eye of prospects and build relationships with customers. Share content that is valuable to your audience, answer questions, and solve problems. This allows you to nurture genuine relationships with your followers and build brand awareness with your ideal prospects. This Symantec update drives registrations for an upcoming webinar. Company updates that contain links can have up to 45% higher follower engagement than updates without links. Suggested time commitment for success: 1 hour daily/4 hours weekly/10 hours monthly. Use this list of suggestions for what to share on your LinkedIn company page: Links to your latest and best white papers Ebooks Case studies Industry articles Helpful how-to content Bright visuals (visual is the new headline!) Post three to four times a day and engage with and respond to followers' comments. Be sure to change your header image every six months to avoid creative fatigue. Intel's company page celebrates a company milestone in this update. This Volvo update announces a product enhancement that will appeal to their target audience. #2: Post to SlideShare LinkedIn SlideShare has more than 70 million monthly unique visitors, and nearly 4 million visitors (on desktop alone) on an average day. With 13,000 new pieces of content added daily, SlideShare is a platform you can't afford to overlook. Barry Feldman of FeldmanCreative shares a nicely designed, helpful social media basics ebook on SlideShare. Suggested time commitment for success: 30 minutes daily/2 hours weekly/6 hours monthly. Use this list of suggestions for what to share on LinkedIn SlideShare: Company videos Webinar and conference recordings Influencer videos Product how-tos and tips Company presentations Webinar decks Infographics Well-designed short and informative content HubSpot shares slides from Dharmesh Shah's talk at the 2016 SaaStr Conference. The slide deck features lessons on SaaS, pricing, culture, MBAs, and customer happiness. To ensure you succeed with SlideShare, upload new content weekly, highlight decks on profile pages, group content into playlists, and add lead forms to help achieve lead-generation goals. You can also link your SlideShare presentation to your website to gain a quality inbound link. In this special video presentation, authors Mark Schaefer and Brian Solis explore the new idea of engineering customer experiences and a new marketing trend. Tip: Use the SlideShare Clipping tool to highlight and share valuable content you've produced with your networks. Ultimately, you can build authority by developing LinkedIn SlideShares that present a unique point of view on industry news, insights, or your company culture. #3: Publish on Publisher More than 1 million people have published more than 3 million posts on LinkedIn's publishing platform. About 45% of readers are in the upper ranks of their industries, including managers, VPs, and CEOs. Brian Solis, principal analyst at Altimeter Group, shared his personal takeaways, aspirations, and highlights from SXSW with a creatively perceptive cartoon ebook. Suggested time commitment for success: 1 hour weekly/3 hours monthly. Use this list of suggestions for what to publish on LinkedIn Publisher: Professional expertise and experiences Industry trends Lessons learned To ensure you succeed with LinkedIn Publisher, publish whenever you feel passionate or on a monthly basis.

Google Analytics and Social Media: What Marketers Need to Know

Google Analytics and Social Media: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you track the return on your social media activity in Google Analytics? Want to discover some valuable shortcuts? To explore cool hacks for Google Analytics, I interview Annie Cushing. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Annie Cushing, Google Analytics expert and chief data officer at Outspoken Media digital marketing agency. She's a total analytics geek who loves teaching other marketers how to make the most of their analytics data. Annie explores Google Analytics, social reporting, dashboards, and more. You'll discover how to customize Google Analytics reports for yourself. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Google Analytics and Social Media What's New in Google Analytics Starting May 15, 2017, Google Analytics will allow people to do remarketing across multiple devices. Annie explains that if someone visits your site on their mobile device and then comes back to it on their laptop, as long as they're logged into Google in both places, you'll be able to target them across their devices. This new capability is a huge step forward for remarketing audiences because few people shop only on their computer, tablet, or phone. Annie explains that Google previously relied on user IDs to offer remarketing features, but most businesses couldn't implement the technology very easily. Only advanced analysts could set it up for sites where users were highly incentivized to log in. Because most businesses don't have sites like that, this new ability is groundbreaking. Annie says one issue she regularly sees with clients is they seldom use Google Analytics for retargeting. Instead, they use AdWords and DoubleClick. However, Google Analytics enables marketers to get much more granular with targeting. For instance, you can serve an ad to someone who visited a certain page but didn't convert or to someone who put something in a cart but didn't check out. Hopefully, multiple-device retargeting will incentivize more people to take advantage of Google Analytics. Listen to the show to discover how a retargeting ad saved Annie last Christmas. Google Optimize Google recently announced they were releasing Google Optimize, a free tool for A/B testing. For example, say you want to experiment with product page design, such as the placement of the price or Buy button or different font colors or text. In an A/B test, you run two versions of your page and compare how each version performs. Up until this point, Optimizely has been the industry standard. At Social Media Examiner, we use Visual Website Optimizer. Annie believes Google Optimize is perfect for small- to mid-sized or even large businesses. (Google Optimize 360 is the enterprise-level version.) Annie recommends that businesses get what they can from the free version first. Then as your organization develops more sophisticated testing needs (for instance, reducing the bounce rate or increasing the conversion rate), consider paying for more advanced features. Annie also notes that Google Optimize is user-friendly. To move things around, you simply drag and drop. You don't have to ask a developer to customize the page for you. Listen to the show to hear my description of how optimizing tools work. Ad Blockers and Do-not-track Technology Annie explains how ad blockers and do-not-track tools impact your analytics data differently. If you run display ads on AdWords, then ad blockers will impact your overall effectiveness. As people choose to block ads, impressions and conversions will decrease. A lot of publishers,

LinkedIn Mobile: What Marketers Need to Know

LinkedIn Mobile: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Have you tried the updated LinkedIn mobile app? Are you actively using LinkedIn to engage with your network? To discover how to use the LinkedIn mobile app for marketing on the go, I interview Viveka von Rosen. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Viveka von Rosen, the world's leading LinkedIn marketing expert. She authored the book LinkedIn Marketing: An Hour a Day and is the founder of Linked Into Business, a LinkedIn marketing consultancy. She moderates the Twitter chat #LinkedInChat Tuesdays at 5pm Pacific. Viveka will explore the latest mobile apps from LinkedIn and what they mean for marketers. You'll discover how to navigate the updated LinkedIn mobile app. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: LinkedIn Mobile LinkedIn's mobile apps Viveka shares that the newest LinkedIn app, the LinkedIn Mobile App is actually an update of the earlier app, but that there are a lot of other apps within LinkedIn people might not know about, such as the Job Search app. There are also the apps that came with companies purchased by LinkedIn, such as SlideShare and Connected, a Customer Relationship Management (CRM) tool. (Note: After this recording, LinkedIn announced they were retiring the Connected App on March 21, 2016.) In addition, there are tools like the Recruiter app, Sales Navigator, Lookup and Elevate which are associated with LinkedIn's premium accounts. Then there's LinkedIn's news reader, Pulse, and the new Groups app. Although all of LinkedIn apps are available to iOS users, only some are available on Android, and Viveka reminds listeners that not all of the apps are free.  For example, Elevate is a combination CRM, content management, content curation tool priced for medium to large companies. Viveka shares a free alternative to Elevate called LinkedIn Lookup, and discusses the differences between the Connected app and Lookup. Viveka talks about the new Groups app and shares ways users can take advantage of features like the Highlights tab and the @ tag function. Listen to the show to hear Viveka discuss how and why LinkedIn is focusing on mobile. Thoughts on the improved LinkedIn mobile app Viveka feels the updated LinkedIn app is significantly easier to use than the old version, which means people will use it to stay in contact with their network more often. She says users she's spoken to seem to like the update. She says there are still some minor limitations with the app, but LinkedIn appears to be on top of it. For example, early on you couldn't customize an invitation to connect on the mobile app, but LinkedIn has fixed that. Viveka goes on to discuss a current issue which affects the visibility of contact info for 1st level connections and why she thinks this is leading to a change to the Connected app. She also says that image updates have vastly improved. In the old app you had to send a picture to Evernote or Dropbox before you could share it on LinkedIn, and now you take a picture on your phone and post it immediately. Listen to the show to hear Viveka's thoughts about hashtags on LinkedIn. Navigating the app Viveka takes us through the navigation of the updated LinkedIn mobile app and starts with the Home button which takes you to a page that is similar to your home page on LinkedIn. She explains it's where you see and share updates, and she the algorithm on her mobile seems to be smarter than the desktop version. There are two pages behind the Me button, Viveka continues. The first page contains notifications about people's interaction...

Live Video Tools: The Best Apps for Going Live

Live Video Tools: The Best Apps for Going Live

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you planning to start a live video show? Want to know which tools you'll need to broadcast live? To explore the best live video apps and software to produce your own live show, I interview Ian Anderson Gray. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Ian Anderson Gray, the founder of Seriously Social, a blog focused on social media tools. Ian is also a live video tools expert. His courses include Seriously Social OBS Studio and Seriously Social Wirecast. Ian explores the best live video software for beginning and advanced broadcasters. You'll discover which software and add-ons offer the features you need. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Live Video Tools Ian's Live Video Story When Facebook Live started rolling out, Ian felt like everyone had access before he did, because he was an Android user (at the time) living in the United Kingdom. In his search for a workaround, Ian discovered OBS Studio, a free tool for Macs and PCs. With OBS Studio, Ian found a way to broadcast from his computer to his Facebook page, profile, and groups. That was his entry into Facebook Live and live video. Ian wrote a blog post on how to broadcast from your computer with OBS Studio and went out of his way to make the process as easy as possible for people to understand. He even included a tool that allows people to get the magic stream key necessary to broadcast with OBS Studio. Since Ian posted the article last year, the article has had just under three million views. Listen to the show to discover what platform Ian tried using before Facebook Live. What Stops Marketers From Going Live? Two things stop marketers from going live: "the fear and the gear." But Ian believes fear is what really gets in people's way. People are afraid they'll say something silly or wrong. They might be worried their cat will jump on the keyboard, the webcam will fall over, and it will be a complete disaster. Or maybe they're afraid others will think they're a fraud. Marketers also have issues with technology. People think they can't go live because they don't have this webcam, that phone, or a decent lighting setup. Those are excuses for people who are simply scared of getting on camera and communicating their message. Everyone gets nervous, explains Ian, who's trained as a professional singer. He feels it too. The key is to channel your nervous energy into your performance. If you feel nervous or scared, Ian says, it's a good thing. It shows you care. The best performance Ian ever gave was when he was absolutely petrified before he went on stage. The worst performance was when he was entirely complacent. He thought the performance would be absolutely fine, and it turned out to be a disaster. To help you overcome that fear, Ian recommends warming up your voice before each broadcast. Exercise the lower part of your voice up to the high part of your voice. These exercises will likely make you feel a bit more at ease. Also, when you warm up, using the high and low parts makes your voice more engaging. By using your vocal range, you're not trying to become a different person. You're heightening your personality by putting more energy behind it. Listen to the show to hear Ian's example of a vocal warm-up and what your voice might sound like if you don't warm up. Basic Apps The easiest apps for live broadcasting are web-based. Fire up your browser (Safari, Chrome, Internet Explorer, etc.), and go to the tool's web page. BeLive, probably the best-known app, has an advantage because has a free trial. You can broadcast up to two 20-minute broadcasts...

Building a Business on the Back of Interviews

Building a Business on the Back of Interviews

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you interview people for your blog or podcast? Want to discover different ways to repurpose those interviews? To explore how he built his business through expert interviews, I interview Nathan Chan. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Nathan Chan, the founder, CEO, and publisher of Foundr Magazine, a paid digital magazine that profiles well-known entrepreneurs. He's built a huge following of almost 1 million Instagram fans and 300,000 email subscribers. He's also launched a new book, Foundr V1.0: Everything you need to know about starting and building a successful business, from the world's most influential entrepreneurs. Nathan shares his interviewing process. You'll discover how Nathan used expert interviews to build his business. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Building a Business on the Back of Interviews The Start of Foundr In 2013, Nathan was working in IT support at a travel company. He loved the company culture, but the work wasn't a fit. As he searched for something more fulfilling to do, he noticed that the major business magazines, of which he was a fan, were difficult for him to relate to. His life wasn't like the lives of the people on a Forbes billionaire list. Nathan started his magazine with about $3,000 and a goal of filling the gap between major business magazine content and entrepreneurs like himself. He wanted to speak to aspiring young entrepreneurs (he was 26 years old at the time) and provide in-depth content about what it takes to build a successful business. Nathan says that podcasts inspired this vision for his magazine, too. Podcasts were becoming increasingly popular, featured stories about relatable people, and could cover a topic in depth. Four months into producing the magazine, Nathan and his startup magazine faced a major roadblock. A large business magazine sued Nathan's startup magazine for trademark infringement. Luckily, Nathan says, the rebranding of the magazine resulted in the name Foundr, which is a better fit. Listen to the show to learn more about how Nathan responded to the lawsuit by improving the magazine's branding. The Business Model Foundr has three main sources of revenue: magazine subscriptions, the membership site, and courses. The magazine subscription is $2.99/month or $21.99/year and is available through the iTunes and Google Play stores. Across monthly and yearly subscriptions, Foundr has 20,000 monthly readers. On the Foundr membership site, subscribers have access to premium content, an online community, and exclusive training. In addition to the main revenue sources, Foundr includes a bit of sponsorship and advertising. Listen to the show to discover the similarities between what Nathan and I do. Nathan's Interviewing Process Nathan has interviewed successful entrepreneurs including Richard Branson, founder of Virgin; Steve Case, founder of AOL; Arianna Huffington, founder of Huffington Post; Gary Vaynerchuk; Barbara Corcoran; Tim Ferriss; Robert Herjavec; Jessica Livingston, founder of Y Combinator; and others. Much of Nathan's interview preparation involves his day-to-day reading about and listening to the topics, brands, and people Foundr covers. He regularly looks at Facebook, reads what's happening in TechCrunch and Mashable, and follows podcasts to see what they're doing and whom they're interviewing. To help find guests, he looks for people who have books coming out or otherwise need press. By consuming a lot of content, Nathan is aware of what's happening in his space and how to guide the i...

SEO: The Beginner's Guide to Search Engine Optimization from Moz

SEO: The Beginner's Guide to Search Engine Optimization from Moz


Moz

New to SEO? Need to polish up your knowledge? The Beginner's Guide to SEO has been read over 3 million times and provides the information you need to get on the road to professional quality SEO.

The Ultimate Website Redesign SEO Checklist

by Rebecca Gill @ Web Savvy Marketing

This week I had a call with a small business owner who is launching a website redesign in WordPress. He asked me how can we best preserve his existing SEO and makes sure he doesn’t lose any search ranking in the transition. Right away I replied that this was a fabulous question. We then chatted... Read More

The post The Ultimate Website Redesign SEO Checklist appeared first on Web Savvy Marketing.

9 Instagram Tips and Tools for Marketers

9 Instagram Tips and Tools for Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you using Instagram for your business? Want to get more from your marketing efforts? Improving your Instagram content and boosting engagement can be as simple as adding a few tactics and tools to your marketing routine. In this article you'll discover nine tips and tools to improve your Instagram marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Tailor Images to Your Audience On your Instagram account, post the kinds of photos that your audience is already sharing and liking. For example, take a picture that shows the inside of your office, the team heading out to lunch or you holding up your favorite afternoon snack. MaybellineAU took a cue from the fashion bloggers dominating Instagram with their facial close-ups and instructional pictures. In this post the brand shows one aspect of a woman's makeup routine: defining the eyebrows. The style and focus on the eyebrow in this photo contributed to a 2.4x increase in sales of Maybelline's Brow Drama mascara. #2: Enhance Your Photos You'll get the most out of every photo you share if they are the best they can be. Here are some quick and easy ways to improve even the most basic photo. Make use of an app like VSCO Cam (available for iOS and Android) to brighten and enhance your photos. The app offers editing tools and preset filters to make your photos more visually appealing and interesting. Although Instagram now supports non-square photos, the square shape still performs best. When you use the tool InstaSize (available for iOS and Android), you can choose a photo and scale it exactly how you want within the square shape. The app adds a white or colored border around the edges of your photo so that it keeps its original shape in the square box. #3: Use Text Overlays on Images Sharing generic content that doesn't connect to your brand is a missed opportunity on Instagram. Many marketers opt for generic content because their product or service isn't inherently visual. How many photos can you really share of your team sitting around a conference table? Not many. Instead, create messages, graphics and designs that tell users something valuable. This could be a quote connected to your brand, or an announcement about a new product, contest or sale. For example, the Huffington Post Instagram account uses graphics to share a quote from a story or to start a conversation. In this example, the graphic asks an engaging question and promotes a hashtag. The question started a long conversation in the comments and led to broader use of the hashtag. There's no need to reinvent the wheel with every graphic either. Consistency wins on Instagram. Keep your template and change the text or background to share a new graphic each week. #4: Tell a Story With the Caption Yes, Instagram is a photo-sharing app, but writing is also a key component to your success. The most engaging brands on Instagram use microblogging to tell a story in the caption. As a result, they see stronger engagement and create deeper connections with their audience. This leads to more sharing, commenting and loyalty. Hey, Sweet Pea writes long stories that are like personal letters to their audience. In fact, they use them to tease what users can expect from attending their classes. Then they plug the classes in the caption and with a link in their profile. Use an app like Hemingway to help you improve your caption writing. This tool marks adverbs, passive voice, overly long sentences and more. Paste your text in the editor to make sure that your writing is active and easy to read before you hit publish. #5: Leverage Trending Hashtags Make your brand known and your voice heard in the top (and relevant) Instagram conversations of the day. With the right hashtag and location tags, you can extend the reach of your content and brand. Instagram's Search and Explore feature shows you the trending hashtags of the day.

Search Engine Optimization Explained

by Administrator @ PG Webs » Search Engine Optimization

Search engine marketing, which is generally called SEO, could be the process regarding increasing the quantity and top quality of customers generated to some website or simply other online property via search engines’ natural/organic positioning results just for specific text called search phrases. For this content, I use the phrase website to consider all Web [...]

How to Optimize the SEO of Your Landing Pages to Rank in Google’s Top 10

by GrowMap @ SEO Chat

For the ideal customers, the landing page creates that first impression. It initiates their interactions with your business. Of course, there are several ways visitors can arrive at your landing pages. These include social media, display advertising, product launch direct referrals, and, more importantly, search engines (primarily Google). If you want visitors to take the […]

The post How to Optimize the SEO of Your Landing Pages to Rank in Google’s Top 10 appeared first on SEO Chat.

Getting Attention: The Science of Being Captivating Online

Getting Attention: The Science of Being Captivating Online

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to bring more attention to your business or product? Want to find out what inspires people to take notice? To discover how to get people's attention online, I interview Ben Parr. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Ben Parr, the former co-editor for Mashable. He's also the co-founder of DominateFund—invest in great companies. His new book is called Captivology: The Science of Capturing People's Attention. Ben will explore the science of getting attention. You'll discover the different types of attention, as well as some of the triggers. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Getting Attention Ben's backstory Ben talks about how his personal blog led to writing for Mashable in 2008. Some of the stories on Ben's blog hit Digg, which was big at the time. Mashable noticed and asked Ben to write for them. He then came on board as a junior editor, and was promoted to co-editor in 2009, which was when he moved to San Francisco. Ben was with Mashable for 3 1/2 years. As co-editor, Ben was in charge of the West Coast. Since he was the only one in Silicon Valley for a long time, if anything came up in Silicon Valley (like they needed someone to talk to Mark Zuckerberg), they called on Ben. He wrote about 2,400 articles and also helped manage and mentor a lot of reporters and junior editors. Ben's book, Captivology, came about a couple of years ago. When Ben was just starting out investing in companies, he realized they were all asking for help with press and marketing, customer and user acquisition, and virality. He explains that all of these areas are about getting attention for products and getting users. Ben says he did a lot of research, and realized there was a lot of interesting information about attention over the last 50 years, but no one had put it together into something mainstream. Listen to the show to discover why Captivology was the book he had to write. The science behind the book For Captivology, Ben went through more than 1,000 different research studies and interviewed dozens of PhDs, as well as business leaders and thought leaders, like Sheryl Sandberg, Steven Soderbergh and David Copperfield. They helped him frame the book in a way that there's a lot of science and research, but also practical information. There's knowledge people can use in daily life. Going into the book, Ben had theories about things like reward systems, and confirmed some of his beliefs on how they work. For example, there's a type of reward-giving, called post-action rewards. This is when someone gets a reward as a surprise after completing an action. When you surprise people with a reward, it reinforces behavior. Listen to the show to discover why incentives are the worst ways to get attention. The three types of attention In Ben's research, he discovered three stages of attention: immediate, short and long attention. Immediate attention. This is the immediate and automatic reaction people have to certain sights, sounds and stimuli. When people hear a gunshot they duck, which is an automatic reaction to protect themselves. There's a lot of fascinating science on how that works and why it matters, Ben says. Short attention. Short attention is the second stage. That's when people start consciously focusing on something. When someone starts watching a show or reading a story about something, that's short attention. Long attention. A lot of people don't think about the third stage, which is long attention (long-term interest in a subject).

The Social Media Examiner Show: This Week in Social Media

The Social Media Examiner Show: This Week in Social Media

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Welcome to our weekly edition of what's hot in social media news. To help you stay up to date with social media, here are some of the news items that caught our attention. What's New This Week? We've got exciting news this week! The Social Media Examiner Show: Subscribe now (for free) and discover quick tips for marketing your business in our 10-minute daily podcast. Consume snack-sized social media content each day. The result: this daily dose of marketing know-how will equip you to take your social media to an entirely new level. Watch this quick video from our founder AND to discover how to subscribe via an iPhone. Subscribe via iTunes, Stitcher or RSS. Click here to help us spread the word about this new show. Other News Worth Noting Facebook Unveils Facebook at Work: Facebook at Work is "only available to people who have set up a work account through their employer" and is currently in beta only on iOS. Google Lets You Specify Your Social Profiles: Are you a website developer? This new feature allows you to "use markup on your official website to add your social profile information to the Google Knowledge panel in some searches. Knowledge panels can prominently display your social profile information."   Weekly Video Tip // Post by Social Media Examiner. . Studies Worth Examining Q4 Social Login Report: Facebook Losing Ground to Google: Janrain's Q4 2014 social login report shows that while Facebook is still the dominant way people log into websites, Google is closing the gap among music and consumer brand sites. Facebook lost 3% of its social login market share while Google gained 6% in 2014, going from 34% in Q3 to 40% in Q4. REPORT: Messenger Cuts Into Facebook App's Reach: According to November 2014 data from comScore, the Facebook Messenger app is boosting its share of overall reach among U.S. users, at the expense of the social network's flagship app. Messenger rose to fifth place in rankings of reach among smartphone apps at 43.1%. The main Facebook app still overwhelmingly topped the list at 69%. Facebook-owned photo- and video-sharing network, Instagram, took ninth-place position on the list at 30.7%. Social Media Update 2014: A September 2014 survey conducted by the Pew Research Center finds that Facebook has the highest concentration of users, capturing 71% of American adult Internet users and 58% of the entire adult population. However, its overall growth has slowed, while other sites continue to see increases in users. The study also broke down key demographic trends and frequency of use for each of the five major social networks: Facebook, Twitter, Instagram, Pinterest and LinkedIn. Data Driven and Digitally Savvy: The Rise of the New Marketing Organization: Forbes Insights and advertising technology company, Turn, surveyed 331 senior executives from a range of industries. Of those executives surveyed, 7 in 10 believe their reliance on data analytics for decision-making will either increase significantly (24%) or somewhat (47%) over the next 3 years. Data-driven marketing is credited with creating competitive advantages in customer loyalty (47%), gaining new customers (43%) and customer satisfaction (42%). Sixty-one percent note a measurable increase in ROI from data-driven marketing campaigns. Instagram 2015 Study: The Most Valuable Instagram Study for Your Business: Iconosquare released the largest Instagram study ever conducted, surveying 16,000 Instagram users, tracking 250 million media, and analyzing 39 billion interactions. The published results include 200+ pages of exclusive analyses, case studies and best practices. Their goal is to help marketers better promote their brand, understand best practices, analyze user engagement and recruit and retain users. How Long Does It Take to Plan Facebook, Twitter Content?: Research by Percolate reveals how long companies plan ahead for their content distribution on Twitter and Facebook...

PAGE ONE RESULTS

by Jack Hamilton @ Search Engine Optimization Specialists affordable search engine optimization effective search engine optimization search engine optimization

PAGE ONE RESULTS Through effective Search Engine Optimization Methodology… Complete marketing strategies for your website…that is what we do. Where search engine optimization and search engine placement are concerned, there are few SEO companies that can compare with the search engine results that BeSearched.com provides for over 800 businesses in 6 different countries around the […]

The Social Media Examiner Story: From Blog to Conference

The Social Media Examiner Story: From Blog to Conference

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Wonder how the Social Media Examiner blog got started? Interested in how we grew a live conference from an online publication? To share the evolution of Social Media Examiner and Social Media Marketing World, Ray Edwards will interview me. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, Ray Edwards of The Ray Edwards Show takes the mic to get the backstory on how Social Media Examiner went from publishing a blog to hosting a live conference. You'll discover the behind-the-scenes story of how I founded Social Media Examiner more than seven years ago and how we decided to start our own conference. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: The Social Media Examiner Story The Beginning of Everything Prior to launching Social Media Examiner, I was writing white papers for clients and I also authored a book called Writing White Papers. Somewhere along the way, I started a weekly newsletter, which included interviews with experts, pieces written by experts, and tips and techniques. I started covering social media and how it could be used to generate more leads for white papers. Subsequently, I reached out to Copyblogger and MarketingProfs, and wrote some articles for them. The turning point came after I sent a LinkedIn request to Ann Handley, chief content officer for MarketingProfs, and she asked if I was on Facebook. After opening a Facebook account, I was immersed in a different world. Then, I went to a small conference in San Diego and met Paul Colligan, Warren Whitlock (co-author of Twitter Revolution), and Mari Smith. As a result, I decided to do an online conference under my white paper business. (Up to that point I did teleclasses, where people would pay $39/month to hear me interview people like Bob Bly, Peter Bowerman, and others in the copywriting world.) I sold a couple of hundred tickets for the Copywriting Success Summit, more than I ever had for my teleclasses, and the conference was all done via webinars. This led to doing the Social Media Success Summit, for which we sold around 700 tickets. I felt I was onto something, so I searched domain names at GoDaddy, found SocialMediaExaminer.com, and immediately registered a trademark. I had the opportunity to speak at BlogWorld and MarketingProf's B2B Summit in October 2009. Deciding that would be the time to launch, I hustled to build Social Media Examiner and reached out to all of my friends, asking if they would write one article a month until it didn't work for them anymore. I officially launched Social Media Examiner on October 12, 2009. Listen to the show to learn which connections Ray and I share from the early days of social media. A Focus on Quality Content When we launched, blogs were opinion outlets and I wanted to be a resource. That's why we're known for how-to content and why our tagline is still "Your guide to the social media jungle." I knew if we could create content with a certain level of depth or richness to it, it would be smart in the long run; each of our articles is at least 1,000 words long. And we've invested heavily in the quality of our content. We've always had at least two or three, and sometimes up to five, editors working on all of the articles and we put at least $1,000 into development for each article. Our vision statement is, "All we serve is quality and we serve all with excellence." I've been in this business for seven years, and almost everyone who started in this space has moved on. It just goes to show you can win in the long run if you consistently deliver excellent value.

Search Engine Optimization Services | Local SEO | Cueblocks

Search Engine Optimization Services | Local SEO | Cueblocks


Cueblocks

Need more traffic from search engines? Cueblocks is a full service digital marketing agency that offers search optimization services. Our SEO analysts will take care of all the on page and off page SEO activities that are Panda and Penguin proof.

4 Ways Your Business Can Get Started on Instagram

4 Ways Your Business Can Get Started on Instagram

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you wondering how to use Instagram for business? Have you looked at how others are using it? With the right tactics, Instagram can help you build awareness, boost engagement, and drive foot traffic to your business. In this article you'll discover four ways you can use Instagram to promote your products and services. Listen to this article: #1: Increase Web Traffic With an Instagram Contest Instagram contests let you showcase your products, attract leads, and grow your followers all at the same time. Plus, contests are just plain fun. Framebridge held an Instagram giveaway contest that offered a chance to win a floral painting by one of their spotlight artists. Framebridge used their contest to drive traffic back to the blog. You can adopt this tactic for your own business by announcing your contest on Instagram and sending Instagram users to your online store's blog for a chance to win. If you want to run an Instagram contest for your business, you can simply offer a free product to celebrate a particular company milestone. If the milestone is Instagram-related, all the better! You'll promote customer loyalty and gain free publicity when fans tag their friends. #2: Inform Your Story With Video Video can complement the photos in your Instagram account by telling stories through moving animation. According to a Vidyard report, 71% of marketers say video conversion rates outperform other types of marketing content. Instagram lets you record videos that are between 3 and 15 seconds long, which is more than enough time to grab the attention of your prospects and customers. Plus, adding a few videos to your Instagram stream will provide some variety in your imagery. http://www.instagram.com/p/BBsdIPNmUOV/ French retailer L'Occitane successfully complements their Instagram images with short videos. The video above shows a flower slowly opening until it presumably releases its wonderful fragrance, which ties in with the company's cosmetic products. You can record your own short Instagram video to complement the images you post. Simply tap the middle icon in the row of icons at the bottom of the Instagram app. This opens up your photo and video capabilities. Once open, tap on the Video tab and click the red button to begin recording your clip. #3: Jumpstart Interest With Instagram Ads You see sponsored ads from businesses all over Instagram. They allow you to put your products or services in front of the specific audience you want to reach. In other words, you can target a customer demographic beyond just your current Instagram followers. When you use Instagram ads to show your products in action, you help viewers understand how they can use your products. This is the same concept used by ecommerce stores when they show high-quality images of people using their products to give customers a sense of what they're buying. Notepad+, a productivity app optimized for the iPad Pro, uses Instagram sponsored ads to promote the app. The centerpiece of this ad is a photo of the app on an actual iPad Pro. This gives customers and prospects an immediate visual sense of the app's interface in use. The good news is that businesses of all sizes can now create and run Instagram ads. All you need to start is a Facebook page. Then during the ad setup process, you'll set a budget for your ad, select a target audience, and create the ad content. For a step-by-step walkthrough, check out this article about how to create an Instagram ad with Facebook Ads Manager. #4: Drive Foot Traffic With Appealing Photos Instagram users respond to beautiful, captivating, and creative photos. Strong images can help you boost engagement, and if you're a local business, they can drive customers to your location. On your Instagram account, you want to post photos that show your products in the best possible light. German restaurant Muse Berlin has grown its local customer base through Instagram by po...

Blog Comments Revisited: Why Major Bloggers Are Turning Comments Back On

Blog Comments Revisited: Why Major Bloggers Are Turning Comments Back On

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have comments enabled on your blog? Have you ever turned them off? To discover why big bloggers turned their comment systems back on, I interview Michael Hyatt and Brian Clark. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Michael Hyatt and Brian Clark. Michael is author of Platform and co-author of the new book, Living Forward: A Proven Plan to Stop Drifting and Get the Life You Want. He's also an avid blogger at MichaelHyatt.com and host of the This Is Your Life podcast. Brian is CEO of Rainmaker Digital, founder of Copyblogger, host of the Unemployable podcast, and evangelist for the Rainmaker Platform. Back in May 2014, I had Mark Schaefer and Tim McDonald (who was with Huffington Post) on the show to talk about the trend of big blogs shutting down their comments. This was spurred by a controversial post from Copyblogger entitled, "Why We’re Removing Comments on Copyblogger" from March 2014. In January 2015, Michael Hyatt published, "I’ve Pulled Comments from My Blog-Here’s Why." Michael and Brian will explore why the initial decision to remove comments was made and why those comments are now back. You'll also discover tips for how to grow your email list. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Blog Comments Revisited Why Brian shut down comments Brian starts by saying he is not the one who made the decision to shut down or bring back blog comments. He left that up to his editorial team. On Copyblogger, a lot of the article feedback shifted to social media, while the product development feedback had moved over to their customer base. As you mature as a company, you really start listening to your existing customers, as opposed to those "out in the wild," Brian explains. At the time, they had 150,000 customers and their strategy was to pay more attention to them. Part of the decision to remove comments (not discussed in the post by Sonia Simone, who ultimately made the decision with input from the editorial team) was a situation Brian calls the six-month class of current commenters. When you publish a marketing blog, other marketers use commenting as a traffic strategy. You'd have six months of the same people showing up, leaving comments: some stupid, some thoughtful. Then they'd move on and a new group of people would come into the comments. The practical reasons for removing comments were the shift to social and to eliminate spam. It's a big deal to moderate comments and have the editorial team spend a significant amount of time trying to figure out whether something is spam or legitimate. Copyblogger's experiment to remove comments lasted for over a year. Listen to the show to learn why Brian left comments on their podcast network, Rainmaker.fm. Why Michael shut down comments Michael says his reasons for shutting down comments on his blog were similar to Brian's. Additionally, Michael noticed the number of comments per post had been going down for some time, so he decided to do a little research. He discovered that in 2011, he averaged about 195 comments per blog post. Then in 2012, while his traffic went up, his comments dropped to an average of 179. Traffic went up again in 2013, and the average number of comments went down to 114. In 2014 blog traffic was up 74% over the previous year, but the average number of comments had dropped down to about 62 per post. Michael adds he read Greg McKeown's book, Essentialism, and thought he had to pare stuff back. The final straw for Michael, who was and is using Disqus as his commenting platform,

9 Ways to Use Facebook Groups for Business

9 Ways to Use Facebook Groups for Business

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you participating in Facebook groups? Want to start one to support your business? Facebook groups help businesses promote products, support customers and much more. In this article I'll share nine ways Facebook groups can benefit your business. Listen to this article: #1: Sell Products As an alternative or addition to selling products or digital goods on your website, you're now able to sell in Facebook groups. Once you create a For Sale group, you'll see an option to "sell something" in your Facebook update. If you don't yet see this option in your Facebook group, take the opportunity to learn how selling works. Also nominate your group for this feature. #2: Supplement Video Training Courses If your business sells a video training course, give customers who purchase it access to a private Facebook group as part of the package. They can ask questions and get supplementary material, as well as forge a bond with other customers. It's a win-win situation for everyone. The customer can get help and additional resources for the product they purchased. Plus, it gives your business the opportunity to forge deeper connections with their customers and promote other courses and services. #3: Promote Chats Those who run a regular Twitter or online chat, or even have a running discussion on their Facebook page, may want to separate it from their business. They can do so through a Facebook group. It's a great way to promote upcoming chats and guests. Plus, you can keep the conversations focused. MediaChat uses their public group to share more information about chat guests, offer member deals and give shout-outs. Remember to let participants know about your Facebook group and page (if applicable) during your chat. This way you can continue to build up your group and online presence. #4: Establish Expertise One of the easiest ways to use Facebook groups for business is to become a resource in your field. Create a group or contribute your knowledge to one that already exists. For example, members of the Internet Marketing Super Friends group, numbering more than 13,000, pride themselves on helping other Internet marketers. Members can ask questions about SEO, get recommendations for designers and tools and more. The key thing about this type of group is to be a resource without self-promotion. (Most groups like this do not tolerate promoting content of any kind.) Use Facebook groups to be helpful and give freely of yourself. You'll be rewarded in spades as the word gets out from other members. #5: Collect Feedback Want to test out new ideas on some of your existing customers? One way to do that is to start a Facebook group to use as a think-tank for your business. Create a secret Facebook group, invite some of your best customers and openly discuss new ideas you're thinking about implementing in your business. Then gather feedback from them. This type of group provides a way to build stronger relationships with customers, while helping business owners collect honest feedback on what their customers might like. #6: Provide Customer Service Every business needs to provide a way for customers to get help. While this could be through a contact form on your website or through your Facebook page, a secret Facebook group is another option. The reason to start a secret group, instead of a closed or public one, is because secret groups can't be located in search or accessed via URL. Instead, members have to be invited. This gives you better control over adding new members. Plus, it protects your business in case you have disgruntled customers. (They won't be able to access the group unless you've invited them.) If you want to make your customer service Facebook group easy to find, create a closed group. However, be sure to state whom this group is for in the description. This will give you better control over approving and rejecting new members.

SearchCap: Google local business edits, AMP powered featured snippets & Bing Ads bid adjustments

by Barry Schwartz @ SearchCap: Daily Search Engine News Recap

Below is what happened in search today, as reported on and from other places across the web.

The post SearchCap: Google local business edits, AMP powered featured snippets & Bing Ads bid adjustments appeared first on Search Engine Land.

6 Ways to Increase Twitter Engagement

6 Ways to Increase Twitter Engagement

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to encourage more interaction with your Twitter followers? Looking for ways to engage your Twitter community? In this article you'll discover six ways to increase engagement on Twitter. #1: Offer Personalized Encouragement The best engagement is sometimes a simple response. Customers are thrilled when you devote time to interact with them. It's a sign of respect and appreciation. Listen to this article: Nike encourages customers to #JustDoIt. To align with the brand's value of inspiration, Nike tweets words of encouragement to their followers. So if you're anxious about your next run, the company could be your #1 fan. To do something similar with your brand, thoroughly read the timelines of 20 to 40 of your followers. Identify tweets that announce major milestones (such as a new baby, running a marathon, getting married or a first car purchase). Then craft a short message (aim for three to six words) of encouragement. You can make the message more personal if you don't use any hashtags or add it to your timeline feed. Make sure you stay away from disingenuous comments. If your business isn't known for encouragement, your customers may be confused by the message. People desire human connections, and a great way to do that is to motivate people to reach their potential. #2: Share Their Tweets It's human nature to want to be validated, so retweet your followers to show you recognize the value of their content. Let them know that what they're saying or posting online matters. ProFlowers retweets their fans often. The retweets usually reflect the beauty of flowers, so popular shares include floral arrangements, mantel ideas and centerpieces. If your business is an extension of your personal brand, you may want to retweet content on your personal account. When retweeting your followers, choose tweets that align with your brand's values. Check the user's profile to be sure it's a real person. Also consider adding a comment to the retweet to contribute something to the conversation. Some experts recommend that you retweet only 20% of your tweets, while others prefer a 50/50 split. Find out what works best for your industry and your audience and go from there. #3: Include a Relevant Hashtag Create and promote a hashtag campaign to reinvigorate your community and spark conversation around your brand. Subway is redefining their image with the #SaveLunchBreak hashtag. The fast-food chain encourages people not to give up their lunch breaks and to eat healthy. The campaign also asks customers to show how they're enjoying their lunch breaks. To start a hashtag campaign, decide on the goal of your campaign and how it will relate to your customers. Then research what your audience is talking about to come up with a hashtag that they'll identify with. #4: Link to Problem-Solving Content One way to grab your followers' attention is to provide content that will help improve their lives. This is a great way to integrate your brand into their lifestyles and strengthen the bond between you and your customers. Whole Foods gives their followers tips on how to prepare and cook food. The supermarket chain regularly tweets seasonal recipes, healthy eating advice and cookbook recommendations. To identify what content might be valuable to your audience, read through your followers' profiles to discover their likes, dislikes and current influences. Select a common issue that they're dealing with (for example, finding concert tickets or locating a logo designer for their business). Then create content that presents a solution to their problem and promote it on Twitter. Avoid creating content that is merely disguised selling tactics, though. Customers will quickly notice your deception and may decide to take their business elsewhere. Rather than sell to them, educate your followers by posting information that they'll find valuable.

Top 4 Tips to Improve Conversion Rate on my Shopify Store

by Sam Landsberg @ WebFly

A successful Shopify store requires a two-pronged approach: raising your store’s visibility to drive traffic, and converting that traffic into customers. Improving the rate at which visitors convert into customers is commonly referred to as Conversion Rate Optimization (CRO). CRO consistently proves to have the biggest impact on your bottom line. Even with a steady […]

Mobile Marketing: How to Get Started

Mobile Marketing: How to Get Started

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use mobile marketing for business? Are you wondering how to get started? To learn how mobile marketing and social connect, I interview Jamie Turner for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Jamie Turner, co-author of the book Go Mobile. His blog, the 60 Second Marketer is ranked as one of the top 10 marketing blogs by Social Media Examiner. He also runs a social media and mobile marketing agency called 60 Second Communications. Jamie shares how to start with mobile marketing and why you should pay more attention to mobile customers. You'll learn what tools to use and the difference between mobile websites and mobile apps. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Mobile Marketing Why marketers should pay more attention to mobile customers Jamie states that 15-50% of the people who visit your website come in from a mobile device and this number will continue to grow. When consumers visit your website from a mobile device, you need to be there to meet them, understand mobile marketing and know how to connect with customers on mobile. You'll have to learn how to use mobile, as it's a way to build a bridge between you and your customer. You'll discover how more people check prices on their mobile devices while shopping and what you need to provide them to make sure they buy from you. And you'll hear that when people buy a product on mobile devices, particularly tablet computers, their total ticket price is typically higher than it is via a desktop computer. It's important to be mobile-ready—not only for B2C but for B2B too. Listen to the show to find out how many people bought a virtual ticket on a smartphone while attending Social Media Marketing World. Is there a social media connection when it comes to mobile marketing? Jamie sees email as a social media tool. Sixty-seven percent of all "C-level" executives check their emails from their mobile devices. The better-known tools being LinkedIn, Facebook, Twitter and YouTube. We all need mobile websites. Remember when consumers visit your site, one of the prominent things you want to do is give them the ability to connect with you on social media platforms from their mobile device. You'll hear Jamie give a great example of how you can use LinkedIn on a mobile device in a business environment. Photography is easy on a smartphone. Look at how well Twitter and Facebook have integrated photos into their mobile apps. It's a great opportunity to grab customers. You'll find out how Ramon De Leon, a regional Domino's pizza guy in Chicago, evangelizes his business with the use of Twitter. Jamie explains what mobile websites mean and the difference between a mobile website and a mobile app. You'll discover what you need to do to make your website mobile and why the WPtouch plugin for WordPress is an awesome tool to have. Listen to the show to find out why social is mobile. The most common types of marketing when dealing with mobile users Jamie lists 7 things businesses have to think about when it comes to mobile marketing. Mobile websites SMS Mobile display ads/banner ads Mobile paid search Location-based marketing Apps QR codes These are the primary tools out there. Jamie's advice is to make sure you always start with a mobile website and then move into paid search or QR codes. You'll hear Jamie give an example of how a restaurant can use SMS to drive more foot traffic to their business.

How to Optimize Facebook Custom Tabs for More Conversions

How to Optimize Facebook Custom Tabs for More Conversions

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to boost conversions from your Facebook app? Have you thought about promoting it with Facebook ads? Supporting your Facebook custom tab with complementary Facebook ads will drive more views and deliver more conversions. In this article you'll discover how to combine Facebook custom tabs with Facebook ads to boost conversions. Listen to this article: #1: Focus on the Benefits You may have heard this saying before: Benefits sell, features don't. Focusing on the benefits for your target audience can make a big impact on conversions from your ads. Whether your Facebook custom tab app is a promotion, contest or newsletter sign-up form, your goal should be to get the people who come to the page to take the action you want them to. How do you do this? You focus your messaging on how filling out the form will benefit your customer. To figure out your most important benefits to promote, create a features and benefits chart and spend some time brainstorming. Start by filling in the features column of your chart. Next, think critically about each feature you've listed and the value that it provides to the audience you're targeting with your ads. Once you've filled in both sides of your features and benefits chart, pick the top two to three benefits. Promote these two or three benefits with your ads and emphasize them in your app copy. The bottom line is, to make a greater impact with your app's copy and drive up conversion rates, focus your copy on the solution that your product or service provides. In other words, focus on the incentive your brand is offering. If you keep your copy about your visitors' wants and needs, you'll see more success with your ads. #2: Define Your Goal After you've identified the key benefits you want to promote, the next step is to determine the most important goal of your Facebook ads and design a custom tab app to reflect it. Here are some goals you might have: Capture the email addresses of users who are interested in your product or service. Drive downloads of a lead-generating resource. Get people to take advantage of a special offer by downloading a coupon. Get sign-ups for an online marketing event you're hosting, like a webinar. Drive engagement (for example, voting and/or an image submission on a photo contest) on a marketing campaign you've built. Your Facebook ads should always direct people to an app that has a clear focus, rather than to your website. Why? Your website is full of distractions. The fewer distractions your ads' destination has, the more likely you'll accomplish your Facebook advertising goals. To optimize conversions from your ads, design your Facebook custom tab app without any of these design elements: a navigation bar; social icons; unnecessary links, tabs and buttons; and drop-down menus. Remove any information or clickable link or button that doesn't support the goal of your landing page. #3: Take Design Cues From Top-Performing Ads Split testing different versions of a Facebook custom tab app is tough for two reasons. First, if you don't have a large Facebook advertising budget, you may not get enough traffic to your app to make any valid assumptions. Second, there are too many variables. You could end up going in circles testing a million little things, everything from the color of your call-to-action button to the copy of your secondary headline. Instead of split testing your app, it's better to split test the three main components of your Facebook ads: the headline, body copy and image. Discover your best-performing Facebook ad, and then update your landing page's design to incorporate that ad's headline, copy and image. After a few days of running your Facebook ads, you'll be able to determine which ad is performing best. Based on what you discover, update your app's headline and primary image to match your highest-performing ad.

5 Ways to Grow Your LinkedIn Group

5 Ways to Grow Your LinkedIn Group

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want more people to join your LinkedIn group? Are you looking for tips to get more exposure for your group? LinkedIn groups are a great way to generate leads and increase influence within an engaged community. In this article, you'll discover five ways to quickly build a larger membership for your LinkedIn group. Listen to this article: #1: Optimize Your Group Description One way to attract more members to join your LinkedIn group is to optimize your group description. This is the description that appears on every group page. In your description, lead with the ultimate reason why people should join your group. This is the first piece of information they see, so it makes sense to highlight your value proposition in this section. Make sure you also spell out the purpose and benefits of joining your group. You'll want to include industry keywords to make it easier for people to find your group when they're searching for groups to join. Identify four to five keywords that are most relevant to your group and use these keywords to optimize your description. Don't forget to mention that self-promotional material is not allowed; otherwise, your group will receive a lot of spammy posts from members who are only there to promote their products or services. You're looking for members who can provide actual value to your LinkedIn group. LinkedIn has a built-in feature that flags posts that are potentially self-promotional or spammy, so even if people do attempt this you can still moderate their posts. #2: Invite Your LinkedIn Connections Because LinkedIn groups are now private, you'll need to manually invite your LinkedIn connections to join. To do this, go to your group's main page and click the Invite Others button. A search box appears where you can type in the name of individual connections who meet your group's criteria. Avoid inviting people who aren't likely to be interested in joining. You can usually tell whether they're suitable by viewing their profile and job title. You can select multiple connections to invite. If you plan to invite as many as possible, start with the letter A, and work your way down to Z. This is the only way to invite a large number of connections. It's important to note that inviting connections does vary by group type. For example, in standard groups, anyone can invite connections to join, but only group managers and owners can pre-approve members and invite them by email address. With unlisted groups, only owners and managers can invite members. Plus, an invitation is required to join unlisted groups. #3: Ask Colleagues and Peers to Promote Your Group Do you know someone with a massive database in your target market? How about someone who runs a digital publication in your niche? Consider asking relevant people to promote your group to their members, and offer an incentive in return. This is how mutually beneficial relationships work, and it could result in many new members for your LinkedIn group. You want to sound as human as possible when doing this type of outreach. Avoid using automation platforms, because most people can tell when you're using one. One-to-one email works best. When you compose your outreach email, start by suggesting you have a new channel that their audience could receive tremendous value from. Use bullet points when identifying this information to make it easier for the recipient to read. If you don't have many industry contacts, consider spending more time working on your personal brand. #4: Send a Newsletter to Your Email Database The importance of growing an engaged email database is well documented. In fact, according to the 2016 B2B Marketing Outlook Report, 60% of marketers are set to conduct more email marketing campaigns in 2016, highlighting its importance. As when doing influencer outreach to your target market, you should create one-on-one emails that are short and to the point an...

Social Media Visuals: How to Easily Create Visuals Without a Designer

Social Media Visuals: How to Easily Create Visuals Without a Designer

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use visuals in your social media? Want tools and tips to help you create images? To discover how to create great social media visuals when you're not a designer, I interview Donna Moritz. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Donna Moritz. Donna is a visual marketing expert, and her blog Socially Sorted was recognized as one of Social Media Examiner's Top 10 Social Media Blogs in 2015 and 2016. Donna will share why social media marketers should care about visuals. You'll discover what to consider before you design images for social media and learn about new tools to help you. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Social Media Visuals Why care about visuals? Because the news feed is so busy these days, Donna explains, marketers need to do everything they can to capture attention. She says visuals catch that attention and typically drive users to take some sort of action because visuals support an emotional connection. Donna points out that the fastest-growing channels such as Periscope and Snapchat are highly focused on visual content, as are Instagram and Pinterest. She also notes that traditional platforms Facebook, LinkedIn, and Twitter are giving more attention to visual content and users are 44% more likely to engage with content that contains pictures. Video is also on the rise, Donna adds. Socialbakers research shows that brands are now uploading more video directly to Facebook than YouTube, and about 80% of all video engagement is coming from Facebook native video. And that's before Facebook Live is really being measured. Plus, she says, 110 years of video footage is watched on Periscope every day. According to the Content Marketing Institute, out of a range of priorities for content creators, visual content is in the top three. Visual content is a very important topic because it works. Marketers just need to find out where to start and how to produce and use images efficiently. Listen to the show to discover the current standard image format and how image sizes have changed. Getting started with images Before you start to design images, Donna says you need to think about what types of visual content get shared well on which platforms. Content that's effective on Facebook might be different from what works on Instagram, which might be different from Twitter. She's seen people get overwhelmed trying to do visual content on every platform, and advises that it's better to focus on visuals for one particular platform at a time. She also cautions that you shouldn't jump into visuals on a new platform until you have systems in place for visuals on the one before it. Donna shares her Visual Content Blueprint, which is five elements to help you create images that work. First, decide what the image is going to be in regards to what works on the targeted platform (more on this later). Then consider the call to action. It could be asking for more connection or engagement (likes or comments), driving more shares or click-throughs, or a combination. Next, think about your landing content (where people arrive when they click through or share). Will people get more information, blog content, a free download, or something else of value? After that, make sure users are achieving some sort of goal. Do you want them to sign up for something, read a blog post, or stay on your website? Donna recommends that every image be able to stand alone. That way, if something is pinned or shared out of context, people will still understand what you're offering and how to get it.

How Google’s Pigeon Algorithm Update May Impact Your Site’s Search Engine Rankings

by adminDdddjc @ Search Engine Placement | Search Engine Optimization Firm

If you own a site, or you do a lot of “near me” searches like  “Starbucks near me,”  you may have noticed a slight change in the rankings. Google recently confirmed that they have made an update to their Pigeon algorithm in order to provide searchers a more relevant local search result. As usual, Google […]

The post How Google’s Pigeon Algorithm Update May Impact Your Site’s Search Engine Rankings appeared first on Search Engine Placement | Search Engine Optimization Firm.

Blogging Tools: Apps to Better Manage Your Blog

Blogging Tools: Apps to Better Manage Your Blog

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have a blog? Want to improve the content development, publishing and promotion processes? To discover how to streamline your blogging with the best tools, I interview Ian Cleary. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Ian Cleary, the social tools guy. His blog, RazorSocial.com has placed in our Top 10 Social Media Blogs 3 years in a row. He's also the founder of the Digital Influencer Club. Ian will explore marketing tools for bloggers. You'll discover tools for your editorial calendar, search engine optimization, social media, email marketing and more. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Blogging Tools How Ian got into blogging Ian talks about the social media training company he had in Ireland. He says his blog failed because he wasn't particularly passionate about it; he was blogging because people said he should. Ian thinks that's the trap a lot of people fall into. Ian shares how reading Launch helped him realize what he'd done wrong with his blog, so he decided to focus on the tools and tech side of social media. Listen to the show to hear about Ian's first encounter with Mike. Editorial tools and plugins Ian says it doesn't matter if you have a team of one or ten, you still need to plan your blogging. He explains how he and his team use the Status feature of a WordPress plugin called Edit Flow to move posts from Ian to his image person, and then to the editor. Once the editor is finished, the post is ready to publish. Ian also keeps rough ideas for future blog posts in EditFlow under the Pitch status, so he has post ideas ready to write anytime he goes to the blog. CoSchedule is another excellent calendar tool Ian is excited to try. Regardless of the tool you choose, you need a good editorial process, Ian says, even if you use Microsoft Excel to track things in the short-term. Listen to the show to discover some of the limitations of Edit Flow. SEO and research tools Even if you don't know a lot about SEO, Ian explains how the Yoast SEO plugin helps you optimize your content for search in an easy way. If you're creating a piece of content and want to see if there's a way to improve it, Ian suggests using BuzzSumo or Uprise. Both are research tools that let you view lists of content from across the web based on a keyword you search for. The lists show which posts received the most shares, and Ian tell listeners how to review them to make their own content better. Ian explains the process of using Ahrefs to find links to high-ranking articles that are similar to yours but are out of date. He shares how bloggers can reach out to these authors or websites to link to their newly published content instead. Ian also mentions a predictive content analytics tool called InboundWriter. The tool lets you put in the keywords you want to rank for, then gives you a green or a red status to show your chance of getting organic traffic to your content based on those keywords. Finally, Ian shares how bloggers can use SEMrush to see which keywords their competitors rank for in Google search results. He says that when you see what words your competitors are ranking for, you can pull traffic from them by writing better articles based on those keywords. Listen to the show to hear more about InboundWriter. Social promotion tools When you include influential people who are relevant to your niche in your content, there's a good chance they will share that content, which will drive shares and traffic. Ian says Topsy is a great way to find relevant,

4 Tools to Build a Social Media Content Calendar

4 Tools to Build a Social Media Content Calendar

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you struggle to keep track of your social media content? Are you looking for tools to help? Creating a social media content calendar doesn't need to be complicated or require a whole new platform. In this article you'll find four ways to build a social media content calendar with tools you may already use. Why Use a Social Media Calendar Individuals and businesses use social media for community engagement, content promotion, customer support, promoting the latest offers and more. Managing many moving parts involves multiple people, multiple strategies, and if not handled correctly, multiple problems. Listen to this article: When you keep all of your social media content plans in a central location, you let everyone know what everyone else is doing, they can see the latest changes and updates and can plan their own content accordingly. Use your calendar to track a variety of items, including publish date and time, post text, attached link, image or images, post type (image, link, text, etc.), campaign and post category or goal (engagement, content promotion, etc.). Once you've determined what to add to your calendar, it's time to create it. Here's how. #1: List It in Google Sheets Since Google Drive is a staple for many businesses, calendars managed in Google Sheets are familiar and accessible. It's easy for anyone comfortable with spreadsheets to use. Plus, when you implement such a familiar tool, you can dive right into planning. The collaboration features prevent confusion over outdated versions. Furthermore, the spreadsheet can be even more useful if your scheduling tool allows bulk uploading via CSV. To set up your calendar, either start with a "blank page" or search for social media calendar templates online. If you want, add a tab for each social network to keep everything separate. Even when you use a template, you still want to customize it a bit. Add all of the info your team needs to know, and leave out whatever they don't. For instance, if it's important to track who's responsible for each update, add a column for that. If most of your posts don't have links, delete that column. Keep in mind, not all information needs to be written out in the spreadsheet. Use color-coding, team member initials and other shortcuts to further organize the calendar. #2: Map It in Google Calendar Google Calendar, which a lot of people use already, has a slightly more rigid structure. However, nothing beats an actual calendar for keeping track of due dates and responsibilities. Keep all of your social content laid out in an actual calendar view. Those who prefer a list format are able to switch to agenda view. Create different calendars for each team member, client or social network to make it easy to segment your content. That way you'll get a calendar view of not just what's being posted, but who's responsible for it or what content category it falls under. Decide how you want to set up your calendar system (I color-code them either by network or content type), and create your multiple calendars. Then create an event for each post. Organize the details as you'd like. For example, use the location field to note who's writing which post. Then use the description for compiling additional details such as post link once it's published. #3: Visualize It in Trello Trello, which is organized by boards, lists and cards, is a tool a lot of people already use for brainstorming and collaboration. Like spreadsheets, Trello is flexible enough for anything. However, it looks and feels the opposite of a spreadsheet. If you're a visual person, or if you like organizing your content by progress stage, try Trello. When you first set up your Trello social media calendar, decide how to organize it. Make lists for different progress stages, social networks or marketing campaigns. Trello also has a calendar view for due dates, which makes it possible to build a plan with t...

Periscope: How Your Business Can Benefit From Live Video

Periscope: How Your Business Can Benefit From Live Video

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you broadcast on Periscope? Want to use it to connect with and grow your audience? To discover how to use Periscope for your business, I interview Kim Garst. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Kim Garst, author of Will the Real You Please Stand Up: Show Up, Be Authentic, and Prosper in Social Media. Her agency Boom! Social helps businesses understand the selling side of social media. Kim is also VERY active on Periscope. Kim will explore Periscope, the live video platform from Twitter, and how your business can benefit from it. You'll discover tools for analytics and saving your scopes. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Periscope: How Your Business Can Benefit From Live Video Kim's journey to live video Kim says that as everyone was coming off of South by Southwest last year, all the talk was about Meerkat. The conversation suddenly changed while Kim was at Social Media Marketing World last March when Periscope was launched. She remembers thinking that since Periscope was from Twitter, she should check it out. So, while in a pedicab heading over to that night's Social Media Marketing World networking event, she did a quick scope with Donna Moritz. Kim's second Periscope came about a month later, when she was covering an event. One of the keynotes was Ashton Kutcher and she decided to open up her phone, broadcast the keynote, and see what happened. Although Kim had very little Periscope experience and a nearly nonexistent audience on the platform, a few people tuned in and left comments. Her third Periscope was the most eye-opening because that's when Kim realized she could use the platform for business. She had Syed Balkhi on a webinar and decided to live broadcast it to her Periscope audience by putting her phone on her computer screen and holding a mic up to the sound source. Kim shares that with no prep, she simply opened up her phone, typed in the webinar title, and invited people to tune in. More than 200 people watched the broadcast. Kim soon realized Periscope could be an amazing medium – not just to deliver content, but also to connect with people. Listen to the show to hear why Kim believes live-streaming is the beginning of Web 3.0. Periscope strategy Kim shares that one strategy she's capitalized on is leveraging Periscope to create multiple pieces of content. She comes up with one or two blog topics for the week, writes down bullet points and research she wants to reference, and then gets on Periscope and speaks her blog content. For example, if the topic is 10 Ways to Do X, she'll jot down the 10 ways and talk through them during the scope. When she's through, Kim sends the recording out for transcription. When the transcription comes back to her, she has a blog post. Kim then takes that same scope material and turns it into 50+ additional pieces of content. When asked to elaborate on how she does that, Kim explains that when people talk, certain nuggets of information they share are what she refers to as "tweetable moments." She pulls those nuggets out of her scopes and turns them into visual content, straight-up text tweets or Facebook page posts, or even a SlideShare. Kim stresses that there are tons of ways to create multiple pieces content from talking it through on Periscope. Kim shares the benefits of speaking her blog posts and how she uses the feedback people give her inside her scopes to see if she missed anything she needs to cover in the written post. Kim tries to keep her Periscopes short, sweet, and actionable,

How to Use Hashtags on Instagram to Grow Your Reach

How to Use Hashtags on Instagram to Grow Your Reach

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want more people to see your Instagram content? Are you using Instagram hashtags? Using the right hashtags makes it easier for people to find your Instagram posts and grows your reach. In this article you'll discover how to use Instagram hashtags to connect with new people on Instagram. Why Hashtags Matter on Instagram Instagram is a powerful social channel. With over 400 million users, an average of 80 million photos posted each day and 3.5 billion likes on any given day, it's a valuable platform to include in your social media marketing mix. But how can you get some of those 3.5 billion likes for your business? That's simple: Use hashtags. Listen to this article: Instagram is a social channel where hashtags are particularly valuable. According to Buffer, accounts with fewer than 1,000 followers that use 11 hashtags with their photos get an average of 77.66 interactions per post. With hashtags, you can reach a wider audience and increase your followers. You can also do market research on your competitors and connect with people who have specific interests. Now that it's clear hashtags are an important part of any Instagram strategy, here are some ways to use them for your business. #1: Leverage Established Trends Popular (or trending) hashtags are a great way to develop an Instagram presence and build brand awareness. There are many popular hashtags you can use, including: #photooftheday: Choose a behind-the-scenes photo of your company and share it as your photo of the day. #selfie: Take a selfie while you're working (or have your employees do it) and share the selfie on your Instagram account. #instalike: Don't just use this hashtag, also go through other posts that use it and interact with those users. #2: Tap Into a Popular Theme Themes can be a lot of fun, and Instagram has some popular themed hashtags that you can use with your Instagram posts. Here are a few to consider for your business: #TBT or #throwbackthursday: Throwback Thursday is a great way to reminisce about your company. On Thursdays, share your first dollar made or photos from a special event. You can even include cute or hilarious high school photos. #motivationalmonday: Add some positivity to your feed by participating in Motivational Monday. Share quotes or life lessons from your professional life. #followfriday: Showcase photos from other users and encourage your followers to follow them with this hashtag. You might even get a reciprocal #followfriday tag from those users. This is also a great way to say thank you to your client base. #3: Share an Inspirational Quote Quotes are a great way to get traction and interaction for visual content, and they work as well on Instagram as on your other social channels. Use image tools like Canva to create high-quality image quotes to share. Here are some hashtags to use with them: #instaquote: Use this hashtag with your quote posts. Also look through other tagged posts to boost your client engagement and share something interesting with other users. #quoteoftheday: Whether you use #quoteoftheday or #qotd, you can get some traction from other Instagram users. Consider creating an editorial calendar and plan quotes to share throughout the week using this hashtag. Share quotes from authors and industry leaders, as well as from your blog posts. Quotes that reflect your brand and goal are typically good choices. #4: Tell People What You're Doing Now Telling people what you're doing now is a great way to make your Instagram account fresh and inspiring to users. Plus, balancing business with fun is a great way to create a following on Instagram. Try these hashtags: #amreading: Are you reading an interesting book about your industry? Or the latest Stephen King bestseller? Share it with your audience to spark conversation and make new connections. #amwriting: Whether you're an author or simply writing a blog post,

Embracing the Google Knowledge Graph

by Rebecca Gill @ Web Savvy Marketing

The Google Knowledge Graph was first introduced in 2012. Since then it has diversified in the types of data presented and it has greatly expanded in usage. It now dominates search results and many people don’t even know what it is. The Knowledge Graph can sound really intimidating, but it really isn’t that scary. It’s a... Read More

The post Embracing the Google Knowledge Graph appeared first on Web Savvy Marketing.

Search Engine Optimization for 2015

by adminDdddjc @ Search Engine Placement | Search Engine Optimization Firm

So much has changed since we at RegisterEverywhere.com started doing SEO in late 1994. Meta tags were a big deal then. Nowadays they play a trivial role, and Google completely ignores the keyword portion of meta tags. Here is what you need to know to deploy a successful SEO campaign in 2015: Avoid using forums for […]

The post Search Engine Optimization for 2015 appeared first on Search Engine Placement | Search Engine Optimization Firm.

4 Tools to Simplify Social Selling

4 Tools to Simplify Social Selling

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use social media to sell your products? Looking for tools to simplify the process? The right tools make it easier to build relationships with people who are interested in what you offer. In this article you'll discover four tools to simplify your social selling. Listen to this article: #1: Find Shared Connections With Discover.ly A key part of selling via social media is making first contact with users who are primed to buy. When the users you're reaching out to happen to be influencers on social networks, the dividends are potentially higher. A big challenge, however, is breaking the ice and initiating a conversation. This is where Discover.ly comes in. It's a social plugin for your browser that maps out the friends or followers you have in common with a potential connection. When you browse social networks with the Discover.ly browser extension active, you can see all of the friends you have in common with an influencer. You can then ask your shared connections for an introduction and get a leg up on converting the influencer to a customer. Discover.ly also offers social data about people, such as their latest tweets or recent pictures posted to Instagram. With this information, you can reach out to influencers in a way that creates a familiar bond, which (if nurtured) might eventually lead to real-world sales. #2: Tap Online Interest With Talkwalker Tracking what your target audience is saying about your brand is important. This information helps you be more knowledgeable when communicating with people and targeting potential customers. Talkwalker is a great way to take the pulse of your audience. Using it, you see detailed insights about who's talking about your brand, what their interests are and what they like or dislike about you. If you want to identify posts that express intent to purchase, use advanced search queries such as "I am looking for (your product)," "can anyone recommend a good (your service)" or "I want to buy (your product)." Talkwalker also benchmarks your brand against the competition and shows you where you fall short and where you succeed. The alert system ensures you'll receive notifications about online mentions of your brand, products and competitors. This information puts you in a position to act in a timely manner. #3: Showcase Product Images With Pablo If you take a cursory glance at the top social media networks, you'll realize that excepting LinkedIn, every platform has a strong visual component to it. There's a reason for that. According to an Ethos3 infographic, 90% of the information that our brains process is in visual form. Of all of the content that your target audience consumes, they actually retain 80% of the visual content, but only 20% of text-based content. If you're selling a product, showing an attractive image of it is four times more effective from a retention perspective. What's more, visual content gets shared on social media 40 times more often than plain text-based content. So if you produce an engaging image or infographic, potential buyers on social media are likely to spread the word on your behalf. Pablo by Buffer is a great tool for creating original and shareworthy images to highlight your products and services. You can also add a text overlay to your image. Imagine a product shot with a clever tagline and a price attached to it. Add a logo too if you want to ensure your brand doesn't get lost in the conversation. #4: Respond to Customer Inquiries With IFTTT Marketers today have a critical opportunity that previous generations lacked: the ability to respond in real time to user actions. You might already track visitors and offer personalized content and responses when they're on your site. But what about social media? How do you respond to a statement like "Can't wait to see what the new Windows 10 looks like. Gotta try it!"? You can respond quickly to user activity on social media with I...

How B2B Brands Can Use Quora to Drive Traffic, Establish Authority, & Earn SEO Benefits

by Brian Honigman @ Digital Current

Quora is an effective avenue to boost your brand’s presence online. Learn how to best use the Q&A site to boost traffic, authority, and SEO. It’s difficult to find an answer to a very specific, nuanced question online at times. Google searches often return results that help answer a question broadly, while Yahoo Answers are […]

The post How B2B Brands Can Use Quora to Drive Traffic, Establish Authority, & Earn SEO Benefits appeared first on Digital Current.

Rigor Named to Inc. 500 List of Fastest Growing Companies in America

by Craig Hyde @ Rigor

This week, Inc. Magazine released the Inc. 5000 list of fastest growing companies in the United States. Rigor was honored to be named in the elite Inc. 500 at the 430th spot. This ranking demonstrates a 10x growth over the past three years, 1,021% to be exact. For comparison, the overall economy grew 6.7% during […]

The post Rigor Named to Inc. 500 List of Fastest Growing Companies in America appeared first on Rigor.

Blog Comments: Should Your Blog Shut Down Comments?

Blog Comments: Should Your Blog Shut Down Comments?

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you like to get comments on your blog? Have you ever wondered if you should allow comments or shut them down? To learn about why blog comments are valuable to your business, I interview Mark Schaefer and Tim McDonald for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Mark Schaefer, who is a college educator and author of four books. His blog is called Grow and his latest book is Social Media Explained. Tim McDonald is the director of community at the Huffington Post, founder of My Community Manager and a member of the No Kid Hungry Social Council. Mark and Tim share what comments mean to their blogs, and some of the challenges they face with moderation. You'll discover the upside of blog comments, how you can use them to improve your business and moderation tactics for different-sized blogs. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Blog Comments A long time ago, Seth Godin shocked the industry when he decided to shut down comments on his blog. He didn't really care for comments—for him it was more about generating daily content. More recently, Brian Clark and his team at Copyblogger decided to shut down their blog comments. As a result of this, there has been a lot of interesting dialogue in this space. The upside of blog comments Mark explains how there are a lot of different business reasons behind blogs, and it's up to each individual business to make the decision whether to have comments on their blog. He says that there are probably some very good economic reasons why Copyblogger decided to remove comments, but Mark thinks that blog comments are the economic engine. The community that Mark has built on his blog has led to many different business benefits for him and his community. You can get to know people in the comment area, which can lead to collaborations, customers and suppliers. Mark feels that a lot of influence takes place in the blog communities, where you can develop strong relationships compared to the ones you make on Twitter or Facebook. You'll hear other great benefits that come from comments on your blog, and why Mark sees them as a gift every day. The Huffington Post has a little bit of a different viewpoint, just because of their sheer size. They face a bigger challenge because of the number of comments they get every day. It's hard for them to actually interact and engage with every single commenter. Tim explains at this point, it's a matter of them looking at some of the prolific commenters on their site and working with them. They've found that some commenters don't want to write for them, they are happy just commenting. Listen to the show to find out the cost of engagement, and why you can engage yourself broke. Some of the challenges the Huffington Post faces with blog comments Tim says that the biggest issue for them is to figure out how to allow people to share and express their thoughts on content, while appreciating that the standard for commenting is different from their editorial standards. They have to find ways to moderate this effectively with the different languages, countries and time zones. You can't replace a human when it comes comment moderation. You need to find a balance between using technology, combined with what people can do. You'll hear how the Huffington Post deals with heated dialogue and negative comments on their blogs. When it comes to dealing with spam, last year they made all commenters authenticate ...

Digital Weekly: Creating Amazing Content Experiences, Social Media Automation, & More

by Kyle Johnson @ Digital Current

Learn how AMP has become integral for organic search, how to draw in millennials with content marketing, & so much more! After a couple weeks off, we return to look at how automation and big data are becoming a part of digital marketing. We also explore ways to deepen human connections through content marketing. Let’s […]

The post Digital Weekly: Creating Amazing Content Experiences, Social Media Automation, & More appeared first on Digital Current.

SearchCap: Bing fact checking, Google mobile tips & Bing agency awards

by Barry Schwartz @ SearchCap: Daily Search Engine News Recap

Below is what happened in search today, as reported on Search Engine Land and from other places across the web.

The post SearchCap: Bing fact checking, Google mobile tips & Bing agency awards appeared first on Search Engine Land.

Measuring Social Media: How to Determine Your ROI

Measuring Social Media: How to Determine Your ROI

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you trying to measure your social media return on investment (ROI)? Do you need to measure the social performance of your business? To learn how to determine the ROI for social media marketing, I interview Nichole Kelly for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Nichole Kelly, author of How to Measure Social Media and the CEO of Social Media Explorer and SME Digital. Nichole shares why so many businesses struggle to determine the ROI of their social media activities and what's really important in your social media measurement. You'll learn the most important steps that all marketers should take when thinking about social ROI. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Social Media Return on Investment (ROI) Why so many marketers struggle with measuring social ROI Nichole believes one of the reasons social ROI is a challenge is because marketers have redefined the metrics used to measure social media. Words such as mentions and retweets are similar to what was measured before. But now people have decided that social media is special, and therefore needs to be measured in a special way. Nichole believes this has set us up for failure. When you try to 1) justify what you are doing and 2) measure the return, you can't compare these two things. It then becomes difficult to compare and optimize whatever the return is. People have played with the return on investment phrase in the social realm. For example, you've likely heard of return on influence, return on engagement and return on conversation. The problem with this approach is that at the end of the day, ROI is a financial return. And whether it is the best measure for success of social media doesn't really matter, because it's the measure of success for business. Listen to the show to find out why you need to translate social media into a positive ROI. The backstory that led Nichole to social media ROI Nichole explains how she spent most of her career in corporate marketing and grew up in the boardroom. In June 2011, there was a study that came out from the Fournaise Report that said 73% of CEOs think marketers lack business credibility. The #1 stated reason was because we talk about trends like social media. Whether you agree with this or not, Nichole noticed that marketers were caught in a trap of trying to measure social media differently. And measuring social media ROI isn't as hard as everyone was making it out to be. So she set out to provide how-to information with step-by-step instructions on translating social media into something that can be compared across channels. Nichole wrote ROI-related articles for Social Media Examiner and discovered there was a never-ending appetite for help figuring out social media ROI. Nichole thinks people are still trying to understand it completely, but they are actually ready to measure now. When Nichole first started, a lot of people were talking about measurement in philosophical terms. We are starting to see companies, and marketers in particular, understand that with social media, it doesn't matter how many fans or followers they have. At the end of the day, if you can compare social media to what you spend on pay-per-click advertising and start measuring it with something simple like cost per click on all of the web traffic you are sending to your site, you have something that justifies a budget. Listen to the show to find out why Nichole feels measuring social media...

Three Pro-Tips for Making the Most of the Rigor Monitoring API

by Sherouk Omara @ Rigor

Rigor’s robust Monitoring and Optimization APIs allow our customers to make the most of their data. While many of our customers are familiar with our API, there are some features which might not be as well known. In this article, I’m going to outline three awesome features of the Monitoring API that help users maximize Rigor. […]

The post Three Pro-Tips for Making the Most of the Rigor Monitoring API appeared first on Rigor.

New Facebook Features: What Marketers Need to Know

New Facebook Features: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you using Facebook for your business? Are you wondering how Facebook's newest features can help your business? To learn about what these new Facebook features mean for marketers, I interview Mari Smith for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Mari Smith, who is known as the Queen of Facebook. She's the world's leading authority on Facebook marketing and author of The New Relationship Marketing and co-author of Facebook Marketing: An Hour a Day. Mari shares how the new Facebook features can work for your business and what you should pay attention to. You'll learn how to use the new hashtags and how to make the most of your cover image. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Features for Marketers Has Facebook rolled out a lot of changes recently in response to Twitter and Google? Mari states that there are many reasons for these new changes, although not necessarily in response to Twitter and Google+. However, Mark Zuckerberg and his entire team do keep a very close eye on the competition. When it comes to features that have been around for a while, Facebook tends to be late with their release simply because they are a much bigger machine. They have a lot more complexity to deal with. With Facebook being a public company, they have to make money for their shareholders. They've made a lot of changes to their ad product and it seems like they move things around to try and get the marketers attention. Listen to the show to find out why most of the features are there to predominantly improve the monetization aspect. What Facebook hashtags are and why marketers should care Mari explains that the simple definition of a hashtag is that it's a way to group conversations together, around the same topic. This makes it easy to discover and follow conversations. Just like you see on Twitter, Instagram, Pinterest, Google+ and LinkedIn. If you think about TV ads 2-3 years ago, the call to action would be an invite to join the brand, where they would give out their Facebook Fanpage. Now the call to action is a hashtag. You'll hear Mari talk about the reason behind why some TV shows have niche hashtags appear throughout their broadcast, instead of one main hashtag. As a business owner you need to start to experiment with hashtags. Find one or two hashtags that can help you ride a wave. There's a term called newsjacking. It doesn't sound very nice but it's a very popular way to get your business in front of people who are talking about something anyway. The great thing about Facebook's hashtags, is that they are clickable. So if you click on any, whether it's on a Post or a Comment, it opens up into what is called the Hashtag Feed. This feed displays other posts with the same hashtag. However, recently they have introduced related searches into this feature. So not only will you see the exact verbatim hashtag but also similar ones. As a strategic marketer, Mari highly recommends every business owner make good use of hashtags. Even if you don't have them personally, they are active for other people. Listen to the show to find out how clickable hashtags can get you in front of new people. Tips and creative uses for Facebook hashtags Mari uses two generic Facebook hashtags which are #facebookmarketing and #facebooktips. You'll hear what hashtag Mari uses to separate herself away from her peers. It's where you'll find all of her posts.

How to Optimize Your Mobile Social Media Ads

How to Optimize Your Mobile Social Media Ads

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you trying to reach an on-the-go social media audience? Are your ads optimized for mobile users? More people are using social on their smartphones. If you want to reach them, you might need to rethink your ads. In this article you'll discover three ways to make your social media ads mobile-friendly. Listen to this article: #1: Use Simple Copy and Bold Imagery Advertising on mobile means that people will view your ads on a much smaller screen than a desktop monitor. Because of this, you need to make sure your ads are still visible and carry the same impact when viewed on mobile devices. Ads for desktop have the screen space to contain text-heavy copy and detailed images. Mobile ads don't have that advantage, so your mobile ad creative needs to be bold, simple, and beautiful to attract your audience's attention. Take a look at two Facebook ads for the shoe company Tieks. The desktop ad features an intricate and interesting image along with a good amount of text to drive engagement. The image in Tieks's mobile ad is much simpler and the perspective puts the viewer right in the ad. The copy consists of a short sentence driving users to click the ad. This ad works for mobile because people can easily read and understand it on a small smartphone screen. While these two ads look very different, they're both unmistakably from the same company. Including the same visual elements, such as Tieks's bold red flats, in each image ties them together and keeps the ads on-brand, regardless of which device they're viewed on. When migrating desktop ads to mobile, it's important to create campaigns that are easy to understand and compelling to users. Simple copy and bold creative are the best ways to boost engagement on mobile. #2: Create Mobile-Friendly Landing Pages The creative in your ads isn't the only thing you need to adjust for mobile. Make sure that once people click on your ad, they're taken to a website that they can view and navigate properly on their mobile device. A website designed for desktop won't do; viewers will quickly get frustrated by the non-intuitive layout and navigate away from your site. This mobile Twitter ad from Home Depot encourages users to apply for job openings at its stores. Rather than direct users to the company's home page, the ad sends users to a mobile-friendly page that's specifically dedicated to careers at Home Depot. This way, users who are interested in applying for a job don't need to search through the site to complete that objective. The ad's landing page is bright, friendly, and on-theme. It's designed to be visually appealing and easy to navigate for mobile users. These two elements mean that there's a better chance of users viewing the page and eventually doing exactly what Home Depot wants: applying for a job. Mobile ads require landing pages that are designed with mobile in mind. To ensure that people follow through on your desired action, make sure they're driven to a web page that is relevant to your ad and is easy for them to view and navigate on their mobile device. #3: Explore Mobile-Friendly Video Ads When it comes to mobile advertising, video is leading the pack. According to eMarketer, U.S. mobile video ad spend jumped over 80% in 2015, and is expected to see double-digit growth through 2019. Many marketers say that video ads have helped them drive brand awareness and engagement, in addition to achieving higher click-through rates. Why? Mobile video ads are perfectly suited to mobile consumption behaviors. There are several ways you can start including mobile video in your advertising campaigns on Instagram, Facebook, and Twitter. In fact, you may already have the resources on hand to craft video ads with very little money or effort. Website Videos Have a video on your website that introduces your product or service? Then you have a video that's ready to run as a mobile ad! In the video below,

Growing Your Audience: How to Increase Your Social Following

Growing Your Audience: How to Increase Your Social Following

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use social media to build an audience for your business? Are you wondering how you can convert your audience into customers? To learn how to grow an audience that wants more and more of what you have to offer, I interview Jeffrey Rohrs for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Jeffrey Rohrs, co-host of the Social Pros Podcast and author of the new book, Audience: Marketing in the Age of Subscribers, Fans and Followers. He's also the vice president of marketing insights at Exact Target. Jeff shares why an audience is so important for marketers. You'll learn about seekers, amplifiers and joiners and how these audience types relate to your business. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Growing Your Audience Why an audience is so important for marketers Jeff explains that in his book Audience, he homes in on the concept of proprietary audience development. It's what people in social media, email marketing and even mobile have been doing, but he approaches it from a different angle. When Jeff talked to marketers about their audiences, which included Facebook fans, Twitter followers, YouTube subscribers and email subscribers, they didn't seem to have a strategy. In most cases, strategy was an afterthought or the outcome of a momentary campaign. Marketing was traditionally organized around a campaign. Jeff refers to it as a beginning, a middle and an end, then a cake to celebrate the results and then repeat it. You'll discover why audience development is a responsibility, primary to marketing. Originally marketers delivered the promise via email, but now you have to take that style of thinking into the social and mobile channels. Proprietary audiences will only be there if you build them. If not, you'll have to pay in the form of advertising. Jeff's message is to take a look at everything you do in marketing and try to optimize it to build a proprietary audience, because it gives you a huge competitive advantage. Before the Internet, creative thinkers only had to worry about great creative. They didn't have to assemble an audience because mass media did that for them. The difference today is not only coming up with the creative, but also thinking about distribution and building an audience that belongs to you—one that nobody else has access to. So when you have that great piece of content, you are able to push the button and reach your audience. You'll hear Jeff explain why it's important for businesses to have people in charge of audience development across all channels. Listen to the show to find out why proprietary audience development is the flipside of the content marketing coin. The definition of seekers, amplifiers and joiners Jeff explains that these are the three top-level audiences that marketers have exclusive access to. 1. Seekers Seekers are people who look for information or for entertainment. For example, you're a seeker when you turn on your TV and flip through the channels to find something to entertain you. You're also a seeker when you use Google or Google Maps. Search engine optimization is all about the process of delivering seekers to your website. Seekers are momentary. Once they have their fill of entertainment or find the information they need, they go away without a trace. You'll find out what you need to do with this audience type. 2. Amplifiers Amplifiers are what social media is built upon.

Year in Search 2016 | SEO 101

Year in Search 2016 | SEO 101

by Scott Van Achte @ StepForth Web Marketing Inc.

Starting in the New Year, we learn about how John’s work setup is evolving into a new team increasing SEO team by close to 500%. Plus Google Blog highlights The Year in Search 2016, and Google teams with Gupshup to develop voice-activated Actions for Google Home. This January 5, 2017 SEO 101 podcast is available […]

The post Year in Search 2016 | SEO 101 appeared first on StepForth Web Marketing Inc..

How to Use Native Ads to Support Your Social Media Marketing

How to Use Native Ads to Support Your Social Media Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you looking for ways to supercharge your social media efforts? Have you considered native ads? Native ads not only help build your social followers and boost social engagement, they also drive high-quality consumers to your branded content. In this article you'll discover what native ads are and how to integrate them into your social media marketing. Listen to this article: What Are Native Ads? The Content Marketing Institute defines native advertising as paid marketing that delivers useful, interesting and targeted information to your audience in a form that looks like the site's native, or non-ad, content. The different forms that native ads can take vary greatly. They can be Google paid search results, promoted listings on Twitter, sponsored updates on LinkedIn, Facebook promoted or sponsored posts or even articles on sites like Forbes, BuzzFeed, The Huffington Post and The New York Times. Native ads can also appear as content-recommendation engines at the end of articles. Here's how to start integrating native ads into your social media marketing. #1: Define Your Goal Whatever the form, native ads offer many potential benefits to your business. Joe Pulizzi of the Content Marketing Institute says native ads can help you build brand awareness and trust, plus help bring subscribers to your content. And keep in mind that your content doesn't always have to be new. Native ads can be a great way to attract new audiences to previously published posts. Additional benefits of native ads include SEO and social proof. Promoted posts on a strong social media site get your message in front of a larger audience and can drive traffic back to your website or blog. Native ads can be especially helpful if you have a new site and haven't had time to build up strong SEO. Unlike other forms of digital marketing such as banner ads, native ads on social media can collect social proof such as likes, comments and shares. This increases the credibility of your message and viral opportunities for your brand. More awareness can equal more authority in the form of links and social signals, which can produce better rankings. Native ads can also help you build social media audiences. A sponsored post on Facebook or Twitter can attract new users to follow you, and sponsored stories can grow likes and followers, but only when the content resonates with users. A sponsored post with little organic traction will do poorly. Promote social media content that is already popular for further exposure to a wider audience. #2: Develop Quality Ad Content To get the most from your native ad investment, focus on creating content that is helpful and interesting, attracts attention and provides value. And fight the urge to sell. Additionally, Zoe Robinson of Add3 suggests these best practices for native ads: Publish the content that the ad is promoting on your own site. If your article features an infographic, chart or graph, be sure it appears on your site first with its own URL. Include a call to action that links to your blog or other social channels. Quality content is key. Go beyond marketing and break down departmental silos to leverage the expertise of others in your company. Create content your audience will find less disruptive and more engaging through segmentation with tools like geo-targeting, demographics and interests. Zoe also recommends measuring metrics beyond traditional click-through rates. Consider metrics such as brand affinity or purchase intent to determine native ad success. #3: Use Native Ad Targeting PR software and services company Cision suggests targeting sponsored content to Facebook users who are already customers or lookalike audiences that share characteristics with existing fans. You can also retarget native ads to people who have come to your website to view a product or service or deliver native ads based on search interest.

How to Republish, Repurpose and Reinvent Your Content Using LinkedIn Publisher

How to Republish, Repurpose and Reinvent Your Content Using LinkedIn Publisher

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want to give existing content new life and greater visibility? Looking for a way to publish more often without much extra work? Use LinkedIn Publisher to consistently provide useful content for your audience, gain visibility and build your professional identity without writing anything new! In this article you’ll discover three ways to give existing content new life using LinkedIn Publisher. Listen to this article: #1: Republish Blog Posts One of the fastest ways to get started on LinkedIn is to copy and paste your complete content posts from other blogs. If you decide to go this route, there are a couple of things to keep in mind. It's important to understand how Google views duplicate content. You should wait at least two weeks after the post publishes before you republish it to LinkedIn. That gives the bots from search engines enough time to index and understand which post is the original, and rank it higher than republished content. Barry Feldman posted an article on LinkedIn a month after it originally appeared on his blog. To let readers know where to find the original post, include a sentence at the beginning or end that directs readers to the original version. This is especially important when you republish your guest post from another company's blog and it's a nice rule of thumb to adopt when you republish your own content. Readers will know where they can find more of your articles. Plus, they'll see you're honest about republishing your post. Take the time to craft a headline that's a little different and specific to the LinkedIn platform. For example, when Guillaume Decugis republishes content on LinkedIn, Medium and other syndication sites, he changes the title of each post to distinguish and optimize it. Then readers who search for the keyword will see multiple versions of the headline on the first page of search engine results. Remember, treat LinkedIn Publisher as a distribution channel, where the goal is to increase visibility and grow your audience. Send people back to your blog, so they can get to know more about you and your business. #2: Repurpose Long-Form Content Do you have robust ebooks, case studies and speeches that are too long for LinkedIn? No worries. It's easy to optimize your existing long-form blog content for LinkedIn Publisher. Take your long-form blog posts or ebooks and break them down into multiple individual posts. Include additional images and subheads too. You can even take old speeches and write them as LinkedIn posts. For example, Ann Handley (who does an excellent job of mixing new content and repurposed content into her LinkedIn Publisher posts) recently reimagined a speech published on her blog in 2013 for a LinkedIn Publisher post in 2015. #3: Use Previous Content to Inspire New Posts If you don't want to republish the same content (or even parts of it) from your blog, there are a few other options to avoid starting completely from scratch. Take a look at the analytics from your published content to see which articles performed best. Look at traffic, social media shares and any other metrics you monitor for performance. Then try to figure out what made that content so successful. One way to do this is to ask yourself questions about each post. Once you determine the source of that success, write a new article for LinkedIn that's similar. You can also go through your blog and find articles with similar themes. Then pick the big ideas from each post and turn it into a list post on LinkedIn. Include a summary paragraph or two from each post, as well as a link back to the original. Tips for LinkedIn Publisher Engagement and Visibility Whether you republish existing content verbatim or revise it, there are a few things to do to optimize it for LinkedIn. OkDork analyzed 3,000 of the most successful LinkedIn Publishing posts to come up with these helpful takeaways:

Optimizing Your Website for Google Quick Answer Boxes

by Dan Honkanen @

For the person doing the Googling, Google Quick Answer Boxes are great—they provide concise, simple answers to a wide range of search queries and places them right at the top of the search engine’s first page. For the person trying to be found on Google, however, Google Quick Answer Boxes act as a bit of […]

The post Optimizing Your Website for Google Quick Answer Boxes appeared first on .

What is Organic Search Engine Optimization (Organic SEO)? - Definition from Techopedia

What is Organic Search Engine Optimization (Organic SEO)? - Definition from Techopedia


Techopedia.com

Organic Search Engine Optimization Organic SEO Definition - Organic search engine optimiza

How to Promote Your eBook With Social Media

How to Promote Your eBook With Social Media

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you have an ebook that needs exposure? Want tips to promote your ebooks via social media? Social media can help you build visibility and generate leads with ebooks. In this article you'll discover six ways to promote your ebook on social media. Listen to this article: Why eBooks? The purpose of an ebook is to capture leads. Turn highly valuable content that can't be found in a simple online search into an ebook, and your prospects are likely to give you their contact details in return for access to the ebook. While half of content marketing with ebooks is the creation stage, the other half is promoting your ebook to increase ROI. Here's how to promote your ebook on social media to generate valuable leads. #1: Create Social Teasers Understandably you'll want to promote your ebook across your social platforms. Tease your audience with snippets from the ebook, and you're much more likely to create buzz around the content you're promoting. Post an engaging image from the ebook, an interesting stat or a stand-out quote to attract your audience's attention so they want to click to your content. Publi.sh posted an attention-grabbing stat to generate interest in their ebook. Also, use a popular hashtag that is relevant to your ebook content in your posts. Explore hashtagify.me to discover suitable hashtags. #2: Pin a Tweet The Pin feature on Twitter is a little-known, yet effective, tactic that gives you the ability to pin a tweet to the top of your feed. Thus the pinned tweet will always be the first one a visitor sees. Find or create a tweet you want to pin that highlights your ebook. Then right-click on the Further Options icon and select to Pin to Your Profile Page. HubSpot pins tweets to promote their ebook content. Pinned tweets are free and perfect for promoting content like an ebook. #3: Design Social Banners Since social banners and covers instantly grab attention when someone visits your social pages, they can be especially helpful for promoting your ebook. For example, create a cover photo for Facebook and Twitter that promotes your ebook. Although there's no way to enable a clickable link back to the ebook content, it's still worth including the URL so your audience knows where to find it. The dimensions for a Facebook cover are 851 x 315 pixels. Twitter covers are 1500 x 421 pixels. #4: Leverage Influencers Social media influencers can really help accelerate your promotional strategy. Explore platforms such as BuzzSumo to find influencers within your industry. Then connect with them to see if they'll share your content. Influencers are always looking for valuable information to share with their audience. For example, Darren Rowse shared a link to an ebook in this tweet. If you're struggling to find influencers to share content from your site, ask if they're open to you writing a guest post for them on their site. Create a post that's topically related to your ebook, and link to it in your article. #5: Post in Communities Google+ and LinkedIn are both home to a variety of different communities where marketers discuss the latest trends within their niche. After you join a community, take some time to get to know other members before you start promoting your ebook. Take part in discussions, and like and comment on their posts to build long-lasting relationships. Take a look at the Groups Directory on LinkedIn to find relevant groups for your industry. Or, if you'd prefer, create your own group and talk about the content of your ebook to an interested audience. Also, on Google+ you'll find hundreds of communities to join. The Google+ platform makes it incredibly easy to promote content with the option to include links, images and videos within your post. #6: Pay to Promote Posts To guarantee your ebook will get in front of an audience that actually cares about your content, consider paying for a sponsored post. For example,

Google+ Marketing Tactics: How to Promote Your Content on Google+

Google+ Marketing Tactics: How to Promote Your Content on Google+

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Google+ for business? Are you wondering how to promote your content on Google+? To learn about Google+ tactics that are available to marketers, I interview Lynette Young for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Lynette Young, author of Google+ for Small Businesses. Her agency, Purple Stripe, helps businesses thrive with social media. Lynette is a Google+ marketing expert who has more than 1.5 million followers on Google+. Lynette shares why she got hooked on Google+, and how businesses can use the tools available to succeed on the platform. You'll discover how to get your content to show up in Google, and how Google+ users are different than Facebook users. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Google+ Marketing Tactics How did you get hooked on Google+? Lynette explains how she is always on the lookout for the next piece of digital publishing software, whether it be blogs in the late 90s or Twitter in 2004/05. She likes to explore what's new and the new places people go online to talk and build communities. So when the first private beta invites for Google+ started to go out, Lynette spent 4 hours on the platform. She fell in love with it straight away and has stuck with it ever since. Lynette says that when she started on Google+, she had a little more confidence than with other platforms because it's Google. She soon figured out the set of tools available and what they could offer for her as a person and as a marketer. Listen to the show to find out why Lynette feels that Google+ is very anti-Apple. The business benefits of using Google+ Lynette looks at Google+ as the Internet and part of Google. Right now they have about 60 products and Google+ is just one piece of it all. It's a way for Google to link all their products together. When you are in the Google ecosystem, it's where you live for search, email, videos, etc. Lynette sees Google+ as a platform that touches everything she does on the Internet. Since the platform launched, it's grown up in many ways and like it or not, Google owns quite a large chunk of the Internet. As marketers, we use a large number of their products in our everyday lives. When you're signed into Google+, you receive alerts when you get new activity. This appears in the right-hand corner of your screen as a bell icon. Lynette explains how it's not so much about the numbers you get, but what you do with them. So whenever you go to a Google property, you'll see these alerts. You'll hear why people are drawn into these numbers, even if they aren't on Google+. Listen to the show to find out how Google attracts you into their ecosystem and tracks your activity. What Facebook marketers need to know about Google+ users Google+ is more of an interest-based network, whereas Facebook is the place where people connect with others they already know. Lynette says that Google+ is more like Twitter or Reddit. Not in the form of how you can publish, but how the communities separate themselves and group together. As a marketer, this is what you want. If you want to get your message out, you obviously want to gravitate toward people you know will meet your criteria and will hopefully want your product. Lynette finds it a lot easier to reach these communities on Google+ than she does on Facebook. You'll discover why published content on Google+ takes a different path than it does on Facebook,

SearchCap: Yelp hits Google again, link building & SMX East preview

by Barry Schwartz @ SearchCap: Daily Search Engine News Recap

Below is what happened in search today, as reported on and from other places across the web.

The post SearchCap: Yelp hits Google again, link building & SMX East preview appeared first on Search Engine Land.

5 Tips to Improve Your Social Media Ad Campaigns

5 Tips to Improve Your Social Media Ad Campaigns

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want more from your social media efforts? Are you ready to try ad targeting? Using the right tactics to deliver and follow up on social media ad campaigns generates better quality leads. In this article you'll discover five tips to improve your social media ad campaigns. Listen to this article: #1: Use Keywords in Ads Before you write the copy for your ads, it's important to know what people are searching for in your industry or area of expertise. To learn more about how your target audience searches for your products, do a keyword analysis (Google has a great one). To get started, go to Google AdWords and sign in. Next, hover over Tools and select Keyword Planner from the drop-down menu. Click the Search for Keywords button on the right. To search for keywords, enter a phrase or website or select a category. Once you click Get Ideas, you'll watch a list of topics populate. Now you can create an ad campaign around your keywords. #2: Serve Ads to Current Customers Many marketers focus heavily on acquiring new customers. But what if all of your current customers bought your product one more time? What if they bought a more expensive service? Think about what that would do for your sales. Radian6/Salesforce estimates that it costs 5 to 10 times more to bring in a new customer than it does to retain a past customer. That eye-opening number is the reason you want to take steps to retain customers. An effective way to do that is to create a custom audience by uploading your current list of customer email addresses for use in ads on Facebook, Instagram or Twitter. To get started on Facebook, open Power Editor and click the Audiences tab at the top of the page. At the top right, click Create Audience and select Custom Audience from the drop-down menu. Select the type of audience you want to create. Next, upload a CSV or TXT file with your current customers' email addresses. When you're finished, click Create Audience. Facebook then matches your email addresses to user login information. When the process is complete, you'll see the following confirmation message. Click Done to save your audience. You can now select your custom list for your Facebook ads to market directly to people who already know and love your brand. This is a great way to get previous customers to come back more often. #3: Reach More Prospects With Lookalike Audiences Similar to custom audiences, lookalike audiences leverage your current customer list to find people who are similar to your current customers. When you create a lookalike audience in Facebook, the platform sources the top 1% of Facebook users who most closely match your established customers' behavior. This is a little-known way to reach your target market at a lower cost. A lower CPC (cost per click) means your budget will stretch farther. To create a lookalike audience, go to Power Editor and click the Audiences tab at the top of the page. At the top right, click Create Audience and select Lookalike Audience from the drop-down menu. From the Source drop-down list, select a custom audience, conversion pixel or Facebook page. Then select the country where you'd like to find a similar set of people. Finally, use the slider to set your desired audience size. When you're finished, click Create Audience to create your lookalike audience. #4: Qualify Leads by Connecting on LinkedIn One of the quickest ways to open doors on social media is to reach out to prospects on LinkedIn. Send messages to their inbox and start building relationships that will help you qualify them as a genuine lead. Most personal profiles will list an email address and phone number you can use to reach out and make introductions. If you upgrade your LinkedIn account, you can filter your searches by industry, years of experience, location, current company, seniority level and more.

Missing Facebook Pages: What to Do When Facebook Takes Your Page Away

Missing Facebook Pages: What to Do When Facebook Takes Your Page Away

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you know what to do if your Facebook page vanishes? Want to be ready when and if that day comes? To share what happened when the Social Media Examiner Facebook page disappeared and how we handled it, keep reading. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I am joined by Erik Fisher, community manager of Social Media Examiner. Erik and I will explore what happened when our Facebook page disappeared. You'll discover what to do if the same thing happens to you. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: How Our Page Disappeared and What We Did About It Finding out On a late Sunday afternoon with my home filled with kids and cousins and my wife cooking dinner, I eased into the couch to watch a football game. Since I drained the battery playing with my new iPhone, it was charging in another room when a text message came at 4:12 PM: “We have a bit of an emergency. Our Facebook page is missing. You around?” I had missed the text. The phone rang 12 minutes later, and my wife picked it up. Our community manager Erik Fisher was calling to tell me what happened. Between the time he texted me and when he called, Erik poked around Facebook and confirmed it. The Social Media Examiner Facebook page had disappeared. And I mean it was really gone. I even received a notification that my personal profile was incomplete because it didn’t list where I worked. I checked to see if I could view the page on mobile or on my laptop, if I could get into the admin side of the page and if the Facebook Fan widget appeared on our site. The answer for everything: no. Listen to the show to learn why it's important to instruct your team to call you in an emergency situation. First thoughts Initially, I thought we’d been hacked. Then I recalled how after I did the Chalene Johnson story we'd taken all the steps necessary to secure the accounts of all of our staff. We secured email with 2-step authentication to our corporate Gmail accounts and we turned on Facebook Login Approvals. Plus, we recently completed a security audit of everyone on our team, and have a master document of who has administrative access to what. These are all steps you can take to secure your business accounts, and you can hear more about how to implement them in the podcast. Listen to the show to hear our thoughts about "what if" the page was gone permanently. First steps After I got off the phone with Erik, everything around me faded into the background. Within minutes I posted the following to friends only: Ok friends, our Social Media Examiner Facebook page has fully disappeared from existence? Anyone have any suggestions on what to do? Posted by Michael Stelzner on Sunday, November 8, 2015   Initially, I decided to share it only to friends just in case there was something nefarious going on. Later on, I changed the status to public. Here are some of the questions people asked me: Did your admin accounts get compromised? Are you spending enough to have a dedicated rep? Any notifications from Facebook? Are you accidentally unpublished? Did you move it to the Business Manager? The answer to all of these questions was "no." I searched all over to find out how to submit my issue to Facebook. I reached out to my network and someone eventually told me about the Report Pages that Disappeared form. I also found where Facebook hides its support responses. Listen to the show to discover what I determined I should have done at the beginning. Reaching out to friends I've been developing relationships with folks for ye...

Website Search Engine Optimization for Lawyers

Website Search Engine Optimization for Lawyers


Attorneys Online, Inc.

Attorneys Online™, Inc.'s search engine optimization services (SEO) help to increase your rankings in the natural listings of major search engines.

4 Tips to Improve Your Pinterest Exposure

4 Tips to Improve Your Pinterest Exposure

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is the Pinterest algorithm burying your pins? Looking for tips to get better exposure in the Pinterest Smart Feed? Pinning more isn't always the answer to increasing your visibility on Pinterest. In this article you'll discover four ways to improve the quality of your pins and boards on Pinterest. Listen to this article: #1: Clean Up Your Account Every Month For Pinterest's algorithm to view your account as high-quality, you'll want to focus on curating the best of the best. In turn, Pinterest will be more likely to recommend your pins to others. Not all popular pins are created equal and many of your account's pins won't get substantial repins from your followers. To make sure your account is up to date, set aside time once a month to go through your boards and delete all of the pins that have fewer than five repins. Here's an easy way to delete underperforming pins from a board: Click on the board and then click on the Move Pins button at the top right corner of the board. Next, click on the red Move button. Now you're able to scroll down and view all of the pins on your board and note the number of repins each one has generated. Select the checkmark on each pin that has fewer than five repins. When you're done, click the red Delete button. Currently you can delete only 50 pins at a time, and be careful to stay below 100 daily pin deletions or Pinterest may block you. You should also wait at least seven days before you delete a new pin. Deleting pins is a lot of work, but if you want to build a valuable Pinterest presence, it's a tactic you can't ignore. #2: Pin and Repin Based on Popularity It's very tempting to repin every amazing image, but if you pin indiscriminately, you'll end up with a collection of great images that offer little value to your audience. To curate a popular account with boards that give value to your followers, look a bit further to see how many repins each image actually has before you share it to one of your own boards. Joy Cho / Oh Joy! has an impressive 12.8M followers on Pinterest, and her account is a great example of what happens when you only repin popular pins to your account. Pro tip: It's good practice to check the link of each image before you repin to make sure you're not directing people to a broken link or dodgy website. Check your Pinterest stats to see which of your boards are most popular. This information isn't limited only to your owned boards, but also extends to any group boards you pin to. When you want to share a new original pin from your website or blog, pin it to one of your popular boards and make sure the pin is related to the theme of the board you choose. #3: Combine Pinterest Analytics With Google Analytics to Identify Traffic-Driving Pins It's important to have your website verified on Pinterest. Not only does this reinforce your credibility, but it also allows you to view your website stats. This makes it possible to see which of your original pins from your website or blog are the most popular on Pinterest. You'll want to cross-check this information with Google Analytics and use the combined stats to verify which of your popular pins are driving traffic to your website. To find out, sign into your Google Analytics account and then go to Acquisition > Referrals > Pinterest. Look at the Visits column to detect high-performing pins. Create similar pins to deliver more of what your audience likes, which will improve your pinning strategy. #4: Adjust Board Elements for Visibility in Search If you have a board that isn't getting the visibility you expect or isn't generating the repins you want, you can change your board title to see if the board's performance improves. First, click on the board you want to change and then click on the Edit Board button. Next, you'll see an edit screen where you can change a number of elements for your board, such as the name (or title), description,

How to Use Facebook Ad Bidding

How to Use Facebook Ad Bidding

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use Facebook ads? Have you tried ad bidding? Understanding how to use Facebook ad bidding will help you reach your campaign goals for less money. In this article you'll discover how to use Facebook ad bidding with your Facebook ad campaigns. Listen to this article: Facebook Ad Bidding The bidding options for Facebook ads have changed slightly. Facebook has updated automatic bidding to be more beneficial. Although the options are different for each type of ad, Facebook set bidding up to reflect the way people should bid to get the most return on their advertising investment. You can control your bidding and budget three ways: what you're optimizing your ads for, how you're being charged, and whether you're using automatic or manual bidding. If you're just starting out with Facebook ads, you may want to go with the default selection (which, again, is different for each type of ad). However, if you have a specific goal in mind, are troubleshooting or testing an ad, or want more control over your budget, you'll want to adjust your bidding accordingly. Here's how to set up bidding for your ad campaign. #1: Choose a Goal Before you launch any type of ad campaign, you need to choose your objective. Objectives range from boosts and promoted posts to website clicks, conversions, video views, and more. Select your campaign objective and then click Set Audience & Budget to continue. #2: Define Your Audience As with any ad campaign, you need to decide what audience you want to reach. You can use a saved audience or create a new one. You can either go broad or get specific with your audience. Keep in mind that the narrower the targeting, the more likely you are to reach the right people, even if the audience size is smaller. #3: Determine Your Budget Before you set the bidding, decide how much money you want to spend for your campaign and how you want to spend it. You can bid a certain amount per day or choose a lifetime budget, which is the total amount you're willing to spend. For instance, if you choose a lifetime budget of $100 and the ad will run for 10 days, you'll probably spend about $10/day. If you choose a daily budget, that will run for the duration of the campaign. Before you go with a large ad spend, split test your ads to see which ones resonate with your audience. Try out different images, text, and offers. For example, I did an ad for a client with a webinar as the offer, but it had very little conversion. When I changed the offer to an ebook with the same title, it was substantially more successful. When you're in the testing phase, test at $25 to $50 per ad to see how each ad performs and then compare ads against one other. After you figure out your budget, move forward with your ad campaign. #4: Optimize Your Ad Delivery When you get to the Optimize section, Facebook defaults to the goal you selected for the ad campaign, such as Link Clicks to Your Website, Video Views, Impressions, or Daily Unique Reach. When Facebook optimizes your ad, it shows the ad to the people who are most likely to take that particular action. For instance, if you have a pixel set up to track when people convert from your website, Facebook will serve your ad to people who are more likely to click. Facebook will also serve video and subscribe ads to those most likely to watch or sign up. If you change the way you optimize your bidding, your estimated daily reach may change, too. If you want to change the bidding optimization (for example, views of the ad rather than clicks), select your new bid optimization method from the Optimization for Ad Delivery drop-down list. Note: oCPM (optimized CPM, or cost per thousand impressions) used to be the default bidding model, but it's no longer available. The current equivalent is to optimize an ad for link clicks and get charged per impression, but this is not always the best choice.

How to Easily Manage Multiple Twitter Accounts

How to Easily Manage Multiple Twitter Accounts

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you managing multiple Twitter accounts? Wondering how to streamline your Twitter marketing? TweetDeck lets you engage, monitor, and schedule tweets for multiple accounts from a single customizable dashboard. In this article you'll discover how to manage multiple Twitter accounts with TweetDeck. Listen to this article: #1: Connect Your Twitter Accounts The first step is to set up your TweetDeck account. If your company has one or two people monitoring social media, you can create one login using your company's handle as the default account. Then you can add more accounts/handles to that same user login. After you log into TweetDeck, you'll see your TweetDeck dashboard. The gray navigation bar on the left side of the dashboard is your go-to location for everything TweetDeck can do. From there, you can add accounts, write new tweets, review activity and notifications, read messages, change settings, and more. To connect additional accounts, click on the Accounts icon near the bottom of the navigation bar. Next, click Add Another Twitter Account and enter the username and password for each account you want to manage. Now you're ready to begin. #2: Add Listening Streams The most powerful TweetDeck feature is the ability to add streams, which are columns of tweets that are updated in real time. There are a number of different streams to choose from, such as User, Notifications, Mentions, Followers, Messages, Search, Lists, and more. To add a stream, click on the Add Column icon (with the + sign on it) in the navigation bar. Then select the column type you want to add. You can customize the content of each column and remove excess noise. This makes it easier to find the information you want. Click the icon in the upper-right corner of the column to access your filtering options. Keep in mind that adding lots of streams isn't always better. It's important to choose the columns that will help you reach your marketing goals. Here are five streams that you'll want to add. Notifications The Notifications stream allows you to see when you have a new follower, someone has added you to a list, or one of your tweets has been liked, retweeted, or replied to. Using this stream, you can quickly find active and potential clients, customers, and followers. Essentially it lets you monitor every handle that is engaging with your content. You can use additional filters to narrow down your notifications to engagement, users, and content type. Mentions Add the Mentions stream to monitor every tweet that mentions your Twitter handle, whether for the first time or as part of a reply/conversation. By monitoring and using this stream daily, your marketing team can track every company mention, and then react in a timely manner. You can quickly jump into conversations, offer customer support, or engage with your existing user base or potential prospects. Search Search is one of the most important streams in TweetDeck. It allows your marketing team to go beyond users and monitor content related to keywords or hashtags. Using the Search feature, you can keep an eye on topics and conversations that are essential to your business. For example, if your company is about to launch a new technology product, your marketing team can set up a Search stream to monitor all tweets for keywords such as new technology, today in tech, #techtuesday, and so on. Bonus Tip: When setting up this stream, don't forget to use Boolean operators to save space. This way, you can search for multiple terms in the same column. Messages The Messages stream allows you to read and reply to direct messages for any accounts you've added to TweetDeck. This is where you can turn your Twitter following into real engagement with prospects and influencers in your industry. Once you have this set up, you can respond quickly and appropriately as the discussion occurs.

Dealing With Unhappy Customers: What Social Marketers Need to Know

Dealing With Unhappy Customers: What Social Marketers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Does your business respond to customers via social media? Are you prepared to deal with upset customers? To discover how to turn unhappy customers into happy fans, I interview Jay Baer. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Jay Baer, the author of Youtility, co-host of the Social Pros Podcast and founder of Convince & Convert, an agency and blog focused on digital marketing. His newest book is Hug Your Haters: How to Embrace Complaints and Keep Your Customers. Jay will explore how to convert social media haters into raving fans. You'll discover why it's important to hug your haters. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Dealing With Unhappy Customers The backstory of Hug Your Haters The idea of customer service and customer experience has been at the front of Jay's mind for a long time, he explains. His company Convince & Convert helps major brands with their social media and content marketing, and they increasingly get involved in issues with customers. It's not just about being proactive and doing marketing, Jay says. You have to be just as good, if not better, at reactive customer service. Jay found even organizations with a lot of resources were befuddled by everything related to digital customer service and experience in the modern world. Jay shares how conducting a tremendous amount of research with Tom Webster from Edison Research changed the focus of his book. Last year at Social Media Marketing World, Jay did his "Hug Your Haters" presentation for the first time. Although he has taken the Youtility concept all over the world, Jay says the Hug Your Haters book is the best thing he's ever done and the speech is the best speech he has ever given. Listen to the show to learn what Tom Webster said he liked about Hug Your Haters in the forward to the book. What are haters and why do people hate Jay refers to anybody who complains about a business either off stage or on stage as a hater. An off-stage hater is somebody who complains in private: on telephone and email. An on-stage hater is somebody who complains in public: social media, review sites, discussion boards and forums. He shares that historically and even currently, the majority of people complain off stage but that the pendulum is swinging the other way because it's much easier to reach out to a brand on Facebook, Twitter or beyond than it is to send an email or wait on hold. When people complain off stage, they almost always want an answer. They have a problem they want to be fixed, and 90% of the time they expect companies to respond. When people complain on stage, they don't necessarily want an answer; they want an audience. They want people to empathize and engage with them around their experience. If they actually hear back from the company, it's a bonus. Even though only 47% of the people who complain in public actually expect companies to get back to them, Jay says their research proved that if you actually answer the person who had a bad experience and left a review online, it has a meaningful and significant impact on your customer advocacy. Listen to the show to discover how content shock also applies to disgruntled customers. Why engage haters Jay says haters are not the problem, ignoring them is. He believes there are multiple benefits to answering every complaint in every channel every time, instead of what most businesses do today, which is answer some people some of the time in the channels they prefer. First, if you answer somebody, you at least have a chance to turn them around.

SEO Competitive Research Is Vital to Your Marketing Efforts

by Rebecca Gill @ Web Savvy Marketing

SEO competitor research is a process that reviews existing and future competitors. This is something that has been done in traditional marketing for a very long time. When you weave SEO into the competitive research mix, you will expand your existing traditional competitors with additional online competitors. You might be asking why you would have both... Read More

The post SEO Competitive Research Is Vital to Your Marketing Efforts appeared first on Web Savvy Marketing.

Beyond the Horizon

by Shishir Tiwari @

I have been in the field of software development for over last 2 decades. With an education background as an Engineer and a Masters in Computer Science, I gathered some working experience in Software Conglomerates and End Clients like TCS (Tata Consultancy Services), GE and Verizon as a Software Developer, Business Analyst and Project Manager, […] Read more

The post Beyond the Horizon appeared first on .

How to Optimize Your Facebook Posts With Facebook Audience Insights

How to Optimize Your Facebook Posts With Facebook Audience Insights

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to increase your Facebook engagement? Interested in discovering what content appeals to your audience? With Facebook Audience Insights, you can get the information you need to tailor content to your audience's preferences. In this article you'll find out how to use Audience Insights to optimize your Facebook posts. Why Facebook Audience Insights? Facebook Audience Insights is a social media marketer's dream come true. It was designed as a tool for targeting Facebook ads, but it also provides a treasure trove of data on your current audience, target market and competitors' customer bases. Listen to this article: Simply plug in your page or a heap of desired demographic data, including age, gender, location, interests, finances, employment, income, family structure, purchase behavior and more. Here are some ways to tap into this data to optimize Facebook posts for your audience, increasing organic reach and engagement without advertising. #1: Use Lifestyle Data to Create Personas The Lifestyle data in Audience Insights creates mini-personas based on demographic data, purchase behavior, brand affinity and interests. Though the personas are rather broad, they lay the foundation for a comprehensive picture of who your audience is. The Apple Pie Families lifestyle persona comprises 7% of the U.S. Facebook audience over age 18. Facebook defines this persona as "upper-middle class couples with school-age children . . . homeowners, often minivan drivers and avid radio listeners." From this snippet of information, you can picture the lives of this audience. You can envision parents driving their children to school in the morning, listening to the radio. After family dinners, the children retreat to their rooms to do their homework on weeknights. You can speculate these are parents who are highly present in their children's lives. They are involved, informed, and in some ways, defined by their status as parents. So how does this information translate into writing posts that will capture this audience's attention and motivate them to act? You do it on their terms. Consider what is likely on their minds right now, and how your brand can assist in quelling their anxieties and make their life better overall. When it comes to audience personas, it's all about framing. Say you're running a promotion. Could you adjust the timeframe and the scope of the promotion to frame it as a back-to-school campaign? Or more broadly, how could the campaign speak to the everyday joys and challenges of parenthood? For example, the largest Facebook audience segment for Kraft Foods is Apple Pie Families. In this August post the company includes a link to kid-friendly recipes. Understanding that at the time, a large segment of the audience was likely focused on sending the kids back to school, Kraft Foods adjusted their content not only to grab their audience's attention, but also to provide information people could put into action. #2: Gauge Interests and Affiliations With Page Likes You can learn a lot about an audience segment based on the Facebook pages they like. Think of this information less like a report on other businesses and more like a key interest breakdown. The Page Likes section of Facebook Audience Insights is comprised of the top pages liked in each category and the pages most likely to be relevant to your audience. This combined data helps you continue piecing together a comprehensive persona. Page Likes let you see insight into what your audience's political affiliations are, which media outlets they follow, where they shop, what organizations they support, what apps they use and more. From a macro perspective, study this data to get into the heads of your audience. Add to the picture you started to form from Lifestyle data. What do these people talk about with their friends? How do they spend their spare time? What issues do they care about?

SearchCap: SEO content audits, a search marketer’s view of Facebook & a link study

by Amy Gesenhues @ SearchCap: Daily Search Engine News Recap

Below is what happened in search today, as reported on Search Engine Land and from other places across the web.

The post SearchCap: SEO content audits, a search marketer’s view of Facebook & a link study appeared first on Search Engine Land.

How to Measure Your LinkedIn Activities

How to Measure Your LinkedIn Activities

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is social selling part of your LinkedIn marketing strategy? Do you know how to measure and track your efforts? LinkedIn gives businesses a number of metrics for tracking the effectiveness of their marketing throughout the selling process. In this article, you'll discover how to measure and track the effectiveness of your social selling on LinkedIn. Listen to this article: What Is Social Selling? Social selling is the process of developing and building relationships via social networks by providing valuable content to your target audience. Ideally, this occurs at each stage of the buyer's journey, which are specific points buyers go through to make a purchasing decision. Those three stages are awareness, consideration, and decision-making. Here's how you can measure your success at reaching prospects at each of these stages. #1: Monitor Awareness Metrics With LinkedIn, you can monitor several short-term results of your social selling efforts, such as an increase in your number of personal connections, content shares and likes, and follower engagement with your company page and showcase pages. These indicate increased awareness and visibility of your business. A great strategy is to include employees in your social selling process, which will increase the likelihood that potential customers will learn about you and eventually follow your LinkedIn company and showcase pages. Number of Connections It's easy to track the number of LinkedIn connections you and your employees have, which provides a meaningful data point for your long-term social selling efforts. Why does this data point matter? Let's say that 30 of your employees are part of your LinkedIn employee engagement program, and they actively share and promote company-related content and information. Assuming that each employee has an average of 200 connections, this means you could potentially have 6,000 people viewing and engaging with content related to your company. If you can get your employees to share content authentically, it'll have a bigger impact because humans want to connect with humans within their trusted networks. By leveraging this human network, you can harness the ripple effect. Content Shares and Likes Implementing a sophisticated content marketing plan is a huge component of your social selling strategy. You need to develop a focused content roadmap around your target audience. A great way to get started is to do a content gap analysis to see what pieces are currently missing from your existing content. Develop a team-based content calendar to ensure that your team shares high-quality content on a regular basis, either by publishing articles or sharing status updates. Eventually, that content gets served to their personal connections. In return, your employees' connections may end up following your LinkedIn company and showcase pages. You can then monitor and track the number of times people share, like, or comment on company-related status updates. This will give you a clear picture of which content resonates with them. As an administrator of your company's LinkedIn page, you can access your page's analytics to see which topics people gravitate towards and what topics you can phase out. In the example below, the last status update reached 529 people. Five people clicked on the post and also interacted with it, resulting in an overall engagement level of 1.89%. To boost your inbound marketing efforts, feed this information back into your search engine optimization strategy. Number of Followers Who Find and Engage With Your LinkedIn Company and Showcase Pages One of the goals of having your employees share company-related content via their personal LinkedIn profiles is to grow the follower base of your LinkedIn company page and showcase pages. This strategy boosts the visibility of your digital assets, and you'll be able to reach entirely new audiences you didn't have access to a...

How Content Can Help You Build a Loyal Following

How Content Can Help You Build a Loyal Following

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you trying to build an engaged loyal following that loves you and your business? Have you tried to use video, podcasting or social media to build engagement? I explore these questions with Pat Flynn for our new Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This New Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a brand-new show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Pat Flynn, founder of Smart Passive Income. Pat shares insights into his tactics and strategies and how social media content contributes to the success of his business. You'll learn how to create content to publish on different social media platforms to connect to a large audience. And you'll discover the techniques to use to build a loyal fan base. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Social Media Content for Business The business strategy behind Smart Passive Income  Pat explains how content plays a key role in his business. You'll learn why his focus is to provide valuable content for those looking for information. You'll hear how you can do this when you share content based on your own experiences. Pat shares the results his business has had from his different content platforms: blog, video and podcast. Listen to the show to discover Pat's personal stories behind his successful business. How to make a personal connection with your audience Pat talks about the different ways he shares personal information about himself to connect with his audience and how he incorporates this into his business content. Pat shares the reason why he gives his audience strategic insights into his personal story. Pat shares how he connects with his audience on Facebook. You'll find out the strategy behind the different components of Pat's Facebook page photo and how this strategy helps him connect with his audience. People like to connect with people. You'll pick up some useful tips on how to build affinity online. Listen to the show to discover why Pat leverages his "trifecta" content creation strategy (blogging, video and podcasting) to connect with a wide audience. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=bJIJ_6G9Z84 Pat's video strategy YouTube is the #2 search engine in the world. Pat explains how he uses videos to respond to questions from his audience. Pat explains how this strategy works well for his business and drives traffic back to his website. Listen to the show to find out how Pat intentionally uses keywords in his videos for great results. Pat's blogging strategy Pat blogs three times a week. He publishes content based on his own experiences and explains what he does wrong, what he does right and the results he gets. He's very transparent with all of the different processes. Pat talks about the Niche Site Duel, where he was challenged to build a website from scratch. Pat publicly displayed the process and how it reached #1 in Google. Pat explains the role email marketing plays in his business model and why it's crucial for business. You'll discover why email is still the best tool to use to connect with people in a direct and personal way. Listen to the show to discover insights into the business strategies behind Pat's successful blog. Pat's podcasting strategy You'll discover how Pat was surprised by the extent that podcasting helps his brand. Learn how Pat discovered that 20% of his readers find his website through his podcasts. Find out how to train your podcast audience to get to your blog with calls to action in your podcast. Pat uses the Pretty Link Pro plugin and domain names for easy redirect URLs to get podcast listeners to come to his site.

5 Tips for Better Facebook Live Broadcasts

5 Tips for Better Facebook Live Broadcasts

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Thinking of going live on Facebook? Wondering how to get the most out of your Facebook Live broadcast? With Facebook Live, you can show your expertise in real time, take people behind the scenes, and much more. In this article, you'll discover five tips to succeed with your next Facebook Live broadcast. Listen to this article: #1: Promote Before You Broadcast Facebook Live allows you to target your personal network, the fans of a business page (if you're an admin), a group, or an event. If you can't find a group or event to meet your needs, consider starting one. It's important to let your audience know about your upcoming live video with news feed posts. Experiment with images and perhaps even a short video to tell them about the bigger video to come. If your live video is important enough, you can boost your announcement posts as paid Facebook ads. Then, remind your audience again right before you go live. For example, here's how NASA Earth promotes upcoming live videos in their news feed and encourages interactions. Don't forget about the world outside of Facebook. Invite your blog readers, email subscribers, and followers from other networks. Include a link to your account, business page, group, or event. #2: Prepare and Practice Before you broadcast your live video, you need to do some preparation to ensure that viewers will be able to hear you clearly without distraction, follow your future broadcasts, and participate. Set Up Your Location Here are some tips for optimizing the location and setup for your live video: Try to minimize background and ambient noise. While users will expect the production quality to be a bit raw and unrehearsed, be sure that they can see and hear you without undue distractions. Decide whether to hold the phone yourself or use some type of mount. You could also delegate the job to a co-worker. For the live video, you can use either the front- or rear-facing camera. Choose a spot that has a strong broadband connection. Facebook recommends that live videos last at least 10 minutes, but you can go as long as 90 minutes. Tip: Forward your calls to avoid distractions during your broadcast. Set a Policy for Instant Feedback Two new Facebook Live features allow viewers to provide feedback and ask you questions during the broadcast. They can click on the same six emoji reactions that replaced the simple like back in February. These will appear for a few seconds onscreen; Facebook compares them to applause and boos. Users can also comment during the video, so you should decide in advance how and when you will acknowledge your audience. Facebook recommends that you address commenters by name and make it clear how much you appreciate their involvement. If you need to block a user, click on the profile picture next to their comment and select Block. Note that when the video is replayed, the comments will appear at the same point they did during the live event. Do a Practice Video Before you use Facebook Live for the first time, consider doing a practice run. To get all of the practice time you need, set Facebook's Who Should See This? privacy setting to Only Me. You'll see the live video exactly as it will appear, but no one else will. If you're having trouble changing the privacy setting from the mobile app, open your desktop or laptop and set your preferences at Facebook.com. Your changes will be integrated automatically by the app. Remember, Facebook doesn't allow business pages to post to a group or event, so you'll need to use a personal account in those instances. You can remind your audience about your company association in posts and during the video. To launch your live video, open the Facebook app and go to the personal, business, group, or event page that you want to target. Tap to start a new post and look for the Live icon at the bottom of the screen. In Android,

6 Tips for Pinterest Marketing in Just Minutes a Day

6 Tips for Pinterest Marketing in Just Minutes a Day

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is your Pinterest marketing taking too much time? Are you ready for a better Pinterest marketing plan? Time-saving Pinterest marketing tactics can deliver more results with less effort. In this article you'll discover six tactics to help you market on Pinterest in minutes a day. Listen to this article: Get Started on Pinterest If you haven't already done so, set up your business on Pinterest. It's easy to get started. First, sign up for a Pinterest business account and complete your profile. Be sure to upload the proper profile image. Then verify your website with your Pinterest account. Next, add Pin It and Follow buttons, as well as widgets, to your website. Plus, enable rich pins, depending on your content type. Once this is done, you're ready to get moving on your Pinterest marketing. Here are six tactics to manage your time and be more productive on Pinterest. #1: Repin for a Few Minutes Each Day Take around three minutes each day to curate and repin to your Pinterest boards. Enter keywords for your niche or industry in Pinterest search. Based on your initial search, Pinterest will offer additional search term suggestions. Just click on any of the words under the search bar to add them. This will refresh the search, giving you new possible content, associated with the extra keyword, to repin. You'll easily find the best content to share. To get noticed on Pinterest, you need to pin and repin regularly. Just check the links on any pins to make sure they're active and relevant before you share them. If you spend 3 minutes a day (15 minutes a week) repinning, you will increase the number of repins on your boards significantly. Let's say you have 10 boards. Target 3 boards and repin 2 pins on each one every weekday. That's 6 pins a day and 30 pins a week. Time investment: 15 minutes a week. #2: Schedule Pins to Publish on Weekends To keep your Pinterest account active on the weekend, schedule pins. I recommend you do this for five minutes on Fridays, after you post your daily pins. Choose a scheduling tool for Pinterest such as Viralwoot, Tailwind or Buffer to post images at any time. I use Tailwind, which allows me to schedule pins on the platform or through a browser extension. Schedule at least six pins over two or three different boards to post throughout the weekend. #3: Follow Relevant Pinners For successful Pinterest marketing, you must follow pinners in your niche. You can find them with Pinterest search. Follow three to five new pinners every day. However, don't just follow anyone. Once you find potential pinners to follow, review their profiles and check their Pinterest activities to see if they'll add value to your Pinterest marketing. Spend 5 minutes a day searching for new pinners to follow, which totals 25 minutes a week. #4: Comment on a Pin a Day Keep your eyes open for relevant pins on which you can offer input. Sure, you can like as many pins as you want. However, if a pin inspires you, add something to the conversation. Aim for one comment a day. Your comments can be as short or as long as you'd like. Just make sure your comment is pertinent and not self-promotional. If you have newfound data to support your comment, that's great thing to add. I often comment on others' pins and leave a link to other content. This way, I add value to the pin by providing extra resources. Take 3 minutes a day to post one value-added comment, which is 15 minutes a week devoted to commenting. #5: Create Pinterest Images in Batches Create images of your own to pin to your Pinterest boards. These can be images to go along with blog posts or stand-alone graphics. Pinterest layout supports taller images than any other formats. Ideal size for a pin is 735 x 1102 pixels. There are tools such as Canva to help you create pins quickly and easily. For example, on Canva select the default Pinterest graphics layout and create your design.

What is Off-Site SEO?

by Gaetano Pizzi @ AudiologyDesign » Search Engine Optimization

Many business owners aspiring for high search engine placement fail to realize that the most important aspects of optimizing their website actually takes place off site. I know this may...

The post What is Off-Site SEO? appeared first on AudiologyDesign.

Facebook Messenger Marketing: What Marketers Need to Know

Facebook Messenger Marketing: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to communicate with your customers via Facebook Messenger? Wondering how Facebook Messenger bots and Messenger ads can help? To explore this topic, I interview Molly Pittman. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Molly Pittman, the vice president of marketing at DigitalMarketer. She specializes in customer acquisition and teaches regularly for DigitalMarketer Engage, which is the company's membership community. You'll discover how businesses can benefit from integrating Facebook Messenger features into their marketing. Molly shares use cases for Facebook Messenger marketing. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Messenger Marketing Why Consider Messenger Ads? As soon as Facebook Messenger ads became available in November 2016, Molly started experimenting with them. Molly says she's excited about Facebook Messenger ads because they're not just a new interface element or feature. Facebook Messenger ads are a whole new channel. Molly believes the value of Facebook Messenger ads lies in the app's popularity and convenience. More than one billion people communicate via Facebook Messenger. Because that's where people are having conversations with friends, family, colleagues, or whomever, Molly believes businesses should be connecting with their customers via Facebook Messenger, too. The app's popularity makes Facebook Messenger a good place to buy ads, connect with prospects, and talk to customers. Molly says that DigitalMarketer's initial tests have shown good results. The open rate and consumption are really high. Molly has seen the benefit from the consumer's standpoint, too. A few months ago, as Molly was driving in Austin, she saw a new apartment complex being built. Molly was interested, so she went to the company's Facebook page and contacted them through their Message Us button. They responded almost instantaneously. Every step of her communication with the company was done through Facebook Messenger. I ask Molly if she believes Facebook Messenger will replace email. Molly responds that email will likely always be a powerful tool for marketers, certainly for the next five years. However, she says Facebook Messenger isn't necessarily a replacement but is the mode of communication most similar to email. In some aspects, Messenger is better than email, she continues, because people tend to respond instantaneously on Messenger, whereas people don't feel compelled to respond to emails right away. Listen to the show to hear Molly and I discuss our predictions for the future of Facebook Messenger. The Types of Messenger Ads Molly explains the two types of Facebook Messenger ads. The first one is called a destination ad because when you set it up, you choose Facebook Messenger as the destination (as opposed to your website). Like a regular ad, a destination ad appears in the news feed and can display a video, carousel, or image. When someone clicks the ad, a message to your Facebook page opens in Facebook Messenger and you can begin a conversation. For example, the first test Molly ran was a simple destination ad that said, "Do you have questions about how DigitalMarketer can help grow your business? We'd love to chat." When someone clicked the ad, a Facebook Messenger window opened where the person could type his or her message to DigitalMarketer. Molly says you can target anyone with destination ads, such as your custom audiences and interests. The opportunities are endless. The other type is a sponsored message, which is more like an email.

Small Businesses Struggle to Prove Facebook ROI: New Research

Small Businesses Struggle to Prove Facebook ROI: New Research

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you using Facebook to acquire customers for your small business? Do you struggle to measure the return on your social media marketing investment? Despite a lack of concrete proof of sales, small businesses are devoting time and dollars to Facebook marketing. In this article you'll discover findings from recent studies focused on Facebook marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Most Small Businesses Don't See a Return From Their Social Media Efforts In April 2015, small business directory Manta surveyed 540 small business owners for their insights on social media return on investment (ROI). Fifty-nine percent report that they did not see ROI from their social media activities. Because the vast majority of small businesses puts most, if not the entire, social media budget into Facebook, this article focuses on that channel. Of the remaining 41% reporting that they did see returns, 17% received less than $100, and 57% received less than $1,000 for their energy and budget. One-third of that 41% (63 individuals) report outearning their social media marketing spend by more than $2,000. Social Media Examiner's 2015 Social Media Marketing Industry Report findings echo those in the Manta study. When the team asked 3,720 marketers whether their Facebook marketing is effective (which we can interpret as driving return to some extent), only 45% reported that it is. (Read here about how 60% of the respondents for the report were small business owners or executives. They either worked in companies with 2 to 10 employees or self-identified as solopreneurs.) The report also reveals that just 33% of the self-employed described Facebook marketing efforts as effective. Larger businesses have a slightly higher regard for their Facebook marketing efforts, with 50% pleased with their Facebook returns. B2C marketers also have a more positive take than B2B, with 51% of B2C marketers finding Facebook effective, compared to just 36% of B2B respondents. Key Takeaways: The significant 35% of respondents who are uncertain about whether their Facebook presence helps their business is telling. With barely enough time to keep up their Facebook page, small businesses typically lack the time and resources to gather the data needed to determine whether their Facebook efforts work. Gathering data requires that either the business owner or staff member learns or understands Google Analytics and Facebook Insights. Both of these tools require time and effort. Further, as Facebook's former Global Head of SMB Marketing Chris Luo explains in his March 2015 Fast Company article, effective Facebook advertising is moving away from the simple updates and boosting that small businesses could master easily: "Facebook has also introduced new, more sophisticated, advertising tools to directly target any user on Facebook in their newsfeed, but for the most part, these tools are used by savvy direct marketers at mid-sized or larger companies and not small businesses." #2: Small Businesses Are Reluctant to Invest Money in Social Media Small business owners are indicating their suspicion of social media marketing with their dollars. The Manta study mentioned above found that 47% of respondents invest less than $100 per month, and 40% spend between $100 and $1,000 monthly. Low spending numbers like these are surprising, given the hype Facebook marketing receives in the media. In a seeming contradiction, a recent poll of 547 small- and medium-sized business owners conducted by BIA/Kelsey and reported in The Wall Street Journal claims that social media marketing gets the majority of small businesses' ad budgets at 21.4% of total dollars. Further investigation, however, reveals that small businesses don't spend very much on marketing at all. A January 2015 BrightLocal survey of 736 small businesses revealed that 70% spend $500 or less per month on marketing. Fifty percent spend less than $300 per month.

How to Gaff a Tuna

How to Gaff a Tuna

by @ How to of the Day

In any fishing trip where you’re catching large fish (such as grouper, marlin, tuna, or swordfish), gaffing is the final step which allows you to bring the fish on board. When gaffing a large fish, you’ll impale the fish with a large stick tipped with a substantial hook (the gaff) and swing the fish onboard. Gaff placement is important: an improperly performed gaff job could result in the tuna escaping from the hook you’ve caught it with.

Proper On-Site SEO for Your Website

by Gaetano Pizzi @ AudiologyDesign » Search Engine Optimization

Search Engine Optimization can be broken down into two types of SEO techniques that ultimately determine where you stand with the search engines. There is On-Site SEO and Off-Site SEO....

The post Proper On-Site SEO for Your Website appeared first on AudiologyDesign.

Launching Products: Lessons From Mistakes and Pushing Boundaries

Launching Products: Lessons From Mistakes and Pushing Boundaries

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Thinking of launching a product, service or even a company? Want ideas of what to do and what not to do? In this special episode, we're going to talk about how to push the boundaries when you launch. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. We're recording literally days prior to Social Media Marketing World 2015. I'm joined by Leslie Samuel, one of our senior managers who I've been working with since the fall. We're going to explore how to launch products and learn lessons from experience and a lot of mistakes. You'll get a behind-the-scenes look at what we do at Social Media Examiner to launch a product. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Launching Products My experience launching As an entrepreneur for the last 19 years, I'm constantly reinventing myself and launching new products. In the last five and a half years or so, I have launched the Social Media Success Summit, Social Media Examiner, the Facebook Success Summit, the Small Biz Success Summit, the Content Marketing Success Summit, our now defunct networking clubs, this podcast, Social Media Marketing World, the Social Media Examiner Show, My Kids' Adventures, the Parenting Adventures podcast, my book Launch and more. Every time we launch something, it’s a completely new experience. Listen to the show to hear what I learned when I worked at Sharper Image. Lessons from failed launches I'll share what happened with My Kids' Adventures. In July 2013 we launched a website designed to help busy parents do fun activities with their kids. I shut it down a year and a couple months later. I learned when you launch something in a space that you do not have a lot of experience in, you need to do more research than I did. My research process prior to launching My Kids' Adventures included going to the library and to book stores and identifying popular blogs. While we made assumptions based on what we saw everyone else doing, we didn’t test whether our target audience (busy, working professionals) had the time to read, consume, do and share our content, even though they may have had the desire to do so. Ways to test these assumptions would have been to go to trade shows attended by my target audience and talk to them or do a joint survey with a big website in that space to gather data. One thing I learned was sometimes it’s better to go deep in a space where you are already successful than to try to go wide into a space where you don’t know anything. There are so many niches where people have developed some success. They hear the word pivot and decide to dive into something new. Instead of doing that, the better thing to do is figure out something new that still fits with your existing audience. The hardest thing in the world is to create an audience. And you can’t launch a product if you do not have an audience. Listen to the show to learn the biggest mistake I made when I launched My Kids' Adventures.  The Phases of a Product Launch The research and definition phase Whenever I get a new idea for a product, it starts with a spark in my brain. One of the first things I do is talk through my idea with people I trust to see whether or not my vision is crazy. I have these crazy ideas about every two months, and the vast majority of them never turn into anything. After talking to a lot of people, and justifying why I thought this newest venture would be successful for busy marketers, I came up with a list of assumptions to test. Last fall, I put together a readers’ survey.

How to Use Facebook Ads to Boost Your Best Content

How to Use Facebook Ads to Boost Your Best Content

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Facebook ads? Have you considered creating Facebook ads from your top-performing organic posts? To explore how to identify and boost your best Facebook content, I interview Larry Kim. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Larry Kim, the founder and chief technology officer for WordStream. He's a frequent blogger, pay-per-click expert, and social advertising ninja. Larry explains how to improve the performance of your best content with Facebook advertising. You'll discover how to budget for Facebook ads. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: How to Use Facebook Ads to Boost Your Best Content Larry's Backstory Larry's company, WordStream, does search engine and social media advertising, and Larry believes that it's important for businesses to do both types. For instance, B2B software companies build new features, functions, and solutions that nobody is searching for yet. However, with social ads, these businesses can target people who are likely to buy their software based on demographics, interests, or behaviors. Unlike an individual advertiser who has data about only one business, Larry is able to spot trends and patterns in online advertising because WordStream manages approximately $1 billion of ad spending across Facebook, Bing, and Google and runs thousands of campaigns for different clients. WordStream analyzes all of these campaigns to figure out data such as the typical cost per click and typical engagement rates. Listen to the show to discover the percentage of WordStream's clients using Facebook advertising. How Algorithms Work To understand the algorithms, Larry says it's important to think about the context in which your ad appears. (Our conversation focuses on Facebook, but Larry says the same is true for ads on Twitter and other social media platforms.) When you sponsor or promote a post, you're one of thousands or even millions of companies going after the same audience. Larry explains that the Facebook algorithm is designed to handle that volume in a way that keeps Facebook engaging for users so they come back. To determine which posts to show users and how much to charge the advertiser, Larry believes that the algorithm looks at many different factors, but the main one is engagement (clicks, likes, comments, or shares). A post with low engagement has an engagement rate of 1% to 2%. (Only 1 or 2 people out of 100 engage with the post.) A high-engagement post has a rate of 10% to 15%, and the average is around 2.5% to 3%. Larry emphasizes that Facebook doesn't want users' news feeds filled with ridiculous updates that no one cares about. A company trying to promote garbage content with low engagement rates will be dinged with very few ad impressions. The ad might not even be shown. If the ad does show, the click-through rate will be expensive (a few dollars per click versus a few cents). The reverse is also true. Facebook rewards companies that promote interesting content by showing their ads and charging only pennies per click. Listen to the show to hear Larry's thoughts about how engaging ad content needs to be compared to organic content. Unicorns Because algorithms reward engaging content, Larry believes that the winning advertising strategy is simple: promote your unicorns. These outlier posts do spectacularly well. They get three to five times more traffic than the average post and are among the top 1% to 3% of your most engaging content. For instance, a unicorn post might have a 20% engagement rate,

5 Ways to Find More Time to Blog

5 Ways to Find More Time to Blog

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is there a blogger inside you, waiting to emerge? Need tips for producing more content? Writing quality content will help you attract more customers and increase your visibility. In this article, you'll discover five ways to find more time to blog. #1: Commit to a Niche When you're committed to a particular niche, it's easier to write for the audience you want to attract because you've already conducted extensive research on most of the topics they're interested in. An added bonus is to use their evolving interests to point you toward topics you haven't considered. If you notice that your target buyers are looking for advice you know nothing about, you know where to start expanding your knowledge. Listen to this article: For example, say you're selling artistic pieces for home decoration. You don't necessarily know everything about interior design, but your audience would appreciate advice in that area. In that case, you can research it. And if you can base the tips and arguments you share on your actual experience, the articles will be much more believable and your readers will trust you more. #2: Limit Your Time on Distracting Sites If you blog for business, you spend a lot of time online. You need to be aware of all of the emerging trends in your niche, and monitor the behavior and interests of your target audience. You also likely frequent Reddit, Facebook, and other sites to get inspiration for new blog articles. How often do you plan to spend only five minutes on these sites, only to lose track of the time? That's why you need the Chrome plugin StayFocusd. You can use StayFocusd to prevent you from spending too much time on distracting websites. It's easy to install and you can customize the settings for your own preferences. First, set the days you want StayFocusd to monitor. Then, decide how much time to give yourself for browsing. Finally, set a list of the sites you want the tool to block for you. When you reach your time limit, you'll get an eye-opening message that prompts you to get back to work. #3: Plan Your Articles With Mind Maps When you find inspiration for an article, your first instinct is to sit down and write that piece as soon as possible. Wait! Once you get the initial idea for the post, you should plan the structure of your article. If you take the time to develop an outline, you'll significantly speed up the writing stage. You can use an online mind mapping tool such as MindMup to create your outlines. Start with a unique and captivating headline, and then make notes for your intro. Finally, consider the main points you'll cover and create subheads for each of the different paragraphs you're going to write. Use the outline as a guide, and remember that it's flexible. You can make adjustments to the outline as you work as long as you maintain a focused thread in your article. #4: Use Tools to Curate Inspiring Content Inspiration is everywhere online, and it can be difficult to keep track of and remember it all. That's where a tool such as Evernote or Pinterest comes in. For example, you can pin all of the interesting online sources you encounter to themed inspiration boards. As your boards are populated with pins, look for a way to connect those pieces of inspiration into a complete article. #5: Source Quotes From Industry Research and Influencers When you support your tips and arguments with quotes from respected research resources and industry experts, you not only increase the value of your content, but also add depth and reliability. Begin your article with a great quote to drive attention to the problems and solutions you're writing about. Then, in each paragraph, use a few short quotes to corroborate your points. Remember, you'll need to credit each author and source you quote. Make sure you include proper attribution within the article. In Conclusion Many social media marketers and business owners get focused...

The Priousol Way Of Search Engine Optimization Guidelines

by Administrator @ PG Webs » Search Engine Optimization

What is Search engine marketing? Search Program Optimization or possibly even longer called all the SEO certainly is the course whereby your blog undergoes redevelopment, carefully selecting the perfect keywords to make sure you prove a mark on the major search engines. It is normally where subsequently after SEO that an internet site is posted. [...]

Should Your Brand Focus Primarily on SEO or Social Media? Learn the Pros and Cons of Each

by Brian Honigman @ Digital Current

Considering SEO or social media for your business? Discover the pros and cons of each to determine what will work best for you. It’s clear SEO and social media are beneficial for similar and distinct reasons, but most brand teams don’t have the capabilities to be active on every medium in a significant way. With […]

The post Should Your Brand Focus Primarily on SEO or Social Media? Learn the Pros and Cons of Each appeared first on Digital Current.

3 Tools That Speed Influencer Outreach

3 Tools That Speed Influencer Outreach

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you trying to connect with influencers? Looking for ways to streamline the process? You can make your influencer outreach more efficient and save yourself time by combining three free tools. In this article you'll discover how to automate your influencer outreach with BuzzSumo, Buffer, and Twitter. Listen to this article: #1: Identify Influencers Who Shared Similar Content The first step is to source popular posts related to the topic you're interested in promoting. Let's use this article as the topic example. Go to BuzzSumo.com and type in keywords related to your blog post. For example, the results for a search for "influencer outreach" returned similar articles. After you find similar posts that are popular, you need to identify key influencers who've shared those posts. Click on the View Links Shared button next to each post and then click Page Authority to sort your list by who has the most influence. Ideally you want to target 10-20 individuals with high authority and a large number of followers. In this example, Brian Dean, SEMrush, and Jon Morrow all have high social authority rank, a large Twitter following, and have shared an article similar to this one. When you reach out to identified influencers who have shared content similar to your own, you raise the chance they'll share your article. Plus their amplification of your content can drive huge exposure for your blog. To put your best foot forward, you'll want to start engaging and interacting with the influencers you choose a few weeks before you reach out to them on Twitter. Add your influencers to a Twitter list so you can easily monitor and engage with them on a daily basis. To put yourself on their radar, make an effort to retweet, like, quote, and spark conversations with each of your influencers. #2: Create and Schedule Automated Tweets to Influencers Once you're on the influencers' radar, create a two-column spreadsheet with personalized direct tweets to each of them. Make sure each tweet is no more than 143 characters long. To quickly work out the character count for each of your tweets in Excel, use this formula: =Len(enter cell). Your spreadsheet should look something like this (including 10-20 direct tweets). Here are some tweet templates you can adapt for your spreadsheet: [TWITTER HANDLE] Hey [FIRST NAME], I saw you shared [CONTENT CREATORS TWITTER HANDLE + POST TOPIC] post and thought you might like this ☺ [LINK TO YOUR POST] [TWITTER HANDLE] Hey [FIRST NAME], I saw you shared [CONTENT CREATORS TWITTER HANDLE + POST TOPIC] post. I hope you like my own refreshed version ☺ [LINK TO YOUR POST] [TWITTER HANDLE] Hey [FIRST NAME], I saw you shared [CONTENT CREATORS TWITTER HANDLE + POST TOPIC] post and hoped you'd like my take on it ☺ [LINK TO YOUR POST] [TWITTER HANDLE] Hey [FIRST NAME], I saw you shared [CONTENT CREATORS TWITTER HANDLE + POST TOPIC] which inspired this – hope you like it ☺ [LINK TO YOUR POST] Once you've created the spreadsheet, copy the Tweets column into a notepad file and upload it to Bulk Buffer, a free tool you can use to bulk-upload content to your Buffer account. Simply upload the saved notepad file where prompted, select the Twitter account where you want your tweets to upload, and click Send to Buffer. Once your tweets are uploaded, you'll want to space out the scheduled updates in your Buffer account. This will ensure the outreach tweets aren't too frequent and don't appear spammy. To do this, simply go to your Buffer content queue and scroll to each queued post. Then click the posting date to edit the date and time the tweet will publish. It's a good idea to space your outreach tweets for every other day, and ensure you're sharing plenty of content in between. #3: Follow Up Influencers can easily miss your direct tweet due to the volume of messages they receive on a daily basis.

The What and Why of Google Search Console

by Rebecca Gill @ Web Savvy Marketing

Google Search Console is a must have account for owners of blogs and websites. It is critical for SEO because it helps webmasters understand Google’s view of their website or blog. And the great tools inside Google Search Console don’t stop at reporting. Google also provides multiple data points and suggestions for resolving issues you... Read More

The post The What and Why of Google Search Console appeared first on Web Savvy Marketing.

Split Testing: How to Improve Your Site Conversions

Split Testing: How to Improve Your Site Conversions

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you split test the opt-ins on your website? Want to get better results? To learn how to create effective split tests, I interview conversion expert Joanna Wiebe. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Joanna Wiebe, a copywriter, conversion expert and founder of CopyHackers.com--a website designed to help you improve your conversions. She's the author of the Copy Hackers ebook series. Today Joanna will explore how split testing can help improve your email opt-ins and much more. You'll discover how to alter your headlines and buttons to improve your website opt-ins, as well as what tools to use to analyze results. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Split Testing What led Joanna to copywriting and conversions Joanna says she fell into the field of copywriting. After leaving law school, she was looking for her next opportunity. When a friend who worked at an agency said they were looking for a writer, Joanna got the position, along with the title creative writer. (She thought copywriter sounded too boring.) A couple years later, Joanna went over to Intuit (makers of Turbo Tax) as senior copywriter. Once there, she says she finally figured out what copywriting was ... and understood that it was not boring! Joanna explains the difference between a creative writer and a copywriter. A creative writer is a person who is more likely to come up with tag lines and concepts for ads and campaigns. It's someone who abstracts a message from insights. On the other hand, from Joanna's experience a copywriter is more of a scientific writer. Copywriting is not about you. It's about listening to people who are potentially nothing like you to find the right message, she says. According to Joanna, split testing became more readily available eight or nine years ago, and testing tools, like Optimizely, VWO and Omniture (before it was acquired by Adobe), were starting to pop up. So the company started split testing different approaches to solving problems. They would test them using actual data: website visitors or email subscribers helped them test by voting with their clicks or their credit cards. This led Joanna to start Copy Hackers about three years ago. Listen to the show to discover how creativity stifled Joanna in her first position as a writer. The ad at the bottom of Copy Hackers To capture email addresses Joanna uses a solution called Bounce Exchange. They have been experimenting with ways to get people's attention. There’s a little guy in the corner of the website and it says “Click here to get a free guide.” It appears as you’re scrolling down the page. Once you click on it, it gives you the opt-in box. Bounce Exchange is software presented with a service, Joanna explains. For best results, you work with their creative team and they come up with variations. They split tested different content and "The Free 2015 Persuasion Guide" got the best response. Now they are testing different messaging for the guide, as well as ways to get people to opt-in. Listen to the show to learn what other content Joanna tested against the persuasion guide. The exit intent popup Exit intent means when the mouse moves up into a certain range to indicate someone is leaving your website. In this case, when the Copy Hackers' exit intent box appears, readers are given the choice. “Yes, get the free guide” or “No, I reject the persuasion guide.” Joanna says this king of messaging is about having your audience make a decision between a choice and a consequence.

Are Online Directories Still Relevant to Your SEO Strategy?

by Todd Hooge @

About 20 years ago, as the Internet was really taking off, businesses flocked to the idea of having a website. And as more and more businesses got on board, the Internet got crowded - fast. There became a desperate need for a way to catalog all of the information that was being published at breakneck speed. Search engines worked fine, but they weren’t great. They weren’t robust enough, and websites weren’t detailed enough. Things were still in their infancy. Enter the online business directory.

The post Are Online Directories Still Relevant to Your SEO Strategy? appeared first on .

6 Video Tools to Ignite Your Social Marketing

6 Video Tools to Ignite Your Social Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to bring more pop to your social media marketing? Looking for video tools to help? The right tools make it easy to create engaging video content. In this article, you'll discover six tools to create and improve your social media videos. Listen to this article: #1: Animoto to Create Video Compilations Animoto allows you to create professional-quality videos with pictures and video clips. There are both free and paid versions of Animoto. Pricing plans range from $8 a month for personal use to $34 a month for businesses. Here's how to get started with Animoto. First, sign up for a free account. You can create your free account with your Facebook profile or with your email address. Then click the Create button to start your Animoto project. Next, choose a style to customize the look and feel of your video. Click on the style template preview to see what your video would look like with that style. Now you're ready to add photos, video clips, and music. Animoto accepts photo and video uploads from your computer, smartphone, or other sources including Facebook, Dropbox, and Photobucket. You can add your own song or select one from Animoto's music catalog. Tracks available include instrumentals and songs. Now you'll want to personalize your video in Settings. Be sure to add a custom thumbnail, video title, and description for your video. All of this information helps with search engine optimization. When you're finished, you can preview your work. Click the Preview Video button to see what your video looks like. If you want to make changes, close this window and make any required edits. Finally, you're ready to produce your video. To do this, click Produce. Expert Tip: If you decide to choose music from another source (such as SoundCloud or YouTube), ensure you have full rights. You may be breaching copyright laws if you don't fully check the music ownership and third-party sharing rights. #2: Legend to Build Custom GIFs GIFs are images with movement. While there are apps that offer premade GIFs, consider customizing your own. This personalizes your brand and allows you to create unique content. Legend is a smartphone app that allows you to create GIFs by combining text, flash, and images. You can download Legend from Google Play or the App Store. Here's how to use Legend to create your own branded GIFs. First, type your text. You have 100 characters to work with. Next, choose a photo. You can take a photo using the camera on your phone, choose a photo from your photo library, or select a photo from Flickr. Now it's time to select your animation style. There are 18 variations to choose from, six on each screen. When you choose your color palette, it changes the color of your photo and your text. Then tap GIF to convert your work into a GIF and tap More to save it to your camera roll. You can share your animated GIF on Instagram, WhatsApp, or in a text message from the Legend app. You can also share it directly from the app to other social networks if you've already downloaded the apps to your smartphone. Expert Tip: Make Legend GIFs in bulk and save them to your camera roll to share later. #3: Relay for Snapchat Video Geofilters Relay is a graphic design and publishing tool for people who aren't graphic designers. You can use Relay to design your own customized Snapchat geofilters, which you overlay on your videos. Geofilters act as a personal branding tactic for your Snapchat stories, which lead to greater engagement. Relay provides a Snapchat geofilter template layout of 1080 x 1920 pixels. You can sign up for a free Relay account and try out a demo for 14 days. For pro features, it will cost you $12 per month or $96 per year. Paying for the whole year up front gives you four months free. Here's how to create a custom geofilter for Snapchat using Relay. After you create a Relay account,

SearchCap: AdWords AMP landing pages, Google & Apple tracking & SEO mistakes

by Barry Schwartz @ SearchCap: Daily Search Engine News Recap

Below is what happened in search today, as reported on and from other places across the web.

The post SearchCap: AdWords AMP landing pages, Google & Apple tracking & SEO mistakes appeared first on Search Engine Land.

How to Create Social Media Videos on a Budget

How to Create Social Media Videos on a Budget

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to add video to your social media content mix? Looking for ways to keep production costs low? Creating a video doesn't have to cost you hundreds of thousands of dollars in high-end production tactics like live actors or 3-D renderings. In this article you'll discover how to create and promote social media video on a budget. Listen to this article: #1: Decide What to Feature in Your Video Here are four ways you can create great video content without breaking the bank. Repurpose User-Generated Content A great example of repurposing user-generated content for a video comes from Coca-Cola, which leveraged their "Share-a-Coke" campaign into big corporate success. To incorporate this strategy in your own marketing, encourage your audience to tell their own stories on social channels like YouTube and Facebook using your campaign hashtag (which was #ShareACoke in the Coca-Cola campaign). You can then aggregate memorable content and repurpose it into broadcast-worthy video spots. While Coke launched its campaign around the Share-A-Coke idea, the soft drink giant tracked and grew their global efforts through the aforementioned hashtags. As a marketer, you can leverage readily available user-generated content and create a winning campaign even without a Coca-Cola-sized budget. Collect Royalty-Free Content The first step is to determine whether there is enough free content about your subject available online (the definition of "free" is content with no royalties). Resources like Flickr and YouTube are great places to start this research. If you want to do a viral video about lamps, for example, do a keyword search on Flickr for "lamps" and see how many compelling images you can find about the topic. Create Your Own Content If you feel that you don't have enough content available, you may need to simply grab an iPhone and snap your own pictures or record short video snippets. Marketing consultant and social media coach Mark Schaefer spoke recently on how he worked with a small family-owned winery in France and struck gold with a simple video called "How to Open a Bottle of Wine Without a Corkscrew." The video, without any paid media behind it, generated over 10 million views and catapulted the winery to stardom. One fascinating postscript here is that this video was amazingly successful when 221 other videos posted didn't achieve quite the same notoriety. Persistence is key here. Record Others Taco Bell generated 150,000 views on YouTube by simply recognizing a trending hashtag called "Drawing My Life" and then filming an artist as he drew simple thoughts about the brand. While Taco Bell certainly has the budget and the creative chops to create its own spots, hashtags, and launch campaigns, it's staggering to note how easily the fast-food chain generated buzz just by riding the coattails of another trend. Regardless of the type of video content you choose, the trick is to keep it simple. The reality of user-generated content or even self-generated content is that you immediately cut out thousands, if not millions, of dollars in cost. Additionally, from a branding perspective, you add a degree of authenticity to your voice by placing a true image of your customer in front of other customers. #2: Create Your Video So Taco Bell pulled off a great video with very little cost. The question is: How can you do it? Creating content that people actually want to see doesn't have to be difficult. If you create compelling content, users will engage with it in the form of shares, likes, comments, and even direct lead creation. You don't need extensive video editing skills, but those always help. You can use affordable editing tools like Adobe Premiere Pro to edit and build complex storyboards. If you're just getting started and don't want to invest in anything, you can use YouTube's free and quick Creator Studio,

5 Creative Ways to Grow Your Email List

5 Creative Ways to Grow Your Email List

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want to grow your email list? Got a blog? New tools and placement options have made it easier than ever to create an offer that compels blog visitors to share their email address with you. In this article you'll discover five unique ways to grow your email list from your blog readers. Listen to this article: #1: Put Your Best Offer on Your Homepage To encourage email signups, show the value of being an email subscriber on the homepage of your blog. The main focus should be on your opt-in box. Place the links to other areas of your site below the fold, so readers won't see them unless they scroll down the page. Bluewire Media collects email addresses directly from their main page. Below, they offer visitors free marketing templates in addition to news and updates delivered to their inbox. #2: Use a Feature Box to Present Lead Magnets If you don't have a custom homepage or don't have the resources to redesign your current homepage, a feature box might be a good option for you. A well-designed feature box exchanges your lead magnet for new email addresses. You typically place the feature box above the fold of your page so it's immediately visible to users. Unlike entry pop-ups, feature boxes don't interrupt visitors from scrolling down the page and browsing your blog content. They can either take your bonus or scroll down the page. The feature box at DIYthemes increased the blog's subscription rate by 51.7%. Feature boxes convert well even if they're subscription-only and don't offer a lead magnet. Choose a good opt-in offer, such as a free email course. The Enchanting Marketing blog offers readers a free writing course in their feature box. If you're looking for a tool to create opt-in feature boxes, try the WordPress plugins PlugMatter Optin Feature Box or Thrive Leads. Don't forget that your homepage is one of the most visited pages on your blog, so it deserves special treatment. Think about changing your homepage design to include an engaging sign-up box as the next step after a feature box. #3: Add Content Upgrades to Blog Posts Content upgrades are another way to grow your email list. The principle behind them is the same as for any opt-in form: You give away free material (a lead magnet) and get your visitors' email addresses in return. Place a link to your bonus content with a call to action in your article and wrap it with an eye-catching box. When readers click the link, a pop-up box appears, asking for their email address to get the bonus material. Michael Hyatt offers readers a list of literary agents as a bonus in the following article, which is valuable material for his readers and relevant to the topic of the article. When readers click your download link, open a pop-up box asking for their email address. After readers complete the form, redirect them to a page with the bonus. You can use a variety of different materials in your content upgrades. Here are a few examples: A PDF version of your article A checklist An instructional video A template A list of tools or resources An infographic Remember that you need to choose bonus content that is highly relevant to the topic of your article. That's why content upgrades are often called "content-specific bonuses." To implement content upgrades on your blog, try a tool like LeadBoxes or the Content Upgrades PRO plugin for WordPress. #4: Display a Scroll-Triggered Box Another effective and unobtrusive way to turn readers into email subscribers is to use scroll-triggered opt-in boxes. Unlike pop-ups, scroll-triggered boxes don't interrupt the visitor's reading and don't cover up any content. Place a scroll-triggered box at the corner of the page when readers scroll down to a certain part of your article. By the time the box appears in front of readers, they've already read most or all of your article. They've formed an impression of you,

Instagram Ad Rollout Will Make It the Top Media Buy: New Research

Instagram Ad Rollout Will Make It the Top Media Buy: New Research

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you using Instagram for your business? Have you thought about advertising on the platform? Instagram just began offering paid advertising opportunities through select developer partners. In the coming months the platform is expected to create a Facebook-like self-serve option for any budget. In this article you'll discover findings from studies about Instagram's current reach, and the potential to reach targeted audiences with ads. Evolution of Instagram Ads In December 2014, Instagram reported its user base hit 300 million, 64.2 million from the U.S. alone. More exciting to brands and marketers than strict user numbers, however, was the engagement rate. Instagram users like, comment and re-gram at a rate of between 3.1% (Socialbakers research) to 4.2% (Forrester research). Comparably, Twitter and Facebook posts have engagement rates of .07% and below. Listen to this article: With population and engagement numbers like these, of course brands wanted to get access to Instagram audiences. For three years now, Facebook has been working on the correct advertising mix for Instagram. Until June 2015, businesses could only reach Instagram audiences by posting content, commenting, sharing and liking consumer posts. Instagram's few brand partners could place sponsored posts, much like Facebook's boosted posts. Strict ads, however, were not available. In June 2015, Instagram rolled out the call-to-action buttons Shop Now, Learn More and Install Now, which take users to mini-apps within Instagram, rather than brand websites. That way, users stay on Instagram once they've shopped, learned and installed. Now Instagram has provided advertising opportunities for all brands… provided you enter via one of their developer partners. These partners include Ampush, Brand Networks, 4C, Kenshoo, Nanigans, Salesforce Marketing Cloud, SocialCode and Unified. They require a minimum spend, so if you're a small business, you won't be able to take advantage of Instagram's new advertising opportunities until later in the year. Facebook's advertising followed the same path: It offered advertising to certain brands and then eventually made ads user-friendly enough that a developer intermediary was not needed. If you don't have the budget to utilize developer intermediaries, now is a good time to familiarize yourself with Instagram so that when the ads roll out to everyone, including small businesses, creating and posting an ad will be a simple task. On its blog, Instagram explains: Instagram ads will be available to advertisers of all types later this year. We are currently testing self-serve buying interfaces and APIs with a small group of partners, and we expect to make them more widely available over the coming months. With the context understood, small- and medium-sized businesses must evaluate whether Instagram is the right place for them. The following research will help with these decisions. #1: Instagram's Access to Facebook Data Offers a Significant Opportunity Lighting a fire under many marketers, Instagram currently doesn't have the pay-to-play platform that Facebook instituted in spring 2013. Before that point, companies that had built Facebook audiences had the luxury of getting each post to nearly every earned follower. Facebook then dropped organic reach to 6% and lower, forcing companies to pay to boost posts for as little as $1 per day if they wanted to reach more of their earned audience. Conversely, on Instagram, for the foreseeable future, each post will reach close to 100% of its earned audience… free! Well, free except for the time costs and any costs involved with Instagram's partners or other outside consulting. When Instagram will go to the Facebook-style pay-to-play platform is unclear. Until that time, you'll save significant marketing dollars experimenting with which content wins the most attention, engagement and likes. This said,

Facebook News Feed: How to Respond to Facebook Changes

Facebook News Feed: How to Respond to Facebook Changes

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Facebook to promote your business? Are you curious how to respond to the recent changes to the Facebook news feed? To learn how to navigate these important changes to Facebook's news feed, I interview Mari Smith, the "Queen of Facebook." More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Mari Smith, who is the world's leading Facebook marketing authority. She's authored the books, The New Relationship Marketing and Facebook Marketing: An Hour a Day. This is her fourth appearance on the show! Mari explores what you need to know about marketing with Facebook, and in particular the news feed. You'll discover the importance of native links, why micro-video should be key to your Facebook posting strategy and how Atlas will change the way you do online advertising. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook News Feed What marketers need to think about this next year when it comes to Facebook marketing Mari shares that over the next year, marketers will have to embrace the idea of paid amplified posts. According to Mari, most businesses on Facebook will have to bite the bullet and allocate dollars to paid posts this coming year. Mari shares that another Facebook trend is the push for micro-video and user-generated content. You'll hear more about this in the show. The next big consideration is connecting with your mobile users. With 75% of Facebook users accessing the site from mobile devices, your content must be effective on a mobile feed and able to direct people to a mobile-friendly landing page. Listen to the show to find out why community managers are more important than ever to your Facebook marketing strategy.  Review your posting strategy With Facebook clearly giving preferential visibility to consumers rather than brands, marketers now have to rethink their posting strategy. Especially with all of the latest updates to the news feed. Mari explains that some of the changes have been around links, and as marketers we are all about the images. In the past we have been told that posts with photos get the best visibility in the news feed. Mari explains that marketers have tried all kinds of clever ways to circumvent the news feed ranking algorithm. When you wanted to include a link in your post, you could use an image and include the link in the description. Now what Facebook calls native link posts give you a bigger image preview on your posts. You type or paste a link into your publisher on your page or profile, and it automatically generates a preview with a large image. You'll hear the huge advantages of this type of post, and why you need to consider it for your posting strategy. Listen to the show to find out why Mari recommends you change up your posting strategy to integrate more links. How Facebook's Save feature works and its advantages At the end of July 2014, Facebook introduced a new Save feature, which lets you to save items found on Facebook to check out later when you have more time. Available on both mobile and desktop, the Save feature was initially only meant for native link posts, but Facebook quietly upgraded it to allow any post with a link, video, photo or status update to be saved. Even if a post has multiple links in it, you can save all of the links at once with this tool. Mari recommends that you remind your fans from time to time of how to save and retrieve their saved items. Although publishers don't have access to the metrics right now, Mari's educated guess is that this feature might ultimately have value and give priority...

Facebook Split Testing: How to Make Your Ads Better

Facebook Split Testing: How to Make Your Ads Better

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you run Facebook ads? Have you tried split testing? To explore different ways to split test your Facebook ads so you can refine your ad campaigns, I interview Andrea Vahl. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Andrea Vahl, a Facebook marketing expert. She's co-author of Facebook Marketing All-in-One for Dummies and co-founder of the Social Media Manager School. In addition, Andrea is a regular contributor to Social Media Examiner. Andrea explores Facebook split testing and how best to optimize your Facebook ads. You'll discover which elements to split test first. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Split Testing How Andrea Became Involved With Facebook In 2006, Andrea started using social media to promote her side business (in-home wine tasting). She says that as she was learning how to use Facebook and Twitter, she didn't see a lot of articles that were entertaining and explained things step by step. So Andrea decided to use one of her improv comedy characters to make an entertaining, fun, and useful blog. She chose Grandma Mary, and dubbed her a "social media edutainer." According to Andrea, Grandma Mary gets a little cranky about social media. The character is the voice of people who are frustrated with having to learn social media. Grandma Mary explains social media in an endearing, engaging, and understandable way. Andrea started her blog about nine years ago, and when the parent company of the wine business folded, she made the blog her side gig. It grew substantially (she had a lot of Twitter followers and Facebook fans), which led to the book deal for her to co-author of the Facebook Marketing All-in-One for Dummies series with Phyllis Khare and Amy Porterfield. Today, Andrea still blogs about Facebook, does Facebook consulting, runs ad campaigns for clients, and more. It's her full-time business and she gets to speak and train on Facebook all over the world. Listen to the show to discover which two loves Andrea combined when she created Grandma Mary. What You Can Split Test Andrea explains that the concept of split testing Facebook ads involves keeping things constant, while changing one thing about the ad at a time. That way, you'll easily be able to tell which variable contributed to the better-performing Facebook ad results. Then you can stop the ads that aren't performing, continue running the ones that are, and hopefully get your click price and cost lower and lower. For example, if you split test an ad to 1,000 people, 500 would see one version and 500 would see another. Then you compare the results. The hope is that you learn what works and what doesn't so larger audiences can be reached. First of all, Andrea says, you can split test all kinds of keywords, which go into the Interests area. For instance, if someone lists jogging as an interest in a profile, and you use that keyword in the Interest area of your Facebook ad, your ad will get shown to that person. Your ad could also be shown to people who have liked pages that are related to jogging, such as types of jogging clothing or shoes. You can also test all kinds of demographics. For example, say you want to reach people who are 35 to 55, live in a certain city, like certain things, and maybe own a home. There are all kinds of demographics targeting you can put in your ads to reach your perfect prospect. For Interests, Andrea suggests using general keywords like "jogging" and "running," versus specific pages like Runner's World or Nike shoes.

How to Create Facebook Ads That Stand Out Using Power Editor

How to Create Facebook Ads That Stand Out Using Power Editor

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do your Facebook ads get noticed? Wondering how creating ads with Power Editor makes a difference? When you build ads in Power Editor instead of the Facebook Ads Manager, you have more control over your creative elements. In this article you'll learn how to use Power Editor to create Facebook ads that get results. Listen to this article: #1: Use More Characters in Headline and Text Areas One of the big benefits of creating ads with Power Editor is that you get to use more text in ads for website clicks or website conversions. Typically, for those types of ads in the Ads Manager, you're limited to a headline of 25 characters and text of 90 characters. The only type of ad that allows longer text is boosted posts (also known as promoted posts). Here's how you can create those same ads using Power Editor, and avoid the text limitations enforced by the Ads Manager. Once you start your campaign, and then name the ad set and ad, you can start configuring the ad in Power Editor. You'll see the text limitations aren't showing. Now you can use the ad text to tell a more complete story about your subject. #2: Customize the Display URL Area In Power Editor, you can customize your Display URL area. Think outside the box and use this area for an extra text message. Maybe add a message about your product or tell people when a deal will end. This Display URL area is a great feature for when your URL is long and unwieldy. For example, if you use extra tracking in the website URL and you want to make sure people know where they're going, you can add the real website address in the Display URL field. Use it to show the main URL where you want clicks on your Facebook ad to go, rather than extra tracking information. Want to reinforce your call to action? You can also use the Display URL area to highlight the Sign Up button. #3: Tag Other Pages in Ads Another benefit only available in Power Editor is the ability to tag other pages in the ad text. This makes the ad look more like a regular post, while potentially increasing its visibility. As always when you tag other pages, make sure the tag is relevant and complementary to that page. You can also tag pages if you do a standard page post and then boost it, or in an unpublished post (also in Power Editor). However, the benefit of doing a website clicks or website conversions post is that you can optimize for that goal and you get the call to action button. To tag another page, just type the @ symbol followed by the page name into the Text box and then select it from the drop-down menu. NOTE: No one outside of Facebook knows exactly how the news feed works, so it's not clear if tagging pages gives an ad any further reach. On the other hand, tagging in an organic post does increase your reach. And although you most likely have to pay for any reach you do receive through tagging, the ad may stand out more to the fans of those pages. #4: Access Additional Ad Types Two types of ads that are only available in Power Editor are dynamic product ads and carousel ads. There are some differences between the two types. Dynamic Product Ads Dynamic product ads use your whole catalog of products along with a user's browsing history to show more complex ads to him or her. You use the Business Manager to upload your catalog as a .csv file. Facebook then uses the conversion pixel and a basic template to show different products (or even multiple products with the carousel ads) to each Facebook user. Carousel Ads Carousel ads are set up directly in Power Editor and can display up to five products. This involves more than simply selecting different images for your ad because each ad can be sent to a unique website where the product is displayed. Each ad also has its own description and headline. For carousel ads, it's important to use 600 x 600 pixel images because the typical Facebook ad image size (120...

SearchCap: Google AdWords ad suggestions, ad performance & Doodles

by Barry Schwartz @ SearchCap: Daily Search Engine News Recap

Below is what happened in search today, as reported on and from other places across the web.

The post SearchCap: Google AdWords ad suggestions, ad performance & Doodles appeared first on Search Engine Land.

Project Owl, and Google’s Attempt to Hit Fake News Where it Hurts

by submit @ Submit Express

Google’s got a big problem, and it’s the same one that’s plaguing Facebook. How do you deal with fake news, when the truth is evolving in real time? A new update from the search engine, codenamed “Project Owl”, aims to try and curb the fake news epidemic. It’s also making some interesting changes to search, […]

Why Quality Unique Content is Important for SEO

by Gaetano Pizzi @ AudiologyDesign » Search Engine Optimization

Back in the day, if you wanted to get your website ranking highly in search engines all you had to do was cram the pages of your site with as...

The post Why Quality Unique Content is Important for SEO appeared first on AudiologyDesign.

How to Easily Create Your Own Video Show

How to Easily Create Your Own Video Show

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Looking for ways to position yourself as an industry expert? Have you considered using video to increase your visibility? Using video to give your own take on news and stories that are relevant to your industry can help you build influence with peers, prospects, and customers. In this article, you'll discover how to use video to deliver value to your followers on social media. Listen to this article: #1: Gather Relevant News and Stories With the proliferation of news aggregation tools, you can easily select, filter, and digest stories, videos, and content from around the world. To collect curated content, use a news reader like Feedly (available in desktop and app versions) and add the relevant industries, brands, and blogs you want to follow. For example, if you're in the tech industry, you can add Wired, Engadget, and TechCrunch to your feed list. Once you set up your feed and find a great article on your topic, simply save it, share it, or bookmark it for later use. Additionally, you can create knowledge boards in Feedly that allow you to compile (and later share) the information in a single location. Now it's time to sort the stories you've curated. Think about your target audience when you pick out interesting articles, blogs, videos, and stories, and choose five stories that will be most meaningful to your audience. For example, if you're a small business, curate a list of the best entrepreneurial stories of the month. #2: Record Your Thoughts on Each Story in a Single Video Now it's time to record your thoughts on video. At this point, you're curating the news-gathering phase for others and telling your audience why certain content is more important than other content. For this reason, it's important to have the rationale ready for why you made each decision. Be ready to explain to your audience why each story is relevant and different. Much has been written about staging and how to create great video content. But in this case, the type of video you're creating is highly personal, so staging isn't essential. The simple webcam position is enough, and helps make your audience feel they're in a chat with you. Keep in mind that poor lighting or sound will raise red flags for viewers, so leave some time for testing and retesting your look. The actual sound bites can be as short as 30 to 45 seconds, and should explain, retell, or give an opinion on the specific piece of content you're discussing. Be ready to share a quick overview of what happened or why the story is relevant. Then, give your take on the matter. Record five short snippets (one for each story) on your webcam or phone and then send them to your favorite editing software like YouTube. If you're a novice to video editing, check out these simple video editing techniques. In building the actual video, how well you incorporate music, graphics, and images in your video will affect the quality. Regardless, even five quick audio clips of you talking can get your audience's attention. #3: Share Your Video Multiple Times Once you've completed the video, the next step is to create a post to share each relevant headline on your social channels, and include your video. By following best practices on social sharing, you should be able to use a trending hashtag to find like-minded consumers. You can also head over to Google Trends. From there you can map, chart, and study search patterns both globally and regionally. Make notes of the stories that generate a lot of activity, as well as any hashtags associated with those stories. When you share content from a written article, give the journalist or blogger who wrote the piece a shout-out. For example, tag them in a Facebook post, mention them in a tweet, and tag them in a LinkedIn update. This can encourage that person to share your take on the piece. From there, you should tweet influential people who have voiced their opinion on one of the stor...

Marketing Instagram Style: What Marketers Need to Know

Marketing Instagram Style: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Instagram for marketing? Are you wondering how you can grow an Instagram following that will build your business? To learn how Instagram can help you engage your audience, I interview Jenn Herman for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Jenn Herman, who blogs at Jenn's Trends and is one of our top 10 social media blog winners for 2014. Her blog focuses on social media management. She's author of the ebook, The Ultimate Beginner's Guide to Instagram. Jenn shares why marketers should consider Instagram for their business. You'll discover the types of images that will engage your audience, how to drive traffic to your website and examples of marketers who are successful on the platform. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show. Instagram Marketing Why marketers should consider Instagram Jenn explains how a lot of people use Instagram for personal communication. Many people believe that it's a platform for selfies and pictures of food. However, Instagram is much more than that and goes a lot deeper. The marketing aspect is so much stronger now, and will only continue to grow. So far this year, the main buzzword has been visual marketing, with Facebook and Twitter embracing visual content. Not only is Instagram a visual platform, it also gives you the capacity to create visual content for other sites. With the Instagram tools available, you can create fun artwork to use on your blog, website, Facebook and Twitter. It's very useful for cross-promoting. Right now, 65% of the world's top brands use Instagram and Jenn says the number continues to grow. There are 200 million monthly active users on Instagram, 70% of which log in daily. This is a huge base of people for marketers to reach. No matter who your target audience is, some of them will use the platform. You'll hear why you can reach people more clearly through Instagram than you can with any other platform. As a marketer, you should aim to create original images for Instagram. There are many different ways to incorporate your products and services into an image to make it look more native and get better engagement. Listen to the show to find out what our 2014 Social Media Marketing Industry Report revealed about visual marketing. Marketers who use Instagram well The first brand example that Jenn talks about is fashion designer Michael Kors. The way they do product placement on Instagram is amazing. The images they create for their fans are behind the scenes at fashion shows, photo shoots and great shots of their products. These types of images can help you to connect with your audience. Although Jenn loves the images, she says it's their lack of engagement that lets them down. Instagram is a highly engaged and active environment. Jenn advises marketers to be aware of this, and make sure that you're responsive to your followers. Listen to the show to hear the type of images we used to create some buzz prior to Social Media Marketing World this year. Engagement on Instagram Jenn states that engagement is considerably higher on Instagram than it is on Facebook, Twitter and Google+. When Jenn tests her blog posts on all of the different platforms, Instagram almost always comes out ahead. One way to create engagement on Instagram is to ask a question in the caption. This encourages your readers to start or join the conversation. When they start to respond, you receive a trail of comments.

Online Reviews: How to Respond to Fraudulent Reviews

Online Reviews: How to Respond to Fraudulent Reviews

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do people review your business online? Ever receive negative or fraudulent reviews? To discover what to do when you receive a review that's not what you were expecting, I interview Dan Lemin. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Daniel Lemin, the founder of One Good Brand. He is also a strategist for Convince & Convert, and author of the brand-new book, Manipurated. Dan will explore online reviews and how to deal with bad and fraudulent reviews. You'll discover why online reviews are so important. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Online Reviews Dan's backstory Dan started his online career with Google's corporate marketing team and saw the emergence of black hat SEO (search engine optimization). He explains the distinction between white hat (good) and black hat (bad) SEO, and talks about link farms as an example of black hat tactics. Google came to love Yelp's fresh content and Dan says that's how the rating and review platforms attracted shadowy SEO characters. They saw the opportunity to continue "tricking" consumers through new platforms. Listen to the show to discover why the owners of small- and medium-sized businesses need to know the dynamics of the SEO industry. Why reviews are important Dan shares that nearly 90% of consumers say they trust reviews as much as they trust their friends and family. Since so many people make decisions based on online reviews, the vast majority of a business's prospective customers are filtering through review sites. Since Google favors this type of content, reviews are a new SEO tactic, and that's why site owners are adding some type of rating and review component. For instance, a lot of hospitality businesses like Starwood Hotels have added reviews to their websites. He says one review will not necessarily make or break a business, but cautions that the presence of the review industry can make or break small businesses, because they don't have all the tools and techniques a large company like Chipotle might have. When asked which review sites matter most, Dan explains his research found it really depends on the business category. For example, Gondola Adventures in Newport Beach, which is in a super-specialized industry, says Yelp matters, but TripAdvisor is even more important. Dan says companies can track reviews manually by going to each review site, but it's very time-consuming. To help, there's a whole cottage industry of companies such as ReviewTrackers and ReviewPush that do review tracking for businesses. Listen to the show to learn how much traffic Yelp gets from Google. The purpose of fake reviews Dan shares that there are different layers to the purpose of fake reviews. He first discusses fake positive reviews and says that several weeks ago, Amazon filed an unprecedented lawsuit against 1,100 people. They accused anonymous people on Fiverr of selling reviews for profit on Amazon. For his book, Dan interviewed a young lady who writes reviews for a living, and says it's very difficult to distinguish her reviews from legitimate ones. Dan discusses fake reviews that are created to injure the reputation of a business. Dan also shares an example of another type of fake review, a scam that targeted wedding photographers in the Bay Area. After responding to what looked like a legitimate inquiry from their websites, the photographers would get an email saying "I decided not to hire you" or "we changed the date." The email would go on to say, "I work in the online reputation business,

LinkedIn Prospecting: How to Find Your Next Customer on LinkedIn

LinkedIn Prospecting: How to Find Your Next Customer on LinkedIn

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use LinkedIn for your business? Are you wondering how to use LinkedIn to find prospects and customers? To learn about how to build strategic relationships through LinkedIn, I interview Viveka von Rosen for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Viveka von Rosen, author of LinkedIn Marketing: An Hour a Day and founder of Linked Into Business. Viveka shares how she prospects on LinkedIn for her business. You'll learn about the tools available to make prospecting easy and what you need to do to get started. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: LinkedIn Prospecting What is prospecting? Viveka explains that a prospect is someone whom you either find or attract to you who's in a company, business, industry or organization that has a need for your product or service. Before social media, prospecting was done through very expensive outbound sales. However, social media and LinkedIn in particular have changed this. You'll hear why Viveka loves prospecting. Social media has changed us from the age of the seller to the age of the consumer. Consumers now tell us want they want. A large part of prospecting is to know who your ideal clients are and know their needs. Facebook, Yelp, LinkedIn and Twitter make the research a lot easier. As a seller, it's also a lot easier and cheaper to get out there and position yourself as a thought leader. This engenders the feeling of "know, like and trust" in a client or prospect with whom you may not have had direct interaction. It makes it easier to close the sale. In Jill Konrath's book, Selling to BIG Companies, she talks about how you have to know whom to sell to. This is why LinkedIn is so important—it tells you who works at the companies, their positions and whom they interact with. It enables you to reach out to the right person. Listen to the show to find out why groups can be so powerful. LinkedIn for prospecting Viveka explains the two aspects of prospecting—inbound and outbound. Actively prospecting is just a matter of research. With a combination of keywords, titles, company name and location, you can use the Advanced Search on LinkedIn to discover the people you want to interact with. These are your prospects. You'll hear about some of the great benefits of LinkedIn and also some of its limitations. One of the most powerful search categories is Location. Not only can you see who lives in your town, but also when you attend trade shows or conferences, it's a great way to connect with people before the event. A really cool app that you can use for conferences is Bizzabo, which has a LinkedIn API interface. There are thousands of events in there and you can see who will be at the event. It shows you their LinkedIn profile. In the show, you'll also discover another app which can be used for prospecting. If you want to meet prospects face to face before an event, a cool new app called Trendr will set up a live meeting place. Listen to the show to find out how you can discover if a prospect is active in a particular LinkedIn group. Viveka's experience on LinkedIn Viveka is extremely active on LinkedIn, either prospecting or inbound. She says that 70-80% of her business comes through LinkedIn and the remainder through things that she markets on Twitter. When you own a LinkedIn group, it allows you to position yourself as a thought leader. Viveka owns quite a few groups.

How to Use LinkedIn Showcase Pages for Business

How to Use LinkedIn Showcase Pages for Business

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you looking for more ways to use LinkedIn for your business? Have you considered showcase pages? LinkedIn showcase pages enable you to promote certain products or services to specific customer segments. In this article you'll discover how to use LinkedIn showcase pages for your business. Listen to this article: What Are Showcase Pages? Showcase pages are an extension of your LinkedIn company page and allow you to highlight a particular product line or brand. Although you need to have a company page to create showcase pages, they're somewhat of a standalone feature. Each showcase page has its own followers, status updates and functionality, sort of like a mini LinkedIn company page. Any showcase pages you've created for your business are listed in the right column of your company page. For example, IBM has a number of showcase pages, including IBM Cloud, IBM Analytics, IBM Security, IBM with MSPs, IBM Social Business and IBM Watson. Here's how to set up showcase pages for your business's products and services. #1: Choose a Page Name First, you need to choose a page name. To take advantage of showcase pages for SEO, include your target SEO keywords as part of the page-naming process. For example, because I provide search engine optimization training, I claimed, created and optimized the showcase page with the same name: Search Engine Optimization Training. The URL for the showcase page I claimed is http://www.linkedin.com/company/search-engine-optimization-training. As you can see from the URL, showcase pages are not directly linked to your LinkedIn company page. The URL just says .../company/..., and only the name of the showcase page is included in the URL. This means no one else can claim a LinkedIn showcase page with that same name. It's sort of like registering and claiming a really cool .com URL and making it yours. #2: Create a Showcase Page To create a showcase page, log into your LinkedIn company page, hover or click on the down-pointing arrow next to Edit and select Create a Showcase Page from the drop-down menu. You can claim up to 10 showcase pages for your company. If you need additional pages, reach out to LinkedIn’s support team and request them. #3: Optimize the Page for Search Without a doubt, Google loves LinkedIn company pages, and frequently ranks them high in search results if they're properly optimized. The same principle applies to showcase pages. The more followers you have and the more actively those followers engage with your showcase page, the better. There are a number of ways you can optimize your showcase pages for search. You get more SEO juice by including target SEO keywords in the showcase page name (as described earlier) and in the description. You can use up to 200 characters to draft an engaging and compelling product or service description, so make good use of this real estate. In the Website area of your page, make sure you include a link to the corresponding service or product page on your website. Also add your logo and a header image to your showcase page. For the header image, you can upload an image in the PNG, JPEG or GIF format. The maximum file size for the image is 2MB, and it must be 974 x 330 pixels or larger. Be sure to invite people to follow your showcase page and encourage them to engage with your posts. When you post status updates on the page, keep them focused and include your target SEO keywords. Companies Using Showcase Pages Here's a look at how three well-known companies use showcase pages to promote their products and services. Adobe Creative Cloud The Adobe Creative Cloud showcase page has more than 15,700 followers and features an excellent and relevant header image. The Adobe company page encourages visitors to follow all of their LinkedIn showcase pages. Intel IT Center The Intel IT Center showcase page, which has more than 47,200 followers,

Twitter Analytics: How to Know if Your Twitter Marketing Works

Twitter Analytics: How to Know if Your Twitter Marketing Works

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you review your Twitter Analytics? Want to use them to improve your Twitter marketing? Ian Cleary is with us to explore what you can learn from the data provided in Twitter Analytics. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Ian Cleary, a social tech expert. His blog, RazorSocial.com, placed in our Top 10 Social Media Blogs four years in a row. He also founded the RazorBlazers Club, a community for marketers who want to monetize with social media. Ian explores how you can use Twitter Analytics to take your Twitter marketing to the next level. You'll discover great third-party analytics tools. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Twitter Analytics Core Twitter Analytics on the Home Tab Ian explains that once your account is 14 days old, you can access the free analytics provided by Twitter by going to Analytics.Twitter.com on your desktop. You'll start off with an overview on the Home tab, from which you can drill down to view data on tweets, audiences, video analytics, and more. On the Overview screen, you'll see the total number of impressions for all of your tweets. Impressions are the actual number of people who saw your tweets on their Twitter timeline, by visiting your profile, or in a search. For instance, they may have clicked on a hashtag and your tweet was listed. Ian wonders whether Twitter is able to access all of the information for tweets displayed in third-party tools (Hootsuite, Sprout Social, etc.). He goes on to say that even though the data is never going to be 100% accurate, it will give you a gauge to see if your impressions are going up or down each month. Profile Visits is the total number of people who visited your profile on mobile and desktop combined. This number is important, Ian explains, because when you pin a really good tweet to the top of your Twitter profile, you have an idea of how many people have seen it. For example, if Ian's profile shows 17,000 visits, that means 17,000 people have seen his pinned tweet, which is an opt-in to download a lead generation guide. He uses this tweet to build email subscribers from people visiting his Twitter profile. It's a simple thing, but it's the equivalent of having a big opt-in at the top of your website. Mentions show how often your Twitter username is mentioned on other people's profiles. For example, the number of people who shared your content and mentioned your Twitter name will show up there. While they're not clickable, the mountain graphs you see under each data label give you an idea of whether that data set is increasing or decreasing at a glance. For example, you can see if your impressions are going up or down over the course of the month. Or you can check the Followers graph to see if your audience is growing or diminishing. The Top Tweet section of the Overview screen shows you your best tweet over the last 28 days and the number of impressions and retweets on it. Ian explains that you want to see what your most popular tweets are, so you can turn them into evergreen tweets to share regularly. There's no point in retweeting content that's not resonating with your audience. The Top Mention section shows you when someone else shared a piece of your content and mentioned your name, and it did really well. The Top Follower is your follower who is followed by the most people. If someone with a large following has followed you, and he or she is relevant to your audience, pay attention to and start interacting with that person, Ian suggests.

Rankings Definition – SEO Glossary | Searchmetrics

Rankings Definition – SEO Glossary | Searchmetrics


Searchmetrics

What are rankings? Our SEO Glossary provides a wide range of technical terms related to Search Engine Optimization and more.

14+ Tools for Bloggers

14+ Tools for Bloggers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you a busy blogger? Looking for new, unique tools to help you work smarter? The right tools will help streamline and improve your blogging. In this article, you'll discover more than 14 tools to help bloggers quickly, efficiently perform common tasks. Listen to this article: #1: Source Free, Quality Images A picture is worth a thousand words. You want them to be the right ones. Unsplash and Foter help tell your story. With Unsplash you get access to a bank of 50,000+ free-to-use photos. No attribution is required. If there's nothing suitable on Unsplash, Foter allows you to choose from a whopping 229 million images. Here's how: type in the search term and click Commercial Use. Next, click on your image. Then download whatever size image you want. Finally, cut and paste the picture attribution into your post. #2: Compress Images to Improve Page Load Speed The load speed of a page is a key ranking factor. Images are usually to blame for lengthy page loading times. That's where Compressor.io comes in. It will reduce image sizes by up to 90%, with no loss of quality. Here's how: just drag and drop your image, watch it compress before your eyes, and then download it. #3: Do More With Screenshots If you write a lot of blog posts you'll need a reliable screenshot grabber to gather illustrative images. To save time, install Save to Google Drive and Awesome Screenshot. Save to Google Drive is a super-speedy browser extension that helps you save web pages. Click the Google Drive icon in your browser extensions bar and it saves the entire web page to your Google Drive in seconds. Alternatively, use Awesome Screenshot if you want to crop the page or annotate it. Click on the Awesome Screenshot extension and you'll get a drop-down where you can choose your options. When you're done, save and store your screenshots in Awesome Screenshot and you can access them from anywhere. #4: Research Competitor Web Traffic When you're competing for a target audience, it's helpful to find out where a competitor's traffic comes from, what their referral sources are, or what their top organic and paid keywords are. SimilarWeb is an unbelievable resource that can help you find this information. The browser extension works best, but you can get the same stats from the SimilarWeb website, too. #5: Run an SEO Audit Want to do a basic SEO audit on your blog, but don't know where to start? Screaming Frog SEO Spider Tool, a small desktop program that acts as a website crawler, will check your blog for broken links, title tags, duplicate pages, redirects, the length of all your meta descriptions, and more. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=AOzOffh9HIE #6: Monitor Keyword Rankings What's My SERP is a free tool that will track up to 25 keyword phrases across 20 domains for you and up to three competitors. You can even export the data after each report. Just sign up, input your keyword phrases, and click Check All Keywords. If you want enhanced features, try the multi-functional Monitor Backlinks. Its keyword ranking tool monitors up to 500 keywords, as well as those of your competitors. #7: Optimize Posts and Pages for Search Yoast SEO is a WordPress plugin that makes it easier for bloggers to optimize blog posts to rank on Google. Simply fill in the fields and tweak your entries until you get a green traffic light. A useful feature for bloggers who use social media is the ability to set the title, description, and featured image for shares to top social networks. #8: Search for Email Addresses by Domain Are you doing influencer outreach? Do you pitch to journalists? This tool will find anyone's email address. Email Hunter offers 150 searches with the free plan. For most people, that's plenty. Type in the domain name of the company the person you want to contact works for. If a specific email address isn't located,

New Feature: Optimization Powered by RBCv3

by Hanna Woodburn @ Rigor

Web development teams that focus monitoring and improvement activities solely on application availability miss many opportunities for improvement. To help address this gap, Rigor’s Optimization platform is all about finding and translating specific performance problems in your app into actionable steps you can take to improve overall performance. Rigor continues to build tools that enable […]

The post New Feature: Optimization Powered by RBCv3 appeared first on Rigor.

Facebook Reactions: What Marketers Need to Know

Facebook Reactions: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Have you seen the new Facebook reactions? Wondering how they'll affect your Facebook page? Facebook reactions let Facebook users go beyond liking a post by allowing them to choose from six emojis that show different emotions. In this article I'll explore how Facebook reactions work, and how your Facebook page can get the most from them. Listen to this article: Facebook Reactions for Fans The new Facebook reactions work pretty easily for users. When users hover over a post's Like button in the Facebook news feed, a personal profile timeline, or a Facebook page timeline, they will be able to choose from one of the new six Facebook reactions. Everyone can breathe a sigh of relief that Facebook reactions do not include a Dislike button. Hence, people cannot dislike your latest post (product, service, content, etc.). These reactions will simply allow expressions of like, love, laugh, wowed, saddened, or angered by your post. The feature will work similarly for mobile users, but users will hold down the Like button instead of hovering over it. Some mobile app users have noted that you must restart or update your app to get the new feature to work. Others have had to log out of their account and log back in again. Facebook Reactions for Pages From a Facebook page admin perspective, a few things will change. For starters, you'll see in your notifications that people are reacting to your posts instead of just liking them. On the posts themselves, you'll see an array of icons representing the different reactions that people have left on the post. On older posts, you'll see the new icon that represents likes, and on newer posts, you'll see all of the newer icons representing the different reactions that people have. People can also go back to older posts and add new reactions. You can click on the link to see the breakdown of which fans had specific reactions so you can see who likes, loves, and has other feelings about your post. Since page posts are public, it's important to understand that everyone can see the breakdowns of Facebook reactions, including people who are not admins and not even fans of the page. This means that you can go to other pages and see the breakdowns of reactions on their posts as well. This can be useful for competitor research as you can get a good feel for how people will react to specific types of content, status updates, and announcements – especially since you can get a quick summary of the reactions right at the top without having to scroll through the entire list. Note that only Facebook page admins will see the Liked / Invite buttons. If you are not a page admin, you only see Add Friend / Follow buttons next to people's names. So far, Facebook reactions only work on the Like button for the main posts themselves, but not on comments. So don't expect to react to comments anytime soon. In terms of your Facebook page's Insights, you can see the full breakdown of reactions for each of your posts by finding the post and clicking on it. There, you can see the full post details, including the new Facebook reactions counts. From an Insights perspective, Facebook reactions do not count as negative feedback. In other words, an angry reaction isn't categorized in the same area as a Hide Post, Report as Spam, Hide All Post, or Unlike Page. Hence, any reaction can be considered a good one. Now that you know how Facebook reactions work for your fans and for your page, here are some ways to get the most from them. #1: Encourage Fans to Use Reactions People love trying new things. Simply invite your fans to test out the new reactions on your page today. Not only will it teach your fans how to use this feature, but it will also boost your page's overall engagement and organic reach. For example, I initially planned to boost my post to test Facebook reactions, but I ended up canceling the promotion.

Search to Social Ads: How to Use Google With Facebook to Build Niche Audiences

Search to Social Ads: How to Use Google With Facebook to Build Niche Audiences

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Does your business serve a specialized customer base? Wondering how to reach specific niche audiences with Facebook ads? To explore a strategy for retargeting specialized audiences using Google ads in combination with Facebook ads, I interview Shane Sams. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Shane Sams, the co-host of the Flipped Lifestyle podcast, a show focused on helping families make money online. He describes himself as a normal guy from Kentucky who loves helping others. He's also the founder of the Flip Your Life Community. Shane explains how to use website traffic generated by Google ads to retarget Facebook users. You'll discover how highly focused keywords help manage your marketing costs. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Search to Social Ads Shane's Story Shane and his wife Jocelyn met at the University of Kentucky. After graduation, Jocelyn initially worked a corporate job and Shane coached football. They then decided to become schoolteachers, which they did for about 10 years. Shane taught social studies and continued to coach, while Jocelyn was an elementary school librarian. After some bad experiences at work, Shane realized he had traded control of his life for job security. He started looking for other things to do because he knew there had to be a better way. This was in 2012. One day, as Shane and his wife were driving around town, Shane said, "I wonder if I can get 100 people to send me $50." She asked what he was talking about and Shane said that out of the 7 billion people on the planet, surely 100 would give him $50. If they all did that in a month, it would be $5,000, and for 12 months in a row, it would be $60,000. If they could do that every month, they could quit teaching. Shane didn't know how he was going to make this money but he was determined to figure it out. He began seeking information about business. One day while mowing the grass, Shane decided to look up business podcasts. An image of a guy looking at the podcast art with his eyeballs caught Shane's attention. It was Smart Passive Income with Pat Flynn. In the podcast, Pat talked about how he sold a study guide and would email it to people. Shane decided he and Jocelyn could sell PDFs of information. After trying different things online, they were finally able to figure it out. They sold lesson plans to teachers and football playbooks to coaches. A year later, Shane and Jocelyn replaced their income. As soon as they quit their jobs (which they did on September 27, 2013), people started asking questions. For example, Lindsay, a friend of Jocelyn's, quit her job to be a stay-at-home mom and wanted advice on making money online. They helped Lindsay create digital products and she made $1,000 on the Internet in a month. This money enabled Lindsay to be at home with her daughter every day. After Shane and Jocelyn realized their experience and knowledge could change the lives of others, they started Flipped Lifestyle. It has helped a lot of people. People ask why it's called Flipped Lifestyle. Shane explains that everybody flipped out after Jocelyn and he left their jobs, where they had tenure and insurance. Shane recalls how his mom cornered him and said, "Shane Sams, you have babies. You have lost your mind. You have flipped out. And I do not approve of this decision." Hence, Flipped Lifestyle. Listen to the show to hear Shane recall how much sharing online business skills meant to his friends. Why Combine Google Ads With Facebook? Early on, Shane and Jocelyn discovered a lot of the marketing advice available online didn't work for ...

How to Optimize Your Tweets for Search

How to Optimize Your Tweets for Search

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want more exposure for your Twitter account? Have you thought about applying SEO tactics to your Twitter marketing? With a few simple techniques, you can increase the chances that your Twitter account shows up in both Twitter and Google search. In this article you'll discover how to improve the visibility of your Twitter account with SEO. Listen to this article: Start With Relevant Keywords Keywords that you're already using in the metadata of your website are a good place to start. Your website keywords might not translate perfectly to Twitter, but if you combine them with popular hashtags and topics that work well in your content, you'll have a good group to test. You'll know which keywords are working best by monitoring your engagement, link clicks and reach. Any spikes in those metrics will show you which tweets have effective keywords in them. Then you can use those keywords more in your tweets and profile. You can also expand your keyword list by including the names of events that your company is always involved with. Make the list as big as you like as long as every word is relevant to your brand. Most importantly, keep this list updated. With your keywords in hand, here are some ways to boost your visibility for both Twitter and Google search. #1: Optimize Your Account for Twitter Search Tweets get the main stage on Google right now, but optimizing your account for search on Twitter will allow you to have long-term searchability. Handle and Username Make sure your handle and username match your website and brand name. Consistent branding across all of your channels is your best bet for being found by the audience you want. Your handle and username don't have to match each other, but they should be related. Your handle is also included in your unique Twitter URL (for example, https://twitter.com/SMExaminer). Your username shows up next to your profile photo for all of your tweets. You can change your username easily. But changing your handle is trickier, and you'll lose your verification badge if you have one. Changing your username or handle may also confuse your followers and cause people to unfollow you. If you're going to change either one, try to do it only once. Don't use a lot of numbers in your username either because Google may flag it as spam. Bio, Photo and Link Your bio, photo and link are the places to make changes and updates to promote campaigns or events. Twitter indexes your bio regularly, so any changes affect your relevancy score in search. You can use up to 160 characters in your bio section, so make the most of them. The bio's main purpose is to explain to potential followers what you usually tweet about and why they should follow you. Update your bio regularly to match the type of content you're currently tweeting about. If you have a campaign or event you're involved with, make sure you include relevant keywords and hashtags in your bio. This will help you show up more on both Twitter and Google when people search for those keywords and hashtags. The profile photo also has some SEO weight. Before you upload the photo, add relevant keywords, separated by dashes, to the filename of your photo (for example, social-media-examiner.jpeg). This won't make you shoot to the top of results on its own, but SEO tactics are most successful when the different pieces are working together. Also make sure your photo is exactly 200 x 200 pixels for optimal loading speed. Your link is the biggest call to action for your Twitter account. Many brands shorten their URL to make it more trackable and user-friendly. If you want to shorten your URL, get a branded link shortener because some link shorteners can be flagged as spam. Also think carefully about which page your bio link is sending your Twitter followers to. The safest option is to use the main page of your brand's website because it usually has the best SEO authority.

Google’s Latest Algorithm Changes and How Your Site May Be Affected.

by Gaetano Pizzi @ AudiologyDesign » Search Engine Optimization

It has been a few weeks since Google released its latest round of updates to its ranking algorithms and I felt it necessary to explain what these updates are and...

The post Google’s Latest Algorithm Changes and How Your Site May Be Affected. appeared first on AudiologyDesign.

6 Tools for Selling Products on Instagram

6 Tools for Selling Products on Instagram

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to sell your products using Instagram? Looking for tools to make it easier for customers to buy from you? The right Instagram tools help you maximize your revenue. In this article you'll discover six tools to help you sell products on Instagram. Listen to this article: #1: Identify Shoppable Content With a Hashtag Hashtags are a big part of how you connect with users on Instagram, and Inselly makes good use of them. Like other platforms on this list, Inselly lets you use the profile-link-to-storefront method of selling. It comes with the added bonus of the Inselly hashtag. Add the hashtag #inselly to your description, as well as any other relevant tags that might put you in front of your target audience. Not only does this hashtag make it easier for users to search for buyable content, but it also flags your content as being buyable if users stumble across it somewhere else. Sellers can process purchases through PayPal, and buyers can contact sellers through a message either on the app or the Inselly website. Buyers need to have Inselly installed and integrated with Instagram, but it's free for them to do so. It's also free for sellers to use, with no commissions or fees, although you can choose to purchase "coins" (the international currency Inselly utilizes) to promote your content. [Editor's note: Inselly recently updated. Buyers don't need to install or integrate the software with Instagram, and it's free for them to use.] #2: Sync Inventory Across Your Online Stores Shopseen is a multichannel listing interface that allows you to upload and list your products and have them automatically uploaded to a variety of ecommerce stores like Shopify, Etsy, eBay and Woo. Shopseen will then update your inventory, continually and automatically, across all of these sales channels. They also have a straightforward Instagram selling tool that's easy to use for both ecommerce businesses and customers. Shopseen will create a storefront using your profile link, similar to other services you'll see in this article. Once you've linked your Instagram to Shopseen, upload images of your products to Instagram, and add a price to the description. Shopsheen will then upload the product to your Shopseen page (which is off of Instagram). Ask followers to click to your store through your profile link and you can collect payment from a credit card. They don't have to set up their own Shopseen account, which is a strong benefit. This is particularly helpful for ecommerce businesses that feature their products on a wide variety of storefronts. Pricing is based on the amount of sales you make per month and the number of stores you have. You start with a free plan that allows you to have one store and Shopseen takes a 10% fee on Instagram sales. #3: Sell Through Comments Soldsie allows users to purchase directly from a seller's Instagram news feed without ever leaving the app. As an added bonus, this selling tool works for Facebook, too. Both buyers and sellers have to install and integrate the software with Instagram after registering with Soldsie, which uses "comment selling" as its method of making sales. Upload your products through your selling dashboard to turn the product images into shoppable Instagram posts. Then you include specific buying information and product details, such as "100% cotton, comes in blue and white" on each Instagram product post. Ask your buyers to make purchases by commenting "sold" directly on the post and including any necessary size/color/selection information. Once buyers comment with this information, Soldsie emails them an invoice so you can collect payment via PayPal or credit card. Soldsie has a variety of pricing plans based on the needs of your store, starting with a basic plan that costs $49 per month, with a 5.9% commission fee on all sales. #4: Connect To a Shoppable Storefront Have2Have.

How to Make Instagram Ads That Stand Out

How to Make Instagram Ads That Stand Out

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want to advertise on Instagram? Ready to take your Instagram ads to the next level? Instagram has quietly rolled out some great features to help advertisers grab attention and drive traffic. In this article you'll discover four features you can use to create Instagram ads that stand out. Listen to this article: #1: Drive Traffic to Your Website Until recently, Instagram ads only supported the objectives of mobile app installs, video views, and reach/engagement. Now you can choose from two additional ad objectives: Clicks to Website and Website Conversions. This is the first time businesses have been able to send users to their site from individual posts, rather than just through their sole profile link. This could be a game-changer in making Instagram a stronger sales tool. You can use both of these objectives in photo, video, and carousel ads, so you'll be able to use every type of ad format for both clicks and conversions. Viewers will see a sponsored ad with an image, a description, and a clickable call-to-action button that will take them to your site. Call-to-action buttons include the options you're already familiar with from Facebook, including Book Now, Contact Us, Shop Now, and Learn More. To create these ads, choose either Send People to Your Website or Increase Conversions on Your Website for the objective. Next, you can add a pixel to your campaign. If you choose Increase Conversions on Your Website for the objective, you'll be asked to choose what type of conversion to optimize for. Now continue to create the ad as usual, and make sure that you select the appropriate call to action. The call to action is the only clickable part of the ad, so it needs to be appealing and match your offer. #2: Stand Out With Landscape Images Previously, the images and videos you shared on Instagram had to be cropped into a square format. While that option is still available, you can now use landscape and portrait formats as well. These formats allow you to make your images taller or wider than the square format allows. This gives you more cropping options to ensure your images show everything you want in them. Plus, the unusual formats help your posts stand out in Instagram's feed. When creating an Instagram ad, you choose the format of your image in the creative section. Once you upload or select your image, you'll see an option to crop it. When you click the gray button and select Instagram, the cropping window gives you two options for cropping your image. Click Original to crop it based on the image's original format (landscape or portrait), or click Square to crop it as a square. In the image below, you can see how different cropping options affect what users see in the feed. Keep in mind that carousel ads are currently only available in square formats. #3: Tell a Story With Carousel Ads To create image carousel ads for Instagram, you need to connect your Instagram account to Facebook. This is easy to do if you haven't done it already. Facebook carousel ads are well-known and frequently used, and they're also available for Instagram ads. Businesses typically use Facebook carousel ads to feature multiple products or benefits in one ad, in an effort to increase sales. However, one of the best uses for Instagram's carousel ads is storytelling. Although Instagram can be used as a selling platform, businesses use it more often for engagement, building brand rapport, and increasing followers. Telling a story or narrative through multiple images can help you accomplish all of these goals. You can create a carousel ad in the creative section of the ad setup process. As soon as you get to the creative page, you're asked how you want your ad to look. You can choose a single image, a video, or multiple images in one ad. For carousel ads, choose the Multiple images in one ad option. Next,

Google Analytics: How to Make Smart Marketing Decisions

Google Analytics: How to Make Smart Marketing Decisions

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to know if your content and social activities are supporting your business? Are you wondering how you can use Google Analytics to track your progress? To learn how to use Google Analytics to help make smart marketing decisions, I interview Andy Crestodina for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Andy Crestodina, author of Content Chemistry and co-founder of Orbit Media (a Chicago-based web design agency). Andy has also written for Social Media Examiner and he's a Google Analytics expert. Andy shares how to use Google Analytics to help you make informed marketing choices. You'll discover why analytics are so important to your business success and step-by-step instructions on how to get started. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Google Analytics Why go beyond the basic metrics of blog comments, social share numbers and page views? Andy explains that these basic metrics will not give you return on investment (ROI) information. The formula he uses is traffic × your conversion rate = success, which can be leads, subscribers or ecommerce customers. The more you're aware of how things are connected and the deeper you look down the funnel, the more equipped you'll be to make better decisions. It's just like the dashboard of a car. You'll hear what happened when I looked a lot deeper into the analytics of a Social Media Examiner article that ranks number one in Google search, and why it made me realize that it wasn't doing as well as I thought. As a marketer, you need to reprogram your mind to what really matters, and it's not what immediately meets the eye. Listen to the show to find out why it's so important to pay attention to the conversion rate. Do you need to be a data nerd to benefit from all of this? Andy says that you don't have to be a data nerd. The only math you need to know is that anything times zero equals zero. Andy relates it to a Magic 8 Ball. You can ask a question, shake up the analytics and find the answer. As a marketer, you need to know how to look at these numbers. It gets easier over time. For every action you take, you can measure it and see if it works, and then make improvements. Listen to the show to find out why Google Analytics is similar to using Photoshop. Common mistakes marketers make with Google Analytics According to Andy, it always comes down to the setup of Google Analytics. There are two or three basic steps you need to take in the Admin section of Google Analytics that make your data much more meaningful. One of the first things you need to do is filter out the traffic from your own IP address. Until you do this, your analytics will be polluted by your own activity. Within the Admin section, you can create an IP address filter. To find out what your IP address is, just type "What is my IP?" into Google search, and it will give you the number. You'll discover what to do with this number in the dashboard to ensure your results are more meaningful. The next step (which is important) is goals. Until you set up your goals, you'll only have half of the picture. Listen to the show to find out what's important if you are a relatively low-traffic site or you're into content or social media marketing. The definitions of goals and conversions A conversion is when a visitor takes an action on a website. There are different types of conversions and analytics that you can set up,

A True Treasure

by @ Position Research

Nulla vitae elit libero, a pharetra augue. Aenean eu leo quam. Pellentesque ornare sem lacinia quam venenatis vestibulum. Cras mattis consectetur purus sit amet fermentum. Nullam quis risus eget urna mollis ornare vel eu leo. Donec sed odio dui. Fusce dapibus, tellus ac cursus commodo, tortor mauris condimentum nibh, ut fermentum massa justo sit amet

The post A True Treasure appeared first on Position Research.

Social Sharing: How to Get More People to Share Your Content

Social Sharing: How to Get More People to Share Your Content

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you publish content online? Want more people to share your content? To learn how to get more people to share your content, I interview Mark Schaefer. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Mark Schaefer, author of The Tao of Twitter and Social Media Explained. His blog Grow was awarded #2 on our top 10 blogs of 2015. Mark also co-hosts the Marketing Companion podcast. His latest book is called The Content Code: Six Essential Strategies for Igniting Your Content, Your Marketing, and Your Business. In this episode Mark will explore why people share via social media. You'll discover what you can do to improve your chances that people will share your content. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Social Sharing How Mark got into content and blogging Around 2008, Mark started his own business doing consulting and teaching. He realized if he was going to talk about Twitter, blogging and Facebook, he had to use them. So he started a blog as an experiment. It took him about 9 months to find his voice, Mark recalls. It dawned on him that all of his contacts and business were coming through his blog, so he needed to pay attention to it. The blog really started kicking in around 2010, and has been building ever since. The turning point happened when Mark started to write posts that were more authentic and had personality. Instead of finding his audience, Mark's audience found him. Mark tells new bloggers "To stand out, you need to be original. And to be original, you need to have the courage to tell your own story and have your own voice." In 2009 Mark wrote a post that was a little bit controversial, called The Social Media Country Club. As a new blogger, Mark felt like an outsider. He says it seemed like all of the influential bloggers were in this club, where they never said anything negative about each other. Mark was thinking, "How are we going to grow if we don't challenge each other?" Coming from 27 years of marketing experience, Mark expected any channel used for business to be measurable, while others felt it was all about the conversation. Though nervous, Mark started speaking his mind. The reaction was supportive and positive. His audience was grateful somebody finally said it. Listen to the show to discover what Mark blogged about at first and how he felt about it. Why marketing with content is so difficult today Whether you're an individual blogger, working in a business or working for a brand, many niches are getting crowded with content and social media activity. This makes it very difficult to compete. Mark feels this was predictable. He says when the Internet first started, everyone needed a website. If you were the first one with a website, you had an advantage. Then you needed to be found. If you were the first one to figure out search engine optimization, you had an advantage, because you're going to be at the top of the search rankings. However, after your competitors figured it out, it got harder and more expensive to be in marketing. He says it's the same thing with blogging. It's hard to be seen, because people are figuring it out. People are trying to stand out, but creating more or better content isn't necessarily the answer. For the last year, Mark has been obsessed with figuring out how to maneuver in this very crowded world. And that's why he wrote The Content Code. Listen to the show to hear my Times Square analogy. Mark's code for success Mark explains how all conversations are about content: creating more,

Social Media Tools: How to Simplify Your Social Media Marketing

Social Media Tools: How to Simplify Your Social Media Marketing

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you looking for a better way to manage your social activities? Are you wondering what tools can help your social media marketing? To discover free or low-cost tools to simplify your social media marketing, I interview Ian Cleary for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Ian Cleary, the founder of Razor Social—a blog dedicated to social media tools. He's also the social media tools writer for Social Media Examiner. Ian shares why as a marketer you should look beyond Google Analytics and Facebook Insights data. You'll learn the services available to keep up to date with relevant content and the tools to use to monitor your overall activities across all social channels. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Social Media Tools How did you become interested in social media tools? Ian explains how his history working for software companies and his very strong technology background led him to social media. When he started to look at all of the key influencers around social media, he soon realized the social media tools niche was perfect because nobody owned that space. Listen to the show to hear how Ian is amazed by the number of tools in development. Why you should look beyond Google Analytics and Facebook Insights data Ian states that although Google Analytics is useful, it doesn't track things such as what's happening on social media related to Twitter or LinkedIn. And the Facebook analytics tool is a little too complicated for many people. One free tool that Ian recommends is LikeAlyzer, which is a very simple Facebook analytics tool. It evaluates your Facebook Page and will give you a score out of 100. You'll then receive some basic recommendations on what to improve. Listen to the show to find out what other amazing recommendations it will reveal. Tools to help marketers keep up with news and content they may want to share Ian explains why there is a lot of activity in this area. The two tools that Ian likes to use on a day-to-day basis are Feedly and Scoop.it. Feedly is a website that allows you to read a selection of posts from any blogs you subscribe to. When you log in, you will see the latest posts. It has a really nice user interface. You can access the content through the web and your mobile device. It also integrates with Buffer app. You'll discover how this can help you with your social media workflow. Another advantage of Feedly is you can group the sites you subscribe to. You'll hear Ian explain the benefits of this and how he groups his. The integration of Feedly and Buffer saves marketers a lot of time. Another tool to help you discover content is Scoop.it. You can follow people on Scoop.it to find relevant content. You can then add this content to one of your boards. It's not only a great way to find content, but also for others to help create it for you. Scoop.it is similar to Feedly in terms of the collection of content, except it's based around people who pick the content for you. You'll discover how to find the right people to follow and the most popular boards around your niche. Ian shares what replacement he uses for Digg and why it's a good source of content. Ian uses a tool within Facebook called Post Planner. It shows you trending content and what's been shared the most. You can then select content and add it to your Facebook Page. Listen to the show to hear about how LinkedIn has invited authorities to bl...

Why Video is a Must-Have for SEO

by AudiologyDesign @ AudiologyDesign » Search Engine Optimization

Everybody knows that Google is the number one search engine. However, you may not be aware that YouTube, the son of Google, ranks as a close second. In 2009, a...

The post Why Video is a Must-Have for SEO appeared first on AudiologyDesign.

8 Twitter Tips to Improve Your Twitter Marketing

8 Twitter Tips to Improve Your Twitter Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is your Twitter marketing working? Do you want more engagement for your tweets? Knowing how to write your tweets and when to publish them can increase visibility, boost engagement and drive traffic to your site. In this article you'll discover eight tips to deliver better tweets. Listen to this article: #1: Tweet Without Links Research shows that tweets without links get more engagement. Remember that not everything you tweet has to have a link. If you limit the number of links you share on Twitter, you'll add value to the ones you do. For example, I tweeted this same quote with and without a link. The one without the link got more engagement. Twitter is an excellent platform to build your brand and create trust, so spend time developing relationships with your followers rather than just sharing a lot of links. Plus, when you tweet fewer links, the people who trust you know whatever links you choose to share are likely worth clicking. #2: Use the Right Hashtags If you want to get noticed, add hashtags that give your tweets context. It's important not to overdo it with hashtags, however. Handy tools like Hashtagify and RiteTag can help you find the right hashtags to use. Find Hashtags With Hashtagify Hashtagify allows you to search for a hashtag you want to use. In the Search box, type in your hashtag (socialmedia, for example) and press Enter. The results let you see the most popular related hashtags. By default, you see the results in Basic Mode view, which looks like a mind map. Click the Table Mode button to see the related hashtags ranked in order of popularity. You can use any of these alternative hashtags or combine several of them for each tweet. Check Hashtag Relevance With RiteTag Once you determine what hashtags you want to use, use a tool like RiteTag to find out how relevant they are. Go to RiteTag and sign in with (and authorize) your Twitter account. Then click the New button at the top of the page. In the Compose New Tweet box, type in your tweet. You'll notice that when you add hashtags, RiteTag gives you a color-coded rating for each hashtag in real time. Green is good, blue is cool and red is overused. RiteTag also has a Chrome extension that shows the tool's codes and analytics for your tweets whenever you use Twitter, Buffer, Hootsuite or another platform to compose or schedule a tweet. Using Hashtagify and RiteTag together is a great way to find effective hashtags for your tweets to get the most visibility and reach. Use these tools to do research and then build a library of hashtags for your future tweets. #3: Add Images for Shared Links It's no surprise that tweets with images stand out and get more engagement than tweets without images. Fortunately, there are a variety of tools you can use to find the right images to use in your tweets. Twitshot is an online tool you can use in any browser that makes it easy to find images to use when you share links. It's also available as a Chrome extension and iOS app. Compose your tweet in the Twitshot tweet box and paste in the URL you want to share. Twitshot then searches for and lets you see all possible images that go with that link. Select one of the available images or upload your own image. Everyone knows that tweets with images stand out, but not everyone takes the time to add them. Consistently incorporating images will improve your engagement. #4: Tweet With the Proper Format To compose a tweet in the proper format, you need to have all of the individual elements in the correct order. Start your tweet with text and then add a link. Make sure to include the attribution with @mentions if applicable. Then add hashtags and insert your image. Now that you know the rules for composing a tweet, you can break them for effect. Come up with multiple ways to tweet the same information to add variety to your Twitter stream.

9 Productivity Tools for Social Media Marketers

9 Productivity Tools for Social Media Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you a busy social media marketer? Looking for tools that will save you time? Using the right tools to stay focused and work more efficiently will help you get more done in a day. In this article you'll discover nine productivity tools for busy marketers. Listen to this article: #1: Save Content Inspiration for Later Use Evernote to create a journal of content ideas and inspiration sources. With text, audio and image options, you can type, dictate or snap an image of whatever has caught your eye. Evernote syncs with all of your devices, so you'll have access to it wherever you are. Reach for it when you're feeling stuck for content ideas. #2: Block Distracting Websites Throughout the course of a day, we have distractions coming at us from a variety of directions. If you intend to spend just a few minutes on Pinterest, only to end up spending half a day looking at recipes, you need Cold Turkey. Use Cold Turkey to group distracting sites, such as social and news sites, and then block them off for certain time periods. Remember, if you're a social media manager who uses native websites to schedule your messages, this probably isn't the app for you. The app works great when you're putting off real work, like drafting your next blog post or newsletter or creating a report for your boss. Set it up for an hour or two and allow yourself some time to write distraction-free. #3: Create Canned Email Responses Do you get a lot of similar emails from customers, such as questions about your return policy or other support-related questions? Save yourself some time and effort with the Canned Responses add-on in Gmail. Rather than write a new response every time, you can save an email as a canned response and use it over and over again. What's great about this feature is that it's not a simple auto-responder that feels robotic and soulless. You can edit canned responses to personalize them for a particular recipient or tailor your answer to a question. To access it, go to your Gmail Inbox and click on the gear icon and select Settings. Then click on the Labs tab to find Canned Responses and select Enable. Now you can save or access your canned responses in the lower-right corner of the New Message window. #4: Secure Account Log In Credentials Do you keep a list of all of your passwords for emails, websites, social media platforms and third-party apps and tools? Is that document really safe? What if you're on the go and can't remember your password for a site? 1Password is the solution for protecting your passwords and giving you quick access to them. The app will store your passwords securely, and autofill them whenever you need them. It's available for Mac, Windows, iOS and Android and as a browser extension. #5: Automate Recurring Tasks Think about all of the repetitive and mechanical tasks you do in the course of a day. Then delegate those tasks to IFTTT and free up your time to focus on bigger things. You can choose from a huge list of social media recipes or create your own. Maybe you want to build a Twitter list for a specific hashtag or get an email notification when someone mentions your business in a tweet. #6: Find and Attribute Images Do you spend a lot of time looking for images online? Have you ever tried to hunt down one specific image? Whether you followed a dead end link or are looking for attribution information to credit an original source, TinEye can help. Use the TinEye browser extension to do a reverse image search and find the original source of any image. #7: Create Tasks From Emails We're all bombarded with emails asking us to do things and complete tasks. You're likely overwhelmed with the sheer volume of email you receive and the challenge of trying to stay on top of requests. If you're using Gmail, you can create to-do items right from your email messages. After you open a message,

How to Map Behavioral Metrics Into Your Key Business Drivers

by Today's Industry Insider @ The Kissmetrics Marketing Blog

Digital marketing is a blessing to marketers because of the wealth of data it provides. Online marketers can analyze and dissect innumerable elements to gain a deeper understanding of the habits and preferences of their customers. As a result, they can effectively put themselves in their customers’ shoes and optimize the entire experience. This allows […]

Conversion Optimization: How to Split Test Your Way to Success

Conversion Optimization: How to Split Test Your Way to Success

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Want to get more leads and subscribers? Have you considered optimizing your opt-in forms? To explore conversion rate optimization for your online forms, I interview Chris Dayley. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Chris Dayley, who is the VP of site testing and optimization at Disruptive Advertising, an agency that specializes in site testing and analytics. Chris's clients include Fandango, Lids.com, and Citrix. Chris explores conversion rate optimization and split testing. You'll discover which elements to test for your opt-in forms. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Conversion Optimization How Chris Got Into This Space Chris got his start driving traffic to websites using search engine optimization (SEO), pay per click (PPC), and social media. The company he worked for was trying to figure out how to monetize their traffic because they were having a hard time getting visitors to convert. Because no one at the company knew about conversion rate optimization, Chris picked it up as a pet project. When he first proposed to test some changes to the site design, there was a lot of pushback from the site designers. After he ran his first round of tests, some of the pages began to see 10% to 15% lifts in conversion. He fell in love with finding out how seemingly small changes could have a big impact on user behavior. Listen to the show to hear the company's initial reaction to testing and the results they got from it. Conversion Rate Optimization and Why It Matters Chris explains that conversion rate optimization is a scientific way to figure out what your audience wants to see on your website in order to convert, and he notes that it should be half of any digital marketer's focus. Driving traffic is only half the battle. While he used to assume that if he drove good traffic to a site, it was going to convert, years of testing have shown that a large portion of your audience won't convert unless you give them the experience they're seeking. Conversion rate optimization is a way of testing different concepts and ideas on your site to find out what your audience actually wants to see. Listen to the show to discover why we use conversion rate optimization at Social Media Examiner and the effect it's had on our marketing. Where to Start Testing Opt-in Forms When doing form optimization, whether it's opt-in, lead generation, or checkout forms, the first things to look at are imagery, color, and font sizes. Make sure your form stands out in contrast to the page and that the image or lack of image is helping your users, Chris says. Chris recommends trying different variations of images, and to make sure the concepts are different, aren't distracting, and add some context to the offer. For example, in Social Media Examiner's previous pop-up, there was no image, even though our provider OptinMonster and other web-based form providers such as LeadPages allow you to include an image. Chris recommended testing an image of the cover of the actual product on offer, a graphic representation of the title, and an icon representation (shown in the image below.) The icon came out as the winner by a long shot! When asked about how many elements to test at a time, Chris advises different approaches for different projects. There are basically four elements in an opt-in form: the headline, content, a potential image, and a button to opt in. With so few elements, each one will have a huge role in the conversion rate, and it's easy to separate them out and test them one at ...

How to Grow Your Twitter Following

How to Grow Your Twitter Following

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want to grow your followers without advertising? Is Twitter working for you? Investing in organic growth on Twitter takes time, consistency and commitment. But the rewards are more credibility and social proof. In this article you'll find simple steps to organically grow your Twitter followers. Listen to this article: #1: Use IFTTT to Curate Twitter Lists Automatically When you add people to a Twitter list, it signals to them that their tweets are valuable enough to be put in a specific category. People on your lists are likely to reciprocate by following your account. While adding users to a Twitter list manually takes time, it's getting easier to automate the process thanks to new technology. Go to the IFTTT website and create an account or login, then connect your Twitter account. Next, create a recipe that tells your Twitter account that when a new tweet is posted with a hashtag you determine, it should add that user to a new list you create. That's it. Now, whenever people tweet with the hashtag in your recipe, they will be automatically added to your list. Some people will follow you immediately. Send out a tweet to thank them. Connect with the others on your list with a tweet, saying that you added them to your list because you find their content valuable. One more thing: when you're using the automatic method, make sure you follow all of the people you add to your lists. #2: Stay On-Topic and On-Trend Twitter users want to view content they're interested in, not the stuff you think is interesting. Do some research to find which topics related to your field are also popular on Twitter. To find out what's trending, sign into Twitter on your desktop. You'll see the trending hashtags and topics appear on the left-hand side of your page. If appropriate, find ways to contribute to the conversation by tweeting with a trending hashtag. For example, find ways your product or service relates to a holiday. Now, I'm not saying you should tweet out your latest blog post and include a trending hashtag that is completely unrelated just to get more views. This is a pretty spammy approach. The goal is not to abandon your brand and jump on whatever shines brightest. It's to take advantage of any widespread trends, news and happenings that are related to your business. Ideally, find something subtle, funny and relatable. When the conversation changes, go with the flow. Jump on the right trends and you'll increase the visibility of your tweets and ultimately gain followers. #3: Respond to Tweets From Large Accounts It's also good practice to reply to tweets posted by accounts with hundreds of thousands or millions of followers. Responding to a giant in your industry is a prime opportunity to engage with bigger crowds. Once you respond, your tweet is attached to their tweet and everyone else can see it. #4: Thank People Who Engage With You This should be the golden rule of Twitter: Engage with people when they engage with you. When people add you to a Twitter list, thank them. When users favorite a tweet you're mentioned in, thank them. When people follow you, thank them. When people retweet you, thank them. This goes beyond gratitude. Thank and engage with people every single time they engage with you, whether they ask a question, offer a suggestion, mention you at an event, etc. Not only will this help you keep new followers, it also prompts them to share your stuff even more with their network, thereby increasing your visibility. People like people who notice them and respond to them. Getting in this habit is a surefire way to organically build an engaged Twitter community. #5: Tweet Those You Quote Whether you write a blog post that includes a Twitter user or use a tool like Storify to compile a bunch of tweets, remember to @mention those you include. People like to see their names published.

Starting a YouTube Channel: How to Achieve YouTube Growth

Starting a YouTube Channel: How to Achieve YouTube Growth

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have a YouTube channel? Want to optimize it to get more subscribers? To explore how to build and grow a YouTube channel, I interview Tim Schmoyer. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Tim Schmoyer, founder of Video Creators, a YouTube channel and website that helps people grow their YouTube subscribers. With 10 years experience, millions of video views, and more than 200,000 YouTube subscribers, Tim is the world's leading expert on building YouTube channels. Tim explores what you need to know to build a successful YouTube channel. You'll discover how to customize your channel. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Starting a YouTube Channel Your YouTube Channel Approach Tim says if you aren't trying to grow a community, have no need for subscribers or conversions, and only want to share your videos with your family, then posting anything and everything is fine. However, if you want to build a brand around your video content to grow subscribers, views, sales, conversions, etc., then you need a more focused approach. A channel, Tim explains, is another word for your YouTube account. It's where your videos reside. For example, Tim's videos are on YouTube.com/videocreators, and when people are looking for his videos, they know that's where to find them. A YouTube channel can be focused on a topic, but it doesn't have to be, Tim says. It could also revolve around a belief, a person, etc. He stresses that your YouTube channel should be very specific to target a specific group of people and deliver a very specific value. Listen to the show to discover who comprises the demographic on YouTube. Common Mistakes People make three big mistakes on YouTube. First, many feel like they need a high-end production team and fancy equipment. Tim says you can grow a very successful channel with basic equipment. Your smartphone may be sufficient, depending on the type of content you want to make, the audience you want to reach, and the image you want to present for your brand. Start with what you have, and possibly invest in a lens for your camera and an external microphone to clip into your phone. Sometimes, a full production studio works against you, because the people have a different content focus and expect higher quality. YouTube viewers, on the other hand, are very forgiving of a shaky handcam if the value of the content is high. Second, people don't pay enough attention to the titles and thumbnails of their videos. Most of your YouTube traffic will come from related videos, suggested by YouTube, when users are viewing other content; an enticing title and thumbnail drive those clicks. Tim says a lot of the top YouTube creators he knows spend just as much time, if not more, developing their title and thumbnail than they spend on the actual content. Start with your title and thumbnail in mind before you start shooting the video. This enables you to capture the thumbnail you need. For example, a video about how to look better on stage needs a thumbnail that portrays that; it could be as simple as a picture of a crowd of people with a spotlight on the main focal point on stage. If you shoot the video first and figure out the title later, the opening may not quite connect to the title until two and a half minutes into the video. The third mistake people make is taking too long to hook viewers. Tim says that when someone clicks your video, you have 15 seconds maximum to relate to the title and thumbnail. That way, viewers feel like they're getting the value they were e...

How to Target Your Facebook Ads to Business Locations

How to Target Your Facebook Ads to Business Locations

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to get your Facebook posts in front of an audience at a specific physical location? Have you considered targeting people based on where they work? Using workplace targeting makes it easy to get your content in front of the right people at the right company. In this article, you'll discover how to use workplace targeting to serve Facebook ads to people who work at specific companies. Listen to this article: Why Use Workplace Targeting? Simply put, it works. It's one of the most effective ways to target users on Facebook, especially when it comes to informing the media and other influencers. There are other uses, too: If you own or manage a restaurant, publish posts about your daily specials and promote your posts to people who work at the businesses within walking distance. If you're promoting an article about the top events in your town, you could target people who work at the local university and other companies to help spread the word. If you run a PR agency, you can post links to successful client stories you were involved with and promote them to decision-makers who work at companies you'd like to represent. If you're pitching to investors or journalists, you can amplify your best content to impress people before your meeting. The possibilities are endless, and here's how you can get started. #1: Create Your Targeted Campaign First, you'll need to decide what you want to achieve out of this Facebook ad campaign. Based on that goal, choose the content you want your target audience to see. If you want to highlight external content, create a post that links to an article, video, or image. You can also use this technique to drive engagement on native posts, like this one. After you've posted to your page, you're ready to get your page post in front of the right people at the right company. Open up your Ads Manager, either directly or through Business Manager, and click Create Campaign. You'll then be taken to a screen with many objectives to choose from. For this example, the best option is the first, Boost Your Posts. Click on the Boost Your Posts objective and you'll see a sidebar come out on the right. Use the sidebar to select the post you'd like to promote. You can also give your campaign a name. Then click the Set Audience & Budget button to continue. #2: Define Your Campaign Audience Here's the fun part. This is where you get to target the people you want to see your ad. You want to target by workplace. To find that option, click the More Demographics drop-down menu, click on Work, and select one of the workplace targeting options. This example targets Employers. Enter the name of the company you'd like to target in the box that appears. You'll also want to change the location targeting to match the geographic location of the company you're targeting. If your target has multiple offices, this helps ensure you're targeting the right audience. #3: Set Your Campaign Budget Start with spending $1/day for around two weeks. As you learn more about how your ads perform, you can adjust your budget and scheduling as needed. This campaign example is set to run for 10 days at $1/day. You'll notice the option to give your ad set a name down at the bottom of the page. This is helpful when you're dealing with multiple ad sets under a single campaign. #4: Create Your Ad Double-check that everything looks the way you want it to. Don't worry about optimization, bid amount, when you get charged, ad scheduling, or delivery type; just make sure that your budget, duration, and campaign name are set. When you're satisfied, click Choose New Ad Creative. #5: Choose Your Ad Creative After creating your campaign, it's time to make an ad for the page post you made in Step 1. You can select that post from the Select an Existing Page Post drop-down list to the left of the preview.

Facebook and Twitter User Behavior Changes: New Research

Facebook and Twitter User Behavior Changes: New Research

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is your business on Facebook and Twitter? Have you considered sharing news with your audience? Research indicates that people are using Facebook and Twitter for more than connecting with friends and brands. They're now looking to these platforms for updates on current events. In this article you'll discover how the way people use Facebook and Twitter is shifting, and how brands can respond. Listen to this article: #1: More People Get Their News From Facebook and Twitter A July 2015 study from Pew Research Center reveals that increasing numbers of Twitter and Facebook users visit the platforms to get news. Of the over 2,000 study participants, 63% now depend on both channels for updates on national events and political issues, big leaps from 2013 numbers. Twitter, which was more news-oriented from the beginning, didn't have as dramatic a leap: 52% to 63% during the two-year period. Those reporting they use Facebook for news, on the other hand, grew from 47% in 2013 to 63% in 2015, or 16%. While the opportunity to stay abreast of friends and family events gets users on Facebook initially, it's news (sports, science, technology, business and entertainment) that keeps them there. As the chart below shows, Facebook's user numbers didn't budge from 2013 to 2014. Despite the inevitable slowdown, today 71% of Internet users have a Facebook account, and 70% of those go to the site daily. Forty-five percent go there several times a day. By following friends, brands, organizations and news outlets, Facebook (and Twitter) users have created their own customized newspapers. They seem to like their new handiwork. While Twitter's audience numbers made an impressive 28% leap from 2013 to 2014, the platform's failure to gain the ubiquity of Facebook has disappointed many. Twitter remains hard at work creating a niche for live-tweeting events, television shows and sports, but it hasn't shown much promise for the retailers who pay for ads. Key takeaway: As Facebook and Twitter mature, their audience growth rates are leveling off. Younger audiences abandoned Facebook for Instagram, but baby boomers, Gen Xers and mature holdouts finally claimed their profiles. Brands should align their marketing content with current events to engage users. #2: Twitter Is the Go-to Platform for Breaking News The Pew Research Center image at the beginning of this article reveals another interesting fact: Even though most Twitter users tweet just once or a few times a week (far less often than Facebook users engage), if there is a nationwide crisis, exciting sports game, gaffe by a politician or a celebrity scandal, they flock to Twitter. Numbers for those who report they follow breaking news on Twitter (59%) are nearly double those who say they do so on Facebook (31%). Twitter is the go-to destination for up-to-the-minute news and comments on that news. Twitter is also the channel where sports fans and news junkies engage by sharing their opinions. Users do more than just read the headlines, they engage. As the graphic above shows, more than half of users tweet at least once about news each week. Also, while the majority of accounts that Twitter users follow are friends and family, the majority of tweets in their news feeds come from news outlets and journalists. In the image below, you can see that while just 14% of the accounts Twitter users follow are news outlets, 33% of the tweets in their Twitter feed are from these outlets. Breaking it down further, the most popular news outlets are sports (with 35% of Twitter news followers receiving sports tweets), business/science/technology (14% getting news on these topics) and civic and political (12%). Keep in mind that in this study, the final sample providing Twitter data was small. Pew drew from its original group of 3,212 respondents only those who self-identified as Twitter users, provided their Twitter handles for analysis and had valid publi...

7 Ways to Improve Your LinkedIn Company Page

7 Ways to Improve Your LinkedIn Company Page

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want more exposure for your business on LinkedIn? Are you using your LinkedIn company page to its full potential? LinkedIn company pages let you provide value to your audience while giving them the chance to engage with your business, effectively establishing your credibility as a trusted resource. In this article you'll discover seven ways a LinkedIn company page can help your business stand out on LinkedIn. Listen to this article: #1: Support Brand Recognition There are two primary visuals to be aware of on your LinkedIn company page: your company logo, which should be consistent on all websites and marketing materials, and the banner image on the top of your profile, which you can customize for LinkedIn and change whenever you'd like. The banner (or background) image is important to brand your company. Since you may have a different audience on LinkedIn from your other social networks, keep certain graphic elements that define your brand such as colors, fonts, and design, while adding visual variety. For example, HubSpot's LinkedIn banner image has their colors, along with the words "Academy & You," to promote the #FindYourAnd hashtag campaign for their HubSpot Academy educational program. Even though there's a place for your website link on your LinkedIn company page, I recommend that you add your URL and central phone number (if you have one) to the banner image. You don't need to include your logo, since it will be right above the image on your page. Add a call to action, tag line, or hashtag to invite some engagement from your audience. In addition to a main primary banner image, create custom background images too. This can promote upcoming events, a new content series, a product launch, a hashtag campaign, your best clients, or new hires. For instance, Ventiv Technology features their new CEO in their current background image. More than anything, your visuals should be consistent and reflect your other social media and business branding. To update your company page images, or really anything on your page profile, click Edit on the right side of your company page, then Edit Page. #2: Promote Specialized Landing Pages Your website URL is required for your company page, and it's likely you'll want to keep the main one most of the time. However, if you're launching a book or promoting something, change your website URL to point to your blog or a product or event page. Putting your website URL in the banner image gives you the freedom to change the link for your website at any time. #3: Speak Directly to Prospects In a lot of situations, the company description is someone's first impression of your business. Whether they're job seekers looking for more info about your company, vendors seeking strategic partnership, or potential customers and clients checking you out, you want to captivate them immediately. Most businesses copy and paste their About section from the company website. While that's better than nothing, there's a way to step it up a notch. Write a description that directly speaks to the people who are visiting your company page, letting them know who you are and how you can benefit them. In her description, Jeanne Bliss of CustomerBLISS tells her company's story and her background, shares the pain point of her ideal client, and then states how she can help. Plus, the image is an excellent visual representation of what she has to offer. Speak directly to the client with a description that builds your and your business's credibility. #4: Improve Visibility in Search Go to the Specialties section and add your keywords. This will make your company page a little easier to find. Your keywords are likely your specialties. Make them known, so those searching can find your company. #5: Feature Specialties Showcase pages are really subpages of your company page. You may want to use showcase pages if you have an annu...

Google SPAM Algorithm & New SERP Tests

Google SPAM Algorithm & New SERP Tests

by Scott Van Achte @ StepForth Web Marketing Inc.

Ross and John discuss the latest algorithm updates targeting blackhat SEO tactics like PBNs and linkwheels. They also delve into a wide range of news topics from WordPress updates, to AMP URLs, and fresh examples of Google testing search results using categorization. This February 13, 2017 SEO 101 podcast is available now: listen or Download […]

The post Google SPAM Algorithm & New SERP Tests appeared first on StepForth Web Marketing Inc..

Influencer Marketing: How to Scale Your Social Media Exposure

Influencer Marketing: How to Scale Your Social Media Exposure

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Wondering how to increase your business's reach on social media? Have you considered partnering with an influencer? To explore how to develop business relationships with influencers, I interview Neal Schaffer. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Neal Schaffer, author of three social media books including Maximize Your Social. He teaches social media strategy at Rutgers University and is the founder of PDCA Social, an agency that specializes in helping Japanese businesses leverage American social media platforms. Neal explores the difference between paid and earned influencers. You'll discover how to use influencer marketing to scale your social media results. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Influencer Marketing Why Influencer Marketing? Social media is a noisy place and the days of 100% organic success are over. Brands, companies, and practitioners need to use paid social to get noticed. In this environment, Neal believes other people can accelerate your social media marketing efforts. Put simply, you need to consider other users on social media who might be able to help spread the word about your brand and amplify your message. Neal identifies three different types of "others": your employees or partners (employee advocacy), your fans (brand advocacy), and influencers (also known as influencer marketing). Each type is powerful in its own way, and in 2017, influencer marketing is the most mainstream. It can help you cut through the noise in a different way than paid social. Plus, influencer marketing is ideally more authentic and leads to more engagement. I ask Neal to explain what influencer marketing is, for people who are new to the concept. Neal says influencer marketing involves partnering with people who have influence over others. In the old days, newspaper writers and television broadcasters had tremendous influence. Now, in certain online or social media communities, people on YouTube or Instagram are famous and influential in a way that's similar to big-name media celebrities. Some social media influencers focus on one network, such as Instagram or YouTube, whereas others have appeal across several platforms. With influencer marketing, you work with an influencer who talks about your brand, and those mentions of your product or service have a positive effect on your business. People become influencers on social media because they're creating their own valuable content. They have a regular audience that cares about the influencer's tips, recommendations, or other content. However, unlike a true celebrity, a person doesn't need a million followers or subscribers to be an influencer. They need to have relevance only in their community. For example, a YouTuber may have never heard of a podcasting influencer. That's okay. The podcaster needs to have influence only within their specific podcasting community. Listen to the show to hear more about how social influencers compare to big-name celebrities. How to Discover and Evaluate Potential Influencers To begin, use listening tools and do keyword searches to learn who in your industry is talking about topics or products relevant to your business. For instance, a consumer brand selling to moms needs to know which mommy bloggers are talking about products similar to theirs, or which Instagrammers are taking photos and using hashtags related to their products. A B2B company needs to seek out tech bloggers who carry a lot of weight. Remember, influence isn't only about the number of followers. Find people who are producing content that seems to have an effect.

5 Lesser Known Facebook Page Features for Marketers

5 Lesser Known Facebook Page Features for Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you manage a Facebook page for your business? Interested in ways to improve your marketing? In addition to the Facebook features you use for business every day, there are some handy ones you may have overlooked. In this article you'll discover five lesser known Facebook Page features for marketers. Listen to this article: #1: Free Images for Ads When creating a Facebook ad, you can choose from a searchable database of thousands of free stock images from within the Facebook image library. This takes an extra step out of the ad creation process. This image library is powered by Shutterstock, but there's one important caveat: Not all of the images meet Facebook's advertising guidelines. For this reason, it's important to familiarize yourself with the guidelines and choose your images carefully. You don't want your ads getting rejected over some minor technicality such as the 20% text rule on ad images. #2: Ad Relevance Scores The ad relevance score is basically Facebook's answer to Google's quality score for AdWords. The relevance score guides how often your Facebook ad will be displayed and how much you'll pay for each ad engagement. Facebook considers a lot of different factors when calculating your relevance score, including positive and negative feedback via video views, clicks, comments, likes and other ad interactions. If people report your ad or tell Facebook they don't want to see it anymore, those actions count against you. Keeping an eye on your ad relevance score can help you determine if your ad needs work. Oddly enough, this setting is unchecked by default. To enable ad relevance scoring, open the ad or ad set in your Ads Manager and navigate to Customize Columns. From the list of available columns, find and select the Relevance Score check box. Enabling this option adds a Relevance Score column to your ads reports so you can keep an eye on this metric. #3: Email Contact Import A great way to grow your audience is to invite the people in your email address book to like your Facebook business page. To do that, go to your Facebook business page, click on the ellipsis (…) button (next to the Share button on your cover image) and then select Invite Email Contacts from the drop-down menu. Next, you see a pop-up box that lists all of the different integration options you can use to import your contacts. Identify the contact list you want to import and click the Invite Contacts link to the right. After you upload your list, a dialog box appears where you can select which contacts to invite. You have the option to select individual contacts or the group as a whole. After you select your contacts, click Preview Invitation. On the next page, review the invitation, select the check box that you're authorized to send invitations and click Send. There are a couple of points to keep in mind when sending invitations. You can upload up to 5,000 contacts per day, so if you have large customer or subscriber lists, you'll have to send invitations in batches. Remember, your page may already be suggested to your contacts who use Facebook, so you can decide whether to email them as well. If you're already showing up in their recommended pages, it's just free advertising for you. #4: Facebook Post Scheduling The ability to schedule Facebook posts is pretty handy, especially if you're using promoted posts. The good news is that you don't need Hootsuite or Buffer to do it. You can schedule future posts right in Facebook. You can even backdate posts so that they appear earlier in your timeline. To access this feature, go the Publishing Tools tab, select Scheduled Posts and click the Create button. Compose your post and then select Schedule from the Publish drop-down menu. Select the date and time to schedule your post. When you're finished, click Schedule. Scheduling posts can be especially useful for larger teams where you have different ...

How to Create Custom Instagram Feeds

How to Create Custom Instagram Feeds

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want an efficient way to stay in touch with your peers, customers and colleagues on Instagram? Have you considered creating custom feeds of their updates? There are tools that make it easy to organize your favorite Instagram accounts into feeds so you never miss an update again. In this article you'll discover how to use Mashfeed and Iconosquare to create customized Instagram feeds. Listen to this article: #1: Create Instagram Feeds With Mashfeed Mashfeed allows you to create your own custom feeds from Instagram, as well as from Twitter, YouTube and Facebook (even from accounts you don't follow). The app makes it easy to categorize your favorite accounts. Mashfeed is available for iPhone and you can download it from the App Store for free. Set Up a Feed When you first open the app, you need to create an account. Pick a username, enter a password and type in your email address. You're then prompted to add a photo, invite friends and follow suggested feeds, but you can skip these steps if you want. To create an Instagram feed, tap the + button in the top-right corner of the screen. In the field at the top, enter a name for your new feed. By default, the feed is public, but you can make it private by tapping Change. Then tap Add Ingredients. Now you're ready to add Instagram users or hashtags you'd like to follow. To do that, tap the Add User button. The first time you use the app, you'll be prompted to connect it to your Instagram account. Tap the Connect to Instagram button and then type in your username and password. After logging into your Instagram account, tap Authorize to allow Mashfeed to access it. Once you've successfully connected your Instagram account, you can start adding users and hashtags to your Instagram feed. To add a user, tap Add User and then tap on the username of the account you'd like to add. You can use the search box at the top of the screen to find specific users. If you want to view a user's profile before adding the account to your Instagram feed, tap the eye icon to the right of the username. When you're finished adding users to your feed, tap Done in the top-right corner of the screen. View Your Feeds To view all of the Instagram feeds you've created, tap the Home button at the bottom of the screen. Then tap on the Instagram feed you want to view. You'll then see the most recent content from the accounts within that Instagram feed. Like Iconosquare, you can heart Instagram posts within the app. If you tap a username within your feed, here are some additional tasks you can do: Unfollow the account. Add the account to another Instagram feed you've created. View all of the posts from that Instagram account. Unlike Iconosquare, Mashfeed doesn't allow you to comment directly through your Instagram feeds, which is a frustrating limitation of the app. That said, many other third-party apps (including Iconosquare) use Instagram's API to allow users to post comments outside of Instagram's native environment. So hopefully this functionality will make its way into a future update of the Mashfeed app. #2: Create Instagram Feeds With Iconosquare Iconosquare is an online tool that provides metrics about your Instagram followers for free. You can also use it to create Instagram feeds you can view through your desktop or smartphone browser. Here's how to get started. Set Up a Group First, you need to create an Iconosquare account. In the top-right corner of the home page, click the Sign in With Instagram button. Once you've signed into your Instagram account, you'll be redirected to the Iconosquare dashboard. Next, you need to create groups to organize the accounts you follow. To do this, click the My Followings tab at the top of the dashboard. Now hover over the circle below any accounts you're following and on the pop-up menu, click New Group.

Top Brands Rediscovering YouTube: New Research

Top Brands Rediscovering YouTube: New Research

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is video part of your marketing mix? Wondering if YouTube is still relevant? In the past year YouTube has enjoyed a sudden surge of interest from both advertisers and young consumers, largely fueled by mobile-device use. In this article you'll discover recent findings on how brands, consumers and marketers are using YouTube today. Listen to this article: #1: YouTube Video-Viewing Time Is Surging A spring 2015 study from comScore and UBS (as reported in eMarketer) found that U.S. consumers increased their video-viewing time on YouTube by 17% over 2014. For a platform that's 10 years old, that's quite a leap. The chart below shows that the biggest year-over-year gain came from mobile users, who increased time spent on YouTube's app by 31%. With desktop-viewing hours declining 30% in 2014 and 9% in 2015, clearly YouTube captured the mobile opportunity. Google's own numbers also indicate a surge even greater than what was noted in the comScore/UBS report. In the search giant's Q2 July 2015 earnings call, CFO Ruth Porat reported that consumer watch time on YouTube had risen 60% from July 2014. That's the fastest growth YouTube has experienced in two years. Porat also shared that mobile watch time alone had doubled. In the above chart Facebook's video usage increase of 852% in 2014 may impress, but remember that it started from almost nothing, so the multiple will be large. The bottom line remains that total time spent viewing video via YouTube amounts to 34 billion hours in 2015. On the other hand, time spent consuming video via Facebook (at 14.3 billion hours) is less than half of YouTube's amount. Still, viewing video on Facebook only began rising in fall 2014, and there could be far greater upside as more consumers pick up the habit of viewing video via Facebook. The article Facebook to Overtake YouTube: Five New Research Findings covers how in a 2014 survey of 180,000 videos across 20,000 Facebook pages, Socialbakers found that direct video uploads to Facebook were increasing rapidly. More content going up means more viewing time will result. Key Takeaway: Because the biggest leap in viewer time spent on YouTube is from mobile devices, you have to credit the user-centric upgrades that YouTube made to its mobile app over the last two years. The authors of the eMarketer study YouTube Advertising: Why Google's Platform Will Stay on Top explain that the new mobile app redesign delivers only the most relevant and personalized content. Further, YouTube instituted TrueView ads that allow users to skip ads at the beginning of videos within seconds. With the power to skip away from the ads, users feel more in control of the experience. #2: Ad Revenue Is Expected to Keep Rising With viewers rediscovering YouTube as a worthwhile channel to spend time on, it only makes sense that advertisers have followed them there. A Look at the Numbers The YouTube advertising study from eMarketer also predicts the platform will remain the top digital video player until 2017 and most likely beyond, despite Facebook's incursion into video. YouTube is expected to earn $1.55 billion in advertising revenue in 2015, and that number should rise to $2 billion by 2017, according to the study's authors. This is still less than the approximately $4 billion Facebook made in ad revenue just in Q2 2015 (extrapolated to a potential $16 billion per year). But given the competition YouTube will encounter from Facebook and others, analysts are impressed with the $2 billion number. In early 2015, digital video advertising agency Mixpo surveyed 125 U.S. agency, brand and publisher executives about plans to use video advertising on Facebook, Twitter, YouTube and more. In 2014, 63% of the respondents ran video ads on Facebook, while 77.8% ran them on YouTube. In 2015, these executives shifted their plans. Eighty-seven percent were planning to run a video ad on Facebook in the coming year,

How to Boost Your Engagement With Visual Content

How to Boost Your Engagement With Visual Content

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want more engagement on your social channels? Have you considered using visual content? There are easy-to-use tools and tactics you can use to create visual content that attracts viewers and engages them. In this article you’ll discover how to use visual content to boost engagement. Listen to this article: #1: Create Animated GIFs From YouTube Video Millennials (people reaching young adulthood around the year 2000) are known as Generation GIF. If you check out publications like BuzzFeed, Gawker and Deadspin or browse the front pages of Reddit and Tumblr, you'll see animated GIFs are everywhere. Animated GIFs expand your marketing channels and increase the chances of your content going viral on Tumblr and Reddit. And from there, content is often picked up by major publications and blogs. There are tools that make it easy to create animated GIFs. Here are a couple you might want to try: MakeaGif is a free online tool that lets you create animated GIFs using photos, YouTube videos, uploaded videos and web camera videos. You can also use it to modify an existing GIF. GIFYT allows you to create high-quality GIFs from YouTube videos. With this free tool, you can select what portion of the video to turn into the GIF and add a caption. You can check out some of the GIFs created with GIFYT here. #2: Install On-Hover Sharing Buttons Sometimes readers are inclined to share an image, but they either don't know how or simply forget to do so. A mild mouseover call to action that encourages a share will prompt more visual shares from viewers. Use a plugin like WWM Social Share On Image Hover as an easy way to enable mouseover sharing (Here's how to securely install Wordpress plugins!) With this tool, you can automatically place buttons on all of your images so your viewers can share them in an instant. It's a surprisingly effective way to increase engagement. Here’s a page where you can see mouseover share buttons in action, and here are more plugins that add image-sharing options on mouseover. #3: Play on Emotion Connecting with your audience on an emotional level leaves a long-lasting impact. When something sparks an emotional response, the viewer is more likely to share, comment on and remember it. Visuals are great for this purpose. Humans respond to what they see, more so than any other form of stimulation. If you're connecting emotionally with users, they'll start to associate those feelings with your brand. http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2K5trQS3JeA According to Fractl research, the two most engaging emotions (in terms of provoking shares) are positive feelings (such as joy, interest, anticipation and trust) and the element of surprise. #4: Celebrate Unusual Holidays From National Hamburger Day to National Book Lovers' Day, unusual holidays are hard to resist. They're also an awesome source of visual content inspiration. There's an idea for a cool image to create almost daily. Coca-Cola does a great job of using unusual holidays in their social media marketing. They published these images of cute animals to celebrate National Polar Bear Day. To find holidays and observances, you can check these useful lists of unusual holidays and days of the year for inspiration. #5: Ask Viewers to Contribute You don't have to use your own visuals to capture your viewers' attention. Flip the script and ask your viewers to contribute their images. People love seeing their work promoted by a brand, and it makes them feel appreciated and special. On your social channels, ask viewers to submit designs, logos, photographs, drawings or anything else uniquely suited to your product. Facebook, Instagram and Pinterest are fantastic platforms for this style of campaign. Here are two easy-to-implement visual contest ideas to engage your audience and create more visual context around your brand. Caption Contests Publish an interesting image and ask your reader...

How to Get Results From Facebook Ads on a Budget

How to Get Results From Facebook Ads on a Budget

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you using Facebook ads effectively for your business? Do you want to get results without spending a lot of money? By selecting a well-targeted audience with your Facebook ads, you can reach your goals without breaking the bank. In this article I'll show you how to set up your Facebook ads to generate big results on a small budget. Listen to this article: Set Proper Goals Before you spend any money on Facebook ads, think about the objectives for your ad campaign. Once you've set your goals, you can better determine your budget. The four most popular Facebook campaign goals for businesses are building a targeted fan base, promoting owned content, generating conversions and promoting a local business. Here's a look at what you can do with a budget of 5 to 10 Euros or Dollars per day. #1: Build a Targeted Fan Base When you get started with Facebook advertising, growing the audience for your Facebook page is the logical first step. Fans are more likely to opt into your list, read your content and buy from you than non-fans. In other words, when highly targeted people like your page, it's an indication that they want to see your content. There are many ways to target Facebook ads to grow your audience. To get the most from a small budget, focus first on attracting the people who know you best. This audience has already invested in you and is likely to convert at a higher rate and lower cost than any other group. Target Your Email List If you want to create a custom audience based on your customer email list, go to Audiences in your Facebook Ads Manager. In the upper-right corner of the page, click Create Audience and select Custom Audience from the drop-down menu. Then click Customer List in the Create a Custom Audience dialog box. To create your custom audience, upload a .CSV file with your customers' email addresses. Facebook then populates the audience and gets it ready for you to target with your ads. Target Website Visitors One of the most powerful Facebook ad types is the website custom audience. The people who visit your website already know you and are more likely to respond positively to your ads. After you've targeted a custom audience for your email list (as described above), move on to promoting your page to website visitors. To create a website custom audience, you need to install a custom audience pixel in the header of your website. Facebook lets you create an audience based on traffic in the last 30, 60, 90 and 180 days. Set up an audience for each option. You might target this audience for people who have visited your site, but aren't yet fans of your page. Target a Lookalike Audience Depending on your website traffic, it's likely that you'll always have an audience to target. But if you want to expand your options, consider lookalike audiences. You can create lookalike audiences based on your custom audience of email subscribers or website visitors. Facebook will match your database within a 1% similarity, giving you a narrower audience to target. Access Audiences from the Ads Manager and then create a lookalike audience for the location you want to target. Target Interests If you're a new business with a small customer list and limited website traffic, you may be wondering how to target your Facebook ads. Interest targeting can be effective if you do it right, but overall it's generally less effective than the options above. The reason for this is that when you target a page or interest, Facebook gives you an audience that includes people who've expressed an interest or liked pages associated with your audience. If you ask Facebook to optimize your ads, they will show your ads to the people most likely to take action. Split-Test Your Audiences After you've set up your audiences, it's a good idea to test each one over a 72-hour time period. A good rule of thumb is to spend 5 to 10 Euros or Dollars...

21 Ways to Improve Your Facebook Ads With Ad Targeting

21 Ways to Improve Your Facebook Ads With Ad Targeting

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use Facebook ads? Are you aware of all of the targeting options Facebook offers? Facebook offers so many ways to target potential customers, there's a right advertising option for every business. In this article you'll find 21 ways to target specific audiences with Facebook advertising. Listen to this article: #1: Know Your Customers' Interests On Facebook, you can target people who have expressed an interest in or like pages related to another page or topic. This is interest-based targeting, although it is commonly confused with "likes" targeting. There are thousands of interests to target, and they're located in the Interests section of your ad set settings. Type literally anything into the search box and Facebook will suggest matching or related interests. Interest targeting usually means that you're targeting large audiences. So before you set up interest targeting, evaluate the size of your target group. Then consider combining an interest with at least one other targeting method. #2: Seek Out People in the Market for What You Sell Our online behavior tells platforms a lot about our buying intentions. By combining data from different sources, Facebook is able to tell who is in the process of buying a given product. Therefore, you can target people who are looking to buy something specific; for example, new vehicle shoppers in the market for a luxury SUV. This option is located in the Behavior section of the ad set settings. You'll see multiple categories in a scenario like this, because Facebook allows you to be that specific. In the case of the SUV, target people who are looking for a new SUV, a used SUV and so on. Experiment with this targeting option to determine which methods are most profitable. #3: Target People Based on Financial Resources If you want to sell a product or service that is tied to affordability, this method is extremely useful. Listed under Demographics, this targeting option allows you to select among Income, Net Worth and Liquid Assets. Liquid Assets is an option under Net Worth. Targeting people by income, net worth or liquid assets usually works well as a stand-alone option. When businesses combine it with a behavior that best matches their target group, the audiences are often too narrow. The trick is to choose a broader behavior than usual in case the audience turns out to be small (for example 10-20K). According to Facebook Power Editor, their data is "Modeled based on age, income, presence of children, occupation, property data, vehicle data, investment interest and census median data." #4: Combine Age and Gender With Where People Live Instead of simply targeting geographic areas, add age groups and gender to the mix. For example, target men ages 25-35 who live in New York City. This is based on the first information people share when they create a Facebook profile: age, gender and city they live in. Targeting people based on where they live can also be a great substitute for targeting certain income levels, because it presumes a certain quality of life. This method can be used right after setting up an ad set. Target virtually any state, region and city in the world (with a few exceptions). Another option is to exclude part of a region to optimize your ads even further. A few selected countries, such as the United States, also support zip code targeting. #5: Target People by Industry or Occupation For products or services that are ideal for people who work in a given industry or have a specific job, use industries or job title for the targeting method. For example, target "Employed in Arts, entertainment, sports and media." This is located under Work (below Demographics) on Facebook. The industry people work in can be a great alternative to simply targeting by office type. In fact, office type targeting actually allows you to target three more small office categories.

SEO Services

by adminDdddjc @ Search Engine Placement | Search Engine Optimization Firm

If you are searching for best pricing on top SEO services, then you landed on the right site! RegisterEverywhere.com has been going SEO (search engine optimization) since November of 1994. Google wasn’t around back then, and search engine like AltaVista, Lycos, and Yahoo! (the directory/portal) were a cinch when it came to ranking websites. Even […]

The post SEO Services appeared first on Search Engine Placement | Search Engine Optimization Firm.

5 Twitter Tools to Boost Your Productivity

5 Twitter Tools to Boost Your Productivity

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you struggle to keep up with your Twitter activities? Interested in tools to improve productivity? Managing your Twitter account doesn't have to consume all your time. There are tools that can make the work easier. In this article you'll discover five Twitter tools to boost your productivity. Listen to this article: #1: Schedule Content via Tweet Jukebox Tweet Jukebox is a free scheduling tool that allows you to load a "jukebox" with content, schedule when you want tweets to go out and then sit back and let it do the job for you. You can create more than one jukebox, load it with thousands of tweets and then send out as many as 100 tweets per day. Your account comes preloaded with two jukeboxes, one with photo content and one with quotes, to get you started. You have the option to tweet jukebox content once, regularly or until a specific date. Tweet Jukebox allows you to set schedules for different times on different days of the week. When it runs out of content, it automatically starts tweeting again from the beginning. The scheduling engine is very flexible. Set a scheduled tweet once a year on a specific date (think holidays and annual events), or choose to tweet by frequency. You can also set a time for each tweet to go out, depending on user engagement. Tweet Jukebox also lets you track who has mentioned you. This can be visualized by the tweets themselves, or shown in a graph format. Choose from mentions in the last 7 days, 30 days, month or previous month. The Jukebox Store allows you to download preloaded jukeboxes with content from other high-profile users. Another handy feature is the ability to thank up to 50 users every Friday. #2: Create Text Overlay for Images Using Spruce Spruce is a free, easy-to-use tool that allows you to quickly create images with custom text for Twitter (and Facebook). Choose an image from the library, add your text, preview your post and publish it. It's as simple as that. Spruce allows you to upload your own images and download completed images for later use. You can check the post and add text before publishing it. Keep in mind that you don't have to tweet using the service, so you can create and add them to your scheduler, too. #3: Manage Followers With ManageFlitter ManageFlitter is a highly useful tool for managing your followers and posts. The functionality of the free account is pretty good. Or you can choose from two levels of paid accounts to get more features, including analytics. In the left column of the main dashboard, find out more about your followers by exploring different views, such as Not Following Back, No Profile Image, Inactive, Fake (Spam), Influence and Muted Users. This allows you to easily unfollow accounts that don't offer any benefit, identify spam followers and more. For example, suppose you want to find people you're following but who aren't following you back. Choose the Not Following Back option to see a list of users to check out and unfollow if necessary. Hover over a user's name to bring up details about that person, including his or her bio, location, language and average number of tweets per day. You can use ManageFlitter to post using the PowerPost feature, which tells you the best times to post based on users' activity. Additionally, you can post suggested content that's based on your niche, add an RSS feed to find further content (although you can't post it directly to Twitter) and view your queued content so you know what's scheduled. You can also connect your Google+ account so that it posts straight to Twitter for you. #4: Manage Relationships Using Commun.it Commun.it is a Twitter relationship management tool. There are three paid plans to choose from, depending on the features you need. You can also access and use the free account, with limited functionality. The dashboard is full of useful information.

Marketing Trends: How to Think Differently and Predict the Future

Marketing Trends: How to Think Differently and Predict the Future

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to stay on top of the latest marketing trends? Looking to tap into the next big trend? To explore marketing trends, I interview Rohit Bhargava. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Rohit Bhargava, the author of Personality Not Included and Likeonomics. He's also the founder and CEO of the Influential Marketing Group. His latest book is Non-Obvious: How to Think Different, Curate Ideas and Predict the Future. In this episode Rohit explores why trends matter to marketers and reveals a few trends. You'll discover what makes something a trend. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Marketing Trends How Rohit became interested in trends Rohit spent many years working at marketing agencies and frequently crossed industries. For example, he'd work for a toothbrush brand in the morning and an enterprise data client in the afternoon. This is how he started making connections among industries and began thinking about trends. Rohit started writing trend reports in 2011. Rohit's experience includes working with Leo Burnett in Australia and Ogilvy in the United States. He did digital strategy and even worked on Intel's first social media guidelines. One of the biggest problems, Rohit explains, is a lot of trends are self-serving. "Imagine I have a company that sells hammers, and then I declare 2015 the year of hammers," he laughs. "How convenient is that?" People declare trends based on whatever they sell so it helps them, but what they point to isn't actually a trend. Rohit considers a trend to be an observation about the accelerating present. That means there are signs of something already happening that will become more important. A trend will either change the way consumers make decisions or change the way companies structure their business models or how they do business. Listen to the show to discover one of the biggest mistakes many trend writers make. Why marketers should care about trends The biggest benefit to knowing about trends, Rohit explains, is to know when to pivot. The term pivot is frequently used improperly. For example, if someone sells bicycles and then becomes a coffee shop, it's not a pivot, it's a completely new business. An actual pivot was seen when BMW, in addition to making cars, decided to start a program called DriveNow in which they rent electric cars. They're tapping into the trend of the sharing and collaborative economy, and experimenting with their business model. BMW is saying we still make super high-quality cars, but we now distribute them in different ways: we sell, lease and rent them. That's smart, Rohit says. It's the way to look at something that's happening in the marketplace and see how it affects your business. Marketers need to be on the lookout for trends and pivot accordingly, but also understand trends that are already happening. Listen to the show to learn about Rohit's haystack method and the difference between trend curating and trendspotting. Glanceable content The trend of glanceable content is a reaction to our shrinking attention spans, Rohit explains. There's material out there, like BuzzFeed headlines, that tantalize us so much we can't help clicking on them. But that alone doesn't make it a trend. This idea of the shrinking attention span leads to innovation in unexpected places. There's a team of MIT researchers working on studies of glance behavior: how fast can we read something in a situation when we need to consume it quickly? For example,

5 Ways to Partner With Influencers on Snapchat

5 Ways to Partner With Influencers on Snapchat

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to increase your company's visibility on Snapchat? Have you considered partnering with influencers? Snapchat influencers can help you connect with your target audience in a creative and entertaining way that improves awareness and messaging. In this article you'll discover five ways to partner with influencers on Snapchat. Listen to this article: Why Partner With Snapchat Influencers? Snapchat influencers are self-made, modern-day digital celebrities who are creative, passionate, and entertaining. They were the early adopters of the platform and inherently understand how it works. They're skilled with the native tools and understand the importance of the channel's animated lenses and emojis. Influencers know how to connect with their audience and their opinions are trusted. You'll find them across all industries including fashion, sports, beauty, health and wellness, home décor, food, and more. Make sure you do your research to find the right influencers for your brand's demographic. Here are some ways you can partner with Snapchat influencers to promote your business. #1: Share Access to Exclusive Events You can partner with Snapchat influencers at all price points to provide access to different kinds of events. This in-the-moment storytelling allows you to show fans a different side to your business than images that are curated and photographed for print. Influencers bring their fan base into the experience, which ultimately leads to more brand awareness and sales. At New York Fashion Week, many top fashion brands enlist Snapchat influencers to cover their collections. Tommy Hilfiger uses Millennial models who are also social media influencers to showcase behind-the-scenes aspects of the brand's shows. Their Snapchat stories include models getting their makeup done, practicing their walks, and getting fitted for the runway. #2: Drive Traffic to Your Website DJ Khaled, the most well-known Snapchat influencer, has over 2 million followers who passionately follow his adventures and listen to his daily life lessons, or "keys." Not only does he inspire and motivate his audience, but he also monetized his user base by opening an ecommerce store and partnering with global brands like Ciroc and Apple Beats. He incorporates sales tactics in Snapchat stories by intertwining his daily keys with the products he showcases. As Snapchat content is ephemeral, the best way to drive traffic to your website is ask influencers to use the text box to write out your website or company name. This is what DJ Khaled does when he's promoting something on Snapchat. Provide the text so the influencer can copy and paste it to his or her Notes app and add it to the snap. This way, you can include more content than what is allowed by the platform. You may also want to direct the influencer to ask his or her followers to screenshot the snap so they have the information readily available. Since the influencer is telling a story, the call to action can be verbal. People are already captivated, so they'll follow the steps to purchase your products. #3: Spread Awareness for a Cause You can reach out to influencers to help with your philanthropic campaigns. They're usually receptive and their reach can have a strong impact. Since it's for a good cause, many influencers will support the campaign free of charge. Influencers are often keen to work with non-profits because they want to help create change in the world. It also gives them an opportunity to add their own personal spin to the story. There are a lot of Snapchat influencers who excel at telling stories through artistic talents. One of the most famous is Miologie. She brought awareness to Nigeria with her creative work for the #BringBackOurChildhood UNICEF campaign. Her storytelling involved the character of Badamassi, a young boy who had taken refuge but missed the environment and the animals he grew up aro...

10 Best Keyword Research and Suggestion Tools for SEO Specialists

by Irina Weber @ SEO Chat

While creating a high-quality content with real people in mind is essential, it will be foolish to ignore keyword research and SEO. Doing keyword research is like a seasoned fish monger casting his net at the right time and at the right place. If you are not using the right keywords: short-tail or long-tail, you […]

The post 10 Best Keyword Research and Suggestion Tools for SEO Specialists appeared first on SEO Chat.

5 Free Ways to Build Your Personal Brand on LinkedIn

5 Free Ways to Build Your Personal Brand on LinkedIn

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to build your visibility on LinkedIn? Wondering which LinkedIn features can help? LinkedIn can help you build a professional presence that showcases your work to the people you most want to connect with. In this article, you'll discover five free ways to help you build a personal brand on LinkedIn. Listen to this article: #1: Optimize Your LinkedIn Profile Your profile is the key component of your experience on LinkedIn. A complete profile shows you're actively participating in the LinkedIn ecosystem. Did you know that you can make your profile seven times more likely to be found in searches by adding a profile photo? Or that you can make your profile twelve times more likely to be found by showing your two most recent employment positions? The following tips will make a difference and help your LinkedIn profile pop: To start, add a professional profile picture. Your picture is your virtual handshake, so pick a friendly profile picture that aligns with your role. Choose a square profile picture, recommended at 400 x 400 pixels, and stay under 10 MB in file size. If either width or height exceeds 20,000 pixels, your photo will not upload. Next, create a distinctive LinkedIn profile headline. By default, the headline is your current employment position; however, you can customize it to demonstrate your expertise or vision for your role. Think of your headline as your brand's tagline. It's the first description many people will see, so make it count! Headlines should call upon the words and phrases your friends and colleagues use to uniquely describe you. For example, "trusted Mac expert" or "experienced admin assistant who never misses a deadline." In addition, use your LinkedIn background to communicate more about who you are and what you do. Think about blank billboards along the highway. Those are missed opportunities. The same could be said for your LinkedIn background photo (the photo that displays above your name and headline). Many LinkedIn members use stock photos, nature snapshots, or city skylines for the background image. However, you can use that space to do much more than show off your hometown. Use the background space for content stream promotions, miniature portfolios, credibility-building, publications, photos of you influencing others, and more. Identify your personal brand by using a photo to express an interest secondary to your résumé, but which points to your personal life or work ethic. Next, customize your LinkedIn URL and share it everywhere. For personal branding, attach everything on the web to your full name, and climb as high as you can in the search rankings. LinkedIn's vanity URLs can help you do just that. As a major website, LinkedIn has a high Google PageRank. Using a URL like this, linkedin.com/in/yourfullname, means you'll likely see your name rank pretty high, too. Tip: Add your personalized link to all other social streams, like your blog, email signature, online résumé, Twitter, Facebook, and LinkedIn SlideShare. Finally, tell your story using the Summary and Experience sections. Your LinkedIn profile should be more than a quick copy-and-paste of your résumé. The Summary is where you can share a bit more about your vision for your role or company. You can also include personal anecdotes about activities you enjoy outside work. Your Experience section should include a tidy list of the key positions you've held, and briefly explain your roles. You can also detail your educational background. Uploading rich media (videos, images, and presentations) and content you've created or produced as part of a team is a great way to bring your description to life. Tips: Use a keyword-rich approach that makes your profile easier to find. Take out overused words like motivated, passionate, responsible, creative, and driven. And add multimedia content to your profile from written posts on LinkedIn Publisher...

How to Create a Twitter Chat: 4 Success Tips

How to Create a Twitter Chat: 4 Success Tips

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Ready to host a Twitter chat? Do you want to improve your chances of success? Making sure you have a few basic building blocks in place will help you start your Twitter chat off with an audience that's ready to participate. In this article you'll discover four tips to help you start a successful Twitter chat. Listen to this article: #1: Choose Your Time Slot With Care If you want lots of people to show up, you need to schedule your Twitter chat at the optimal time for your audience. The more people who are available to chat, the greater your chances for engagement. Use a tool like Followerwonk to figure out when your followers are most active, so you'll know the best time to host your chat. After you log in, click on the Analyze tab, enter your Twitter handle and click Do It. You'll see an hourly breakdown of when your followers are most active. Look at the chart to discover the optimal times to host your Twitter chat and get the most engagement from your audience. There's no point in hosting a chat when the majority of your followers aren't online. Reduce Scheduling Conflicts In addition to knowing when your Twitter followers are most active, you'll also want to take into account the times during which other popular chats are scheduled. To reduce scheduling conflicts, be sure to consult the Twitter chat schedule from TweetReports. This is a helpful resource which shows the times and days other popular Twitter chats are scheduled to take place. Checking this document will help you avoid scheduling your chat during the same time as another chat your audience (or you) might be interested in attending. You might also want to review the Twitter chat schedule from Twubs. It shows you an active list of upcoming Twitter chats. By consulting the schedules of other popular Twitter chats, you'll ensure that your chat doesn't conflict with them. That way you don't run the risk of people not attending yours. If you're just starting out, this can be very beneficial. #2: Invite Relevant Guests and Influencers to Participate To maximize your reach and overall engagement, make a point to invite special guests and relevant people to participate in your chat. For example, SEMrush invites special guests to their Twitter chats and sends direct tweets to influential people inviting them to participate. You can identify influential people using Followerwonk. It allows you to find and connect with influencers in your niche, making it the perfect tool for finding relevant guests to join your Twitter chat. To identify influencers, click the Search Bios tab. Next, you will want to search for a keyword that is relevant to your niche or the topic of your chat. Enter your search term and select Search Twitter Profiles from the pop-up menu. If needed, click the More Options button to see more filtering options like location and minimum followers. Then click Do It. Followerwonk shows you a list of relevant people for your topic of choice. All you have to do is decide which people you want to target from the list, and invite them to be special guests or ask them to participate in your chat. #3: Incorporate Eye-Catching Visuals When you promote and run your own Twitter chat, you'll want to get as much engagement as you can. Visual content might provide the extra boost you need to connect with your audience. There are several ways you can incorporate visuals into your Twitter chats. You can use images to promote your upcoming chats, ask questions during the chat and recap answers to all of the questions that people asked during the chat. Here are a few tips to help you design more appealing images for your Twitter chats: Pick an attractive color palette using a site like COLOURlovers. Ensure there's adequate contrast between the background and text in your images. If you need help identifying contrasting colors, consult the Adobe Color Wheel.

How to Use Social Media to Build Your Personal Brand

How to Use Social Media to Build Your Personal Brand

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to build a personal brand? Interested in ways to differentiate yourself from others? Social media is a great way to develop a personal identity, establish a reputation and stand out in your industry. In this article you'll discover how to use social media to build your personal brand. Why Personal Branding? To understand personal branding, start by doing a Google search for your name. Listen to this article: Chances are you'll see a list of your prominent social profiles (namely LinkedIn, Pinterest, Instagram, Twitter and Facebook) in your search results. Google gives high authority to all of the main social media platforms. Ultimately, the more active you are on a particular platform, the higher that profile is ranked. Your personal blog, website and images are probably ranked high too, as social media and content creation are fundamental parts of personal branding SEO. Remember that everything you do online is a representation of your personal brand. Here are some ways to start shaping your message and how you're perceived. #1: Define Your Objective What do you hope to achieve when people search for your name? What do you want them to see? If you want people to see your work experience and receive new opportunities in your area of expertise, concentrate on developing your LinkedIn profile first. If you want to promote your content to a wider audience, try increasing your Twitter followers. If you're trying to sell artwork, Pinterest is your best option. You get the idea. Here are some other possible goals: "I Want to Start My Own Business" If you're a budding entrepreneur, your personal brand could make the difference in whether your idea is successful. When people research you online, what they learn about you can be a deciding factor in whether they invest in your idea. "I Want to Differentiate Myself From Competitors" With a strong persona and unique branding proposition, you're almost guaranteed to stand out from the crowd. In a competitive marketplace, it's important to show what makes you different. "I Want to Sell More" This goes without saying: When your personal brand is strong and you make yourself appealing enough that people want to connect with you, chances are you'll sell more of your product or service. #2: Identify Up to Three Areas of Expertise What do you want to be known for? Whom do you want to connect with? The Internet is flooded with entrepreneurs and experts, so you need to determine what makes you unique. You might be more than just a social media marketer. Your interests could be as broad as Peruvian cooking or dolphin training, but don't choose more than three. Your areas of expertise define who you are and what you do. They're used for writing your social media profile descriptions and should include your main keywords. #3: Make a List of Profile Links Store links to all of your social media profiles in a spreadsheet. You might have 10 or even 30 profiles (the more, the better). If you have a large number of profiles, prepare to carve out time to be active on these channels. Review each of your social media profiles regularly and update them to ensure they contain your most current information, such as your work info, website URL, social links, etc. #4: Develop a Strong Positioning Statement A positioning statement is a brief summation of who you are, what you do and what you stand for. Typically, positioning statements are created for brands or products, but in this case you're developing one for you. When creating your statement, always keep your audience in mind. Although the statement is about you, it's not necessarily for you. It's for the people you're trying to connect with. Describe what differentiates you from other people in your area of expertise. If you're not quite sure what that is, take time to research some of the well-known people in your field. Take note of their tactics,

Organic vs. Non-organic Search Engine Optimization (SEO)

by nobox @ nobox creatives

When people hear organic/non-organic, they’d most likely envision the produce section at their local supermarket. Society has become not only aware but educated on the differences between the two and how it affects their personal lives. Although the familiarity with these options has grown significantly, many business owners are completely in the dark when [...]

The post Organic vs. Non-organic Search Engine Optimization (SEO) appeared first on nobox creatives.

Search Engine Optimization (SEO) Services | Internet Marketing Inc.

Search Engine Optimization (SEO) Services | Internet Marketing Inc.


Internet Marketing Inc

Get the most out of earned media marketing with SEO services. Our Internet Marketing Inc. search engine optimization consultants will get you to the top!

New Research Reveals Paid Social Media Effectiveness

New Research Reveals Paid Social Media Effectiveness

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you know where to spend your social media marketing dollars? Wondering what works for other businesses? In this article you’ll discover recent insights on the effectiveness of paid social media marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Majority of B2C Marketers Find Promoted Social Posts and Ads Effective In fall 2015, the Content Marketing Institute (with MarketingProfs) surveyed 3,714 marketers from around the world about content and other digital marketing successes. While just 263 identified as B2C marketers and business owners, their insights are still instructive. As revealed in the chart below (from eMarketer), 76% of B2C respondents use promoted posts (for example, boosted Facebook posts and promoted tweets and pins). Sixty-one percent of these users found promoted posts effective, rating them either 4 or 5 on a 5-point effectiveness scale (3 is neutral). As for LinkedIn, Facebook, Twitter, and other ads (as opposed to the more editorial-style posts), 59% of respondents rate these 4 or 5 on the 5-point effectiveness scale (74% of those surveyed report using them). More interesting is the jump in marketers’ perception of effectiveness from Q4 2014 to Q4 2015. Perceived effectiveness stayed mostly even for offline promotion, online banner ads, and native advertising. Conversely, the number of marketers viewing social ads and promoted posts as effective leapt by 20% and 30% respectively for each tactic. Still, given the small sample size, smart marketers must explore the experience of B2B marketers and others when considering paid social ads. B2C marketers surveyed by the CMI also put Facebook at the top of the heap in terms of effectiveness, with YouTube coming in second. Key Takeaway: That only 263 of the CMI’s 3,714 survey respondents identified as B2C suggests that B2C lags behind B2B in adopting the more sophisticated social marketing tactics of promoted posts and social ads. These early adopters find them effective (worth 4 or 5 on the scale) at rates of 64% and 59%. A satisfaction rate 10% to 15% higher than what B2B companies report (see below) could reflect that the B2C space for these two marketing tactics is not as saturated. B2C is getting better results because with less competition, each campaign draws more eyeballs. #2: Fewer Than Half of B2B Marketers Find Promoted Social Posts and Ads Effective The CMI data came from one survey, but it divided the numbers into two reports. With the majority of its respondents in the B2B space (1,521), the Content Marketing Institute had a robust sample from which to draw insights for this vertical. Of the 93% of B2B marketers and business owners using paid social media, 52% use promoted posts and 51% use sponsored ads. Forty-eight percent of promoted post users and 45% of sponsored ad users rate these tactics 4 or 5 on the 5-point effectiveness scale (again, 3 is neutral). To compare tactics, B2B marketers pinpoint search engine marketing tactics like PPC or paid search advertising as the most effective paid marketing tactics, with 55% rating them 4 or 5. At the other end of the scale, traditional online banner ads disappoint with only 29% of respondents finding them somewhat or very effective. Breaking it down further, B2B marketers do have favorite social media platforms. A darling of the B2B world for years, LinkedIn has become the salesperson’s hunting ground. The platform has always enjoyed a more serious reputation than Facebook with its memes and fun apps that appeal to a diverse audience. Key Takeaway: When using social media channels, keep in mind that consumers go to Facebook and LinkedIn with different goals and mindsets. Facebook provides a fun and entertaining diversion from work. Marketers and companies that provide lighthearted content there generate goodwill with engagement following from that. B2B marketers, on the other hand, must recognize that LinkedIn users’ goals have more to ...

The Benefits of Pay-Per-Click Advertising for Practices

by AudiologyDesign @ AudiologyDesign

When it comes to businesses competing for space on the first page of top search engines like Google and Bing, competition can be fierce. In order to make sure your...

The post The Benefits of Pay-Per-Click Advertising for Practices appeared first on AudiologyDesign.

How to Work With YouTube Influencers

How to Work With YouTube Influencers

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Want your ads to reach an enthusiastic niche audience? Have you considered collaborating with YouTube video influencers? To discover how to work with influential YouTube creators, I interview Derral Eves. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers, business owners, and creators discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Derral Eves, one the world's top YouTube video marketing experts. He's consulted with many of the world's largest YouTube channels and is also the founder of VidSummit, an industry conference for video creators, agencies, and brands. Derral explains how to collaborate with YouTube influencers and maximize your ads budget. You'll discover what you need to know about how to disclose influencer/brand relationships. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: How to Work With YouTube Influencers Derral's Story Since 1999, Derral has worked with brands and businesses through his agency. Originally, Derral's focus was using search engine optimization to increase websites' visibility. After YouTube came along, his agency began optimizing clients' lead generation videos on Google. Derral helped the owner of a pest control company quintuple his business, and over a year, helped The Piano Guys go from being unknown to having 1.8 million subscribers and hundreds of millions of YouTube video views. Through his work with The Piano guys, Derral saw the power of audiences and the influencing power of his client. He was shocked at how engaged and excited people could get about sharing someone else's vision, mission, and purpose. Through YouTube, The Piano Guys created a tribe and became visionaries. They brought people together and spread their uplifting message to the world through music and visual representation. People who work together and grow communities can ultimately change the world, Derral believes. Derral decided to focus solely on developing audiences and building influence and sold off the other portion of the business around 2007 or 2008. Since this transition, Derral has been especially attracted to projects and people that are making a difference in the world. Derral and his company have helped 14 different channels start from scratch, reach more than a million subscribers, and generate 21 billion video views. After working with every vertical on YouTube, Derral has found a system for creating audiences. Also, he's learned how influencers affect their tribe and get people involved in changing the world. As Derral and his team have navigated this landscape, they've learned that influencers aren't a new trend. They've been around since the beginning of time. People are put in positions of influence. Derral has also learned that the way influencers communicate and interact with fans can make a big difference. By simply interacting like a regular person with their audience, influencers can have a positive impact on people. Listen to the show to hear Derral give an example of a great interaction between a fan and an influencer. Why Work With YouTube Creators? One of the biggest challenges an agency faces is how to get the most visibility for their clients. You can always pay for an ad; however, influencers can make an impact that an ad can't because the fans who engage with a specific creator or influencer are willing to listen and take direction from that influencer. Those fans have a sense of loyalty to the influencer, who's already part of their lives. When agencies look for the most effective way to reach their intended audience, they have choices. They can do a targeted ad, integrate an influencer in the ad and target the influencer's demographic,

4 Ways to Increase Your Pinterest Visibility

4 Ways to Increase Your Pinterest Visibility

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want more visibility from your Pinterest marketing? Are you looking for ways to get your pins and boards seen by more people? There are some quick and easy tactics you can use to help more of the right people find and share your content on Pinterest. In this article you'll discover how to increase the visibility of your content on Pinterest. Listen to this article: #1: Understand Who Uses Pinterest It's important to approach each social media platform as a unique entity. Although many networks have similarities, Facebook is different from Twitter, Pinterest is different from Instagram, and so on. One big difference among social platforms is your audience. Here's a look at Pinterest's overall demographics: Pinterest has 100 million daily active users, with over 500 billion Pinterest pins. 80% of Pinterest's users are female and 90% of all pins are created or shared by women. 13% of adult men who are online use Pinterest, with a 120% growth in male users in 2015. Millennials are using Pinterest as much as Instagram. 67% of Pinterest users are under the age of 40. 60% of Pinterest users are from the U.S. If you have a business account, you can get a picture of your unique audience demographics with Pinterest analytics. You can see whom you're connecting (and not connecting) with. To access Pinterest analytics, click the Analytics tab in the top-left corner of the screen and select Audience. View the Demographics tab to see pertinent information about your audience, including where people are from, their gender and the languages they speak. Once you have a good understanding of who your Pinterest audience is, you'll be able to create relevant content for them. #2: Appeal to Users Preferences It's important to find out what your specific audience's interests are so you can better tailor your content to them. Check out your Pinterest analytics to see your best-performing pins and boards and discover their other interests. Identify Top Content Choose Analytics > Profile to view engagement metrics for your Pinterest content. You'll see your top pins and boards from the past 30 days and how many impressions, clicks, repins, likes and either pin type or numbers of pins on the board. This data provides insights into which pins and boards are resonating with your Pinterest audience. Look at Audience Interests You can also review your analytics to see insights about the interests of your Pinterest audience. Choose Analytics > Audience and click the Interests tab to see images and labels describing common interests your audience members share. Some interests are generic, like Quotes, and others are more specific, like Casual Outfits. Try to find ways to incorporate your audience's other interests into your content. For example, if you run a cooking website but notice that a large percentage of your audience is also interested in camping, you can create pins like "10 Best Recipes to Make While Camping" or "Snacks for the Campfire." The more you adapt your content to appeal to your target audience on Pinterest, the better you'll be able to connect with them. #3: Write Search-Friendly Descriptions Though Pinterest users will often scroll through their main feed or the feeds of selected topics (such Women's Fashion, Cars and Motorcycles or Geek), they'll also frequently use Pinterest as a search engine to find content they're interested in. Because of this, it's important to add relevant tags and keywords to your pins. Strategically place keywords in the descriptions of your pins and in your boards to help users find your content when they're searching or browsing through feeds of a related category. For example, if your keyword is "campfire recipes," make sure you highlight it in your board description. Though not as prevalent as on Instagram and Twitter, hashtags make a frequent appearance on Pinterest.

How to Use LinkedIn Sales Navigator

How to Use LinkedIn Sales Navigator

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use LinkedIn to find prospects for your business? Have you tried Sales Navigator? LinkedIn's Sales Navigator helps you find and keep in touch with the right prospects at the right time. In this article you'll discover how to get started with LinkedIn Sales Navigator. Listen to this article: What Is LinkedIn Sales Navigator? When it comes to LinkedIn premium services, people often think of LinkedIn Pro with InMail messages. But LinkedIn offers many more tools targeted specifically to sales and marketing people. LinkedIn Sales Navigator is the one that most people start with. This social selling tool makes it easy to find relevant prospects for your business. It does this by providing in-depth user details and advanced search and filtering options. LinkedIn offers a free 30-day trial of Sales Navigator so you can test it out to see if it works for your business. When the trial ends, you can choose a professional account ($80 per month with 15 InMail messages) or a team account ($130 per month with 30 InMail messages). Note that TeamLink and full out-of-network access are available only with the team account. Here's how to get started using Sales Navigator for your business. #1: Start Your Free Trial To set up an account, go to the Sales Navigator page and click the Start Your Free Trial button. You'll need to enter your credit card information to sign up for the 30-day free trial. (You won't be charged if you cancel before the trial period ends.) Next, you're directed to the Sales Navigator site (linkedin.com/sales/), which is a different platform altogether. All of your activity takes place on this site and won't affect your normal LinkedIn account. Before you can start using Sales Navigator, you need to configure it with your preferences. Click Continue to set preferences like what vertical, regions and job titles you want to target. First, you have the option to save your existing LinkedIn connections as leads. Next, you can sync Sales Navigator with Salesforce to import your accounts and contacts. Now, you can view and save companies suggested by Sales Navigator (similar to following on Facebook or Twitter). Saving companies in your account allows you to track new leads, follow updates and receive company news so you're well-informed before your first conversation with a prospect. If you're not sure what companies to save, you can skip this page and add companies later. Finally, you need to fill in information about what types of leads you're looking for. You can enter information about your sales territory (countries, regions and cities), industries you sell to and job functions you want to target. #2: Find Prospects and Leads When you're finished with your account preferences, you're ready to search for prospects and build lead lists. A great way to start is to use Lead Builder, which offers advanced search filters. Click the Lead Builder button to the right of the search box. You can search for job titles ("sales manager") or companies ("Microsoft"). Use the various filters to refine your search criteria. When you're finished setting your search parameters, click Search to see the results. Sales Navigator provides much more data in its search results than you'd find with LinkedIn.com. Next to each result, you'll find a Save as Lead button, which you can use to save relevant prospects. At this point, you have the option to save the lead to an account. Accounts are the companies that you want to follow to stay up to date on recent developments. In addition to saving leads, you can save the search itself. Then in the future, when new profiles match your search criteria, you'll receive email alerts. To save a search, click Save in the upper-right corner of the search results. You have the option to receive email alerts daily, weekly or monthly. On the left side of the search results,

Balancing User Experience and Search Engine Optimization - Rigor

Balancing User Experience and Search Engine Optimization - Rigor


Rigor

Search engine optimization (SEO) has evolved greatly over the years. While you could once achieve high rankings on search pages by cramming specific keywords onto your site as many times as possible, modern algorithms are intended to “think” like a user. As such, there is now a mutually beneficial relationship, so to speak, between design …

The Future of Google+, What New Research Reveals

The Future of Google+, What New Research Reveals

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you interested in Google+ marketing? Wondering where the platform is headed? Despite a number of detractors, Google+ has a number of fans and supporters who say Google+ has grown into a platform that wins them business. In this article you'll discover findings from recent studies focused on the current Google+ activity as well as speculation about what Google plans to do with the network. Google+ in Recent History When Google+ first launched, bloggers warned Facebook to watch its rearview mirror for the new, hyper-capitalized social channel. By all accounts, Google leadership designed Google+ as a social media platform, a direct competitor to Facebook. At first, the hype didn't seem hyped enough. Just two weeks after its June 2011 launch, Google+ hit 10 million users. By the end of the year, 90 million users had Google+ accounts. Listen to this article: Compare that surge to Facebook, which took three and a half years to reach 90 million users, and Twitter, which took a little under three years. While it's clear that these two older platforms primed the market for a Google+ launch years later, six months to get that many users is still a rocket-ship trajectory. Google had two more distinct advantages. First, it forced users to sign up for a Google+ account if they wanted to easily use services like YouTube, Photos and Drive. In addition, the year Google+ launched, Google CEO Larry Page tied 25% of all employee bonuses to its success. With a motivated salesforce of 30,000+, you bet word spread. Fast-forward four years to 2015, and we see headlines like Google+ Is Walking Dead, Goodbye Google+, I Wish I Never Knew You, Why Google Is Finally Putting Google+ Out of Its Misery… and a myriad of other posts using words like doomed and ghost town. Digital marketers went back and forth for years about Google+'s ability to attract meaningful activity. Internet marketer Ryan Hanley wrote over a dozen enthusiastic posts about Google+, including this one gushing about the platform’s business pages. In 2015 he published How Perception Became Reality and I Had to Break up with Google+. Hanley makes a credible case here about why he and many other digital marketers had bet that Google+ would be successful: "For what it's worth, I believe the Google+ format is most evolved of all the social networks. First to include streaming video. First to include in-stream GIFs. First to include hovercard functionality. First to include post formatting. First to include varied image sizes." Despite these perks, the return on investment just didn't hold up for Hanley and many others. In the comments on this article, Hanley reveals that he will redirect his time into creating content on his own properties while dialing down time and energy spent on all social media platforms. #1: Google+: Ghost Town or Bustling Suburb? While digital pundits hurl their Google+ prognostications at each other, marketers tread cautiously about where to put their time and dollars. Several robust studies of Google+'s audience, engagement and trajectory provide a snapshot of where Google+ really is right now. International web research company GlobalWebIndex surveyed 83,806 individuals, Internet users ranging in age from 16 to 64, from countries around the world (except China whose policies make it difficult). While 60% of those surveyed claim they have a Google+ profile, only 21% of Internet users self-identify as active users. One may think that the figure of 60% of all Internet users with a Google+ profile should be respected. There are 2.2 billion total Google+ profiles, after all. Even 21% of all Internet users could translate into access to large populations. The problem is that while the other social media channels may have fewer members, these members visit, post and engage at a much higher rate. GlobalWebIndex's numbers indicate that despite the above-mentioned Google+ advantages,

How to Increase Awareness, Generate Leads and Create Advocacy With Social Media

How to Increase Awareness, Generate Leads and Create Advocacy With Social Media

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Have you been tasked with generating more awareness, more leads and more advocates? Need a plan to get you started? In this article you'll discover how your business can use social media to achieve three of the most common marketing goals. #1: Increase Brand Awareness Perhaps your brand isn't a household name and you'd like more prospective customers to know who you are. Social media can help you get there. Here are some ways to jumpstart your brand's presence through social media: Listen to this article: Establish fully fleshed-out profiles on the major social networks. Create company profiles on the big four social channels: LinkedIn, Facebook, Google+ and Twitter. Make sure your company logo and bio are consistent across all of your social sites. Decide which social network you'll spend the most time on. Depending on your market segmentation and customer research, it might make sense to spend more time on one network and less on others. For example, LinkedIn is consistently the best social outlet for B2B lead generation, and Google+ tends to attract professionals in the technology space. Consider advertising. When you first sign onto a social network, you don't have any connections because no one knows you're there. One way to make yourself known is through advertising. Each social network has intriguing ad options (like media-rich Twitter cards and Facebook sponsored posts) that help you target the prospects who will most likely click through and get to know you. Create a content schedule. Consistency is key in social media. Before you start posting, create a content schedule that allows you to develop your brand story one social post at a time. Give content creators access to the calendar so they know what to contribute and when. Make connections with others. Depending on the network, start following others in your industry who have important and insightful things to say. Obviously, you won't follow competitors, but think laterally. Bloggers, thought leaders, academics and companies in related industries might be putting out great content, and be open to socially engaging with you. And that comes with the bonus of a bigger presence for your company. Track important key performance indicators (KPIs). Only by tracking certain metrics can you know if your social efforts are paying off. Decide which metrics you'll evaluate on a regular basis, ranging from the number of likes and shares of your material, to more telling metrics like web traffic, social media conversion rates and reach. Make sure you have the right social media management tool on hand to walk you through your stats. Once you've set up a content calendar, perhaps done some advertising and are ready to track predefined KPIs, you'll have a solid foundation for spreading awareness of your brand. Your audience will then get a chance to see how your products and services can change their business practices. Perhaps they'll see the light through an interesting YouTube video or a report that speaks to a particular problem and your solution for addressing it. However you make your customers' lives better, social media puts you out there and brings your solutions to your prospects' doors. #2: Generate Leads and Engagement Now that people are starting to know you exist, it's time to turn people into leads. As in all content marketing, you'll want to develop social content that speaks to your audience. This is content that your followers will find informative, helpful and even exciting. When you've improved things just a little bit for people, they'll come back to you for more of the same, and that's your chance to qualify them as leads. Here's how to put together social content that turns followers into leads: Create content that inspires conversation. On social media, you can't depend on passive followers to convert themselves. You need to create as many opportunities to engage people as possi...

Medical Search Engine Optimization Company

by adminDdddjc @ Search Engine Placement | Search Engine Optimization Firm

How to Choose the Best Medical Search Engine Optimization Company  We here at RegisterEverywhere.com do SEO (search engine optimization) for lots of medical sites. Our clients include everything from hand surgeons to plastic surgeons. Not to mention the various laser treatment offerings like laser hair, tattoo, and hemorrhoid removal. We do SEO for all sorts […]

The post Medical Search Engine Optimization Company appeared first on Search Engine Placement | Search Engine Optimization Firm.

How to Host and Promote a Twitter Chat

How to Host and Promote a Twitter Chat

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use Twitter to market your business? Have you thought about hosting chats? Twitter chats are a great way to connect with customers and prospects, build authority and gain exposure for your business. In this article you'll discover how to prepare, promote and host a Twitter chat. Listen to this article: #1: Define the Objective Always start by defining the objective of your Twitter chat. Find a topic that will appeal to your target audience. The chat needs to provide value to your audience to be successful. Don't make it just about your company; tailor it to how you can help your community. For example, if you're in the photography industry, invite guests to discuss photo editing tips, black-and-white photography, photography inspiration, etc. An added benefit is that you can repurpose all of the chat contributions into a future blog post. Those who participated in the chat will appreciate having a summary of it, and readers who missed it will enjoy the insight. #2: Identify Similar Chats Once you've established an objective for your chat, find at least five Twitter chats similar to yours to gather ideas. You can find Twitter chats with tools like TweetReports and Gnosisarts. Learn how these chats work. Observe how the host controls the flow of conversation and directs topics. Also find out which guests are invited, how many questions are posed, what times the chats are held and how they're promoted. Be sure to participate as well. Answer questions and engage with others. This allows you to build your expertise and gives you insight into what it's like to participate in a Twitter chat. #3: Set the Date and Time Choosing the date and time for your chat is important. Typically the best times to hold Twitter chats are between the hours of 6 pm ET and 10 pm ET. However, avoid scheduling your chat at a time that would clash with other popular chats. Write down the times that you won't be able to hold a chat. Next, list the scheduled times for the five Twitter chats that you followed earlier. Then search for a time slot that won't clash with them. #4: Choose a Hashtag Now comes the fun part: naming your Twitter chat. Typically every chat hashtag ends with "chat" (for example, #mediachat, #influencerchat and #blogchat). Adding the word "chat" signals to people that it's a Twitter chat instead of a regular hashtag or an event. When choosing a hashtag, make sure it fits your brand. Also, check that it's not a Twitter username and hasn't been used as a hashtag previously. Brainstorm at least 15 chat names and then pick the best one. You might want to seek input from your co-workers. After you select a hashtag, make sure that you register the Twitter username. You can use this account to hold your chats. #5: Invite Guests Next, make a list of at least 20 guests you want to invite. Start securing guests at least two weeks prior to your chat. If it's your first Twitter chat, make sure you have a commitment from at least four guests a month in advance. Guests are often busy, so you need to secure them in advance. Ideally, you want someone who has experience being a guest and is interested in holding Twitter chats. If you have an influential user who loves your company, consider inviting that person to be a guest, too. #6: Prepare Questions Once you have everything in place and have secured at least four guests in advance, start preparing questions. You'll need about 7 to 10 questions for your guests. Send these questions to them at least 72 hours prior to the chat so they can prepare their responses. During the chat, spread out the questions about 6 to 8 minutes apart. Ask your last question about 10 minutes before the end of the chat to allow time for the community to discuss it. #7: Promote the Chat The key to making your Twitter chat stand out is to promote it. Here are some ways to do that: Partner With Other Chats

Social Growth: How to Use Pinterest to Grow Your Following on Facebook, YouTube and Beyond

Social Growth: How to Use Pinterest to Grow Your Following on Facebook, YouTube and Beyond

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you active on Pinterest? Have you thought about using Pinterest to grow your other social networks? To discover how to drive traffic from Pinterest to other networks, I interview Natalie Jill. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Natalie Jill, the founder of Natalie Jill Fitness, a site dedicated to health and fitness. She inspires women around the world with her videos and visual content. She's also got a unique social strategy that helped her grow 1.3 million Facebook fans and 476,000 Instagram fans. Natalie will explore how she uses Pinterest as her secret marketing tool to build a loyal following on Facebook, Instagram, YouTube and beyond. You'll discover how to adapt your content for Pinterest. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Social Growth What led Natalie to social media Natalie says she got into social media by accident. While dealing with a lot of personal issues, she turned to Facebook to develop a support system and talk about her struggles. She explains how sharing what she was doing to lose weight and posting pictures of food in an album called "What I Eat" developed into a downloadable ebook of her recipes. This led to her first full product, which is now called 7 Day Jump Start. By sharing success stories of the people who bought her book and listening to what her audience was asking, Natalie's Facebook presence started to grow and her products started to take off. That's how Natalie Jill Fitness was born. Listen to the show to learn what Natalie thinks makes a good salesperson. Why Pinterest is great for marketers Natalie initially built her business on Facebook (pre-Facebook pages) and had about 5,000 subscribers when she realized she couldn't keep everything on Facebook. She started exploring other social media platforms like Twitter, Pinterest and Instagram. Natalie says she was looking for a social media site where she could post her content and reach more people over time. When she noticed older items getting repinned, she decided Pinterest had the content value-over-time effect she was looking for. A year and a half ago, Natalie started deep-diving into Pinterest and says she currently has 1.3 million fans on Facebook and fewer than 50,000 followers on Pinterest (it's one of her smallest social networks). She goes on to explain why the lower Pinterest follower count doesn't matter when it comes to content shares. She also points out that Pinterest comes up in Google search, which is a huge benefit. When Natalie noticed she was getting a lot of website traffic from Pinterest, she decided to figure out how to use Pinterest to help with her content in other places. Natalie explains how she tested her tactic, which she calls the Pinfinity concept, starting with Facebook and a Pinterest board called "Bodyweight Exercises." Now people searching for body, weight, exercise, workouts, fit mom, etc., find her on Google+ or on Pinterest, and they're taken back to her video on Facebook. Although there's no built-in option to pin things from Facebook, Natalie has found a way to do it. Natalie explains why she drives traffic to social networks instead of her website. Listen to the show to hear how many Facebook followers Natalie had before she started this experiment. How Natalie uses Pinterest to grow her other social networks YouTube is another example of Natalie's method at work. When she started her YouTube channel about a year and a half ago, she had a few videos but no subscribers. She shares how she's built her YouTube channel to ove...

6 Browser Extensions for Busy Social Media Marketers

6 Browser Extensions for Busy Social Media Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you need to increase your productivity? Looking for browser extensions that simplify your marketing? In this article, you'll discover six browser extensions to help busy marketers. #1: Group Multiple Tabs Into a Single Tab With OneTab Some of the best tools are the simplest ones, and you can't get much simpler than OneTab. When you click the toolbar icon, the tool will pull all of your browser tabs into a simple list under a single tab. You can then organize, sort, and save that tab for later. Listen to this article: This free tool can be especially helpful when you're doing article research online. It's easy to get lost when you're reading article after article and following link after link. With OneTab, just click the toolbar icon when you're done and you can comb back through your tabs days or weeks later. The tool also gives you the option to save your newly formed list as a web page that others can view. #2: Save Web Pages With Evernote Web Clipper The Evernote Web Clipper is a fantastic free tool from the Evernote team. It lets you clip a web page and save it as an article, simplified article, full page, bookmark, or screenshot. After you clip it, you can add tags or comments and drop it into a folder in your Evernote account. You can then share that article with whomever you like right from the Web Clipper dialog box. #3: Edit Your Content With Grammarly Grammarly is a free, simple, powerful editing app that hides on your browser toolbar and edits your work as you write. As with many of these apps, there are both free and paid versions available. The free version offers a more advanced spelling, punctuation, and grammar check than Microsoft Word. You can paste your copy into the editor on the Grammarly website, upload a document, or just let the extension edit as you create social media posts in whatever program you're using. The app runs in the background, and if your copy is clean, you'll see a green icon. If your copy needs work, you'll see a red icon along with suggestions. If you opt for the paid version, you get more robust features like style and sentence structure suggestions, vocabulary enhancement tips, and a plagiarism detector. You also have the option to submit your work to one of their professional proofreaders. #4: Schedule Social Posts With Hootlet Hootsuite is a powerful social media management tool, and their Hootlet extension offers an easy way to create and schedule social media posts from within your browser. Cruise to a website article that you want to share and click the Hootlet icon to make the magic happen. You can then choose which social media account you want to post it to, edit the post, and post it now or schedule it for later. #5: Research Hashtags With RiteTag RiteTag is a great tool for researching relevant and trending hashtags. To access the free version, you need to use RiteTag's website. Just enter your keyword or topic in the search box. You can get access to the browser extension at the paid level (starting at $11 per month). This allows you to enhance your social media posts with hashtags related to the topic you're writing about. RiteTag's extension lets you upload images to your post, add emojis, edit calls to action in your links, and see your saved tag sets. You can even search for free images or GIFs to add to your posts. #6: Track Email Opens With RocketBolt RocketBolt works a little differently from other extensions. The extension itself doesn't do anything when you click it; but you need to have it installed to unlock its functionality. When used in conjunction with Gmail, RocketBolt lets you track individual email open and click-through rates. Marketers are used to this in programs like MailChimp and Emma, but those programs don't give you that information on the individual level. Why does this matter? Because you can see if a specific person is reading your email.

How to Get Your Videos to Perform in Search

How to Get Your Videos to Perform in Search

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you create YouTube videos? Want to get them seen? Amy Schmittauer is here to help you discover how to get your videos to rank in search. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Amy Schmittauer, a video marketing expert, public speaker, and host of the Savvy Sexy Social YouTube video series. Amy helps marketers with YouTube and social media tips and explores how to get your videos to perform better in search. You'll discover what goes into creating the headline, description, tags, and thumbnail for your videos. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: How to Get Your Videos to Perform in Search Centralizing video Amy recommends to always consider the platform before uploading a video. Don't plan to create an awesome Snapchat story with the intent to upload it to YouTube. That derails your focus. The most important thing is to recognize the platform and deliver a product that will be welcomed in the context of that situation, whether it's Snapchat, Instagram, Vine, or YouTube. How you would present a video on YouTube is very different than how you would present a video on Facebook, especially since you want to create something successful for a specific environment. There's one exception to keep in mind. An influencer who wants to build a Snapchat portfolio needs to find a way to retain that material (a place to put it to be rewatched), since it will expire in 24 hours. If you create content on YouTube, it may make sense to edit in footage from Instagram, Snapchat, a live stream, or something else to give a little context. However, a Snapchat story, uploaded in its original form to YouTube, will not do as well as it would on the original platform. Someone took a bunch of Zach King's Vine videos, strung them together, and put them on Facebook and YouTube, which caused him to explode. So I asked Amy if material from Facebook Live could easily go up on YouTube. She said it could, but the platforms are still different environments. Facebook Lives aren't always as fun on playback, she explains. Also keep in mind that if you get on Live and are just sitting there, going through some sort of programming or curriculum, and talking to comments, it's going to drag on. It doesn't matter if it's 10 or 30 minutes, it won't be fun for anyone on YouTube to watch in a replay. If you broadcast with more intention (for example, mention big news that just happened) and possibly reference a couple of comments here and there (but stay focused), that may be a good repurposing opportunity for YouTube. You want the audience to feel like they're having a similar experience to when it was live. Amy says Facebook and YouTube are about the same in terms of uploading. You take a produced piece of content, upload it, and put it out to the audience subscribing to that channel, whether it's a YouTube page or Facebook page or profile. However, when people watch a video on YouTube, it's an intentional move. They have to go to a video and click Play. Then the audio and video immediately begin. On Facebook, and now on Instagram, posted videos are put in the viewers' faces. When people scroll though their feed, they may or may not see it and they may or may not click the Play or Audio buttons to watch and listen. Plus, the audio on Facebook goes on when the viewer clicks it, so they could start listening at any point in the video. Viewers go through a different thought process before they decide to watch a video on either one of these platforms. Listen to the show to learn why you want to put videos of similar le...

4 Ways to Save Time With Social Media Marketing Tools

4 Ways to Save Time With Social Media Marketing Tools

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you spend too much time adding customer data to spreadsheets? Looking for ways to automate some of your marketing tasks? If you're creating content for a target audience, automated tools can free up your time to engage as a human when and where it matters most. In this article you'll discover four ways to integrate automated tools into your social media marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Search for Prospects You can use Twitter's search engine to pull together a list of leads, but the process can be time-consuming. For example, suppose you're looking for U.S. residents between the ages of 18 and 35 who are interested in Lincoln cars. Rather than do a Twitter search, let an automated tool like Audiense (formerly SocialBro) do the work for you. Once the search is complete, you'll need to check the results manually. If you added the word "Lincoln" to your search query, you want to follow leads who are interested in the car, not users quoting Abraham Lincoln in their profile. In other cases, you'll need to vet your leads. What are potential customers and audience members talking about in their tweets? Before you use automated tools to interact with users, you need to make sure that they're the users you're looking for. If you're looking for high-profile prospects, you can also use tools like BuzzSumo or Babbly to find profiles based on people's interests, past shares, and bios. For example, use the Amplification tab in BuzzSumo to search for influencers by topic. You can sort by the type of influencers you're looking for, such as bloggers, companies, or journalists. The results show each influencer's page authority, domain authority, follower count, retweet ratio, reply ratio, and average retweets. This allows you to separate and search through the list by goals and objectives. Then you can export those influencers to an Excel document and use it to target them with your marketing. #2: Segment Your Audience It's hard to remember life before Google Analytics and the days before beautiful dashboards of data existed on social media platforms. Now, you can mine most social media networks for insights and analytics data to help you understand who comprises your audience. For example, to find the demographics and locations of your Facebook fans, go to your page's Facebook Insights. Click the People tab to see a breakdown of the age and gender of your fans, where they live, and the languages they speak. Tools like Facebook Insights will provide data about your audience, but it's up to you to answer "so what?" and "why?" based on the segments represented in those numbers. #3: Engage With Leads Engagement is new territory in the world of automated tools. New tools allow you to connect with leads with strategic auto-interactions, which are a great icebreaker. Once you initiate a conversation, human interaction is essential. Your customer or audience wants to know that there are real people behind your business. Use a tool like Socedo to automate engagement with potential customers or initial engagements on Twitter. Socedo will ask you to specify who you're trying to connect with, what you hope to achieve, and what your message is. You'll also need to tell Socedo what actions to take on Twitter when you approve a lead. You'll need to approve or decline potential leads found by Socedo. Socedo will then take care of the rest based on the actions you specified. Some tools allow you to use auto-reply features based on phrases or words used in an inquiry. However, there's a margin of error that your response won't really answer the question asked. At that point, it's up to you to make sure your customers feel like they're being heard and want to continue engaging with your business. #4: Plan and Schedule Content Publishing content in real time isn't always possible when you have meetings to attend or work in a different time zone than your clients.

3 Social Media Engagement Techniques That Work

3 Social Media Engagement Techniques That Work

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Need some new social media marketing ideas? Looking for ways to jumpstart your engagement? Whether your goal is to spread awareness or grow your audience, better engagement is your key to success. In this article you'll discover three ways to improve engagement for your social media accounts. Listen to this article: #1: Personalize Your Approach Your audience is the greatest asset for your campaign. To run a successful social campaign with plenty of engagement, you have to know your audience and what they're likely to respond to and enjoy. To gain these insights, you'll need to do some research. Find out which social media channels the people you want to reach spend the most time on. Discover what topics they care about and what hashtags they use. Don't just listen to your audience, but communicate with them. When you show your fans that you're interested and you care, and they'll show you what makes them happy. Once you know what they're looking for, you can launch a social media campaign that they'll embrace. Many brands have leveraged Pinterest to run successful social campaigns, including Kotex's Woman's Inspiration Day. The company looked at the Pinterest boards for 50 inspiring women to see what interested them. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=UVCoM4ao2Tw Kotex then brought their inspirations to life by creating handmade gifts and sending them to the women as virtual gifts. If the women then posted something about their virtual gift, they received a real gift from the company in the mail. Almost all of the 50 women responded, generating 2,284 interactions and 694,853 impressions on Pinterest. The campaign was a huge hit because Kotex was able to hyper-target a specific audience and what they want. This is just one of many examples of how you can use Pinterest to launch a successful social campaign. #2: Put the Product in Your Fan's Hands Remember the core goal of social media is to be social, so it's important to cultivate relationships with your fans and followers. This is an essential step to launching a successful social media campaign. Yes, your ultimate goal is to sell your product and your brand, but for the purposes of your social media campaign, take a step back on the selling and simply share. Don't force your product or your brand on your audience or they'll stop listening to you. Opt for subtlety instead. Give people a way to share your product in a fun and unique way and let your audience come to it. Ford's Fiestagram Instagram campaign created buzz for the release of their new Fiesta model by asking fans to post pictures that related to different campaign hashtags. Each hashtag was a buzzword describing one of the features of the new Fiesta car, such as #music, #entry, #hidden, etc. Ford then chose the best pictures for each hashtag and displayed them on digital billboards. They also awarded weekly prizes to fans who submitted photos for the campaign. More than 16,000 photos were submitted to the Fiestagram campaign and Ford gained 120,000 new fans on their social media pages. Lay's launched the clever Do Us a Flavor campaign on Facebook that asked fans and consumers to come up with a new flavor of potato chip for the company to create and sell. That year, nearly 4 million people submitted their flavor ideas via Facebook or text message. Once the finalists were chosen, Lay's asked fans to vote for the winning flavor on Facebook, receiving over 1 million votes. The prize for the winning flavor was $1 million (or 1% of sales for the chip flavor). The first campaign increased Lay's sales by 12% and was so successful at generating engagement for the brand that they continue to run it each year. If you offer your fans a chance to showcase their creativity and connect it to one of your products, you can establish a respectful relationship with your audience, linking their personal creations to your company. #3: Play the Tag Game

Facebook Professional Services: How Your Local Business Can Rank

Facebook Professional Services: How Your Local Business Can Rank

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you have a local business page on Facebook? Want to reach more local customers? Facebook recently launched Professional Services, a directory that helps consumers find the best local businesses and services to fit their needs. In this article I'll share how to use the Facebook Professional Services feature to boost visibility with local customers. Listen to this article: What Is Facebook Professional Services? Facebook Professional Services is a directory inside Facebook for local businesses. The goal is to help customers find local businesses with the best Facebook reviews and ratings. Facebook expert Mari Smith doesn't see it as making "... a huge dent in Yelp... at first." But, she continues, "Over time, as more and more businesses become savvy with their Facebook marketing, and really promote their page activity, the Services Directory and Places could be more of a first choice for consumers." Customers can use the search box to find businesses in the area based on keywords specific to the products or services they need. They can also browse the top local business categories. Within search results or specific category selections, customers see basic details about local businesses, such as their description, address, phone number and ratings. One of the nice parts about Facebook Professional Services is that it's not limited to the United States. People can search for local businesses worldwide. While there are no specific guidelines as to how the Facebook algorithm determines which local businesses to show, after several searches, you can determine it's based on the following: Where the local business is located Matching keywords in the local business page's name, description and category The overall average star rating of the local business The number of ratings the local business has received The recency of the latest review The number of check-ins for the local business Previous interactions between the local business page and the customer Connections between customers and people who check in, rate and review the local business Mobile users can access Facebook Professional Services from their device's browser. The search works the same, but the categories presented are much more limited. Inside the Facebook app, Nearby Places is the best alternative. iPhone users will find this under the More menu. There, they can search for businesses based on location and category. Search results and category pages will show similar information as presented in Facebook Professional Services on the desktop. Based on Facebook's tendency to create individual apps for different features, one could assume that if Facebook Professional Services takes off, it will become a stand-alone app similar to what Yelp offers. But Facebook Professional Services is still in its earliest stages, so only time will tell. Now that you know what Facebook Professional Services is and a little bit about how it works, here are some tips to help you boost your local business's visibility in the new local directory. #1: Choose the Correct Category and Subcategories for Your Local Business Page To ensure that customers find your local business in search or a category listing page, be sure that you've selected the appropriate category and subcategories for your local business. To start, search for the keywords or categories that customers would use to find you and see what Facebook suggests. Then go to your local business Facebook page and enter them in Page Info on the About tab. #2: Enter Your Business Details All of these fields (found in Page Info on the About tab of your local business Facebook page) appear in search results on Facebook Professional Services. Hence, you'll want to be sure the short description, contact info and business hours fields are filled in on your local business Facebook page.

Content Marketing: How Businesses Can Grow With Content

Content Marketing: How Businesses Can Grow With Content

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have a content marketing strategy for your business? Would you like to discover how to create and distribute content that will drive sales for your company? To learn how to grow your business with content marketing, native advertising and more, I interview Robert Rose. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Robert Rose, the co-author of the book, Managing Content Marketing: The Real-World Guide for Creating Passionate Subscribers to Your Brand. He's the chief strategist at the Content Marketing Institute. He's also the co-host of the podcast, This Old Marketing. Robert explores content marketing, native advertising and what all of it means for your business. You'll discover how to develop a content marketing strategy that grows your business, take advantage of the marketing opportunities offered through native advertising and learn new ways to distribute your content to the right influencers. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Content Marketing What is content marketing?  The Content Marketing Institute views content marketing as the approach businesses use to create, curate, distribute and promote the types of content their customers will find valuable. The goal of content marketing is to drive sales and move your business forward. Done well, content marketing offers a value that's separate and discrete from the products or services you sell. It's about providing content-driven experiences that are educational, entertaining or useful to your audience, but ultimately drive engagement, awareness and sales for your brand. Social media gives you the power to aggregate your own audiences and be your own media company. The tools needed to publish the type of content that establishes you as a thought leader in your industry and draws customers to your brand are readily available and easy to use. Listen to the show to discover how content marketing can go beyond written articles and encompass things like videos, app development, games and more. Examples of businesses that do content marketing well You'll hear Robert explore how big companies like Chipotle Mexican Grill, LEGO and Coca-Cola leverage content marketing in creative and innovative ways such as movies, TV series and magazines. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=DBhTiyQU1kA Compared to what large companies might spend on traditional mass media or big sponsorships, their content marketing expenditures are just a drop in the bucket, according to Robert—yet it has such a big impact from a branding standpoint. Even if your small business doesn't have the budget for national TV spots and large print campaigns, you can get a lot of bang for your buck through content marketing. It's easy and inexpensive to publish, distribute and promote your own content through blogging, social media and podcasting. Robert uses Marcus Sheridan's business blog to illustrate this point. He used his site to answer every question asked about pools and became an expert in the very small niche he was already passionate about. This propelled his business, River Pools and Spas, to huge success and top Google rankings. Listen to the show to find out how the Content Marketing Institute leverages its blog, workshops, classes and podcast to drive attendance to their annual show, Content Marketing World.  Research on the effectiveness of content marketing Content Marketing Institute and MarketingProfs recently released two new studies: B2B Content Marketing 2015: Benchmarks, Budgets, and Trends — North America and B2C Content Marketing 2015: Be...

4 Little-Known Tools to Curate and Publish Content

4 Little-Known Tools to Curate and Publish Content

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is curated content part of your social media marketing? Looking for new ways to collect and share curated content? New tools are changing the way marketers compile and deliver handpicked content to their social media audiences. In this article you'll discover four unique ways to curate social media content on Medium, Twitter, SlideShare, and your blog. Listen to this article: #1: Select Stories on Medium Medium is a great platform for marketers because it allows you to distribute content quickly. You can write long-form articles, short pieces and tweets, and upload videos to share with the Medium community. When you publish articles, they're shared with your followers and a network-wide feed where people find content based on tags and the amount of engagement posts receive. Medium also offers a content-curation opportunity that many people overlook. You can create your own publication and curate articles from authors around the web. To create a publication, go to the Publications page and click New Publication. From there, fill in the details for your publication and design the layout. You can choose the layout style (Grid, Stream, or List) and how many stories to include on the homepage. To curate content, search Medium for articles that are aligned with your publication's message. If your publication is about satire, for example, research "satire" and look for relevant posts. Once you find an article that you want to republish, scroll to the bottom of the story and click the ellipsis icon. Then select Request Story from the drop-down menu and choose the publication you want to publish it to. Once you've selected the publication, you'll see a request email to send to the story's author. If the original author decides to let you use the story, they will submit it to your publication. You'll receive an email from the author, and can click through to the story. From there, click on Edit at the top of the page then click on the Publish button. Now the story is added to your publication. #2: Collect Tweets on Twitter Some of the most popular Twitter accounts don't necessarily share their own content. They seek out the best articles, videos, pictures, and stories related to a specific topic and share them with followers. To curate content on Twitter, you can share links or curate tweets from others. The first approach is the most popular. You find links to content online and share them as tweets on your account. The second approach is to use Twitter's Curator platform. With this tool, you type in a few keywords, hashtags, or individual users and Twitter will deliver the most relevant or engaging content in a real-time stream. Once you've identified content you want to curate, you can publish your curated content directly to Twitter. #3: Clip Slides on SlideShare SlideShare recently rolled out their Clipping tool, which lets you clip and save the best slides from presentations to view or share later. It's a great way to keep curated content organized by topic so you can deliver only the best insights. To get started, sign in to SlideShare and click My Clipboards in the SlideShare navigation bar. On the next page, click Create a Clipboard. Now enter a name and brief description for your clipboard and choose whether to make it public or private. Your clipboard name should be related to the story you're going to tell with your slide collection. Once you've saved your new clipboard, it's time to find slides to add. When you're browsing SlideShare and find a slide that you want to save, hover over the top-right corner of the slide and click Clip slide. The slide is then added to your clipboard. Once you're satisfied with the content you've curated, you'll want to organize your content to tell the story in a compelling way. Include some of your own slides in the clipboard to achieve some of your objectives.

Arizona Natural History Association

by muckl @ Sedona Website Design

The Arizona Natural History Association (ANHA) is a nonprofit organization founded in 1988 to assist the USDA Forest Service with public education, interpretation, research, activities and special projects to benefit Arizona’s public lands. WordPress based site with online store. www.aznaturalhistory.org

Beware the Google Image Search

by Kate Will @ denning e-solutions LLC

Website Image Rights & Why You Should Care To some, this topic may seem obvious, but we’ve had the issue arise often enough over the years, including just this last week, that I think it bears addressing in clear terms. … Continue reading

The post Beware the Google Image Search appeared first on denning e-solutions LLC.

3 Steps for Adding Video to Your Social Media Marketing

3 Steps for Adding Video to Your Social Media Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is video part of your social media marketing mix? Looking for tips to get started with video? Making the right decisions in three key areas will help you create videos that engage people. In this article you'll discover three steps to add video to your social media marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Choose a Video Type The great thing about social media is that you can create many different types of videos to keep your publishing schedule interesting and your followers engaged. Eighty-eight percent of businesses say that video is an important part of their marketing strategy. However, the biggest struggles are to stop recycling old content and choose the right type of video content. Here are five ways that you can include video in your social media marketing. Grab Attention With Pre-roll Video Pre-roll video ads are short 15- to 30-second videos that grab the viewer's interest in a product or service. You can use them on social media sites such as YouTube, Facebook, Twitter and Instagram. The secret to a successful pre-roll video is to gain the viewer's attention quickly, as most people naturally gravitate towards the Skip button or scroll past videos on their news feed. This pre-roll video from Geico pulls the viewer in by showing a runaway vacuum. Use humorous tactics like this to make your video stand out in the news feed and compel viewers to watch the whole thing. (Editorial Note: This video was removed from public view after this article published.) httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Xmzm1JCOqtU Show Viewers How to Do Something One way to produce highly targeted content is to teach your audience how to do something. This helps you improve shares and attract new followers. Fitness trainer Kayla Itsines regularly produces videos that teach her target audience how to do various fitness moves. Content like this has helped her become an influencer in the fitness industry, gaining her 4.4 million followers on Instagram. Her videos are easy to follow and they feature content that people would normally expect to pay money to see. http://www.instagram.com/p/_XYsJfACNp/ "How to" video searches on YouTube are up to 70%, with over 100 million hours watched on the platform. Problem-solving content is valuable and video is one of the best ways to offer it. Capitalize on Trending Topics Marketers are always hoping to create the next viral video, but with so much competition, it's not as easy as it sounds. That's why it's important to take advantage of the trending topics across social platforms. The Trending Topics sections on both Twitter and Facebook are popular sources of news content for social users. If you create a video related to a trending topic, you can potentially tap into a huge market. Jimmy Fallon created an a cappella video to celebrate the new Star Wars movie. Creating content around a popular event helped this video to secure millions of shares across social media. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ZTLAx3VDX7g Take a look at the events likely to create a buzz during the calendar year and incorporate these into your video marketing strategy. Go Behind the Scenes Showing people what goes on behind the scenes at your company is a great way to connect with your audience on a personal level. It helps close the gap between brand and customer, which is important in the world of marketing. In this video, Ben and Jerry's introduces one of their Flavor Gurus and gives viewers a brief look at what goes into creating their products and what it's like to work for the company. http://www.instagram.com/p/39m2aMRkLn/ Showcase Products When it comes to video content, 76% of consumers say that they would share a video if it's entertaining. When you incorporate a product video into your social strategy, it's important to strike a balance between promoting your product and keeping the tone light, fun and informal.

Online Reviews for Local Businesses: What Marketers Need to Know

Online Reviews for Local Businesses: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you own or manage a local business? Are you leveraging the full power of online reviews? To discover how to leverage online review services, I interview Martin Shervington. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Martin Shervington, one of the world's leading experts on Google+ and Google for Business. As a trainer, speaker and consultant, he helps marketers understand how to best utilize Google's services. Martin will explore online reviews for local businesses. You'll discover how to get reviews for your business, as well as how to respond to negative reviews. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Online Reviews for Local Businesses Google for business In June 2014 Google launched Google My Business, which simplifies how people set up pages. Part of this is for local businesses, so they can appear on a map, get reviews and so on. Martin has been doing research on this and says businesses are not quite connecting the dots on Google+ marketing and using this powerful tool. He says as of last year, only 37% of businesses had claimed their Google listing, 63% have not. Listen to the show to discover more about Google My Business. The impact of reviews Martin has spoken to hundreds of businesses (owners and staff) about reviews. People use reviews as a socialized way to judge the businesses around them, which get more customers as a result of reviews. For example, Martin shares, Tasty Thai in San Mateo can attribute thousands of dollars of revenue to one single positive Yelp review from a guy who had been to Thailand and loves their Thai food. At the moment Yelp has a lot of people's attention, and Martin hopes Google reviews will get to that level as well. Reviews can bring tourists, new people and new business. The downside is there's the potential for negative reviews. "[Businesses have to have] good service, good product and sometimes be willing to say when you haven't got it 100% right," Martin says. Listen to the show to hear about an amazing experience I had while traveling, based on a Yelp review. Google listings Martin explains how Google sometimes auto-generates a business listing, and a lot of people's businesses are listed without them knowing about it. To determine if your business has an auto-generated listing, Google your location to see if anything comes up. If it doesn't, go to Google.com/business to set one up. If it is already set up, click where it says "claim this listing," so you can control uploading photos, reply to posted reviews and more. When you set up a page on Google they verify it by phone or by mail. There are two different types of local pages, Martin continues, a storefront and a service area. If you run your business from home, say you are a service area to hide your address. Once you've claimed your property or set up your page from scratch, there are several things you can do: change the profile image (which is the icon people see when you make comments or reply to reviews), change your cover photo, manage your photos, add what you do to the description area, post on that Google page, reply to reviews, share reviews and more. You can even embed the best reviews on your website. This is how you take the social proof you get from reviews and spread it onto your website. The Google My Business dashboard provides a higher-level frame-of-reference around the things that are connected to your business, such as analytics, your YouTube channel, the page insights and the Google+ page itself.

Content Marketing Success: Why Answering Questions Sells

Content Marketing Success: Why Answering Questions Sells

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want more sales? Is content marketing a part of your strategy? To explore how to create content that sells, I interview Marcus Sheridan. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Marcus Sheridan, a blogger, podcaster, and keynote speaker who specializes in content and inbound marketing. He's known as "The Sales Lion," and is the author of the brand-new book, They Ask You Answer: A Revolutionary Approach to Inbound Sales, Content Marketing, and Today's Digital Consumer. Marcus explores how to market and sell with content. You'll discover how the right content can overcome buyers' fears. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Content Marketing Success Marcus' Story Marcus began learning about content marketing during the 2008 market crash. Within 48 hours, his swimming pool business, River Pools, lost a quarter of a million dollars after five clients pulled their deposits. By January 2009, three consultants had suggested filing for bankruptcy. However, if Marcus filed, he and his partners would lose their homes and their 16 employees would lose their jobs. Marcus knew he had to generate more trust, traffic, leads, and sales than ever, and he had no money to do it. So he looked at the Internet. Marcus read all about inbound marketing, content, and blogging. He learned that addressing his prospects' questions, issues, fears, worries, and concerns on the business website could help the business be successful. In March 2009, Marcus told his two business partners that the company needed to live by a new philosophy: "They Ask. You Answer." Marcus brainstormed all of the questions he'd ever been asked and found that the major questions were often ones businesses don't like to answer online. Committed to the new philosophy, however, Marcus began writing blog posts about customers' questions, including the good, the bad, and the ugly. The company became committed to answering questions more consistently and transparently than anybody in their space. Listen to the show to discover how this new approach transformed the website's traffic, leads, and sales. Online Content Overload Now that many websites have taken the same approach to content that Marcus did, I ask Marcus what advice he would give to any business owner concerned that approaches to website content have changed. Marcus says he's really bothered when businesses assume they shouldn't share their philosophies or content because they think everything has already been said. Those businesses are letting other people in their industry create the content. Business leaders also think they shouldn't share content because their content isn't amazing. Marcus disagrees and notes that initially his writing and video content were bad. However, he kept going and now his content is good. Listen to the show to hear what false idea Marcus says everyone believes. The Five Subjects That Make a Difference In any industry, Marcus says buyers want to discuss five subjects as they research a company, product, or service online, and addressing these subjects on your website will help you reach your marketing goals. Cost questions Problems questions (what the drawbacks and issues are) Comparisons (your product versus another) Best of (for example, the best marketing automation software) Reviews However, Marcus finds that businesses don't like to talk about these topics on their websites. As a result, they lose customers. Most people research cost online before they buy and get frustrated when they can't find that informa...

Facebook Engagement: How to Get Seen in the Facebook News Feed

Facebook Engagement: How to Get Seen in the Facebook News Feed

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to understand Facebook engagement? Are you looking for Facebook engagement tactics that lead to news feed visibility? To learn how to better use Facebook, I interview John Haydon for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview John Haydon, author of Facebook Marketing for Dummies and founder of Inbound Zombie, a consultancy focused on small- and medium-sized nonprofits. John shares why Facebook engagement is so important. You'll learn how to better engage Facebook fans. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Facebook Engagement Why Facebook engagement is so important John says that his definition of engagement—from a Facebook perspective—is like, comment and share, because that's what really matters. In his experience working with Facebook and nonprofits, which is slightly different than the for-profit world, John encourages an organization to work with existing community and get that community talking about them. He says he thinks about engagement, as it pertains to Facebook, as word of mouth. John explains that when your current customers or donors engage with content from your Facebook page (or talk about that content), their friends see that content. That's increased exposure for your organization. John says that exposure starts by getting your current community, the people who already love you, to engage first. Listen to the show to find out how the news feed algorithm impacts engagement.  How Facebook page managers should spur engagement  John wants to change the word posting to planting because when you plant something, like a bush, you have to stick around and take care of it. If you post an update on Facebook, you want to pay attention to how it's performing. If people are commenting, liking and sharing, you want to be involved in that comment thread. Recalling Amy Porterfield's words from a few weeks ago, John says the more people notice that you stick around, the more they'll engage with your content. John agrees that community management on Facebook comes down to identifying the best-performing content, then tweaking and experimenting with content to optimize how you're posting, topics, times that you're posting, etc. Listen to the show to hear what you’re missing by not interacting with what people are saying on your Facebook page. The Talking About This metric and how it's calculated John explains this metric as anything that a Facebook user does to create a story in their news feed for their friends to see. He says that when a user shares something, likes a page, RSVPs to an event a page has published or tags that page in a photo or a status update, all of these actions put content into the news feed of that user's friends so that they become aware. It's really what you might call viral reach. Anything that creates viral reach is Talking About This. Listen to the show to learn more about Talking About This. How a Facebook page used engagement to achieve a goal Three years ago, the Brain Aneurysm Foundation was doing Facebook upside-down. John worked on a strategy that started with letting people use the page to express who they are. The foundation tapped into the passion around the issue and encouraged people to share their stories on the page. One of the first posts was, "If you've had a friend who found out they had a brain aneurysm, what would be your number-one tip?" Now their Facebook page is mostly made up of posts by others who come to share their stories.

Pinterest Traffic: How to Use Pinterest for More Exposure

Pinterest Traffic: How to Use Pinterest for More Exposure

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to drive more traffic to your site with Pinterest? Are you looking for ways to improve your Pinterest exposure? To explore how Pinterest can help your business I interview Pinterest expert, Vincent Ng. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Vincent Ng, host of the Pictures to Profits podcast and author of Pinterest Marketing: How to Search Optimize Your Pins and Boards for Pinterest. He's a Pinterest expert and blogs at MCNG Marketing. Vincent shares how to use Pinterest to drive more traffic to your website. You'll discover reasons why you should use Pinterest in your social media marketing, tips on images and plugins that can boost traffic to your site and provide social proof for your company and what you need to know about Pinterest's smart feed and promoted pins. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Pinterest Traffic How Vincent got started with Pinterest While Vincent has successfully used Twitter and Facebook for his social media clients, he found neither site could drive much traffic to his blog. Curious about Pinterest's rapid early growth, he explored the site and discovered a fair amount of traffic going to his blog from it. That is when he decided it was the site he needed to be on. Vincent has been on Pinterest since its beta stage four years ago and has witnessed how much the platform has changed and evolved since the beginning. Listen to the show to discover the major changes and trends Vincent has witnessed on Pinterest. Reasons to consider Pinterest for your marketing People are naturally drawn to attractive, magazine-quality images. Information can be processed very quickly when it's seen as an image or picture. Pinterest makes it possible to leverage beautiful, shareable images to drive more traffic to your site. You'll hear Vincent describe how to lay out your images to get the most impact and reach from Pinterest. Pinterest is also a powerful way for users to discover things they might not have expected to find. It's become a visual search engine for products and can link items together based on how they've been previously pinned or searched. Vincent shares how many people bypass Google and go directly to Pinterest to search for products and lifestyle topics because the content is curated by actual users and the results tend to be high quality. Listen to the show to find out how Pinterest's visual recognition engine links related products to be searched and discovered. The biggest mistakes people make on Pinterest The biggest mistake businesses make on Pinterest is neglecting to redirect the source of a pin back to their site. The source is the URL where you want users to be directed when they click on your pin. You could potentially get hundreds of pins and repins on your image, but you lose the opportunity to grow your blog with Pinterest if you don't link directly to your site as the source of the pin. Listen to the show to learn how to edit your image to redirect where you would like your pins to point users. The Pinterest smart feed and what marketers need to know about it The Pinterest smart feed is a new algorithm based on the quality of the pin, the quality of the pin's source (blog or website) and relevance of pins. Each factor is measured based on the number of users who link to the specific pin or the source. High-quality images and the most popular sources are given preferential treatment on Pinterest's feed. It also boosts pins from people you follow and will suggest related pins based on what's pinned...

Search Engine Optimization Ranking

by Arron Andrews @ Top Visibility

This is how some search engine optimization companies worked in the past and some are still trying this today! “We appreciate the time you have taken to review our website & realize that you have choices when selecting a company to … Continue reading

How to Discover Social Media Insights About Your Competitors

How to Discover Social Media Insights About Your Competitors

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want to raise the bar on your social media? Are you monitoring your competitors? Knowing what works for the competition helps improve your own social media marketing. In this article you'll discover six ways to reveal insights about your competitors' social media marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Analyze Your Competitor's Content Share Rates Ahrefs is a handy tool for SEO, but it has some excellent social metrics as well. If you want to look at more than just social sharing numbers, it has some stats that will give you a peek at how your competitors' content is performing socially. Open Ahrefs Content Explorer. Then type in your competitor's domain, and click Search. You'll see a spread of your competitor's content, along with a snapshot of share stats in table form. To drill down into the shares for specific pieces of content, click the down arrow located in the far-right cell. You can instantly see how the article is distributed on social media. This chart provides you with information about the sharing velocity of the content and the most popular platforms. You can access this information for every article ever published. This helps you understand how, why and when your competitor's content is getting distributed. Note: Ahrefs requires a trial sign-up or paid membership. #2: Find Out Who Shares Your Competitor's Content on Twitter It's crucial to know who loves your competition. If an audience loves your competitors, there's a good chance that they'll love you, too. Go to https://twitter.com/search-home and type in a competitor's Twitter handle and when you see the results, click Live to see Twitter users who are promoting your competitor's content. These people, for whatever reason, may follow your competitor on Twitter. They at least liked your competitor's content so much that they shared it. What should you do about it? You may want to reach out and follow these users yourself, share their content or favorite their tweets. Doing this will get you on their radar. #3: Identify Top Influencers Who Share Your Competitor's Content Every industry has those people who are actively sharing great content. Chances are, your competitors are benefitting from the social sharing of these individuals. How would you like to have these people sharing on your behalf? You can use BuzzSumo here, but if you don't have a paid account, you can carry this technique only so far. BuzzSumo imposes a daily limit on non-users, so you may have to wait a day to try this one out. (Or just buy an account; it's worth it.) Go ahead and enter a competitor's website so you can identify their top-shared content again. Now, click View Sharers. The list you'll see shows you who is sharing this content and why it's so popular. The information is roughly organized according to the top-ranked influencers. The people who are at the top are big on social media. They usually have lots of followers. If they have a website, you can also see that web address. One of the best features of this tool is the ability to filter results. Say you want to find only the social sharers who have a blog. No problem. Filter the results to show only bloggers. Now you can target the people who might be open to sharing your content on their blog, or who could be open to guest-posting opportunities. What should you do with this information on social influencers? Connect with them on their preferred social media network. Get to know them. Reach out to them and request retweets. Inquire about guest posting on their blog. #4: Discover Your Competitor's Most Popular Content What are the most popular articles your competitors are producing? What content has the most shares? Use a tool like BuzzSumo to find out. You don't need to sign up for an account to use the limited version. Enter the domain URL of the site your competitor uses to post content.

5 Unusual Tips to Improve Your SEO With Social Media

5 Unusual Tips to Improve Your SEO With Social Media

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to rank higher in search engines? Interested in ways to use your social accounts to improve your SEO? Social media has a significant impact on your search results, and a strong social presence can boost your search rankings. In this article you'll discover five ways to use social media to improve your search rankings. Listen to this article: #1: Build Links With Your Social Channels Google used to put a high value on link building in their search rankings, no matter what quality of links you were building. When people figured this out and started manipulating rankings with fake or low-quality links to their site, Google started to focus on higher-quality links. Links on social media are often considered higher-quality links, because social sites have a high web authority from the get-go. Even if your Facebook page is new, it's likely to rank highly (and maybe even surpass your website) thanks to Facebook's overall high authority. It may sound obvious, but make sure that you include a working link to your website not only in your content, but also in every social profile you have. In addition to increasing traffic to your site, it's also highly valuable for link building. When it comes to link building within content, post content like new products or blog posts to your social profiles to encourage sharing. For example, you could create a relevant YouTube video for each blog post and embed it in the post, capitalizing on the high web authority to send traffic to your site and increase search rankings. #2: Grow Your Follower Base Pages with a lot of high-quality followers rank better in searches. High-quality followers are real followers on your social channels, and a large percentage of them engage or interact with you in some form. This interaction might be repinning pins, retweeting your content or sending you a tweet, placing reviews on Google+ or engaging with your posts on Facebook. Social signals are a very real factor when it comes to SEO. Search engines look at social signals to find out how often you're posting to your social media accounts, how many people interact with you and if there are social-sharing elements available to visitors to your site. There's no point in trying to outsmart the algorithms with fake likes on Facebook. Low-quality followers are not good for you. Not only will Facebook penalize you for fake likes, search engines like Google will punish you with lower rankings, too. So, make sure you're steadily gaining a solid base of followers that are interacting with you and your content, and encourage them to share, engage and interact with you. #3: Make Your Content Searchable and Sharable Pinterest is a great example of a social platform that makes your content both searchable and sharable. Pinterest encourages sharing to a great extent. Users post pins they like to their boards, and share them with other Pinterest users. Many social accounts give you the option of keeping your content private, or relatively so. On YouTube, you can have unlisted videos, and only people who have links to the videos can watch them. Pinterest allows secret boards, and Twitter gives you the option to have a private profile. When it comes to your business, you want all of your social accounts to be public, and you want all of your content to be searchable. For example, for your Facebook profile, you have the option to make your posts searchable in search engines. To do this, go to your Facebook privacy settings and enable the option Do You Want Other Search Engines to Link to Your Timeline?, shown here. The more people who see your posts, the more people who might share it. Encouraging sharing (including through methods like Facebook contests) is a great way to increase your search rankings. #4: Use Keywords in Your Posts Keywords are important for your website, blog and paid ad campaigns,

SearchCap: Google Search Console beta invites, Google attribution & question and answers in maps

by Barry Schwartz @ SearchCap: Daily Search Engine News Recap

Below is what happened in search today, as reported on and from other places across the web.

The post SearchCap: Google Search Console beta invites, Google attribution & question and answers in maps appeared first on Search Engine Land.

How to Find More Customers With Twitter

How to Find More Customers With Twitter

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to find new customers for your business? Have you considered searching for them on Twitter? Thanks to public updates, searchable bios and a plethora of third-party tools, you can find customers on Twitter easier than you can on any other network. In this article I'll show you how to find your current and future customers on Twitter, without advertising. #1: Start With a Strong Profile Before you start looking for potential customers on Twitter, you need to make sure that any potential customers who visit your profile know who you are and what you do. Listen to this article: Start by visiting your Twitter profile and reading your bio. Make sure that any products, services and qualifications are clearly listed in your bio, along with your website link and location. If they're not, click Edit Profile and add them. Once you're finished, save your changes. To complete your profile, make sure that you pin a tweet at the top that highlights your business, products, services, free ebook, top case study or anything else you want to promote to potential customers. You can create a new tweet for this or use one you've recently tweeted. Click on the three dots beneath your tweet to pin it to the top of your profile. Pinning the tweet ensures that potential customers don't miss the message you're trying to send them. Once your profile is set, you can start searching for potential customers on Twitter. #2: Search for Potential Customers Using Their Bios Can you identify potential customers by keywords they use to define themselves and by their location? If so, you can use Followerwonk to discover them. This Twitter search engine allows you to search for people using the criteria shown here. You then get the following search results. As a free user of Followerwonk, you need to click through to the person's profile to follow or add him or her to a Twitter list. If you want to do the latter, start by going to your Twitter profile and clicking on the Lists tab (to the left of the Edit Profile button). Scroll down to find the Create New List button. Give your list a name that you'll recognize, add a description and set the list to Private. If it's set to Public, each user you add to this list will be notified. When you visit the profile of a potential customer, you can follow that person and/or add him or her to your newly created list. To add someone to a list, click the Settings wheel icon to the left of the Follow button. Now go to your Twitter list and see the news feed of updates from the potential customers you've added to your list. Use this list to start engaging with your potential customers. #3: Get Specific Tweets Delivered to Your Inbox Do you know your potential customers' needs or pain points? Do they share them on Twitter? If they do, you can get potential customers, primed to buy, delivered directly to your inbox. Start by using Twitter search to query a few things you think your potential customers might talk about on Twitter in relation to your products or services. For example, if you have a web hosting company, you might want to search for recommend web hosting ? -http -link to find people looking for recommendations for web hosting. The -http -link­ part will remove a majority of the results that contain links, which usually won't be tweets from potential customers. Once you find a few good searches, head over to IFTTT, sign up for a free account and create a new recipe. Start by selecting Twitter as the trigger channel. Next, choose New Tweet from Search as the trigger. Paste in your Twitter keyword search that generated some potential customers. Then select your choice of an instant email, email digest or Gmail notification as the action. The best option is an instant email or Gmail, as you want to be the first person to respond. Now customize the email you want to receive.

How to Use LinkedIn Publisher Statistics to Refine Your Marketing

How to Use LinkedIn Publisher Statistics to Refine Your Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use LinkedIn Publisher? Want to get deeper engagement from your posts? LinkedIn Publisher now offers the ability to review stats for your published posts, which helps you refine messaging, target the right audience and directly engage with the people who interact with you. In this article I'll share how to access LinkedIn Publisher statistics and how to use them strategically. Listen to this article: How to Access LinkedIn Publisher Stats LinkedIn Publisher is a powerful platform because it's sticky. Your posts live on forever on your profile, and the content is searchable. It's good for positioning yourself as an expert in your industry and sharing relevant information with your followers. Your LinkedIn Publisher analytics show you how your content is doing, make sure it's reaching the right people and help you connect with those who are responding to your posts. It's great for content development and lead generation. You can access your LinkedIn statistics in a couple of places: on your profile just above your posts and on your author page (the URL that's associated with the page where your posts are listed). Click on See More, and then select a post to see its statistics. The three sections of analytics are See How Your Post Is Doing, Demographics of Your Readers and Who Is Responding to Your Posts. Here's a look at how to use each section to create more powerful content and increase visibility. #1: Track Publication Trends Go to the See How Your Post Is Doing section to discover if your posts are getting views. You can see your posts' visibility for the last 7 days, 15 days, 30 days, 6 months and 1 year. This analytics section also lets you view how many likes, shares and comments a particular post has received, as shown in the upper-right corner of the image below. After you publish a post, keep a close eye on the activity for the first week. Often visibility increases on the second, third and fourth day. Therefore, if you're writing a post that has a specific timeline (perhaps it relates to a project, product or webinar release), make sure you post it a day or two before you need people to see it. Also, try posting on different days of the week and see if your results change. John White, a successful LinkedIn published writer, recommends posting at about 8 p.m. Eastern Time. Not only is this a good time to get views in Europe, but it's also not too late for U.S. time zones to see your content. It's interesting to look at the long-term view also to see if there's some correlation between trending events and the visibility of your post. For example, if your post on the latest Apple products gets a lot of traffic, you may want to write posts whenever Apple releases new products. Build on any increased reach by resharing a popular post as an update on Facebook, LinkedIn and Twitter. If you like to keep a close eye on your metrics, see if there's a correlation between reshares and LinkedIn views. #2: Discover Reader Demographics Scroll down the page to see the demographics of your readers. LinkedIn shows you reader demographics related to the top four industries, titles, locations and traffic sources. Use the first three demographics (industries, titles and locations) to make sure you're attracting the right audience with your content. For example, if your niche demographic is marketing and advertising executives, but your content is attracting job-seekers in software design, you're probably using the wrong keywords and content. Also check to see what other people in your field are writing about to attract the correct audience. Then reframe your content so it targets the right demographics. You can always use LinkedIn Pulse to research what other people in your industry are writing about. As far as traffic sources are concerned, it might surprise you to find out how people get to your posts.

How to Boost Your Facebook Ad Visibility

How to Boost Your Facebook Ad Visibility

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use Facebook ads to promote your business? Are you struggling to connect with your audience? By fine-tuning your Facebook ads, you can capture the attention of both customers and prospects. In this article you'll discover how to boost the visibility of your Facebook ads. Listen to this article: #1: Use a Clutter-Free Image With Minimal Text The image you choose for your ad depends on what business you're in and whom you're targeting. If you're a personal brand, you may want to choose a picture of yourself, because a friendly face can improve the performance of your ad. It's also possible to get good results with images that show a product or something else that's relevant to what you're advertising. When choosing an image, make sure that it isn't too busy or cluttered. And avoid using an image that has Facebook's shade of blue because people may dismiss your ad, thinking it has something to do with Facebook. It's also helpful to add a border around your image. Keep images text-free, or use a very small amount of text. Facebook has implemented a 20% rule for text in an ad image, which means text can cover no more than 20% of the image. In a tiny ad on the sidebar of a page, a lot of text on an image wouldn't be legible anyway. #2: Write Short, Attention-Grabbing Copy Your ad copy should be short and enticing and grab the user's attention immediately. Spend some time coming up with your ad copy. Facebook suggests you include a timeframe and a price (when appropriate) and stick to one call to action. You can create multiple ads with different text. Then test them to see which gets the most engagement. There are two distinct components to the ad copy: the headline and the text. In the news feed, the ad's headline (which is clickable) appears under the picture, and in the sidebar, it appears before the text copy. Try to keep the headline to a single line in the ad. The text copy sits above the image in the news feed or under the headline in the sidebar. Keep the text short enough that the person viewing the ad won't have to click the See More button. #3: Explore Audience Targeting When you're targeting an audience for your ad, don't just type in male/female, 30 to 40 years old, in a certain city and hope for the best. It's important to know who your customers are so you can drill down and segment accordingly. Target the people you want to be connected to you and your brand. For example, if you're advertising something that people can buy, you might want to target those who have bought from you before or expressed an interest in buying at some time. When creating your ad, always choose the location, age, gender and interests you're targeting. Most people won't list their job title or very personal details on their Facebook profile, so you can leave these details out. Target interests by specifying the pages that your ideal customer likes. You can target your direct competitors' pages. For example, if you're a photographer in Toronto, target the followers of the page of a competing photographer in the area. You might also want to target the pages of businesses whose products and services are complementary to yours. These people likely have the same customers as you. For example, if you're a web designer, target people who like the pages of a particular copywriter. Look at the profiles of people who like your page and see what other pages they like. You'll probably find common likes among your fans. Make sure that you target the actual pages, which show up in Interests, rather than the interests themselves. Note that there seems to be no real rhyme or reason to the pages that Facebook pulls up in the Interests section. You may enter the name of a page that has over 20,000 likes, and Facebook won't find it, but one with 2,000 likes may show up if you search for it. This is something you'll have to test for yourself when choosing page...

Snapchat and Podcasting Growth: What the Research Reveals

Snapchat and Podcasting Growth: What the Research Reveals

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Wondering if you should get into Snapchat? Is podcasting something you're considering? To discover more, I interview Tom Webster from Edison Research about his latest study on Snapchat and podcasting adoption. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Tom Webster, vice president of strategy and marketing at Edison Research and co-host of the Marketing Companion podcast. Tom is a specialist in consumer behavior and media consumption. Tom will explore his brand-new research from The Infinite Dial, focused on Snapchat and podcast adoption. You'll discover reasons to embrace Snapchat and podcasting for your business. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Snapchat Growth About the study Research from The Infinite Dial series dates back to 1998, according to Tom, and it's the longest-running study on digital habits, behaviors, and consumption. They have trending graphs for areas, such as Internet radio, that go back to 1998. Plus, they've measured all kinds of behaviors and patterns in relation to consumption of audio, video, social, and mobile. Tom has been involved with the study and has been the voice of the studies on webinars since 2004. When the series started in 1998, it was focused more on digital audio. While today's brands and streaming audio like Pandora and Spotify weren't around back then, there were plenty of others. For example there was Broadcast.com, which Mark Cuban sold to Yahoo, NetRadio, Spinner, AOL Radio, and lots of other fledgling brands, Tom explains. The survey was a means to track them and put them in their place in the universe. As behaviors started to migrate to various media (as opposed to the text-driven medium that it had been previously), The Infinite Dial started tracking that too. Over the years, they added podcasting, social media, and so on. Essentially, if people do it online, The Infinite Dial is interested in measuring how it's consumed. The Infinite Dial's goal was always to create the survey of record in the various fields covered, so they spend nearly six figures in hard costs on mobile and landline telephone sampling to make a study that's random, representative, and projectable to the United States population. Tom loves coming out with new facts every year that corroborate what he sees people do online. Listen to the show to learn more about the survey sampling and why they survey via telephone. Podcast growth One of the things Tom loves about doing survey research is that although it reflects the current state of America, it typically lags behind what the digerati think. It can lag by quite a bit, he says, but if it's a real thing, it eventually gets there. The Infinite Dial added podcast tracking back in 2007. Two years ago, before Serial popularized podcasting, research showed that 15% of Americans 12+ listened to a podcast in the past 12 months. While that's a huge number (tens and tens of millions of Americans), it had been growing steadily, but not exponentially. Podcasting inched up from 9% in 2008 to 11% to 2009. And to 12% in 2010. For a short time, podcasting plateaued before jumping to 15% in 2014. After Serial came out, there was enormous advertiser, brand, and insider interest in podcasting. Listenership went from 15% in 2014 to 17% in 2015. In 2016, podcast listening has surpassed 21% already. That's a 24% increase year over year in the percentage of Americans who listened to a podcast. The Serial effect didn't happen immediately, Tom continues, although it made people a lot more aware of the on-demand content out ther...

Growing Social Media Examiner: The Bumpy Road of Pursuit

Growing Social Media Examiner: The Bumpy Road of Pursuit

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Ever wonder how Social Media Examiner started? Are you curious about the obstacles we faced in building a sizable media entity? Sit back and learn the story that led millions of people to us. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, my friend Mark Mason, host of the Late Night Internet Marketing Podcast, interviews me to celebrate the fifth anniversary of the Social Media Marketing podcast. We'll explore the core skills that helped me move into social media marketing. You'll also learn how I make strategic decisions about the future of the company. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Pursuit My Entrepreneurial Journey Before Social Media Examiner, I was known as a writer. I wrote a book called Writing White Papers and helped a lot of out-of-work journalists figure out how to go from writing for magazines and newspapers to writing for businesses. The job of a white paper is to persuade and educate. Businesses with expensive or complex products or services use white papers to communicate about them. For instance, a big corporation would hire someone to talk to the engineering and sales departments and translate that foreign language into something a customer could understand. Mark asks how important the helping aspect is to me as an entrepreneur. Whatever I do, I want to help the largest number of people in a way that doesn't place a huge strain on me personally. There's only so much of me to go around, and by creating products that are highly scalable, I can make helping others a big part of what I do. For example, this podcast has more than 10 million downloads and Social Media Examiner has 60 million readers. I wasn't an overnight success, however. When I started Social Media Examiner in 2009, I felt like I was really late to the social media game. A lot of people say they feel they're late today. What I lacked in timing I made up for in my ability to ask questions, understand complex things, and communicate how these things work in a way everyone can understand. This skill has helped me throughout my career. In the 1990s, my focus was creative agency work and designing websites, which was novel at the time. I also helped people design annual reports, trade show booth displays, and corporate logos. When I transitioned into a writer and later into social media, my communication skills continued to serve me well. When I started Social Media Examiner, my secret skill wasn't that I knew anything about social (I knew nothing). It was my ability to discern which people knew things, extract information from them, and convey that knowledge to my audience. No matter what you do, figure out which of your skills allow you to travel into a new space. Then you can be really successful. My entrepreneurial journey has never been easy. By the same token, I think if it had been easy, I would have been bored and moved along to the next thing. I like a challenge and solving puzzles. I'm not one of those people who wants to build a system and then sit back and retire on a beach. I want to keep pushing the envelope and figuring out ways to be better. When I was in college, I dreamed that I was in a room with a couple of hundred people who were congratulating me on my success. I had the dream when I was around 20 years old, and I'm 49 now. That dream didn't come true for around 25 years. Although I've always had certain levels of success, I've never had something amazing happen overnight. I've always been the tortoise, not the hare. I realized my dream had come true in 2014, the second year of Social Media Marketing World,

How to Optimize Your Facebook Ads: A Proven Approach

How to Optimize Your Facebook Ads: A Proven Approach

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Want to improve the performance of your Facebook campaigns? Wondering how to successfully test and fine-tune your Facebook ads? To explore his process for optimizing Facebook ads, I interview Azriel Ratz. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Azriel Ratz, author of the Facebook Pixel eBook and the Facebook Ads Mastery online course. He manages Facebook ads for clients across the globe. Azriel explains how he researches audiences and creates ad sets. You'll discover which metrics to consider when testing Facebook ad performance. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: How to Optimize Your Facebook Ads Azriel's Story About five years ago, Azriel started working for a friend whose business had an email list of 1,000 subscribers at the time. Azriel's job was to post on Facebook, Pinterest, Instagram, and Twitter and figure out what posts worked or didn't work. When Azriel looked at the analytics and noticed that certain Facebook posts worked really well, his friend suggested scheduling posts at certain times and targeting the posts based on what was already working. For instance, they created yes-or-no poll questions on Facebook, which attracted a lot of reach and activity. The polls asked how people felt about the day's news. They also posted these questions on the website: A basic form asked a poll question and a reader had to give their email address to respond. With this approach, the email list grew to the tens of thousands, all without spending money on ads. Azriel's friend wanted to know what would happen if they started putting money behind these posts, so they started running serious tests on Facebook. Over the next three years, the list grew to about 150,000 email addresses and led to ecommerce sales and client work. Two years ago, Azriel started his own business, focusing solely on optimizing Facebook ads for clients. He discovers what audience and content work best and then uses Facebook ads to target each client's best potential audience with the best potential ads. As a result, clients get the best return on their ad spend. Listen to the show to discover what Azriel studied in college. The Value of Optimizing Ads Most people think that creating Facebook ads is a very basic process. They know who they want to talk to and what they want to say. Based on that knowledge, they create an ad, choose an audience (thinking Facebook will figure it out), and let the ad run. They believe the cost is what it is, and they can't do anything about it. However, Azriel explains, if a business talks to the same person a different way by creating slightly different ads, this change could possibly save the business money on the cost to reach that person. Over time, a savings of even one cent per click could potentially save a company hundreds of thousands of dollars, depending on the ad spend. Listen to the show to hear my thoughts on conversion rate optimization. Azriel's Process Azriel's process reflects the structure for creating ads in Ads Manager. However, before you begin creating ads in Ads Manager, you can use the specifics of Azriel's process to begin thinking about how to build your ads. Identify what business goal you want to achieve by running these ads: Do you want to get leads? Do you want people to attend your webinar? Do you want people to visit your store? Your business goal helps you choose which type of campaign will most likely get you the right results. If you choose a page likes campaign, don't expect to get webinar subscribers. A video view campaign isn't ideal for getting purchases on your website.

Mobile Marketing: Are You Ready for the Revolution?

Mobile Marketing: Are You Ready for the Revolution?

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have a mobile strategy for your business? Are you interested in discovering what the future of mobile marketing has in store? To learn how to market your business with mobile, I interview Tom Webster. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Tom Webster, the Vice President of Strategy and Marketing at Edison Research. He's authored studies such as The Social Habit and Twitter Users in America. He's co-authored a new book with Tim Hayden called The Mobile Commerce Revolution: Business Success in a Wireless World. Tom explores how mobile marketing impacts your business. You'll discover why successfully mobile marketing goes beyond technology, how consumer behavior is already being shaped by mobile, and how to respond to the mobile commerce revolution. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Mobile Marketing Why Tom wrote his new book  Working in consumer behavior and market research, Tom has tracked human behavior for decades. He helps brands figure out why humans do what they do. His particular area of interest is to capture the opinions and study the behavior of people out of their homes and on the go. For Tom, understanding mobile marketing goes beyond the technology. It's about being able to understand people's needs, wants, and desires while they are in transition, out and about, and away from home. This idea was the impetus behind his new book, The Mobile Commerce Revolution: Business Success in a Wireless World Listen to the show to learn how it's been possible for Tom's company, Edison Research, to study mobile behavior for decades.  What is the mobile commerce revolution Every year, experts in various trades are asked if this is going to be the year of mobile when, in fact, the year of mobile has already happened. According to Tom, the mobile commerce revolution is already upon us. You'll hear Tom describe the Starbucks mobile app as an example of how much consumer behavior has already been shaped by mobile. There's no special technology to the Starbucks mobile app. It's nothing more than a bar code on your phone that's tied to a method of payment. Yet it's eliminated the need for a wallet and made it simpler to purchase items using something Starbucks customers already have in hand: their smartphones. The use of this smartphone app has become such default behavior that it’s prompted customers to make a purchase at Starbucks when they otherwise might not have. If you base your mobile strategy on the technology, then you will not make it. Mobile isn't about technology. It's about being able to understand and enable human behavior. Listen to the show to hear what companies with successful mobile strategies are doing that others aren't. How marketers should respond to the mobile explosion  It's easy to be lulled into thinking that big data and clickstream analytics will give you everything you need to know to develop your mobile strategy. However, the first step when you develop a successful mobile strategy is to examine human behavior. Tom describes the mobile web as having three distinct eras. We've moved past the first two eras of optimizing for mobile and responsive design. We are now moving towards a new era of contextually relevant experiences based on a customer's unique needs and wants in the context of their specific location. Mobility enables this capability to happen. There is a serious measurement gap between the online and the offline interactions because our focus has either been on search or on purely technology solutions.

Ripoff Report Removed from Google for Several Hours, What Happened?

by submit @ Submit Express

Written by Pierre Zarokian We stumbled across something quite amazing this morning: RipOffReport appeared to have been completely de-indexed by Google for several hours. We can confirm that at 11 AM pacific standard time, performing a search for “site:ripoffreport.com” or the Ripoff Report brand name returned no results. Although the site has since shown up […]

26 Ways to Use Video for Your Social Media Marketing

26 Ways to Use Video for Your Social Media Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to add video to your social media marketing? Looking for ways to increase video views and engagement? In this article, you'll discover 26 ways to use video to improve your social media marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Experiment With Video Lengths When it comes to the ideal video duration, a lot depends on the type of video you want to share with your audience. Testing different video lengths will give you an idea of what works best for you. Before you get started shooting or editing your video, you should know the maximum video lengths per platform. These include: Facebook: 120 minutes Twitter recommends keeping videos under 30 seconds Instagram: 60 seconds Snapchat: 10 seconds Vine: 6 seconds Note: While you don't have to reach the maximum time length, you're not allowed to go over it. If you really want to get around the maximum video duration on social media platforms, you can post a link to a YouTube video, which will allow you to share longer content. Unfortunately, this doesn't work on Instagram, where you can't share links except in ad campaigns. #2: Optimize for Autoplay Twitter, Facebook, and Instagram offer Autoplay as a feature. When users scroll through their news feeds, your video automatically plays as it passes over their screen. This encourages users to watch your video, because it's already playing. Feature movement within the first few frames to enhance the Autoplay feature and grab attention quickly. There is a caveat, however. Users are more likely to turn off Autoplay on their mobile devices to reign in unwanted data charges. Alternatively, you can target longer video campaigns to desktop users and see if that increases your views and engagement overall. Though Autoplay helps increase views when Facebook and Twitter users have it enabled, be careful not to count on it too much. #3: Add Subtitles Social media connects us with users whom we may not interact with otherwise, and brands that are as inclusive as possible will have the best results. Adding subtitles to your videos lets users watch them on their mobile devices even if they're in a place where they can't or don't want to play the accompanying sound (like a waiting room or a plane). More importantly, adding video subtitles will allow those who are hearing-impaired to watch and get all of the information. It's easy to add subtitles to your video from your computer with any video editing tools. You can also add subtitles to Facebook videos by uploading SRT files with your video. #4: Broadcast Live Facebook Live video lets businesses and users broadcast videos to their audiences in real time from their smartphones. You can see the number of users watching and users can comment on the video in real time. You can also address comments directly as the video plays. One study found that viewers spend 3x more time watching live videos than videos that aren't broadcasting in real time. Users automatically opt in to get notifications when someone they follow is "going live," which increases visibility. Once your live video is complete, you can save your live video to your timeline so users who missed it live can watch it later. Periscope and Blab also provide platforms for live video sharing. #5: Grab Attention Early It's vital to grab your audience's attention within the first few seconds of your video. You need to capture viewers' interest within the first 10 seconds (or less) or they'll stop watching and move on to something else. This forces you to be concise and get right to the point. Vine's success with six-second videos proves it's possible to catch a user's interest in 10 seconds or less. Within the first few seconds, the following video tells viewers what it'll be about, and offers a solution to a problem. Hooks are an important part of capturing interest, because they explain why viewers should care or be interested.

Social Media Evolution: What Does the Future of Social Marketing Look Like?

Social Media Evolution: What Does the Future of Social Marketing Look Like?

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you amazed at how much social media has changed over the last few years? Want to discover what's next? To explore the evolution of social media, I interview Brian Solis. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Brian Solis, a principal analyst at the Altimeter Group. He's written eight books, including Engage and What's the Future of Business? His newest book is called X: The Experience When Business Meets Design. Brian will explore how social media has changed and how it continues to evolve. You'll discover how marketers can use moments of truth to engage their customers. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Social Media Evolution From Engage until now Brian recalls that in the late 90s and early 2000s, he helped with development around what became social media and realized that two-way digital marketing aspect was going to be phenomenal. He says his book Engage was the culmination of all that work put into a book designed to help anyone in marketing or business really understand how to become social. After Engage, Brian says, the world started to change and technology started to accelerate. This is something he studies as both an analyst and an anthropologist. Brian has continued to write books, do research and speak on how to bridge the world of brand or business with technology and people. He says social has become part of that process, as has mobile and digital transformation, wearables, etc. When asked about major changes in social media that have taken place between his first book and today, Brian talks about creating an infographic called The Wheel of Disruption while he was writing What's the Future of Business? The infographic showed all of the things that were disrupting industries, with an emphasis on brand, marketing and engagement. He explains that then and now, the three things Fred Wilson once called The Golden Triangle are at the core of everything. Brian goes on to discuss how wearables, augmented reality and services like Uber, Instacart, Postmates, Amazon, Drone Delivery and Google Express are creating disruption not only on technology fronts, but also on behavioral and expectation fronts at a human level. Listen to the show to hear Brian explain how the disruption happening today has grand implications for every business in every industry. The importance of experience Brian shares that while many marketers, brand strategists and executives say experience is one of the most important things to deliver, that means different things to different people. From great customer service to great product design, it's all over the map. Brian believes that everything that happens when you buy, use, shop for or have a problem with something are moments that contribute to the overall experience. Brian shares why he thinks we should be able to define and design experiences as part of business and branding to build better relationships, and why he believes experience is the next competitive advantage. He says that while some savvy organizations have introduced efforts to define a brand experience (BX), a customer experience (CX) and a user experience (UX), all of these efforts are disparate. Thus, by default or by design, the experience is disconnected. Listen to the show to hear why Brian wants to bring all experiences under one banner of X, where everything works together. Businesses doing a great job with experience Brian explains that he chose the companies he talks about in his book not because they are examples of holistic experiences,

Search Engine Optimization and Design

by Administrator @ PG Webs » Search Engine Optimization

Building a good even wonderful is with regards to most web page designers. At the same time, sometimes the potency of the web page is receded. We need to note that your goal is not just to employ a beautiful website that can make people would like to stay and check around and luxuriate in, [...]

Online Reputation Management

by nobox @ nobox creatives

On Oct 29th I had the privilege of speaking at Georgia Gwinnett College about Online Reputation Management and how that impacts job searches and your career. I had a blast and am grateful for all of the attendees! I promised them an online resource of the material we covered as there was not nearly [...]

The post Online Reputation Management appeared first on nobox creatives.

Google PPC vs. Social Media Marketing: Which Is Right For Your Business?

by Peter Cunningham @ Keyword Performance, LLC.

Digital marketing is a big tent. There’s SEO, content marketing, direct email-marketing, display advertising, native advertising, influencer marketing, inbound marketing, drip marketing and a whole lot more. But for most small and medium-sized businesses (SMBs), digital marketing comes down to search engine marketing (PPC with Google AdWords or Bing Ads) and social media marketing. For […]

The post Google PPC vs. Social Media Marketing: Which Is Right For Your Business? appeared first on Keyword Performance, LLC..

Best Option for Website SEO: WordPress, Squarespace, Wix, Weebly, or HubSpot COS?

by Rebecca Gill @ Web Savvy Marketing

Until recently, I hadn’t thought much about website SEO and which website builder was best for supporting search engine optimization efforts and best practices. I’m a WordPress girl after all, and in my head, WordPress is the only option. But recently, my private Facebook group has received a number of questions asking about SEO and... Read More

The post Best Option for Website SEO: WordPress, Squarespace, Wix, Weebly, or HubSpot COS? appeared first on Web Savvy Marketing.

How to Encourage Employees to Share Your Content on LinkedIn

How to Encourage Employees to Share Your Content on LinkedIn

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are your employees on LinkedIn? Do they share your company's content with their networks? Asking your employees to promote your company content on LinkedIn is a great way to reach more prospects and increase visibility. In this article I'll explain how to help your employees share your content on LinkedIn. #1: Promote the Program The first step to starting a LinkedIn employee engagement program is to find and appoint a leader. Look for someone from marketing who's enthusiastic about LinkedIn and excited about this program. You'll want to choose a passionate leader who can motivate your employees and get them excited to participate. Listen to this article: Once you've established a leader, get a couple of employees on board before rolling out the program to the rest of your staff. Later on, after you work out the bugs and streamline the processes, these employees can promote the program and encourage others to participate. Now you're ready to launch the program to everyone. #2: Communicate the Goal First, explain and outline your company's current digital marketing efforts and what it takes to get followers for your social media channels. Then, make it clear that the program's overarching goal is for all employees to attract new followers and customers by representing the company as a cohesive team. Finally, create a short but powerful mission statement that will engage employees in helping you to achieve the goal of your LinkedIn Employee Engagement Program. #3: Highlight Participant Benefits To get your employees' buy-in, share why their participation can benefit them personally and professionally. For example, the program can increase exposure to potential customers, drive more leads and increase sales, possibly resulting in higher bonuses or profit-sharing. Additionally, participating in the program can enhance your employees' personal profiles, activities and visibility on LinkedIn, and they'll be seen as industry professionals. And it may even improve their reputation within the industry your company serves. #4: Outline Profile and Engagement Expectations Spend some time going over what you expect from employees who take part in the program. Keep in mind that you don't want to overload them with too much extra work. Here are some tasks you might want to ask them to do: Optimize Personal Profiles It's important that employees have a complete and professional-looking LinkedIn profile. Ask them to update their profile with a company and job description (which may come from marketing). You'll probably need to walk employees through how to optimize their LinkedIn profiles. Show them how to: Claim a vanity URL. Add or change their profile picture. A professional-looking profile image goes a long way toward making the right first impression on LinkedIn. Set the correct industry description. Update the Summary section and add rich media (especially if your company produces high-quality videos and other rich media). Update the Experience section. Link their current position to the LinkedIn company page (thus increasing your company's LinkedIn page rank in organic searches on Google). Update and optimize their contact information. Expand Personal Networks Share how together as a team you'll be able to reach hundreds or thousands of people who may be interested in reading and engaging with the company's content. The larger their personal networks, the better. Provide instructions on how and why your staff should connect with fellow employees, customers, partners, prospects and so on. Explain how this will help expand the reach of your company's content on LinkedIn. You might share an example like the following: "Say that 20 employees in the program have 200 connections. This means that potentially 4,000 people could see and engage with our content if we shared and promoted it. Even if only a small percentage of these 4,

Achieving High Ranking SEO Listings

by Gaetano Pizzi @ AudiologyDesign » Search Engine Optimization

It has become pretty clear at this point that you need your website at the top of search engine results (seo listings) to effectively promote your business online.  This is...

The post Achieving High Ranking SEO Listings appeared first on AudiologyDesign.

Tips for Setting up a YouTube Channel for your Practice

by Meghan Pendley @ AudiologyDesign

Tips for Setting up Your Practice YouTube Channel Videos are the preferred medium for many different online search queries, so utilizing quality video content that is relevant to your target...

The post Tips for Setting up a YouTube Channel for your Practice appeared first on AudiologyDesign.

How to Vet Social Media Groups for Prospects

How to Vet Social Media Groups for Prospects

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you looking for ways to engage directly with your customers? Have you thought about joining social groups on Facebook, LinkedIn and beyond? Joining the right social groups allows you to connect with your customers by answering their questions and sharing valuable information. In this post you'll discover how to choose the best social groups for your business. Listen to this article: #1: Look for Real Discussions The most important thing to look for in a social group is discussion. You're not looking for posts; you're looking for posts with comments. This signals a group whose members are actively engaging with each other. In other words, you want to steer clear of the "link farms" of social groups. These are the ones where members stop by to drop a link to their latest content or sales page, and nothing more. Note that groups that allow people to share links can still have engagement. It's the groups that have zero engagement and lots of links that you'll want to avoid or leave at your earliest convenience. Sure, you could drop your own links into those groups, but chances are no one is listening. #2: Consider Groups Your Competitors Join If you're having trouble finding social groups to join for your business, take a look at what groups are listed on your competitors' profiles. Start by visiting your competitors' Facebook profiles. Click on their About tab and scroll down to see if they have any groups listed publicly on their profile. You can find a similar listing of groups on some LinkedIn profiles. Note that some LinkedIn users can see who has visited their profile. Also check the About tab on your competitors' Google+ profiles to see if they publicly share the communities they've joined. This research should point you toward groups that will be great for your business to participate in to find customers, colleagues and partners. #3: Make Sure Your Customers Are There To ensure that the groups you've joined are home to your customers (and that they're actively engaged), do a quick preview of engaged member profiles. You can do this by hovering over names of people engaged in discussions in Facebook groups. You can scroll through discussions on LinkedIn to see the headlines of discussion starters or hover over names in the comments or discussions. Both will usually include job titles and company names. On Google+, hover over names of Google+ users to see their taglines, many of which will also include job titles and company names. This research should ensure that your customers are participating in discussions within a group and help you figure out the right people to start engaging with yourself. #4: Go Local Whenever you're searching for great groups for your business, don't forget to go local in your search. Even if your business isn't solely local, you'll likely find great local groups on Facebook, LinkedIn and Google+ that focus on helping businesses refer other businesses. In many cases local groups tend to be more heavily moderated than general groups, making them invaluable. #5: Try Paid-Entry Groups Another option when searching for social groups with strong engagement is to focus on groups that require some form of payment to enter. This includes the use of paid products, courses, subscriptions, memberships, masterminds, events, conferences and other premium points of entry. To find these groups, ask yourself what premium resources your customers would buy. These groups likely are filled with the customers you want to connect with; ones who've shown they're willing to invest in premium education, products and services. Go Beyond Social Networks Don't just rely on the top social networks to connect with your customers. Look beyond social networks for forums, Q&A networks and other online communities within your industry. These also offer a wealth of opportunities to engage directly with your ideal cust...

SlideShare: How to Market Your Business With This Growing Platform

SlideShare: How to Market Your Business With This Growing Platform

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use SlideShare? Are you looking for more leads? To learn how SlideShare can help marketers, I interview Todd Wheatland for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Todd Wheatland, author of The Marketer's Guide to SlideShare. He's also head of Thought Leadership at Kelly Services. Todd shares his insights into how SlideShare can be used to generate more exposure and leads for your business. You'll learn the tactics to use and the mistakes to avoid to ensure you get the most out of this platform. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: SlideShare for Business Why marketers should take a closer look at SlideShare Todd believes there are three reasons why marketers should take a closer look at SlideShare. 1. Pure traffic. SlideShare is one of the highest-traffic sites on the Internet, receiving over 60 million unique visitors every month. It gives sheer exposure to your potential audience and SlideShare credibility for search engines. You'll discover amazing things that can happen when you use the same content from your website on SlideShare. The inter-play between content and distribution in one place is very unique in terms of what SlideShare delivers. 2. Business audience. It's a platform that's about business. You'll find out the six words that are the most used tags on content in SlideShare. 3. Leads. The lead-capturing model that SlideShare has been using for the last couple of years is a very simple tool. It's easy for the visitor. You'll hear about how flexible the lead form is for the marketer and the control it gives when you ask for lead generation. A quick overview of SlideShare Todd explains how SlideShare began as a place for people to upload the PowerPoints they were presenting at a conference or an event. Since then, it has evolved into a content marketing platform for any form of digital content. With SlideShare, you can take any sort of presentation and insert videos and record an audio track and lay it over the top. You can then even use it as an audiovisual presentation. It's a platform for you to share any type of digital content including Word documents, infographics, webcasts and HD video. It has moved far beyond the original premise. If you're a blogger with great content on your blog and you choose to house it on SlideShare, you could decide to use your content on SlideShare specifically to capture leads. There are certain ways to handle lead capture on SlideShare versus your own site. Todd states that if you have content that has a complex design, when you host that document on SlideShare, it enables you to embed it very neatly. You'll learn why you should think of it as an enhanced YouTube embed, rather than seeing it as something competing with your website. It supports and drives traffic to your own platform. Listen to the show to find out why the average use on SlideShare is probably far less sophisticated than what the average marketer or professional is using and trying to achieve out of it. How Kelly Services uses SlideShare Todd shares how Kelly Services started to get deep on SlideShare about 2-3 years ago. At present, they have an off-brand on SlideShare called The Talent Project. It's where all their major content items including research reports, ebooks, infographics and videos are stored. You'll hear why they have a platinum network account and how it works for them. The "network" part means that their most prolific con...

Raising the Bar

by @ Position Research

Nulla vitae elit libero, a pharetra augue. Aenean eu leo quam. Pellentesque ornare sem lacinia quam venenatis vestibulum. Cras mattis consectetur purus sit amet fermentum. Nullam quis risus eget urna mollis ornare vel eu leo. Donec sed odio dui. Fusce dapibus, tellus ac cursus commodo, tortor mauris condimentum nibh, ut fermentum massa justo sit amet

The post Raising the Bar appeared first on Position Research.

What is Search Engine optimization and how it cans Benefit Your Business

by Administrator @ PG Webs » Search Engine Optimization

Search engine ranking, and that is often known as WEB OPTIMIZATION, is a procedure of boosting the degree in addition to quality connected with in order to a site by yahoo and Google by means of organic as well as listings. The more expensive your personal company’s web page ranks with Web Final result Web [...]

How to Use Pinterest for Local Businesses

How to Use Pinterest for Local Businesses

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want to connect with local customers on Pinterest? Wondering how to drive foot traffic with Pinterest? Pinterest offers local businesses a way to cultivate relationships with prospects and customers who are primed to walk through your door. In this article you'll discover how to use Pinterest to market a local business. Listen to this article: #1: Find Out What Likely Customers Are Interested In Before you do anything on Pinterest, spend some time on the platform studying the people you want to reach. You likely have an idea of who your target audience is. Are they the same people you're hoping to reach on Pinterest? Find out what your target audience is doing on Pinterest, who they follow, and what kinds of things they're pinning. Start by browsing the categories on Pinterest. Click to the right of the search box to open the drop-down category list. Click through the categories that are most relevant to your business and check out related topics. From here, you can start to see where your content and business might fit in on Pinterest. Try searching for related words in the Pinterest search bar. Pinterest's Guided Search will show you the most commonly searched words and phrases with your search term. You can also click through to the most popular pinners and pins and boards from that search term. This is a great place to find your target customers, and learn what kind of content your target customers value and how they share it. #2: Create Keyword-Friendly Boards and Profiles Now that you've identified popular topics and keywords for your target audience, you can begin building your profile. You've likely discovered some popular topics that are related to your industry. Use the interest topics you've identified for your boards. For example, if you're a hair salon, "Hair styles DIY," "Curly hair tips," and "Prom styles" might be good boards for your business. Your Pinterest profile is a perfect place to embed your keywords. This will help you get discovered on Pinterest and also on Google. Add keywords to your profile name, profile description, board titles, and board descriptions. #3: Fill Your Boards With Informative Content People come to Pinterest looking for things to learn and to buy. Now that you know what your audience finds interesting, consider what informative content you can share on your boards. This is the type of content that will get more repins and help you reach more people. Create some boards that are related to your local community. For example, if you're a restaurant, create a board to share events that are taking place in your area. If you're a vet, you could share educational content related to health and care for animals, popular pet products, and favorite places to take pets in the surrounding area. Informative content will help you extend your reach. In addition to curating that content from others, you should also create your own content. Think about what customers need to know in order to value the service you provide. What kind of customer education is needed in your industry? Create simple graphics to explain a point or a new regulation. Even for non-designers, it's easy to create informative and engaging infographics with online tools. You might also write an explainer article or create a video to show how something gets done. Share your content on Pinterest as a vertical pin. Pins perform best at 600 x 1200 (or more) pixels. Remember to write an information-rich caption to get more engagement. #4: Drive Foot Traffic and Click-throughs With Rich Pins Pinterest rich pins allow you to embed information from your website that is updated dynamically to encourage customer conversions. Here are some rich pins that might be helpful for your local business: Use article pins if you have a blog or create blog content. When you create article pins, the headline, author, and story description will automatically be pul...

How to Assess and Improve Your Social Media Marketing: A Monthly Plan

How to Assess and Improve Your Social Media Marketing: A Monthly Plan

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is social media working for you? Want better results? Regularly analyzing the performance of your social media marketing helps ensure your content and profiles are delivering. In this article you'll discover four monthly assessments to improve your social media marketing results. Listen to this article: #1: Review Key Performance Indicators Most marketers will tell you that if you didn't measure it, it didn't happen. Before you go running to your dashboard, though, it's important to know what you need to measure. Determine which key performance indicators (KPIs) actually matter to your business. B2Cs, for example, often care about engagement and brand awareness. This means metrics such as likes, shares, comments, followers and retweets. B2Bs, on the other hand, put more weight on the clicks, conversions and website traffic coming from social channels. Look at the numbers to see where your leads are coming from, when and how they convert and what types of content produce the greatest returns. From there, you can determine what to tweak for the best possible performance, and what to discard or modify. You can (and should) consider both quantitative and qualitative metrics. Quantitative factors are more concrete and easier to measure (optimal time of day and character count). Qualitative factors are more abstract (subject matter and tone of voice) and can be a bit trickier to measure accurately. Quantitative Metrics Once you've selected your KPIs, start with the quantitative analysis.  Pay attention to the best times to post your social content. Many social media tools automatically analyze this for you, but you can also check manually. For example, look at the top-performing posts based on clicks (assuming that posts with fewer than five clicks shouldn't be counted), and see if you can identify a pattern in terms of days and hours. Also look at your worst-performing posts and compare their times and days to the successful set. Find out if your audience prefers shorter, snackable messaging or longer, meatier posts. Look at the character count for Twitter or the word count for LinkedIn and Facebook to see which lengths were most successful for each network. Although 65% of B2B marketers realize that visual content works, look at whether visual posts are really driving engagement for your brand. Also, find out what kind of visuals worked best: images, videos, slides, infographics or GIFs. For Twitter, despite research showing that tweets with images generally outperform those without, that may or may not be true for your business. Depending on which social networks you're posting to, check the impact of hashtags and keywords you've used. If you see that a certain hashtag isn't getting you results, turn to Hashtagify.me or RiteTag to find new ideas, especially more long-tail versions that your target audience may be monitoring. Qualitative Metrics There are also some qualitative metrics you need to review monthly: Identify what topics have performed well. Is there an increasing number of shares, likes and inquisitive comments when you promote blog posts about certain topics, events or trends? The easiest way to assess this is to bucket all of your social posts into "campaigns" when writing them. Then you can see which campaign did the best, and use this knowledge to write similar content. Assess whether your top posts were written in an educational, humorous or straightforward tone. This one is a bit harder to analyze. Try to find out if people are reading your posts to educate themselves professionally or reading them just for fun. Keep in mind that while B2C marketing efforts focus on driving traffic and engagement (which are, no doubt, important to any marketing effort), B2B campaigns are focused on leads. Ultimately, you'll use your analytics to help find out how many of the people you're engaging through social channels will contribute to your botto...

How to Win With Pinterest Contests

How to Win With Pinterest Contests

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Have you considered running a Pinterest contest? Looking for tools to help? Pinterest contests can increase your followers, boost engagement, and promote your brand and products. In this article, you'll discover how to easily host and manage a winning contest on Pinterest. Listen to this article: #1: Choose a Contest Management Tool Pinterest contests can be challenging to run, simply because they're hard to keep up with. Fortunately, Pinterest contest apps can make the process significantly easier. Some apps will even create landing pages to capture valuable lead information (like email addresses and phone numbers) that users otherwise wouldn't likely submit on a social media platform. If you're going to host a Pinterest contest, here are three apps you may want to try. Wishpond Wishpond has a user-friendly interface and features a lot of great tools for customizing your contest to fit your needs. Wishpond's contest app allows you to create "entry galleries" where other users can vote on their favorite pins or boards that have been entered into the contest. Users can do this by submitting their email addresses, providing an additional way to capture lead information. Other features allow you to choose customizable landing page templates, add a countdown to your landing page to increase urgency (and entries), and access analytics to see views, conversions, and conversion rates. You can also share entry forms on Facebook and Twitter. The landing page is designed to be both desktop- and mobile-friendly. You can preview the landing page and entry forms while creating them. The Wishpond contest app features the ability to have two different periods (or sections) of the contest: one period allows entries and another only allows voting on the entries. Wishpond offers a free trial, so you can see if the software is right for you. The basic plan, which includes social promotions, starts at $45 per month. PromoJam PromoJam's Pin-It-to-Win-It promotions app makes it easy to run a Pinterest contest. It can take as little as 10 minutes to get your contest up and running. With PromoJam's Pinterest contest app, you can create an SEO-optimized URL for your landing page. Choose from a variety of stunning and fully customizable landing page templates. This landing page converts into a confirmation page once users have submitted their entry. Other PromoJam features include the ability to share customized QR codes for your contest, view analytics and user entries as the contest progresses, add social plugin buttons (like a Facebook like option) to your campaign, and use a random winner selection tool. To use PromoJam's Pinterest contest app, you need to upgrade to the pro plan, which costs $249.99 a month, and allows you to collect up to 10,000 user submissions. Woobox Woobox is another amazing contest app that's used by brands like Fisher-Price, Crayola, and Shopify. Woobox's Pinterest contest features let you collect email addresses, allow unlimited entries or only one per user, create tabs for Facebook pages, create HTML entry forms, add an age restriction, and require users to follow you to enter (users must follow you on Pinterest for contest eligibility). Woobox has a free plan and trial, so you can get a feel for the interface before you purchase. To access all of the social promotion apps continually, including the Pin to Win app, you'll need to upgrade to a paid plan. The basic plan starts at $30 per month. #2: Pick a Contest Type At a first glance, it seems like the easiest way to host a Pinterest contest would be to ask users to repin a specific pin. That would be easy to track and easy for users to participate. However, it's not a valid option. You're not allowed to ask users to pin one specific pin. Here are some other options to consider. Require Pinners to Use a Specific Hashtag

5 Facebook Marketing Hacks for Your Website

5 Facebook Marketing Hacks for Your Website

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Is your website using Facebook to the fullest? Are you wondering how you can get the most out of Facebook for your business? To learn how to use Facebook to your advantage, this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast goes deep into the subject. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, you'll discover 5 Facebook hacks you can employ on your website to help drive more traffic and exposure. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Marketing Hacks #1: Use the Correct-Size Images on Your Website You have probably noticed on Facebook that some posts have large images at the top, and underneath there is a URL, the website name and a small description. If you have content on your website that you want seen in the news feed, then you can alter the size of the image, which will lead to more exposure and click-throughs to your website. Facebook queries all of the actual images that are on your website and will choose to display the image with the largest dimensions. Facebook only allows users to select three images. To see how this works, check out my friend Jon Loomer's guide on Facebook Link Thumbnail Image Dimensions. The aspect ratio of your image is the critical factor. The aspect ratio is 1.91:1. This calculates out to about 1200 pixels wide by 627 pixels deep. The ideal size is 400 pixels wide by 209 pixels deep. You need to make sure that at least one of your images inside the article is larger than all of the others. It should be in the 1.91:1 aspect ratio. Listen to the show to find out what happens when an image is deeper than it is wide and how it can appear in the Facebook news feed. #2: Implement Facebook Open Graph Tags Facebook has its own language called Open Graph. This allows you to tell Facebook certain kinds of attributes, which include the image it should use as a default on a page, where it should pull text from and what the description should be. This kind of information helps your content appear more appropriately in the news feed. You can discover all of the data behind Open Graph and find everything you need to know about how it works. It's a great guide even for the non-techie. If you are on WordPress, Open Graph is easy to implement with a plugin called WP Open Graph. It allows you to set data on a macro-level and on a post-by-post basis. It's a great way to control what shows up when people share your articles on Facebook. The best way to keep your shared content up to date on Facebook is to use Facebook's Debugger. It's a great tool to stop Facebook from pulling in information that's no longer relevant. Listen to the show to find out how the Debugger tool works, and how it will help you with your Open Graph. #3: Add a Facebook Share Button to Your Website When you add a Facebook Share button to your website, you need to make sure that you use the code from Facebook or the WordPress plugin, which was developed by Facebook. It doesn't matter if your website is WordPress or not, you can visit here and paste in the URL you want to share and choose the different layouts for your button. You'll discover the best Share button to use for social proof on your website. If you use WordPress, it's easy to use their default plugin. This plugin allows you to do the same as the Facebook one, but it does everything automatically for you. When it comes to the placement of the Share button on your website, many people like to put it at the top of a blog post. This way,

How to Manage Your Facebook Page Effectively

How to Manage Your Facebook Page Effectively

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you manage at least one Facebook business page? Are you using all the admin features? Facebook pages include many tools to help marketers and business owners get the most out of their business presence. In this article I'll share how to use Facebook's features, tools and settings to manage your business page effectively. Listen to this article: #1: Access Your Facebook Pages There are a few ways to access your Facebook pages. To see all of the pages you are linked to as an administrator, editor, moderator, advertiser or analyst, go to your Pages bookmarks. From there, click on the link to the page you want. To use your Facebook page to like other Facebook pages or comment on posts, click to log in as your page. Plus, select the settings wheel icon to add specific pages to your favorites in the left sidebar of your Facebook screen. Alternatively, access your pages using the drop-down arrow in the menu at the top of your Facebook screen. #2: Navigate Your Page Menu At the top of your Facebook page, there's a menu to direct you to the main features of your page. You should see this menu when logged in as your personal profile or as your page. The first item in the menu, Page, will take you back to your Facebook page from your Messages, Notifications, Insights, Publishing Tools and Settings. Here are the rest of the features. Engage With Users Privately Through Messages If you'd like, enable Messages in your General page settings. This will allow Facebook users to send private messages to your page. Note: You can only reply to messages your page has received. You cannot send messages (as your page) to people who have not messaged you. A great feature in Messages is saved replies. Create a template for common responses you can easily personalize to send through your page's private messaging. Click on any of your messages create a new reply. Check Notifications for Recent Engagement Notifications give you a quick summary of people who have engaged with your page, as well as their interaction. If someone asks for your contact information using a prompt on your Facebook page, like the one shown below, you'll find it in Requests under the Notifications section. See a full timeline of activity related to your page, including when other people or pages mention your page and when others share your page's posts, under the Notifications section in Activity. Review Your Analytics With Insights Insights are your Facebook page's analytics. This is where you'll learn more about your fan page audience growth and engagement. Insights show you which page posts get the most engagement, and whether your fans match your ideal customer base (age ranges, gender and location). Plus, learn how people discover your page by clicking the Visits tab. Schedule and Publish Posts Through Publishing Tools The Publishing Tools feature lets you create Facebook updates to be published immediately, schedule posts to be published at a future time and draft posts to save for later. To publish a status, photo, video, offer, event or milestone immediately, go to the Published Posts section and click the Create button at the top right. To schedule a status, photo or video post, go to the Scheduled Posts section and click the Create button at the top right. Use the drop-down next to the Publish button to get schedule, backdate or draft options. Be sure to review your analytics on the Published Posts tab as well. Search by keyword for specific updates to see their statistics. In addition to reach, it includes the name of the application used to publish the post to your page. Use this data to see which posts have the most engagement, and determine if posts shared through your page have more reach than those shared through third-party tools. #3: Configure Page Settings Your page's settings allow you to control everything from visibi...

6 Steps to Updating Your Social Media Profiles During a Rebrand

6 Steps to Updating Your Social Media Profiles During a Rebrand

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you need to update your social identity? Are you looking for a simple way to make sure all your social channels are consistent? In this article you’ll discover a checklist that will help you rebrand your social media profiles. Listen to this article: #1: Give Your Audience a Sneak Preview Some companies purposefully keep their rebrand under wraps until the last minute. While this shock-factor approach will likely generate press, it can be risky if people react badly. To stay on the safe side, give your audience a sneak preview of your rebrand. To do this, post something from your new company (your new logo or images from a new marketing campaign, for example) on social media. Announce the change and ask people what they think. This makes your audience feel like you value their opinion and allows you to gather feedback before launching the rest of your rebrand. It also gives your audience time to adjust to the idea, and you'll generate anticipation and excitement for the launch. In the example below, Cultures for Health uses a sneak preview photo that offers enough information to generate excitement, without giving it all away. Once you've launched a new visual identity, it's a good idea to get feedback on what your audience thinks about it. This isn't about whether people like your logo; it's about more tangible things that can affect revenue. Is your new blog easy to navigate? Does your audience relate to your brand story on social media? You can post a quick survey on Twitter or Facebook to ask these questions and then use the results to make improvements. #2: Update Your Social Media Profiles Have you designed a sleek, modern visual identity to accompany your rebrand? Great! Now it's time to show it off. Be sure to update your profile photos and hero photos on all of your social media accounts or add them to new accounts if you've completely scrapped the old ones. This isn't just about profile photos. It's about making sure your social media sites visually represent your company's new identity. For example, you may need to change your Twitter theme to match your new colors. Or you may want to create a new Pinterest board showcasing elements such as your packaging design or imagery. In addition to standard social media profiles like Facebook and Twitter, make sure you edit review sites such as Yelp, Foursquare and TripAdvisor. If you don't have a presence on these sites, now is your chance to create one. If you're a B2B company, you might have reviews on sites like Capterra or G2 Crowd. You also might have a presence on directories like Angie's List, so it's important to be thorough with this search, no matter your industry. It will only add to your brand consistency and boost awareness. You also need to update your social media profile handles. This seems like a no-brainer, but you'd be surprised how many companies get this wrong. When creating new social media usernames, here are two important points to keep in mind: Choose a handle that's spelled correctly and arranged sensibly. This makes it easy for users to locate your new accounts. It also makes your account names more memorable, which means your audience will be more likely to engage with you. Create a consistent social media name across all channels. Before you do this, make sure your desired handle is available on each social platform. You don't want to change half of your usernames only to find out another company already owns it on one channel. #3: Revamp Your Google Business Page If you don't have a complete Google Business profile, you could be missing out on opportunities for new customers. Make sure your Google Business page is up to date with your most current information so local customers can easily find you. The first thing you want to do is create a customized URL. Then add photos or images and include information about your company such as your address,

4 Ways to Optimize Your Facebook Ads

4 Ways to Optimize Your Facebook Ads

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to spend less time creating Facebook ads? Looking for ways to get more out of the ads that are working for you? When you've created a Facebook ad that converts, there are a number of ways to maximize your success. In this article you'll discover four ways you can build on the success of Facebook ads that are already performing well. Listen to this article: Know Which Ads Perform Best To find out which Facebook ads are successful, you should install the Facebook pixel on your website. This snippet of code allows you to see what happens on your website after Facebook users click on your Facebook ad. When you can track whether people do things like view a certain web page, add an item to their cart, buy a product or fill out a registration form, you'll know which ads convert best. For example, while two ads may be particularly successful at inspiring people to click through to your site, only one might drive them to purchase from you. Armed with the knowledge that pixels provide, you can focus your budget and the following scaling efforts on the ads that are actually helping you reach your business goals. #1: Build Out Lookalike Audiences It makes sense that Facebook users who are similar to your best customers are likely to be interested in your business. If you've found success targeting ads towards a particular group of people, you can expand your advertising to reach more people who are similar. Facebook allows you to reach these related groups by building out lookalike audiences. You can create lookalike audiences in Facebook's Ads Manager or Power Editor. Regardless of which of these options you use, you'll need an original audience source to base your lookalike audience on. Consider starting with an audience of people who clicked an ad to install your app, people who clicked through to become fans of your Facebook page or people who clicked an ad and completed a certain action on your site. When you build lookalike audiences from groups of people who have already clicked on your ads, you can reach similar people who may also be interested in what you offer. This tactic allows you to expand your audience in a smart way and obtain more opportunities to grow your revenue. #2: Refresh Your Images and Copy No matter how successful your Facebook ads, your audience will tire of seeing the same ones over and over and they'll stop converting. To avoid this, use ads that have historically performed well as inspiration for new ads that incorporate similar images or copy. For example, this ad offers Facebook users 10% off their next purchase and uses an image that highlights a varied selection of card designs. The ad below offers the same discount, but uses a different call to action and an image that shows a single card style. Run each component in an individual ad to pinpoint what made your ad a success in the first place. Maybe a particular color, background or model drew people in, or maybe a specific call to action was especially effective. Split test your ads to find the secret and use the information to create future ads that build on that success. #3: Combine and Conquer With Carousel Ads If your audience responded well to a series of particular product images, try combining all those images into a single carousel ad. This newer ad type allows you to showcase several images at once in a single ad unit. Ecommerce businesses can take this a step further with dynamic product ads. These innovative ads are especially great to cross-sell complementary products or retarget customers who clicked through to your website but didn't complete a purchase. #4: Duplicate Your Ads on Instagram Did you know that the same targeting options for Facebook are also available on Instagram? This means that you can easily expand your successful Facebook ad campaigns to reach an entirely new set of potential customers on Instagram.

Thought Leadership: How to Remain Top of Mind in Your Industry

Thought Leadership: How to Remain Top of Mind in Your Industry

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you consider yourself a thought leader? Want to know what it takes to become a guest on a major podcast or a speaker at large events? In this episode I go behind the scenes at Social Media Examiner with Phil Mershon. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Phil Mershon, director of events at Social Media Examiner. This show is the official third anniversary of the Social Media Marketing podcast. Phil and I will explore how we pick the thought leaders in our industry for our conferences and podcast. You'll discover how to become a thought leader in any industry. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Thought Leadership What thought leadership means Phil talks about the two parts that go into being a thought leader. First, there's the "thought" element. It starts with people who have excellent forward thinking, stay on the cutting edge and push boundaries, understand deeply how things work and are able to articulate it. And second, they must be a "leader," someone whom others listen to and follow. A thought leader does those things over time, consistently producing material that people will listen to month in and month out. Before I started Social Media Examiner, I was called one of the leading authorities in the white paper world. To earn that, I constantly wrote articles, started a blog, did training, wrote a book, summarized industry research and had a monthly newsletter. Establishing yourself as a thought leader is a lot of work. Even harder is maintaining it. Mari Smith is an excellent example of someone who chose to own her title of "Facebook Expert," and is having great results. Listen to the show to discover how long Phil and I have been working together and what we did before Social Media Examiner. How we decide who should be on the podcast and on our stages When deciding on our content, we ask two questions: "What should people speak about?" and "Who should speak about those subjects?" To determine what people will speak about, we look very carefully at the data, Phil explains. We study our annual Social Media Marketing Industry Report, which is based on the subjects our readers tell us they do and do not care about. It influences decisions about the kinds of speakers we need to find, which sometimes means we need to seek out experts we don't know yet. If you want to pitch yourself to a conference or podcast, it's important to first study it. Look at the organization's typical lineup to see what kinds of things people are speaking about, and determine if you're a fit. Not every thought leader is appropriate for every situation. We get inquires all the time from people who pitch us things that aren't appropriate. Listen to the show to hear how booking speakers is like programming for television. What we look for in our speakers Phil and I share the four criteria we look for in a speaker. 1. Are they a great communicator? We're not just looking for inspirational communicators, we are looking for people who can explain or teach at a very deep level how to use the different social media platforms. A lot of people think they're great communicators, but a lot of people also think they're good drivers. I share how when Sally Hogshead was keynoting at Social Media Marketing World, she said "Raise your hand if you think you are a good driver." About 95% of the hands went up in the room. Then she says, "Interestingly enough, research shows that only 55% of people are good drivers, so that means that about 40% of you are kidding your...

What to Unlearn About SEO from 10 Years Ago

by adminDdddjc @ Search Engine Placement | Search Engine Optimization Firm

What to Unlearn About SEO from 10 Years Ago  If you have been trying to get your site ranked higher on search engines, particularly on Google, you know that 10 years ago, it was a much easier undertaking to do so than it is today. Here are some things you should unlearn from 10 years […]

The post What to Unlearn About SEO from 10 Years Ago appeared first on Search Engine Placement | Search Engine Optimization Firm.

How to Build a Periscope Audience for Your Business

How to Build a Periscope Audience for Your Business

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you marketing on Periscope? Want to reach more people? You can develop a following on Periscope by promoting your broadcasts, engaging with viewers and repurposing your content on other channels. In this article you'll discover how to build a Periscope audience for your business. #1: Cross-Promote Broadcasts While content is ultimately king, think about how you can attract enough of an audience to Periscope to drive results. Listen to this article: If you've already established and nurtured followers on other social channels, especially Twitter, you likely have a strong foundation to begin distributing your Periscope content and generating interest. Think about your branding guidelines for the social channels that you plan to use in your promotion strategy. Even though you're promoting Periscope content, make sure that you optimize your promotions to match the tone and format of the different channels. By aligning your promotion to each network, you increase the likelihood of earning social shares, receiving feedback and gathering an audience. Consider the following distribution tactics when planning your Periscope promotions. Twitter When promoting your live stream on Twitter, craft a brief yet compelling tweet equipped with hashtags and an attractive visual, which are some Twitter best practices. In the tweet below Michael Hyatt included hashtags to attract people interested in Periscope streams, as well as the followers of his #VirtualMentor brand. Hashtags on Twitter can make your Periscope event (or scope) more noticeable and easily searchable on the channel. Hyatt also used an informative and eye-catching visual to attract users' attention when they're scrolling through their Twitter feeds. Pinterest Pinterest is largely built on visually compelling, do-it-yourself and project-based content. Create informative content that incorporates images with a tall aspect ratio, detailed descriptions of your event and a call to action to your Periscope stream or landing page. Instagram When promoting your live stream on Instagram, consider adding a text overlay to your images. Content descriptions on this channel tend to be shorter (around 100 characters) and include multiple hashtags (try three to five). In this Instagram post, Sue B. Zimmerman promotes a scope with Kim Garst. Facebook Visual content typically does well on Facebook, particularly video. Create a brief video preview to attract attention and tag any guests participating in your Periscope stream to reach a broader audience. The LPGA promotes upcoming Periscope broadcasts on their Facebook page. This post previews an upcoming broadcast with golfer Morgan Pressel. Snapchat While Snapchat can be a tricky channel for promotions, start by creating a story to announce your Periscope stream. Since your followers won't be able to follow direct links to your content, ask them to take screenshots of your snaps that contain event details or publish snaps that reiterate the value of your Periscope stream to pique interest. LinkedIn Create a short LinkedIn Publisher article (between 500 and 800 words) to promote your Periscope efforts. Make sure to include an eye-catching visual and a call to action. You can share this content on your personal account or company profile, through LinkedIn groups or by direct messaging connections who are likely to be interested in your content. Hootsuite CEO Ryan Holmes promoted an upcoming AMA on Periscope in this LinkedIn article. Email List and Company Blog Okay, so your email list and blog aren't necessarily social channels. However, using your owned media channels to generate interest can be an excellent strategy for driving visitors to your Periscope content. Alert email subscribers to your upcoming broadcasts or write a blog post summarizing recent ones. Be sure to ask your followers for feedback and the type of content that they'd ...

How to Use Promoted Pins on Pinterest

How to Use Promoted Pins on Pinterest

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want to get your pins in front of customers? Have you considered using promoted pins? Pinterest promoted pins can help you drive referral traffic and increase sales. In this article you'll discover how to create promoted pins on Pinterest. Listen to this article: Why Promoted Pins? Pinterest's promoted pins, which are now available to all businesses, are designed to increase visibility to a targeted audience. They help you get your products or location in front of people who are far along in the buying process and ready to make a purchase. Promoted pins are searchable, so you can add keywords to connect with users who are searching for content like yours. With promoted pins, you're paying to have your pins placed where users are most likely to notice and interact with them. The promoted pins that users see are based on their interests and activity on the site. Users can't turn off promoted pins, but they can hide specific promoted pins that they don't like. Here's how to get started with promoted pins for your business. #1: Understand Campaign Objectives Just like with other types of social media ads, you can run promoted pin campaigns based on specific goals and objectives. There are three objectives you can choose from: Engagement: Get engagement on your pins, such as repins, clicks, and close-up views of your pins. You pay per action taken. Traffic: Send traffic to your website when users click through your pins. In this case, you pay per click to your site. Awareness: Use promoted pins to introduce and expose your brand to a relevant audience. Awareness pins are currently available only to Fortune 500 companies who have a minimum monthly ad spend, but that may change in the future. Promoted pins, like other social media ads, work on a bid system, so keep this in mind when setting your budget. #2: Create a Promoted Pin To create and use Pinterest's promoted pins, you need to have a business account. If you don't already have one, you can either create a new account or convert your current Pinterest profile to a business account. Once your account is set up and ready to go, hover over Ads at the top left of the Pinterest home page and select Overview. You see an ads dashboard similar to Facebook's Ads Manager, where you can review and create new Pinterest ad campaigns. This article walks you through how to create an engagement promoted pin, but traffic promoted pins work exactly the same way. From the Ads Manager, click on the Promote button next to Engagement Campaigns. Next, select Boost Engagement With Your Pins. If you want a traffic campaign, you'd choose Get Traffic to Your Website. On the next page, name your campaign, select a start and end date (the end date is optional), and choose a daily budget. I recommend setting an end date, since you can only have daily budgets instead of lifetime budgets. If you don't set an end date, make sure you keep an eye on the campaign so you don't spend more than you intended. After you click Pick a Pin, you'll see a list of your pins. Select the pin you want to use for your campaign. If you want, you can search for a pin using the search box, or view the pin that's been most clicked or the most repinned in the past 30 days. After you select your pin, enter a name for your promoted pin and set a destination URL. Make sure that the URL goes to the specific page where you want users to land, not a generic homepage. In the next section, select relevant topics that will help you reach your target audience in their home feeds. You want your pin to be placed in the right Pinterest categories so users come across it while browsing. Make sure to choose only relevant interests for your pin, not random interests your audience might have (as you might do on Facebook). This step is about pin placement, so it needs to be accurate. Next,

Search Engine Optimization Explained

by Administrator @ PG Webs

Search engine marketing, which is generally called SEO, could be the process regarding increasing the quantity and top quality of customers generated to some website or simply other online property via search engines’ natural/organic positioning results just for specific text called search phrases. For this content, I use the phrase website to consider all Web [...]

How SEO Works - Search Engine Optimization Ranking Factors

How SEO Works - Search Engine Optimization Ranking Factors


Shopify

SEO is considered by some as the holy grail of internet marketing. Learn how it works and how to take advantage of the ranking factors to drive more visitors and sales to your website.

Google Launches Another Mobile-Friendly Update

by Meghan Pendley @ AudiologyDesign

Today, Google announced another search algorithm update that favors mobile-friendly websites. According to Google, this will “increase the effect of the [mobile-friendly] ranking signal.” Our records indicate that your website...

The post Google Launches Another Mobile-Friendly Update appeared first on AudiologyDesign.

What Will The Future of Search & Search Advertising Look Like?

by adminDdddjc @ Search Engine Placement | Search Engine Optimization Firm

The Current “Search” Landscape  The current model of search is quite simple. Let’s say you are looking for a web developer to help you create your website. You go to your favorite search engine and you search for something like “web developers” or “web developers near me.”  The search engine will query the database, and […]

The post What Will The Future of Search & Search Advertising Look Like? appeared first on Search Engine Placement | Search Engine Optimization Firm.

Search Engine Placement and Optimization

by Arron Andrews @ Top Visibility

Old News This page was just put back into place Search Engine Placement & Optimization Top-Visibility.com offers a variety of search engine placement packages that will quickly increase your visibility in the major search engines & route targeted visitors to … Continue reading

SUBMIT EXPRESS CEO PIERRE ZAROKIAN DISCUSSES CONTROVERSIAL YELP CASE

by Gevorg @ Submit Express

Imagine that your business is receiving phone calls from Yelp, unsolicited, trying to sell advertising space. How many times do you have to say “no thank you” until you finally reach the end of your patience? One business wants “no” to mean “no” in every aspect. In a recent interview with Search Engine Journal, Pierre […]

5 Tools to Measure Social Media ROI

5 Tools to Measure Social Media ROI

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you struggle to determine an accurate ROI in social media marketing? Wondering which of your social media campaigns are most profitable? It's important to know whether the money you've invested in your social media marketing has provided a return that's worth what you've put in. In this article, you'll discover five tools to help you accurately and completely measure your social media ROI. Listen to this article: #1: Kissmetrics Kissmetrics is an analytics platform designed to optimize marketing success and ROI. It lets you track individuals, groups of similar individuals, and your users as a whole throughout their visit to your site. People are tracked anonymously on their first visit all the way through multiple visits and conversions, and even after they've left and come back. It's a great tool to evaluate customer behavior and ROI. The stand-out feature of Kissmetrics is that it notes when users leave and come back, and what they do when they return. You can track ROI coming from Facebook, LinkedIn, Twitter, or any website, and attribute the conversion credit to the correct social media channel, allowing you to track your entire customer lifecycle more accurately. This, in turn, provides valuable information about ROI, and lets you see which paid advertising sources are actually working and converting. A free trial of Kissmetrics is available when you first sign up. After that, plans start at $120 per month. A/B testing reports are available with the Power Plan, which is currently $600 per month. #2: Customer Lifetime Value Calculator While plenty of social media campaigns prioritize sales or on-platform engagement, social media is frequently used to connect with new audiences and generate new leads. If that's your goal, it's a good idea to calculate your approximate customer lifetime value (CLV). You can use the Customer Lifetime Value Calculator to find out not only what a new lead is costing you, but also whether it's worth it. With this tool, you can create CLVs for each of your different customer groups. For example, a jewelry store can calculate the value of customers who make big, one-time, high-value purchases like wedding rings, as well as customers who buy a much less expensive charm bracelet, but who come back an average of six times to add charms to the bracelet. By knowing an estimated CLV, you can quickly determine how much you're willing to spend on lead generation or engagement campaigns on social media. The Customer Lifetime Value Calculator is free and fast. #3: RJ Metrics' Cloud BI For a more in-depth analysis of CLV, try RJ Metrics' CloudBI. The tool not only automatically calculates CLV, it will even break the CLV down to show the social media channel that sent you the customer in the first place. RJ Metrics also offers amazing features like churn analysis that gives you insight into your customers' behaviors, and analysis about marketing ROI as it pertains to customer acquisition cost. In addition, RJ Metrics will show you the all-time value based on the acquisition source and repeat order profitability from different sources. This helps you decide which social ad platforms are working for you and which to invest in. You can even have reports sent to you on a regular basis. #4: Cyfe Cyfe is an all-in-one reporting tool that provides an insane amount of information about how your content is shared across social media and the impact it's having on your overall ROI. You can use widgets to create multiple customized dashboards where you can see the reporting on Facebook ads, Twitter engagement, Shopify orders and sales, or Google Analytics. The categories of widgets to choose from include advertising, blogging, email tracking, social media, and more. Cyfe has some really interesting social tracking features, combined with detailed ROI and analytics reporting, like their Twitter Mentions widget.

Twitter Chats: How Marketers Can Benefit From Twitter Chats

Twitter Chats: How Marketers Can Benefit From Twitter Chats

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you participate in Twitter chats? Want to discover how to get the most out of them? To explore how marketers can benefit from Twitter chats, I interview Madalyn Sklar. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Madalyn Sklar, a Twitter marketing expert. She's host of the Twitter Smarter podcast and hosts a weekly Twitter chat at #TwitterSmarter. She blogs about Twitter at MadalynSklar.com. Madalyn explores the power of Twitter chats and how to benefit from them. You'll discover tools to make marketing with Twitter chats easier. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Twitter Chats Madalyn's story Madalyn had been doing online marketing for a long time, and when social media came about she was hooked. Twitter was her favorite, because the 140-character limit forces you to be concise. She shares that whenever she traveled to different events and conferences, she asked people what was their favorite platform and why. She was amazed at how many people said they didn't like or understand Twitter. As a result, she went on a mission: to help people become Twitter Smarter. She began using the hashtag #TwitterSmarter as she developed online classes and eventually launched Twitter chats. Listen to the show to discover how Madalyn and I first crossed paths. What's a Twitter chat? The most simple description of a Twitter chat is a group of people coming together on Twitter for about an hour each week to have a conversation that revolves around a pre-determined hashtag. As long as people include the hashtag in their tweet, they're part of the conversation. It's a great way to meet lots of like-minded people, as well as receive and give advice, Madalyn explains. She encourages people to learn from her chats, but also to chime in and share their own expertise. A common approach, the one Madalyn takes, is to host a guest who does a Q&A for each Twitter chat. Listen to the show to hear my analogies to Twitter chats. Why participate? Madalyn says that last year, she made it her mission to participate in as many Twitter chats as possible. She confides that it's not been easy; it takes effort to be a regular participant in several hour-long chats each week. Twitter chats are great for helping you connect and network with people. For example, when Madalyn started going to #MediaChat, she didn't know anybody. She started to connect with people and ended up having a side conversation with Matt Diederichs from Hootsuite, which is one of her favorite platforms for scheduling tweets. Later on, she hosted Matt as a guest on her podcast and her Twitter chat. Side conversations are a common occurrence during Twitter chats, Madalyn adds. You're still actively participating and using the hashtag, but you're also creating a small community within the big community. It's a great way to make valuable, strong connections. Listen to the show to hear why Madalyn refers to Twitter chats as "cocktail parties." Where to find Twitter chats Madalyn finds that it works best to run a Google search for your topic and "Twitter chat" in Google search. Another option is to type in "Twitter chat," and you'll find some directories. Since directories aren't always reliable or up to date, Madalyn also recommends looking for chats on Twitter (you can identify them by the repetitive hashtag). Once you dip into a chat, you'll hear about others. She says you can also find out about specific chats in Twitter bios, because many times hosts will mention them there.

How to Generate Revenue With Your Content

How to Generate Revenue With Your Content

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Want to make money from your content? Wondering how a loyal audience can create business opportunities? To explore business models that help publishers generate revenue, I interview Joe Pulizzi. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers, business owners, and creators discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Joe Pulizzi, founder of the Content Marketing Institute and Content Marketing World. He's written five books including Epic Content Marketing and Content Inc. His newest book is called Killing Marketing: How Innovative Businesses Are Turning Marketing Cost Into Profit. Joe explains how high-quality content can transform marketing from a cost center into a profit center. You'll discover the different ways you can monetize your content. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: How to Generate Revenue With Your Content Why Joe Wrote Killing Marketing Joe and co-author Robert Rose work mostly with large businesses. They've been seeing a trend where businesses are viewing marketing as a profit center rather than a cost center. Only a few companies are currently doing things this way. However, Joe believes that over the next 5 or 10 years, marketing as a profit center will be the rule, not the exception. The premise of the book (and the philosophy) is to create trusted relationships with your audience and monetize that relationship by doing more than selling products. You can monetize your business in 10 different ways. Joe says the biggest mistake people make with their marketing is they set up their marketing department wrong. They seek opportunities for the sales team and don't see all of the potential in what their companies can be and sell. Any business that has lasted 10 or 15 years has evolved over time. Yes, selling products is important but you can't lead product-first anymore. The only competitive advantage people have today is communication. Everything else can be duplicated. Marketers need to be refocusing on making markets and creating opportunities for organizations; however, many have lost sight of those objectives. When the focus is on people, not necessarily products, companies can sell all kinds of things they never thought about before. Listen to the show to discover how marketers typically view marketing. Companies Embracing This Premise BabyCenter.com, owned by Johnson & Johnson, is one of the largest sites dedicated to mothers. Eight out of 10 mothers use the site, which is a stellar resource for research and development. Johnson & Johnson monetizes the site directly and launches new products from it. Red Bull Media House is judged as a profit center and media company. Although they're the marketing arm of Red Bull (and want to sell more product), their revenue comes from advertising and content syndication. They package and sell their videos to companies like The New York Times and the Wall Street Journal. They also sell subscriptions (The Red Bulletin Magazine has two million subscribers). One of Joe's favorite examples is Arrow Electronics, which is the 118th company on the Fortune 500 list. They're like the Amazon.com for electronics equipment and they target electrical engineers. Two years ago, they went to Hearst and UBM (Content Marketing Institute's parent company) and bought 51 media properties, including EE Product News. Now, Arrow Electronics is the largest media company in the electronics industry. Although the media division is a marketing arm for the company, the media division is also extremely profitable. Plus, it helps the company sell more products and services. In most cases, marketers simply target customers or prospects with the goal of getting t...

26 WordPress Plugins for Social Media Marketers

26 WordPress Plugins for Social Media Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to improve your WordPress blog? Have you considered customizing WordPress with plugins? One of the biggest advantages of WordPress is the sheer number of easy-to-use plugins that help marketers add functions with little hassle. In this article, you'll discover 26 WordPress plugins for marketers. Listen to this article: #1: Social Profile Integration Plugins Social Login Plenty of websites have members-only areas or user accounts, or require users to log in to comment. Social Login will let users log into your site with a social media profile. There are more than 30 different networks you can choose to make available for users to log in with, including Amazon, Facebook, Google+, Instagram, WordPress, and more. Placement options for the login plugin include registration pages, sidebars, comments, and more. This plugin is free to download and use. Snapchat Snapcode Widget Snapchat users don't always actively search for brands on the platform. Because of this, getting followers can sometimes depend on advertising your Snapcode across different online platforms, including your website. The Snapchat Snapcode Widget is exactly what it sounds like; a small widget that allows you to place your Snapcode on your site. All your blog visitors have to do is take a picture of your Snapcode and upload it on Snapchat to find and follow you. This plugin is free and easy to use. WordPress Social Stream When you don't want to choose between featuring your Facebook or Twitter feed, WordPress Social Stream allows you to create a combined feed from multiple social platforms to display on your site. You can add platforms including Facebook, Twitter, Pinterest, YouTube, Dribble, StumbleUpon, LinkedIn, and Delicious. You can pay $19 for a regular license with 6 months of support, and have the option to upgrade to an extended license and/or 12 months of support. Pin It Button One of the most effective ways you can encourage users to share your content and products on Pinterest is to add Pin It buttons to your site, and the Pinterest Pin It Button comes with a range of customizable options. The plugin will let readers select the image they want to pin from your page, although you can also select an image users will be prompted to choose when pinning. To customize your button, choose from a variety of different colors and sizes and easily place your Pin It buttons anywhere on your blog with a shortcode. The features above come with the free version of the plugin, but you can upgrade to the pro version for more customization features. Custom Twitter Feeds Placing a Twitter feed on your blog is a great way to keep your readers up to date and integrate your social media presence with your site. Add Custom Twitter Feeds to your blog to display a customizable feed. You can choose to display only your Twitter feed, a feed from multiple Twitter users, a feed from a single user, or a feed from a hashtag. The top of whichever feed option you choose will display a clickable CTA encouraging users to follow you on Twitter. In addition, the Twitter feed from this plugin is mobile-responsive, automatically takes on the stylistic aspects of your theme, and search engines can find the feed content. This plugin is free and there is a pro version available. Instagram Feed The Instagram Feed plugin will display images from your Instagram profile on your site, and help drive traffic to your profile. Place Instagram Feed on your site to display photos from non-private Instagram accounts, including yours or those that you're tagged in, which is great for sharing user-generated content. You can have single or multiple feeds, plus it's mobile-responsive and was updated with the June 1 Instagram updates. This plugin is free and there is a pro version of the plugin available. Custom Facebook Feed

5 Tips for Selling Products on Instagram

5 Tips for Selling Products on Instagram

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you wondering how to sell your products on Instagram? Want some tips to get started? To make the most of interactions with customers on Instagram, your images and descriptions need to stand out and purchasing needs to be as easy as possible. In this article you'll discover five tips for selling your products on Instagram. Listen to this article: #1: Develop a Signature Look Before you start posting, think about how you want to position your products on your page. The right product placement is key to driving Instagram sales and engagement. Identify the aesthetic you want for your page and stick to it. Once you have your product shots, use Instagram's internal filters or an app like VSCO Cam to make your photos visually sharper and clearer. Remember that you want to showcase the true product to your customers, so sometimes no filter works best in social selling. If you want to show one product in a variety of ways, try the Instagram Layout app. The app makes it easy to combine multiple images into a single image. Use it to show your product at different angles, which is particularly useful for fashion and jewelry businesses. Rocksbox showcases their products in an effective and consistent manner on their Instagram page. They feature close-ups of their products or have a model wear them. People can really see the products and find out how to incorporate them in their everyday fashion. #2: Give Product Descriptions Something Extra While it's important to be clear about what you're selling, you also need to attract the attention and interest of likely customers with your descriptions. One way to do that is to add a few relevant emojis. They help break up the copy and work well with an emoji-obsessed demographic. Birchbox uses emojis to detail their products and how to purchase them. Here, the emojis help viewers understand what scents are in each perfume. #3: Promote Product Visibility in Search With Hashtags Hashtags have a lot to do with how your products get discovered on Instagram. You can use Instagram's Search and Explore feature to view the top hashtags for your demographic and vertical, and then use three to five of them in your social selling campaigns. Don't forget to create and use your own branded hashtag, too. Do a daily search for that hashtag to see who's using it, and consider regramming the best photos or videos from fans on your own marketing platforms. Use the Regram app to easily feature your customers' photos on your Instagram feed. #4: Make Purchasing Easy Now it's time to convert your followers into customers. Use an Instagram selling tool like Have2Have.It to add a shoppable link to your Instagram bio. This will eliminate the clunky user experience created when you include a website or Bitly link in your product posts. By clicking on the link in your bio, followers are taken to a page (with the same look and feel as your Instagram page) where they can purchase your products. You can import your products from ecommerce databases like Shopify and WooCommerce into Instagram, and analyze the results so you know what products are converting. Then you can focus on promoting those products to increase sales. The Have2Have.It dashboard also includes conversion tracking, so you can attribute revenue to the platform itself. For social media managers trying to prove ROI for Instagram, this is key in social selling. #5: Partner With Influencers You can expand brand awareness and increase sales by partnering with Instagram influencers to reach an audience that's specifically targeted to your products and services. Simplify the process of connecting your brand and influencers with a tool like Captiv8. From search, discovery and workflow management, you can solidify the relationship right in the marketplace. Figure out the best product placement that's in line with the influencer's authentic voice and the trending hashtags and cop...

Hello world!

by admin @ TOP3 Search Engine Placement on Google, Bing, Yahoo

Welcome to WordPress. This is your first post. Edit or delete it, then start blogging!

The post Hello world! appeared first on TOP3 Search Engine Placement on Google, Bing, Yahoo.

How to Ensure Your Social Media Content Meets FTC, FDA and Google Requirements

How to Ensure Your Social Media Content Meets FTC, FDA and Google Requirements

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you involved with influencer marketing campaigns? Do you know how to meet disclosure and compliance requirements? By following a few simple guidelines, you can maintain transparency while producing brand-sponsored content that engages consumers. In this article you'll discover how to make sure your content meets Federal Trade Commission (FTC), Food and Drug Administration (FDA) and Google requirements. What Compliance Means for You In September 2014 the FTC sent warning letters to more than 60 companies as part of what it called Operation Full Disclosure. While the warnings focused on print and broadcast advertisements, the move signaled that the commission may start regulating more companies on all media that it finds to be out of compliance with accepted standards and practices. Listen to this article: Take note of this positioning, especially when it comes to your digital advertising on social channels. The FTC issued updated guidance on .com Disclosures in March 2013, and gave its clearest direction yet in June 2015 for endorsement disclosures in its What People Are Asking FAQ page. Many see this as a necessary step of enforcement by the commission. While the FTC monitors compliance with truth-in-advertising laws, your company must also work to stay abreast of regulations from other agencies and organizations (such as the FDA and Google) when producing compensated content. Compliance with these regulations ultimately falls on the sponsor rather than the content producer. Consequently, if you're working with bloggers or YouTube video bloggers, you must have audit mechanisms in place to ensure those producing content on your behalf maintain compliance. Compliance, however, is not as difficult as it might seem. The following simple tips will help you keep your content compliant without making it stiff or unappealing to the consumer. #1: FTC: Disclose Clearly and Conspicuously The FTC really has only one guideline when it comes to disclosure: Disclose early, clearly and conspicuously. When you publish blog posts, you should include a simple, clear and easy-to-find disclosure near the top of the post right below the title, as seen in this Almost Supermom post. If you record or broadcast video content, it should at minimum have a clear and conspicuous disclosure right at the beginning. While not mandated, the FTC says disclosures that appear regularly throughout the video would be even better. While the FTC also does not mandate specific wording of disclosures, it still requires disclosures, even in the shortest form of media. On Twitter, for example, include #ad in a tweet or "Ad:" at the beginning of your tweet. It's the safest way to comply when using short-form content. While some companies worry that these disclosures will impact their content's authenticity, disclosure statements actually have the opposite effect. Used appropriately, disclosures note the influence that compensation may have on the person producing the content. However, savvy readers recognize that compensated content is an effective way for creators to fund the creation of content. And ethical bloggers will only accept compensation for content their readers want to consume in the first place. #2: Google: Use NoFollow Tags for Links in Sponsored Posts Google, the arbiter of all things search, has worked for years to keep compensated content from unduly affecting search rankings. To that end, you should ensure all of the links in a compensated blog post contain NoFollow tags. This designation tells Google's algorithm to ignore those links when calculating page rank for the links' target pages. You can insert this link manually by adding rel="nofollow" in the HTML code. The result looks like this: Many online publishing systems make this easier with plugins that manage the tagging process automatically. A search for "NoFollow" in the WordPress plugin library yielded 298 results.

How The Hummingbird Google Algorithm Update Will Affect SEO

by Alex Karlson @ WebFly

On Sept. 26, Google revamped its system of guiding searchers to the content they seek. According to Search Engine Land, the introduction of a new algorithm, called “Hummingbird,” marks Google’s biggest modification in 12 years. Before you begin devising a brand-new SEO scheme to make the most of the changes, bear in mind that Hummingbird […]

11 Ways to Optimize Your LinkedIn Profile for More Exposure

11 Ways to Optimize Your LinkedIn Profile for More Exposure

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you getting the most out of your LinkedIn personal profile? Interested in ways to drive traffic to your website? LinkedIn offers many overlooked ways to optimize your profile, helping more people discover you and promote your business. In this article you'll discover 11 tips you might not be using on your LinkedIn profile, but should. Listen to this article: #1: Emphasize Your Professional Skills If you haven't added skills to your LinkedIn profile, you're missing out on an opportunity to optimize your profile for specific keywords and get quick endorsements from your connections for those skills. LinkedIn showcases your top 10 skills based on endorsements so people know where you excel. #2: Promote Your Projects You can use the Projects section (originally created for students to share projects they completed at university) to highlight products, services or other projects, such as the podcasts listed on Jay Baer's LinkedIn profile. Directly link each project to your website and include team members when applicable. #3: Link to Your Publications The Publications section is perfect if you're a book author, regular contributor to top publications, or have ebooks, white papers and other content that you want to promote. You can directly link each publication to where visitors can buy your books (like Mari Smith does on her LinkedIn profile) to author profile pages and landing pages for your content. #4: Share Your Honors and Awards Another section originally designed for students' scholastic achievements, the Honors & Awards section is where you can highlight notable lists and mentions you've received from recognized authorities and publications in your industry. #5: Showcase Specialized Certifications If you haven't completed a higher-education degree, the Certifications section allows you to showcase your specialized educational achievements within your industry. If your business boasts a certification for your industry, you can list it here and link to it so people can learn more about it. #6: Highlight Industry-Related Coursework Not all courses come with a certification. If you've taken any courses that would apply to your business, you can list them in the Courses section. This includes coursework you completed at university, those you completed as part of your on-the-job training and those offered by recognized organizations in your industry. #7: Feature Your Professional Memberships If you belong to professional organizations in your industry, use the Organizations section to highlight your membership and the position you hold beyond just being a member. It's also another great opportunity to optimize your profile for keywords. For example, professional photographers can include their membership to Professional Photographers of America. #8: Demonstrate Language Proficiency Demand for people who speak two or more languages is on the rise. Therefore, if you are fluent in multiple languages, include that information in the Languages section. #9: Highlight Your LinkedIn Groups When you join LinkedIn groups, you have the option of listing them on your profile, as shown in the Groups section below. This can benefit you in a few different ways. First, people who want to get to know you can do so by joining the groups you're in and engaging with you there. Second, if you join groups related to your industry, such as groups for social media consultants, you can add more keywords to your profile. Finally, if you run groups for your business, you can display them on your profile to help increase membership. #10: Publicize Your Interests When you follow specific news channels, publishers, influencers and companies found on LinkedIn Pulse, they will appear in the Following section of your profile. You can use this section to optimize your profile for specific keywords, highlight publications that you may contribute to and showcase your customer...

How to Curate a Roundup Blog Post of Industry Influencers

How to Curate a Roundup Blog Post of Industry Influencers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want more exposure for your blog? Have you tried curating articles written by influencers? Roundup posts help you gain the attention of influencers who can increase the reach of your content. In this article I'll share five steps to creating a curated blog post. Listen to this article: #1: Choose a Topic To select a subject for your post, start by researching popular topics covered by your competitors. Make a list of three to five individuals or companies that share your area of expertise. Then, go to Buzzsumo.com, type in the name or URL for each competitor and click search. The results let you see their most successful articles. For example, a search of Social Media Examiner shows two of their most successful posts are about tools. After you search a few more companies, identify a common topic you want to feature in a curated post. #2: Identify Influencers to Feature After you choose your subject, strategically target experts to feature in the blog post. First, go over to Followerwonk, click on Search Bios and enter your topic keyword. This free tool lets you see the most influential Twitter users relative to your topic or keyword. Next, click the Social Authority tab to sort your list by who has the most influence. Ideally you want to target individuals with high authority and a large number of followers. I suggest individuals rather than companies, since people tend to be more responsive. For instance, on the topic of social media tools Ian Cleary has a high social authority and a large Twitter following. Finally, go back to Buzzsumo. This time, run a search for your topic. This is how you find the most popular blogs and authors on the subject. Compile a list of 5 to 15 of these influencers, including their blog URL, and move on to the next step. #3: Select Articles to Include Once you know which influencers to target, you need to find the most popular content they've published on your topic. Paste each influencer's blog URL into Buzzsumo search and look for a popular article that relates to the subject of your article. If you cannot find any relevant content from the author, don't panic. Type the topic keywords after the URL and search again. Make sure you read all of the articles (you may even want to make notes for later) and gather a nice cross-section of articles without any overlap. You're curating content from these influencers to share with your audience, so you want to create as valuable an article as possible. When you're done researching, choose one article written by each influencer on your list to feature in your roundup post. #4: Write a Roundup Blog Post Now it's time to construct your roundup blog post. Use the following blog post structure to increase the likelihood of getting shares from the influencers you mention. Headline & Introduction Start with a strong headline to drive clicks to your blog. Here are some headline formulas you can adapt for your roundup: X Most Popular [TOPIC] Posts From the Pros in [MONTH/YEAR] X Most Popular [TOPIC] Posts From [JOB TITLE] in [MONTH/YEAR] X Most Popular [TOPIC] Posts That Will [DESIRED RESULT] X Most Popular [TOPIC] Posts That Will [DESIRED RESULT] in [DESIRED TIME] Next, tell your readers what they will learn from your article. Keep the introduction short, punchy and to the point. Featured Blog Mention Title and Rank: Start with the numbered position of the article (#1, #2, #3, etc.). Then add the original post title and the amount of shares it received. Images: Gather and insert the logo, an eye-catching image of the header from the featured blog and a screen grab of the Buzzsumo share count for the original blog post. Attribution: It's essential to fully credit the website that posted the original article and cite the author. For example: Original Article: 7 Strategies for Growing Your Community Blog (ProBlogger).

Google Launches Another Mobile-Friendly Update

by Meghan Pendley @ AudiologyDesign » Search Engine Optimization

Today, Google announced another search algorithm update that favors mobile-friendly websites. According to Google, this will “increase the effect of the [mobile-friendly] ranking signal.” Our records indicate that your website...

The post Google Launches Another Mobile-Friendly Update appeared first on AudiologyDesign.

Facebook Live: Fuel All of Your Content With Live Video

Facebook Live: Fuel All of Your Content With Live Video

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you broadcast on Facebook Live? Want to discover how to use your videos to create more content? To explore why Facebook Live is a path to success for creators, I interview Chalene Johnson. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Chalene Johnson, a lifestyle expert, author of Push, and host of two top podcasts: Build Your Tribe and The Chalene Show. She's also active on Facebook with 1 million fans and regularly uses Facebook Live. Chalene shares how she uses Facebook Live. You'll discover what she does to leverage the content she captures. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Live Chalene's Background With Video While Chalene has developed a number of businesses, most people associate her with fitness and a program called Turbo Kick that she created for fitness instructors to teach in health clubs. Instructional videos were part of the program and when a cast member fell ill, Chalene was forced to be on camera. Since that time, she's done many videos and discovered the more she relaxed, the better she could connect with her audience, whether it was for fitness or business. Chalene first broadcast live on Periscope in the summer of 2015. She remembers it well because it was also the day she was hacked. Chalene stresses there's no correlation between the two events. You can listen to Episode 158 of this podcast for the backstory. When she got early access to Facebook Live, Chalene went live and applied what she'd learned on Periscope. Her first Live reached a half-million people within 20 minutes and she knew it was a game-changer. Listen to the show to discover Chalene's philosophy on the importance of doing things that are scary. What Facebook Live Is All About Chalene believes Facebook Live is like TV, meaning you can use it to spread your message, become famous, or have a reality TV show. Mike and Chalene discuss the connection between bloggers becoming paid authors, musicians on YouTube becoming paid recording artists, and the likelihood that a future show host will be discovered through Live video. Listen to the show to hear why podcasters should consider live-streaming video. How Chalene Goes Live Chalene and her team have an organic plan in place for her Live videos. The calendar is set around the promotion of the Virtual Business Academy, the Marketing Impact Academy, and Smart Success. Eighty percent of the content for each Live broadcast relates to the upcoming promotion, so it attracts the people interested in the related product. Currently, she's promoting Smart Success. Chalene aims to go live a couple of times each week. She's noticed that the longer she broadcasts, the better the video does in terms of reach and live viewers. Often, she plans to go live for 15 minutes but ends up broadcasting for an hour. Chalene's Live prep starts when she wakes up at 5:45 AM. She spends the first hour of her day in learning mode focusing on a certain topic. She then finds a way to relate what she's studying to the product she's promoting. For example, since she's studying the neuroscience behind behavior, discipline, and habits, she'll do a Live broadcast about developing good habits, which ties into her promotion of Smart Success. To prepare, Chalene writes down a proposed title, five bulleted discussion points, and any research or stats she wants to reference. She describes how to start a broadcast and in which order to share information. In the first 10 seconds, tell people what you're talking about and why they need to stay tuned.

How to Get More Out of Google+ With Circles

How to Get More Out of Google+ With Circles

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you building a network on Google+? Do you want to keep your connections organized? Sorting people and pages into circles allows you to read the news you want from your stream and connect with specific audiences. In this article I'll share how to use circles to improve your Google+ network. Listen to this article: #1: Fill Your Google+ Circles Google+ profiles and pages use circles to organize the contacts they follow. Think of circles the same way you would Facebook interest lists or Twitter lists, but with more functionality. Both profiles and pages can add other profiles and pages to their circles to follow their public updates. Profiles come with four default circles: Family, Friends, Acquaintances and Following. Pages come with four default circles: Following, Customers, VIPs and Team Members. Use these circles or delete them and create your own custom circles. There are a few ways to add people to circles. Hover over the Add to Circles button on Google+ profiles or click the Follow button on Google+ pages to add someone to a circle. Add profiles and pages to multiple circles, based on how you plan to use them. To see people and pages that have added you to their circles, click on the notifications icon near the top right of your Google+ screen. Then hover over the Add button to put those people into your circles. While logged in as your Google+ profile or page, click on People in the left sidebar menu. Those are people and pages that have added you on Google+, as well as suggested people and pages from Google+. You also have the ability to search for your Gmail contacts, colleagues and classmates on Google+. Hover over the Add buttons to put these people and pages in your circles. You can also drag people and pages into circles in the Your Circles view. Now that you know how to add people and pages to your circles on Google+, let's look at the ways to use circles to customize your experience and your Google+ marketing. #2: Filter What You See by Circle One way to use your circles on Google+ is to filter your stream (news feed). As you add people and pages to your circles, think about how you would like your stream to be organized. Then add people and pages to circles according to those categories. Use the menu bar at the top of your stream to filter by your circles, so you get whatever information you want to read, when you want it. The Google+ iOS app has a similar menu at the top to filter your stream. Click on the All drop-down to see a list of your circles, and then select a circle to view its updates. #3: Target Your Circles Share Updates With Specific Circles Sharing to specific circles is just like sharing to friends' lists on Facebook. Think about the groups of people who would enjoy specific types of updates, and then add people and pages to circles according to those categories. When you create targeted updates, select the relevant circles of people to receive them. For updates you want to share with everyone, use the Public option. For updates you want to keep private for friends and family, or share with only members of your business's VIP group, use their circles. When you share to specific circles, everyone in those circles will see who received the update. Keep this "public" aspect in mind when you decide which people and pages to add to what circles. Email Your Circles One advantage of sharing updates with specific circles (as opposed to publicly) is the ability to send an email to the people and pages within those circles. This feature works depending on the settings for people and pages in your circles and whether those people and pages have added you to their circles. Remember, the email feature only works for a total of 100 people or fewer. Therefore, you may want to create one or multiple circles for the specific purpose of sharing via email. Recipients will receive an email that looks similar to t...

SearchCap: Amp links at large, Google AdWords demographic targeting & more

by Amy Gesenhues @ SearchCap: Daily Search Engine News Recap

Below is what happened in search today, as reported on Search Engine Land and from other places across the web.

The post SearchCap: Amp links at large, Google AdWords demographic targeting & more appeared first on Search Engine Land.

WordPress Vulnerabilities

by link2city.com @ link2city

Fake WordPress Plugin Opens Sites to Criminals A fake WordPress plugin is trending, targeting one of the world’s largest open-source applications in order to allow back-door access to a host of websites. Dubbed WP-Base-SEO, the plugin is a forgery of a legitimate search engine optimization plugin, called WordPress SEO Tools, according to SiteLock, the firm

The post WordPress Vulnerabilities appeared first on link2city.

Search Engine Marketing Pricing

by Arron Andrews @ Top Visibility

Search Engine Marketing Pricing What good is a well-designed website if it cannot be found? Search engine marketing is an art as much as it is a science. To take a website that has practically no exposure & bring it … Continue reading

How to Publish Content on Apple News: A Step-by-Step Guide

How to Publish Content on Apple News: A Step-by-Step Guide

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want more exposure for your content? Have you considered publishing your content on Apple News? Apple News lets you deliver both visual and text-based content directly to a growing number of iOS mobile devices. In this article, you'll discover how to become an Apple News publisher. Listen to this article: What Is Apple News? Apple News is a preinstalled application on every iOS device (version iOS 9 or later). The app delivers traditional text-based content, videos, and photo galleries from a variety of sources, including magazines, websites, and newspapers. Anyone in the US, UK, and Australia can sign up as a publisher and produce content for Apple News. Once you publish an article, it's added to the Apple News app, and the content is automatically optimized for all iOS devices. This ensures that readers have a great experience, no matter which device they're using. Before you can publish content for Apple News, you need to sign up as a publisher. Here's how to get started. #1: Sign Into iCloud To start the sign-up process, go to http://www.icloud.com/newspublisher/ and then click Continue. Sign into your iCloud account with your Apple ID (which is your device's associated ID). You'll need to accept the end user license agreement to continue. #2: Provide Publisher and Channel Information On the next page, fill out your publisher information and then click Next. You'll also need to provide additional information to set up your channel. When you're finished, click Next. #3: Upload a Logo You now have the option to upload a channel logo. (Note: You can skip this step.) Make sure your logo is a PNG file with a minimum size of 256 pixels square. The file size limit is 2MB. Click here for more details about logo specifications. Note that after you complete your registration, Apple will review your logo, and if it doesn't satisfy the requirements, they won't accept your application, and you may have to start over again. #4: Choose a Publishing Format Next, you can choose from two different publishing methods: RSS feed (there's no change in user experience, which means you can't use Apple's article format) or the Apple News Format, which optimizes your content for iOS devices. Use the Apple News Format To use Apple's News Format for your content, all you have to do is to click Sign Up for Apple News Format. Once you click the button, your application will automatically be sent for review. Use the RSS Feed for Your Blog or Website To use the RSS feed for your website or blog, click on I'd Rather Use RSS for Now. This choice takes you to the next step where you have to provide the RSS feed of your website. It's easy to find your feed URL. Visit your website and right-click anywhere on the page. From the menu, select Inspect Element or Inspect. Once the window appears with the HTML code of your page, use the Find feature (press Ctrl+F on Windows, Command+F on a Mac) and search for "RSS." It will then be highlighted on the screen like this. Copy your feed link and then paste it into the form. When you're finished, click Next. After accepting the terms and conditions, you can submit your application. You're all set! Apple will review your application and get back to you within a few days. Note: Ads served by Apple are not available if you only present your content via RSS. #5: Submit Articles for Approval After you're approved as a publisher, you're required to submit some articles for review. To do that, you can either create an article in News Publisher or use your existing content management system (CMS). To create an article in News Publisher, sign in and select News Publisher from the menu. If you need further information about the features, check out the official guide. If you prefer to connect your CMS with News Publisher, you'll need to use a plugin or write the code yourself. Fortunately,

5 Ways to Improve Your Social Media Results

5 Ways to Improve Your Social Media Results

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is your social media audience losing interest? Do you want to tap into your followers' emotions? Using psychology to connect with your target audience is a powerful way to engage and motivate them to take action. In this article you'll discover five psychology principles you can use to improve your social media marketing results. Listen to this article: #1: People Prefer Stories to Stats In Made to Stick: Why Some Ideas Survive and Others Die, authors Chip and Dan Heath share research that reveals we're more likely to donate when we hear the story of an individual in need rather than data about an entire impoverished area. Even though a region's suffering has a larger impact than that of an individual, the individual's story is appealing because we have an emotional response when hearing the experiences of others, not statistics and abstract information. To apply this principle to your social media marketing, tell a story to reach your audience emotionally. Guinness does this well through their marketing campaigns. Rather than spout information or simply show a scene, this ad takes the viewer through a complicated situation that gradually unfolds to reveal the outcome. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rx0MRawkrj4 Ads like this one follow the "show, don't tell" principle. They lead audience members through a story they need to interpret for themselves based on the actions of the characters. Your social media content can impress your audience and be more memorable if you share a personal experience; whether it's your own or someone else's. By creating a journey with a resolution, you can make an emotional impact on your viewers. #2: Personal Benefits Generate Interest Expressing how people can benefit from your product or service will help you increase engagement on social media. Taco Bell's Twitter account socially engages its audience with its witty and interactive tweets. Most importantly, the people behind the account understand what makes people tick. Take a look at this popular tweet. Who wouldn't like a free meal? Imagine what people are thinking as they watch the World Series. They're likely hoping someone steals a base with the promise of free breakfast from Taco Bell. This keeps the brand at the top of its audience members' minds. Of course, you don't have to give everyone in the country a free breakfast to garner attention. There are other effective methods to let people know what you or your product can do for them. Taco Bell's strategy shows that captivating the audience begins with thinking about what they want, first and foremost. Apple famously focused on the consumer when Steve Jobs described the iPod as "1,000 songs in your pocket." Now imagine if he had described the features instead: high storage and smooth texture. People would probably be thinking, "So what? How does this apply to me?" httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=6SUJNspeux8 The next time you share something about your brand on social media, explain or show why it will make a difference in people's lives. #3: Social Proof From Peers Increases Trust These days, reviews and testimonials on products and services are available at the click of a button. Consider a 2008 study that involved hanging public-service messages on residents' doors, asking them to use fans instead of air conditioning. Results found that telling a group that 77% of their neighbors were using fans was more effective than mentioning residents could save $54 a month. What our peers do, impacts our decision-making. Crate and Barrel's website invites customers to leave reviews for products and gives them the option of uploading a picture. Pictures help other potential customers visualize how the product would look in a home setting. There are a number of ways to create social proof; show Facebook likes and post testimonials to tell your audience about how popular your product is.

Mobile Web App Development With JQuery Mobile – Alternatives, Pros and Cons

by Administrator @ PG Webs

Since the name signifies, jQuery Mobile is really a touch-optimized structural part developed influenced by jQuery collection. It allows programmers to produce mobile internet applications to get major mobile phone platforms just like Android, is, Home windows Phone as well as Blackberry. The web developers can further make use of the framework to develop mobile [...]

Influencer Marketing: What You Need to Know to Get Started

Influencer Marketing: What You Need to Know to Get Started

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Does your company work with influencers? Want to incorporate influencers into your marketing? To discover what you need to know about influencer marketing, I interview Lee Odden. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Lee Odden, an influencer marketing expert. He's the author of Optimize, the CEO of TopRank Marketing, and his company produces TopRankBlog.com. Lee explores influencer marketing and what you need to know to do it well. You'll discover how to work with influencers. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Influencer Marketing What is influencer marketing? Lee says the roots of influencer marketing are in advocacy and public relations organizations. You're essentially working with people who are really famous in an industry. The idea is to create an affinity for the brand for however that celebrity is known, and to reach the audience that celebrity has been able to attract. Lee adds that people still have the idea that if they convince famous people to talk about their company, then they'll be famous too. The reality is that, today, especially in the world of social media, people are empowered to follow their passions to create, curate, connect with others, and attract a following. This allows people to create their own influence. Everyone is influential about something, Lee says. Not just famous people can be part of your influencer marketing program. An influencer can be an employee like "Ted in engineering," who has a blog with 5,000 subscribers. Or, it could be that person with a million followers. It could even be customers who are advocating for you every chance they get. When you work with people who have subject matter expertise and an active network, you can advance your brand goals in some really powerful ways. On platforms like YouTube, Instagram, and Snapchat, there's a whole category of people called creators. They have various levels of celebrity, influence, or network size, and have anointed themselves as experts. There are marketplaces where brands can go and literally shop for a tweet, an Instagram image, product placement in a YouTube video, etc. For companies in the business of paying to play, it's a good fit. There are also brands that want to develop relationships with people who are truly thought leaders in their industry, or up-and-comers. They want to develop relationships, because they have an affinity for each other and have things their common audiences care about. There's no right or wrong, but it's important when setting expectations to know what you're going to get out of it. What is the distinction between a celebrity and a thought leader? Lee brought up an expression he borrowed from Scott Monty, "brandividual." This is someone truly invested in developing his or her own brand, except they're an individual. These professional influencers write books, give keynotes, and do all sorts of amazing things. Lee adds it's an important distinction to make between someone who is exclusively focused on being well-known and someone who is a true thought leader. He's not saying a brandividual can't be a thought leader. A thought leader is someone expressing original thought. They're creating content based on intelligence, experimentation, and observations. Brian Solis is a great example of a thought leader, Lee says. In addition to being really good at promoting himself, Brian is constantly experimenting. He does research. He interviews. And then collects, analyzes, and interprets the data. His experiments and experiences help form the thought leader con...

Outbound Linking Advice and Best Practices from Twitter’s #SEOPub Chat

by Peter Cunningham @ Keyword Performance, LLC.

Every Wednesday, the Twitter account #SEOpub Chat (@SEOpub) hosts a roundtable discussion between SEOs and search marketers on a particular topic. Today the conversation was on a subject that’s often overlooked—outbound linking strategies and best practices. Let’s look at some of the highlights! Question 1: How closely do you vet outbound links? Q1: How closely do […]

The post Outbound Linking Advice and Best Practices from Twitter’s #SEOPub Chat appeared first on Keyword Performance, LLC..

Google+ Hangouts: What Marketers Need to Know to Get Started

Google+ Hangouts: What Marketers Need to Know to Get Started

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Google+ hangouts for your marketing? Are you wondering how hangouts can help your business? To learn how to get started with Google+ hangouts, I interview Brandee Sweesy for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Brandee Sweesy, who is a Google+ hangouts marketing expert. For the last 20 years she has been helping entrepreneurs grow a following with video. Brandee shares how you can use hangouts to promote your content. You'll learn the different techniques to help brand your hangouts and the best ways to promote attendance. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Google+ Hangouts Marketing What is a Google+ hangout? Brandee states that first of all, it's free. Google describes it as a unification of their video, chats and messenger service all in one place. It was a replacement for Google talk and Google chat. Hangouts can either be private or you can stream live to your YouTube channel with Hangouts on Air. Brandee explains that if you're a consultant or coach, you can use hangouts like you would Skype. The quality of the video is amazing. If you want to record your private hangout sessions, then you will have to use Camtasia or ScreenFlow. These hangouts are great to use for team meetings, consulting, coaching or when you privately advise people. With a hangout on air, you can host yourself and up to nine other people. You can all be on the video at the same time, where you can chat and give a presentation. This can be done with private hangouts and hangouts on air. You'll discover why you need to keep control of the sound-activated screen and what you need to do. Hangouts on air stream live to your YouTube channel. It's linked to your Google+ page. If you have a Google+ profile or a Google+ business page, you link it to your YouTube channel. You need to have your YouTube channel verified for uploads of more than 15 minutes and most hangouts run longer than that. The great advantage when you stream live to your YouTube channel is that at the end of the broadcast, you have unlimited YouTube content. You'll find out what you need to add once you have finished the live stream to be able to optimize your video marketing. When you stream live, it also runs on your Google+ profile page at the same time. Once you start a hangout on air, you can take the embed codes and share them on a Facebook tab, website or blog post. You can then direct people to watch it there. There's also a Hangouts on Air page that lists all of the hangouts that are currently on air. Listen to the show to learn about how you should name your hangouts to grab people's attention. How does a hangout differ from a webinar? Brandee first saw hangouts as a possible replacement for webinars. A lot of the webinar platforms are expensive and if you only do a few, it can be hard to justify the cost. Many webinar platforms base their price on the number of viewers. But with a hangout on air, you have unlimited viewership. Brandee explains how she has done webinars by herself with a slide presentation embedded on a website that has unlimited viewers. With hangouts on air, you don't need to buy expensive plugins for your website. People can enter their email address and then flip over to a Watch Live page. You'll discover the best option to help build engagement and keep viewers from getting distracted. The advantage with hangouts is you have the opportunity to share an image wit...

How to Use Facebook to Market Your Products

How to Use Facebook to Market Your Products

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have products to sell? Have you tried using Facebook ads to promote your products? To find out how to market products via Facebook, I interview Steve Chou. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Steve Chou. Steve and his wife run an ecommerce site that sells handkerchiefs and linens at BumblebeeLinens.com. He's also host of the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast and the website MyWifeQuitHerJob.com, where he teaches people how to sell physical products online. Steve explains which Facebook ad types he uses to sell his physical products. You'll discover how Steve uses email and Facebook ads in tandem. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: How to Use Facebook to Market Physical Products Steve's Story As Steve and his wife were preparing for their wedding, his wife wanted a nice handkerchief because she expected to cry during the service. After shopping around, they imported a bunch of handkerchiefs from Asia. After using only a few, Steve and his wife listed the rest on eBay, where they sold like hotcakes. Later, when Steve's wife became pregnant with their first child, she wanted to quit her six-figure income job. They reconnected with the handkerchief vendor and opened their online store, Bumblebee Linens. At first, Steve worked as a microprocessor designer by day, and after the baby went to bed, Steve and his wife ran the business. It became such a success that they maintained their income even after his wife quit her job. Steve explains that soon afterward, their friends began wanting to have kids and quit their jobs, and they kept asking Steve how to launch an ecommerce store. Instead of answering the same questions over and over again, Steve began blogging about his experiences running the store. That's how MyWifeQuitHerJob.com got started in 2009. To generate sales in the early days, Steve used Google AdWords. His brother-in-law worked at Google in the AdWords division and showed Steve how to use it. Back in 2007, Steve generated a lot of sales via clicks that cost him about 10 to 15 cents. Steve says online content also helped generate sales. They wrote articles to help brides and provide craft ideas for their products. After three to six months, the articles started ranking in search engines and sent traffic to their store, too. Today, Bumblebee Linens sells handkerchiefs, linen napkins, linen towels, lace parasols, aprons, and more. Steve says the store has several target audiences. The handkerchief audience includes people planning weddings and an over-55 crowd. Event and wedding planners are the target audience for napkins and moms are the audience for Mommy & Me aprons. The company has in-house embroidery machines for personalizing their products. Listen to the show to learn more about the audience and the content on MyWifeQuitHerJob.com. Win-back Campaigns Steve explains that a win-back campaign targets people who have already purchased from your shop because those people are more likely to buy again. To run this type of campaign, you need to figure out who those people are, and if they haven't purchased within a certain timeframe, give them an incentive to come back. You can automate a win-back campaign with an online merchant system. For example, if someone hasn't purchased from Bumblebee Linens in 60 days, they automatically receive an email and a Facebook ad with a 10%-off coupon. To automate the Facebook component of the campaign, Steve says the ecommerce system Klaviyo allows Bumblebee Linens to export a specific segment (in this case people who haven...

How to Use Rigor’s Real Browser Check API Data Pull Tool

by Hanna Woodburn @ Rigor

There’s the old adage that knowledge is power. We like to think that the same is true of data because it provides insight and can be used as a jumping off point to make informed decisions. Our Optimization product, for instance, is predicated on helping our customers take informed, strategic actions based on the performance […]

The post How to Use Rigor’s Real Browser Check API Data Pull Tool appeared first on Rigor.

How to Get Started on Blab: Group Video Broadcasting for Marketers

How to Get Started on Blab: Group Video Broadcasting for Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you a fan of live-streaming video for business? Have you tried Blab? Blab, the newest platform in streaming video, lets you build a personal and business presence while creating community. In this article I'll explore Blab and share ways you can use it for business. Listen to this article: About Blab Blab.im, which is currently available on desktop and iOS (Android is coming soon), is a live-streaming video platform that lets you host your own live video show or conference with up to four people engaging at the same time. The moderator has control over who is in the three additional video seats, but anyone who wants to tune in can use the right panel to chat and the left panel to tweet. Blab's ease of use, simplicity and functionality give it the edge over other live-streaming platforms. For instance, Meerkat, Periscope and Facebook Mentions are mobile-only and are mostly just you talking to your audience. Plus, if you want to interview someone, he or she needs to be right next to you. And while you can include up to 10 people on a Google hangout, the session feels more like an interview and doesn't provide the same sense of engagement as a blab. Another plus is that Blab's time length is open-ended and most blabs last about an hour. According to Shaan Puri, CEO of Blab, most people using the platform spend at least an hour "blabbing" each day. Blab is more than just a new toy. It's a substantial method of connecting, and others are getting as excited about it as I am! #1: Get Started on Blab Use the same account for Blab as you do for Twitter. Just log in and you're ready to go. If you want to change your bio or notifications, click on your photo and select Settings. Once on the platform, follow people to receive notifications about their blabs. Finding people to follow is simple: do a search by name or look anyone up by adding their Twitter handle after blab.im/. To start a new blab, click the purple button next to your profile picture. Then give your blab a title and choose up to three tags (keywords). Next, set up your blab to go live immediately or schedule it for the future. Record Your Blab If you're the moderator, you can choose to record the blab. Within a minute of the end of the show, you'll receive two links to an mp3 or mp4 with the recording. After you receive those links, you can upload your recorded blab as a video to YouTube or as a podcast on Libsyn, iTunes or your preferred host. Additionally, all of the blabs you record are archived for access on your profile under Replay. While archived blabs can be replayed at any time, viewers cannot chat, send feels or follow people during a replay. Promote Your Blab If you go live, you can tweet a link to let people know about your blab. Promote your scheduled blabs the same way you would promote any event. Create a custom graphic, email your network, schedule a Facebook event, tweet it out and share on all of your social networks. Moderate Your Blab When there's an empty seat, someone can request to join in. When the moderator approves, the new person enters the video chat. Blab is similar to a late-night talk show format. There's a host and a primary special guest. When another guest comes on, the previous guest can slide over a seat and stick around. #2: Use Blab Chat Commands There are a few unique commands enabled in the chat column on the right of Blab's layout. To ask a question, type "/Q", and the word Question appears in a grey box so it stands out. To change the topic of the blab, the moderator can type "/Topic". For a bit of fun, you can add interest to your chat comments by typing "/shrug" or "/tableflip" in the chat box. I'm not aware of other commands, but it wouldn't surprise me if the Blab development team has more Easter eggs hidden. #3: Give Kudos to Blabbers Instead of hearts, like those used on Periscope,

How to Research and Locate Your Audience Using Social Media

How to Research and Locate Your Audience Using Social Media

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you struggling to connect with your customers on social networks? Do you know where they hang out online? To optimize your social media marketing efforts, it's important to know who your customers are and which social networks they spend their time on. In this article you'll discover how to connect with your target audience on social media. Listen to this article: #1: Identify Your Ideal Customer One of the first questions I ask is, "Who is your ideal customer?" Some of the answers I've received include women, people who have to eat to survive, bosses, employees and people looking for work. While these answers may be true for you, too, they won't help you find your audience because they don't help you prioritize where to spend your time. John Lee Dumas has famously talked about identifying your business avatar. This means you'll want to create a fictional persona of your ideal customer, to the point of naming it, knowing how many kids it has or what it does on the weekends. The clearer your avatar is, the easier it is to find people on social media who resemble the persona. #2: Determine Your Audience Size Once you have a good sense of what your audience looks like, you can use Facebook Ads Manager to estimate the size of your audience. For example, if you want to reach women in Maine who are interested in nutrition, you can find out that 62,000 people on Facebook match that audience. This is also good business information, because if your audience is too small, you may need to change your offering to expand your audience. On the flipside, if your audience is too large, you might want to target a narrower niche to start. Of course, not everyone is on Facebook. According to recent research, almost 60% of Americans are on Facebook. That number may be more (or less) depending on where your audience lives, their age, gender and household income, but it's a good starting point. #3: Survey Your Customers If you've been in business for any length of time, you have customers you can survey. For the purposes of optimizing your social media campaigns, wisely spending your ad dollars and targeting guest blogging opportunities, you need to know where your audience hangs out online. As part of your survey, ask your current customers the following questions: What social media sites do you regularly use? What websites do you visit for information on _______ (for example, remodeling ideas, pricing strategies or whatever is appropriate for your business)? Do you listen to podcasts? If so, which ones? Do you regularly read blogs? If so, which ones? What people do you follow or pay attention to online? You can also use free tools like SurveyMonkey or Google Forms to collect your answers. In this video, Steve Dotto walks you through how to create your own forms with Google Forms. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=wwf72lwPLVY Google Forms is a great way to collect feedback on live events, for example, because it graphically displays your audience's feedback. Go to your form results and select Form > Show Summary of Responses from the drop-down menu. #4: Research Online Behavior What do you do if you're just starting out, your customer base is too small for meaningful results or you're expanding into a new category? In cases like these, or simply to supplement your surveys, you can research online behavior. The Pew Research Center has an excellent breakdown of where your audience spends their time online. It's not difficult to find studies and infographics that provide information on specific platforms or other countries. For example, check out this chart from MarketingCharts to see a makeup of the top social media channels based on gender, age, education and more. #5: Find and Connect With Your Customer Once you get the results from your survey and have reviewed the demographics of the available research, it's time to put that knowledge to work across different so...

8 Collaboration Tools to Improve Your Content

8 Collaboration Tools to Improve Your Content

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you part of a team that collaborates on content? Want tools to make the collaboration process more efficient? Whether you're working on blog post or creating social media updates, the more people involved, the richer the results can be. Using collaboration tools makes the process smooth and seamless. In this article I'll share eight collaboration tools to improve your productivity. Listen to this article: #1: Map Out Content Using MindMeister MindMeister is an effective brain-mapping tool that allows you to visually break down complex concepts and show how each idea flows into another. It's perhaps the fastest, easiest way to get a point across effectively. MindMeister is browser-based and available on mobile apps. There are a variety of templates and numerous additional features for brainstorming, project plans and more. Map out your content strategy with your team, no matter where they're located. Price: Free plan gives you access to three maps. Note: MindMeister collaboration features are included in the free plan. There are multiple premium plan options, starting at $36 for 6 months with a 30-day free trial. #2: Brainstorm in Real Time With Scribblar Scribblar is an educational tool that can also be used for collaborative brainstorming sessions. Primarily an educational tool, Scribblar is a favorite among students and teachers for its ability to create multiple "rooms" that allow you to collaborate in real time. Plus, you can text and audio chat during the process. While there is an obvious academic tone, Scribblar is a great tool for creative people who excel when they let their ideas flow in a free-form conversation. When working on your content plan, eliminate endless emails and conference calls. Just jump onto Scribblar and work on the same dashboard together. Price: A very limited free plan (2 users, 1 room) and a variety of premium plans that start at $9 a month are available. Note: Chatwoo can be a good free alternative. It's online chat room software which is completely free. You can use it to collaborate with your team (on a private corporate site) or with your site visitors. #3: Compile Research on Cyfe Cyfe is a multi-purpose research and productivity dashboard that lets you collect data, create to-do lists, archive search results and more. It helps you monitor social media mentions and activity too. For companies that need a bit more oomph in their collaborative tools, Cyfe provides a long feature list to help users work together in the cloud. Price: There's a free plan with the option to upgrade to premium ($19 per month; $14 a month if paid annually). #4: Plan Editorial on GatherContent Specifically designed for collaborating, GatherContent is every social media manager's and blog editor's dream. It allows you to create an effective project or editorial calendar that has everything in the same place, and is organized through the same dashboard. This ultra-organized information keeps everyone on the team on the same page. GatherContent is easy to use and minimizes the task of managing workflow, no matter how many people you invite to be a part of the process. Never cross wires or miss deadlines again. Price: $79 per month with a 30-day free trial. Note: Check out CoSchedule as another option. #5: Manage Projects on Trello If you need a simple way to set tasks for everyone on your team, Trello is probably the best project management tool for this purpose. Once you have a plan, create boards and then pin cards with tasks to each one. Then, write either checklists or standard text instructions for what each task entails, and assign those cards to different team members. When the work is done, attach documents to the completed card if you like and list it as complete. Also, @tag team members to quickly get their attention and connect with them. Price: Free. Note: Also check out Wrike for easy project management.

How to Automate Your Tweets: 3 Useful Twitter Apps

How to Automate Your Tweets: 3 Useful Twitter Apps

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Does tweeting take up a lot of your time? Do you want to share content automatically? There are tools you can use to automatically tweet your best content when your followers are most active and engaged. In this article you'll discover how to automatically schedule your tweets at optimal times. Why Automate Twitter? Putting together a Twitter content calendar can be a time-consuming task. You've likely experienced times when you've run out of ideas or had trouble finding articles to curate. A great way to keep your posting schedule full is to automate Twitter. You can schedule your posts automatically when the engagement and potential reach are higher. Listen to this article: Keep in mind that only a small portion of your followers will see your content the first time you post it. That's why it's a good idea to share the same content more than once. With smart scheduling and automation, you can reshare your content without being a Twitter spammer. This guide will help you schedule your best content when your followers are most engaged. #1: Find Out When to Tweet With Tweriod Before you start scheduling content on Twitter, take the time to analyze your followers' activity. You want to find out when your audience is most active and engaged on Twitter. This is a necessary step to maximize engagement. There are a number of analytics tools you can use to identify these peak periods. One free and easy-to-use tool is Tweriod. It shows you the intervals when your Twitter followers are most active. To get started, go to Tweriod and sign up with your Twitter account. Note that the time zone is determined according to your Twitter profile's settings, so make sure it's correct. After signing in, go to your dashboard and click on My Analysis to get a free premium analysis. On the results page, you'll see which time periods give you the most exposure on weekends and weekdays. For example, the Twitter account below has the most exposure on weekdays from 5 to 7 PM and 8 to 9 PM. On weekends, this account gets the most exposure from 5 to 6 PM and 8 to 10 PM. On your dashboard, you can also see when your followers are online. The results below show that followers are active between the same time periods on weekdays and weekends. Now you know the peak time periods for your followers on weekdays and weekends. In the next section you'll discover how to schedule tweets for these periods. #2: Set Up a Posting Schedule in Buffer A scheduling tool like Buffer can save you a lot of time with your Twitter account. Here's how to set up your own scheduling plan. After you sign in with your Twitter account, click on the Schedule menu. Make sure the time zone matches the settings of your Twitter account. According to when your followers are most active, set up a posting schedule for weekdays and weekends. It's up to you to decide how often you want to post content. You may want to experiment with different posting schedules to see what works best for you. Buffer has a beta feature that will identify the best times to post during the day by analyzing your past 5,000 interactions (likes, favorites, clicks, etc.) and similar profiles in the same time zone. On the Schedule page, scroll down and click on the Try Our Optimal Timing Tool (Beta) link. You can specify how many times you want to post per day, and the tool will calculate the optimal times for posting. Click on the Submit button. Next, you'll see a list of optimal times for you to post on Twitter, according to Buffer. Pro tip: Revise these peak times regularly, since your audience changes over time. Focus on optimizing your posting schedule by using data from Twitter analytics and Buffer. Before you move on to the next step, spend some time scheduling tweets. Here is a great guide to finding high-quality content to share on Twitter. #3: Fill Your Buffer Queue Using IFTTT

How to Easily Analyze the Social Activities of Your Competitors

How to Easily Analyze the Social Activities of Your Competitors

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to freshen up your social media marketing? Have you thought about looking at other accounts for inspiration? Checking out what other companies are doing on social media can help you brainstorm your own content tactics. In this article you'll discover how to analyze your competitors' social accounts to inspire new marketing ideas. Listen to this article: Why Look at the Competition? Researching your competitors on social media not only provides an overview of your industry, but it also gives you insight into the current habits of the audiences you're targeting. By answering a few key questions, you'll see what kinds of posts are effective for the people you want to reach. #1: Analyze Facebook Pages If you want to gain insight into a company's Facebook page, here are some questions to consider: How many followers do they have? What are they posting about? Are their posts mostly internal (company-based) news, blog posts and articles; mostly external news, blog posts and articles; or a mix of both? What's their brand voice? How often do they post? How many likes/comments/shares do they get per post? Do they run any polls, contests or fun games with their brand? The Facebook page for Powell’s Books, a famous independent bookstore, is worth checking out as inspiration if you're a local business hoping to make a national footprint. One of the first things you'll notice is that Powell's takes the time to create their own graphics, which often include quotes from authors. It's a great twist on a sharable meme for a bookstore. They post photos of customers at individual stores and events, so you can assume their staff participates in social sharing (a great idea for local businesses). They also share interactive posts and comment on national conversation topics to keep the feed relevant to non-local fans. Interestingly, one of the biggest buzz-generators for Powell's Facebook page is when they share posts on books and publishing from other media, such as The New Yorker. Remember that sometimes social media successes can come from other sources. Key takeaway: A brick-and-mortar brand can serve both local and national audiences with the right mix of photos and interactive content. #2: Look at Twitter Accounts If you're analyzing a company's Twitter account, here are some questions to answer to gain insight into their activities: How many followers do they have? How many accounts are they following? A good rule of thumb: An account with 50,000 followers that's following 500 users probably has more influence than an account with 50,000 followers that's following 49,000 users, unless they bought followers. What do they tweet about? Are they mostly mirroring their Facebook content, or is their content unique to the channel? Are their posts mostly internal, external or a mix of both? How many favorites/replies/retweets do they average per post? Does one engagement stand out over the others? Have they created lists? What hashtags do they use? Do they run any Twitter chats? Do they use Twitter cards for lead generation, email signups, etc.? If you look at the Twitter account for Moz, you'll notice that they use a photo in almost every Twitter post. Their photos all follow the brand's style and color scheme, and they've created a template for their Twitter images to accompany guest posts. Brand-wise, it's interesting that the "owner" of the Moz account is a robot named Roger. Choosing an on-brand character to run social accounts is a way the Moz brand stands out as playful in the generally more serious SEO industry. Key takeaway: Templates and a social media character can help a large brand stay consistent in social, even if multiple people are behind the account. #3: Examine Instagram Accounts Answer these questions to evaluate a company's Instagram account: How many followers do they have?

Hello world!

by @ Position Research

Welcome to WordPress. This is your first post. Edit or delete it, then start blogging!

The post Hello world! appeared first on Position Research.

How to Launch Your Product Using Facebook

How to Launch Your Product Using Facebook

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you launching a new product or service? Want to create buzz and get the word out to the right people? Facebook is a great way to promote the launch of a product or service and generate excitement. To be successful, you need to plan your content, write your posts and make good use of the tools Facebook has to offer. In this article you'll discover how to launch a product or service using Facebook. #1: Before Pre-launch: Start Planning Early You'll want to map out your launch strategy at least two months ahead, and most likely even earlier than that. Plan what types of launch material you'll have available to share on social media to get the buzz going. You may also need to start designing some of these materials. Listen to this article: If you have an online product, you can use some great freebies to help get people onto your list. Some examples of great freebies or launch materials include: Images and infographics: Think about designing several versions of your images so they're size-optimized for each social site. Also, if you'll be using them in a Facebook ad, make sure the images are 1200 x 628 pixels and comply with the 20% text rule. Free ebooks, reports or white papers: These freebies could be part of your final product or something valuable that will promote the final product. Free webinar or other educational content: If you're launching an online product, you may want to host a webinar, telesummit or some other type of live event. Plan when that event will occur and when you'll start promoting it. Sale or discount period: If you're offering an introductory price, figure out how long that will last and how many posts you might have around that promotion. Facebook contests: If you're having a contest to promote the launch or new product, plan the timing and determine what type of contest will work best for you. When launching a course, for example, you might plan all of the content and decide when you'll communicate about it to people on your email list and in your social media posts. If affiliates or promotion partners will be helping you get the word out about your product or service, start assembling that team and putting together resources for the team to use. Be sure to make it easy for affiliates to build buzz on Facebook and other social media channels. Write a variety of Facebook posts and tweets so they can either cut and paste them or have a great starting place to add their own wording. Social Media Examiner provided a variety of images to their affiliates to help promote Social Media Marketing World. Some of the images were appropriate for Facebook ads, while others were useful for tweets or blog posts. They also provided a variety of tweets and Facebook updates that were ready to use, and people just had to add their affiliate link. #2: Pre-launch: Build Buzz To start building buzz and generating excitement around your product or service, post teasers about it. If appropriate, use both your Facebook page and profile to let your Facebook fans and personal friends know that something is coming. Using video on Facebook to promote your launch will go further in the news feed. Make sure you're creating a variety of content. You can see that this video post reached nearly 39,000 people and had over 8,000 views. You can also give people a sneak peek into your process. Bathers Beach House in Australia started posting about their restaurant months before it opened. They shared the building process, gained the interest of potential diners and grew to over 4,000 fans before they even opened their doors. This led to a successful opening of their restaurant, and they continue to have high engagement and interaction. If you have affiliates or promotional partners, consider co-creating material to launch the product, such as a webinar or live Q&A session. Gena Shingle Jaffe launched a legal course for entrepreneurs,

How to Identify and Prioritize Conversion Optimization Opportunities

by Brian Honigman @ Digital Current

Use this guide to help you determine how best to optimize your site in order to boost visitor conversion. Conversion optimization is an ongoing marketing practice that’s never fully completed. No website is perfect as every brand will have areas of their online properties worth optimizing to boost conversions. As an enterprise brand, you likely […]

The post How to Identify and Prioritize Conversion Optimization Opportunities appeared first on Digital Current.

LinkedIn Ads: What Marketers Need to Know

LinkedIn Ads: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you advertise on LinkedIn? Have you considered LinkedIn advertising and want to learn more? To discover everything there is to know about LinkedIn ads, I interview AJ Wilcox. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview AJ Wilcox, a LinkedIn ad expert. His agency, B2Linked, specializes in business-to-business advertising and lead generation on LinkedIn. In addition to managing accounts, AJ also specializes in LinkedIn ads training. AJ explores the different types of ads available on LinkedIn. You'll discover what B2B marketers need to know about advertising on LinkedIn. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: How AJ Got Into LinkedIn Ads AJ is a long-time digital marketer who started out doing search engine optimization (SEO) and Google AdWords. About four years ago, a company in Utah recruited AJ. On his first day, he laid out his plans for SEO, pay per click, and social media to the CMO. She gave him the go-ahead and also informed him that the company had started a pilot program with LinkedIn ads. "See what you can do with it," she said. AJ replied, "absolutely," and then turned around and started laughing to himself. He felt like a veteran at digital marketing, yet had never heard of LinkedIn ads. He jumped into the platform to learn about it to try to keep the egg off his face. Within about two weeks, one of the salespeople approached AJ, telling him how much they loved the leads they'd been getting. When AJ discovered through Salesforce that the leads were all sourced from LinkedIn, he realized there was something to it. Listen to the show to hear how AJ started his business, B2Linked. Why Consider LinkedIn Ads? AJ explains that while Facebook's and LinkedIn's ad platforms are very different, they share the same principles. That means that if you have something nailed on Facebook, it will probably work well on LinkedIn and vice versa. While AJ doesn't run Facebook ads for his clients, when he's compared similar campaigns from Facebook to LinkedIn, he's found his conversion rate on LinkedIn to be about double that of Facebook. Plus, the sales teams have told him the LinkedIn leads are much higher quality than the ones from Facebook. LinkedIn is by far the best for B2B targeting, he continues. You can target by job title, seniority, company, skills, specific group membership, geography, and years in business; information people aren't putting on Facebook. AJ shares what he believes are the two best uses of LinkedIn ads. Number one is recruitment and the other is promoting B2B products and services such as an SaaS company (software as a service). Those businesses charge a substantial ongoing rate ($6,000 to $7,000 per month) for access to their software and have a lifetime value of more than $15,000. If you have a lifetime value of under $15,000, AJ cautions, make sure your funnel and your processes are really ironed out on Facebook first, because LinkedIn's cost per click (CPC) is much higher than Facebook's. Listen to the show to discover how to calculate lifetime value. The Ad Types When you go to LinkedIn.com/ads and start a self-service account, you'll have access to two different ad units. AJ explains the first type is text ads. These ads appear in the right sidebar of the LinkedIn homepage (on desktop) and you'll often see three ads there. According to AJ, text ads have a low click-through rate because most people are banner-blind to them. If four people click on them out of every 10,000 times they're viewed, you're doing great, he says.

CRO vs. SEO for my Shopify Store – Which One Should I Prioritize?

by Sam Landsberg @ WebFly

Conversion Rate Optimization (CRO) and Search Engine Optimization (SEO) aren’t simply buzzwords: they have a real impact on the success of your Shopify store. Both of these factors go hand in hand: you need SEO to drive traffic, but if you don’t provide the optimal user experience and encourage purchase behavior, visitors simply won’t convert […]

How to Perform a Detailed Analysis of Your Social Media Competitors

How to Perform a Detailed Analysis of Your Social Media Competitors

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want better results from social media? Have you considered researching your competitors? If you're not getting the results you want from social media, a little research and the right tool can help you refine your social media strategy. In this article, you’ll discover how to perform a detailed competitive analysis and improve your social strategy. Why Competitor Analysis? Competitor analysis lets you discover how your competitors use social media. You can see how your competitors position themselves on social media, what they share and how their audience responds. You can also find out what social media networks work best for your competitors, what information you should include in your social profile and page bios and what types of status updates get the most engagement. Listen to this article: While you can gain these insights for free on your own, it takes time to find multiple competitors' social accounts, collect all of the data (followers, engagement, etc.) and then analyze that data. To show how using a tool can help you gather the data more quickly and present it in an easy-to-analyze format, this article uses Rival IQ as an example. Now, let's look at how to do social media analysis and apply what you learn to improve your social media strategy. #1: Create a Landscape With You and Your Competitors To get started, you'll want to sign up for a free 14-day trial of Rival IQ's service. If you're just doing a one-time analysis of your competitors' social media strategy, you should be able to get it done before the free trial period ends. Otherwise, you'll want to choose a plan that best fits your needs. For each company (including your own), you'll be able to analyze and monitor one account per social network (Facebook, Twitter, Google+, Instagram and YouTube). Once you set up your account, create your first landscape by clicking the + button under the Landscape drop-down menu at the top left. In the dialog box that appears, enter the name for your landscape and click the Create Landscape button. Next, enter the website address for your company and select it from the drop-down list if it appears. Then click the Add to Landscape button. This will allow you to compare your social media presence and content against your competitors'. After Rival IQ confirms that your company has been added, continue adding your top competitors. Enter each competitor's website address and click the Add to Landscape button each time. When you're finished adding companies, click Done Adding Companies. When you click Done, your screen will refresh to show your landscape's dashboard. Rival IQ will confirm the accounts it has found for your company and your competitors. If the companies are new to their system, it might take a little while to update, but usually no more than 24 hours. If you know that one of your competitors has an account on a network that Rival IQ didn't find, you can hover over it and suggest it to them. They'll usually add it within 24 hours. In the above example, the only accounts Rival IQ didn't find were the ones that didn't exist for the specified companies. Once everything is set up, you're ready to start your analysis. #2: Find Social Engagement Opportunities Begin your analysis with the social networks where your competitors have profiles and pages. This should tell you at a glance if you're missing a network that might be beneficial for your social media strategy. In this case, you might assume that out of all of the networks, Instagram is the least important because a few of your competitors don't have a presence there. But that might not always be true, which you'll see shortly. In addition to seeing what social networks your competitors are on, check to see which ones they have the largest audiences on. You can do this by clicking the Cross-Channel link in the left sidebar and then clicking on Detailed Metrics at the to...

Small Business Social: How to Build Relationships

Small Business Social: How to Build Relationships

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use social media to attract and engage customers? Are you wondering how you can use social media to market your business and drive sales? To learn how you can develop relationships with social media and content, I interview Jeff Korhan for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Jeff Korhan, author of Built-In Social: Essential Social Marketing Practices for Every Small Business. He also trains and coaches small businesses on social media marketing at Jeff Korhan.com. Jeff shares his knowledge of and experience with social marketing from running his own small business, and how you can implement it into your business. You'll learn about the 'Social Marketing Process' and the importance of collaboration and cooperation. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Build Relationships With Content and Social Media What did the experience of running a local landscaping company teach you about social marketing? When Jeff first started his local landscaping business, he had just completed 10 years in the corporate world and was fairly ignorant of how small businesses operated. He started to research and study the industry he was about to move into and discovered by accident that small businesses were less formal than the corporate world. Even back then, people wanted to get to know you. Today it's something that can easily be done with social media. You'll find out what Jeff discovered about consumers and why it was the key to getting his business off the ground. Jeff explains how going door-to-door led him down the road to content marketing. Not only did he spend a lot of time with customers, he also spent time reaching out to other people in his industry. The one thing they all had in common was that they all used Yellow Pages for advertising. This led him to explore other options to stand out from his competitors. You'll discover what kind of advertising worked for Jeff and an example of an ad he used. Jeff figured out before the age of social media that he could get business by educating his consumers with his expertise. He started to look for a way to differentiate his business from local competitors and found out that there were a lot of unanswered questions. You'll find out what you need to do to resonate with your customers to help build your business. Listen to the show to find out why you need to start thinking of how you can be the source of answers and how educating people can make you an authority. The Social Marketing Process  Jeff explains the 3-step Social Marketing Process, which is: Content attraction Social engagement Sales conversion The first component is that content attracts attention. You should start at the beginning. Use content to attract the attention of people to help build an audience. You need to publish the information online, where people can find it. The second component is to engage with people and develop relationships using social media. Over time, once you have developed trust, this is when the third component, the sales conversion, almost becomes a byproduct if you've got a sales process in place and you know how to convert people to whatever it is you're selling. Jeff finds that some businesses don't have a reliable sales process. In his book, he writes about how to develop that process and if you have one, how to make it even better. When it comes to knowing what kind of content to produce,

Google+ Success: What Your Business Needs to Know About Google+

Google+ Success: What Your Business Needs to Know About Google+

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Google+ for your business? Are you wondering how you can be more successful generating traffic and growing a community with Google+? To learn what your business needs to know about Google+, I interview Martin Shervington for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Martin Shervington, who is a Google+ marketing expert, consultant and executive coach. He manages two Google+ communities, Plus Your Life! and Plus Your Business! and has authored numerous books including Developmental Coaching. Martin shares why he values Google+ and the benefits you can get from it. You'll learn what Google+ can offer your business and the best ways to get started. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Google+ Success Why Google+ and what has it done for your business? Martin explains how he started with Google+ on March 6, 2012, when his book, Developmental Coaching, was out and he was looking for ways to promote it. He considered Twitter, but decided to go with Google+ instead. After a few days of learning everything he could about the platform, he realized how useful it was and started to make notes. People then started to relate to his notes and shared them. You'll find out what type of content he shared and why it gave people a better social experience. Over the last 20 months, Martin has built two communities. Plus Your Life! is very inspirational and about development on the personal side of things, and Plus Your Business! is all about how to use Google+ in business. Martin says that Google+ not only helped with his book, it also allowed him to start blogging too. You'll discover how Google+ helped him  find an audience and why it gave him the ability to express himself more in his writing. Eventually Martin started to blog on his own site because he could move the attention over. He now has 36,000 people a month visit his blog. Martin explains that there are two mechanisms of Google+ that make it unlike other platforms—social and search. When it comes to Google+, the connection between search and social is unique. No other platform has it. Martin says that the punchline to this is that Google+ is Google. Listen to the show to find out why the search engine becomes a personalized content-surfacer based on whom you are connected with, and what you have interacted with in the past. Google+ statistics The latest statistics state that there are 1 billion Google accounts. This number includes accounts for YouTube, Google+ and Gmail. There are 540 million active users, of which 300 million are active in the stream. You'll hear Martin explain in more detail why Google+ is more than just a social site. Listen to the show to find out why Martin believes that in a year, everyone will see that Google has done something amazing with Google+. The difference between Google+ users and other social networks Martin says that whenever a change happens with Google+, people in the Google+ community are wowed by the new features. Everybody gets very excited. There are some great communities that have formed around different niches. It's a positive environment, where everyone is supportive of one another and there is very high engagement. Martin believes that people are excited to spend time there, because they feel part of a community. You'll discover some big news that Google+ has in beta testing right now. Listen to the show to learn how Google has integrated the Goo...

Pinterest Success: Creative Ways to Use Pinterest for Your Business

Pinterest Success: Creative Ways to Use Pinterest for Your Business

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Pinterest for business? Are you wondering how your business can benefit from Pinterest? To learn some creative ways to use Pinterest to help your business, I interview Cynthia Sanchez for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Cynthia Sanchez, host of the Oh So Pinteresting Podcast. She freely admits that she's addicted to Pinterest. It's changed her life in a major way and now she helps other businesses figure out how to tap into this growing network. Cynthia shares how you can use Pinterest for market research and how to get your content seen by more people. You'll learn about some of the most popular trends on Pinterest and how to create attention-grabbing images. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Pinterest for Business How did Pinterest grab you? When Cynthia was practicing as an oncology nurse, part of her work was to develop a program called Navigation. The role involved a lot of teaching and reaching out. At the end of 2011, she joined Pinterest to find information not only for herself, but also her patients. It started to take over her life unlike any other social media platform. She had the entrepreneurial spirit, but in the medical world, the opportunities are very limited. In February 2012, Cynthia launched her blog Oh So Pinteresting. It evolved from personal use to more business use. A local company noticed she knew a lot about Pinterest and approached her for help. The business grew from there and she said goodbye to the nursing world. The reason Cynthia started with a blog first was because it seemed less technologically daunting. She used WordPress for her self-hosted site. The podcast started a year later when the time seemed right. You'll discover what type of people Cynthia interviews for her podcast and the areas discussed, with Pinterest being such a visual platform. Listen to the show to find out the reaction to Cynthia's blog at the New Media Expo. How people use Pinterest for market research Cynthia says there are a lot of ways you can use Pinterest for market research. If you already have a presence on Pinterest, take a look at the people who follow your account. You can click on the number of followers you have to see a list pop up with all of the people who follow you. From this, you'll see if you have a predominant age group or gender following you. You have to remember that Pinterest is an international type of service. When you click through your followers, you can see the other boards they're following. You'll find out what you can learn when you click through and how this can help you with some ideas for your business. There are a few other things to look out for within a Pinterest account, which include people's location and if they link up to their other social networks. You'll learn what benefits there are to people having their Twitter account linked to their Pinterest account. Cynthia shares the benefits of a free analytic service called PinLeague. The difference with PinLeague and Pinterest's own analytics service is that you can see who your most influential followers are. You'll learn what you can gain when you dig deep into their accounts. Listen to the show to find out other ways you can check out your competitors and how it can help guide your Pinterest activity. Some of the more popular trends on Pinterest Cynthia believes that the most important thing overall,

How to Create More Exposure Using LinkedIn

How to Create More Exposure Using LinkedIn

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Wondering how your business can get more out of LinkedIn? Want to make sure you’re maximizing your LinkedIn presence? LinkedIn has a number of features that will work together to promote your business and its products. In this article you'll discover how to create an integrated LinkedIn marketing presence for your business. Listen to this article: #1: Get on the Map With Company and Showcase Pages If you want to spread awareness for a new product line, create a content hub for company news, publish employee success stories or distribute hiring resources to attract new talent, LinkedIn company and showcase pages can help you align your efforts. Create a Company Page The first step to establishing a LinkedIn presence for your business is to create a company page. Talk to key stakeholders within your company and gather the following materials and information: A high-resolution company logo and cover banner (no larger than 2 MB and 646 x 220 pixels) An approved written company description (up to 2,000 characters) A list of relevant keywords for the company specialty section General company information (industry type, organization size, URL, etc.) You're now ready to set up your company page. On LinkedIn, hover over the Interests tab and select Companies from the drop-down menu. On the right side of the page, look for the Create a Company Page section and click the yellow Create button. You're prompted to enter your name and company email address. LinkedIn will send you a verification email to ensure you're an official representative of your company. After you verify your email address, upload your company logo, cover banner image, company description and other details about your business. When you're finished, click the Publish button. Request Access to an Existing Page If your company already has a company page, you'll want to contact your page administrators to ask for LinkedIn account privileges. If you aren't sure who is responsible for your LinkedIn assets, make sure you've added your work email address to your personal profile. Then go to your company page and look for the Want to Help Manage This Page? section on the right. From here, you can contact page administrators and request moderator privileges. Set Up a Showcase Page Once you've set up your company page, you'll want to create other sections within it to market different company assets. LinkedIn allows you to do this with a feature called Showcase Pages. A showcase page is an extension of your company page and allows you to highlight other business lines, products or services, brands or even upcoming events that your company is hosting. Although showcase pages are directly connected to your company page, think of them as unique entities. They contain their own content, attract their own followers and have exclusive functionality, similar to how you'd share distinct assets on your website. To create a showcase page, go to your company profile, mouse over the Edit drop-down menu and select Create a Showcase Page. You'll then see options to get started. Creating a showcase page is similar to building a company page. However, you can provide more detailed information about a specific area of your business and bolster the visual aspects of your brand with the larger cover photo area. Rather than use your business name as the title, select a page name that both summarizes and sets the expectations for the content you'll publish on your showcase page. Keep in mind that the words you choose for your page name can influence how well your page is discovered through LinkedIn search. Distribute Content on Your Pages After creating a company page and affiliated showcase pages, you're ready to begin promoting and distributing content through these channels. Generally speaking, this is an opportunity to: Share your company branded content. Use white papers,

How to Create a Promoted Pin Campaign on a Budget

How to Create a Promoted Pin Campaign on a Budget

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to add Promoted Pins to your marketing mix? Are you wondering how to budget for a Promoted Pin campaign? You don't have to spend a lot of money on Promoted Pins for them to be effective. Because they have long-term visibility, they're a sound addition to your Pinterest marketing. In this article, I'll share how to build an effective, affordable promoted-pin campaign on Pinterest. #1: Start With Effective Pins While promoted pins are an excellent way to get the most visibility for your advertising dollar, it all starts with crafting a great social media image. Based on your business specialty or niche, create images that speak to your audience. Listen to this article: Also, use tall images to make sure your pins get noticed. They stand out better and command the attention of Pinterest users. Give yourself a selection of images and pin them ahead of time, so you have choices if you decide to test out various types of visual content using different small budgets. Once you decide what image you want to use, here's how to craft an ad for your promoted pin. Note: Promoted pins are still rolling out in the United States. If you don't have access yet, join the waitlist. #2: Choose Your Objective Go to your Pinterest profile and click the settings button next to Edit Profile to get to promoted pins in the drop-down menu. Once you click the Promote button, you'll see that Pinterest offers you two choices: Boost Engagement or Get Traffic. To get maximum benefit from your promoted pin ad campaign, choose Get Traffic to Your Website. Keep in mind this is a future strategy that does the promotion backwards. While you tell Pinterest that you want traffic to come to your website, what you really mean is that you want engagement for your pins. #3: Create the Campaign Give your campaign a name and then decide on what date or dates you want your promoted pin to be seen. Since the budget is low, you don't want to stretch it out too long. If it's your first time promoting a pin, use Saturday as your day. The more you use promoted pins, the more likely you'll find the best day for your brand. Keep fine-tuning this aspect of your campaigns. Now, decide how much money you would like to spend each day. I recommend spending $10 for one day or spread $10 over two days ($5 per day). #4: Select Keywords for Visibility The next step is to pick which pin you would like to promote. Then use keywords to tell Pinterest where you would like it to be seen. This is one of the most important things you can do to get your pin noticed. Keywords should include everything that anyone searching for what you have to offer would think of. So make sure you hit all of the right niche-specific terms for your pin. Depending on your niche, you can see an estimate of how many weekly impressions your pin may get. #5: Determine the Cost Per Click After you set your keywords, decide how much money you're willing to spend for each person who clicks on your pin to be directed to your website. This is where you may think you need a large budget to get good traffic. However, we're not after traffic right now. We want the engagement in the form of repins. Come up with a low cost-per-click (CPC) number. I usually offer 15 to 25 cents per click. A low CPC ensures you won't run out of money if people get click-happy. #6: Review Campaign Results Once your campaign is complete, review the results and wait for the resulting traffic. For example, I only spent $5 on the campaign below. It received a lot of engagement and impressions at the time, and I'm still getting traffic from it today. The point of this whole strategy is to turn small amounts of money into traffic generators for your website in the future. The 42 people who repinned this pin will show it to their followers. When their followers repin it, it opens up new reach for you on Pinterest.

6 Tips to Grow Your Pinterest Marketing Results

6 Tips to Grow Your Pinterest Marketing Results

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is your Pinterest account working for you? Want to take your Pinterest marketing to the next level? Tailoring your profile, boards and pins to appeal to your target audience will grow your followers and increase engagement. In this article you'll discover six ways to improve your Pinterest marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Optimize Your Page The best way to convince visitors to follow you is to optimize your Pinterest page. Here are some key areas to focus on. Profile For the business name, use your company's name or your name (if it's for your personal brand). Upload a relevant profile image, such as your company logo or an image with your company's name. You want to make it easy for people to recognize your brand page. If it's a personal page, add a photo of you smiling or laughing. Match your username with your business name. If the username is already taken or is too long, choose something similar to it or use an abbreviation. Write a convincing bio. In 160 characters, describe your business and let people know about the types of images and content you share on your Pinterest page. Add your town or city and other location details. This will help you attract local followers. Add your website and social media details. Don't forget to add your website and Twitter account. This information will be displayed right below your profile image. Add your Facebook account only if it's a personal page. (You don't have the option to add a Facebook business page yet.) Boards Make sure that your page has at least 10 boards. Place your most important or popular boards in the top row. That way they're displayed above the fold, and people will see them immediately when they visit your brand page. Optimize your boards by adding good board names, descriptions and cover images. Shake Up Learning's Pinterest boards have relevant cover images that contain the name of the board and their logo. For your cover image, you can use an existing pin from the board or create a unique image, pin it and choose it as the board's cover image. In the image you can include the name of the board and a call to action asking people to check out the board or follow it. Another option is to use a technique similar to pricing tables, where one option (usually the most popular) has a unique color so it stands out. To apply this tactic to your boards, use similar cover images for all of your boards but choose a unique image for your most popular board (or the one you want to drive followers to). Also create a few secret boards so you can save images to pin publicly later on. #2: Design Content to Support Goals Before you can determine what to pin, think about your goals. They might be to drive engagement and build an audience or to drive traffic. Most businesses choose a primary goal (such as driving traffic) and a secondary goal that complements the primary goal (like gaining more followers). Once you choose your goals, you can determine what to pin by reviewing your Pinterest analytics. To access this data, click the gear icon and choose Analytics from the drop-down menu. Your analytics page has three sections: Your Pinterest Profile, Your Audience and Activity from [Your Website]. In the Your Pinterest Profile section, find out how your pins are performing. Your pins are categorized depending on the impressions, clicks, repins and likes they've received. Depending on your goal, choose the category you want to view. If you want to drive engagement, for example, look for pins that have been repinned and liked most. If you want to drive more traffic, take a look at clicks. Scroll down the page to see your most popular boards. You can also adjust the date to see how your pins have performed during longer or shorter time periods. Next, visit the Your Audience section to look at your followers' demographics and interests. Browse the Demographics tab to look at the coun...

Why Things Catch On: The Science of Why People Share

Why Things Catch On: The Science of Why People Share

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to understand the science behind why people share? During this fascinating interview I explore these very concepts. To learn the reasons why people widely share content, I interview Jonah Berger for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Jonah Berger, author of The New York Times bestseller, Contagious: Why Things Catch On. He's also a marketing professor at the Wharton School and columnist for BusinessWeek. Jonah shares the reasons behind why people engage with word of mouth and why marketers should pay attention to this. You'll learn about the 6 principles that drive people to share. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Why People Share How Jonah become fascinated by the reasons people engage in word of mouth As a scientist, Jonah thought it would be interesting to study why things go viral or why certain stories circulate around the water cooler. He grew up studying math, chemistry, computer science and material science and thought it would be interesting to apply these hard science tools to social science problems. It was after reading the book The Tipping Point that he was inspired to think about these things and soon realized there hadn't been a lot of research done on the subject. Listen to the show to find out why he spent his academic career trying to study these things and bottle the phenomena. Why social media marketers should pay attention Jonah starts with how a lot can be done with social media and that there are tons of content out there already from many brands and organizations. Some content does better, but it's not about luck and it's not random. Jonah and his team spent a decade doing research to try to understand why people share word of mouth. With the 6 principles they discovered, you can make it more likely for your own posts to be contagious. People will share them and pass them onto others. You'll find out what the research entailed and how it led to the discovery of the psychological drivers behind sharing. Word of mouth can be over 10 times as effective as traditional advertising. People trust word of mouth more. It's also more targeted than traditional advertising. Plus it's cost-effective, if you can get it to work. It doesn't cost you anything to get people to talk about your brand. However, it requires you to understand why they are talking about some things rather than others. Following the rigorous academic research, Jonah decided to write the book Contagious to help people apply the insights, so their products and ideas could take off. Jonah explains how when the science was applied to a number of different companies to increase word of mouth in a given campaign, there was an increase of 20-50%. You can definitely guarantee more views and more shares when you follow the 6 principles. Listen to the show to find out what you need to do to help activate your existing customers and get them to spread that message to more potential new customers. The 6 principles in Contagious Jonah gives the high-level of each principle, which is called the STEPPS framework. These 6 principles drive people to talk and share. Social currency Triggers Emotion Public Practical value Stories These steps are based on psychology. It's about being able to understand the motivation or the drivers that cause us to pass things on. Some people wonder if you need all 6 principles for it to work.

6 Location-based Social Media Monitoring Tools

6 Location-based Social Media Monitoring Tools

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to reach local customers on social media? Are you monitoring the online conversations near your business? Geo-specific social media monitoring tools help businesses engage with customers who are close to their brick-and-mortar stores. In this article I'll share six location-based monitoring tools to use for local social media marketing. Why Use Location-Based Monitoring Tools? Geo-specific social media monitoring tools are different from the conventional keyword-based monitoring tools in many respects. For one thing, these tools offer a clear picture of what's happening at a particular location, which helps you reach out to local audiences. Plus, they allow you to connect better with your community by engaging with local social media influencers and leveraging local hashtags. Listen to this article: If you do social media for a company with multiple locations, here are some excellent tools to explore. #1: Search Real-time Feeds With Geofeedia Geofeedia allows you to search real-time social feeds by location to discover geolocation social media posts from anywhere worldwide. You also have the ability to monitor multiple locations to archive, curate and share your content. Simply draw a custom perimeter or enter an address on Geofeedia's digital map. It will then display all social content posted by users in that particular area. While the tool searches by location first, you also have the ability to filter your search by keywords, date, time, users and more, across various social media channels including Facebook, Instagram, Twitter, Flickr and YouTube. Discover what's trending in an area. Then leverage those trends by including the right keywords and hashtags into your social conversations. Geofeedia offers custom social media monitoring solutions for different industries. The pricing depends on the features you require, as well as the number of locations you want to monitor. #2: Engage and Target Customers With WeLink If you're looking for a cutting-edge social monitoring tool for geo-specificity, WeLink is an excellent option. It lets you engage your potential customers with targeted ads and instant offers on their preferred social media channels. This easy-to-use tool combines keyword-based monitoring with geo-specific listening to offer enterprise-grade location-based social monitoring solutions. The result is a hybrid solution, which uses cellular data mining and WiFi to help you discover and collect all social chatter within your selected area. Gather feeds from all popular social channels using this tool. Use WeLink across various verticals including event management, retail, malls, airlines, hospitality, sports teams and stadiums, schools, security and law enforcement, etc. WeLink offers custom pricing, depending on the features you require. #3: Listen to Trends With Sysomos Sysomos enables you to listen to what's trending locally and understand what your customers are talking about. Use this location-based tool to discover and dig into social content posted by local influencers. Sysomos will gather digital content from popular social media platforms like Facebook, Twitter, Google+ and LinkedIn, as well as posts on blogs and forums. It then collects and displays insightful actionable data in a single platform. Filter digital conversations by both keywords and demographic information. This makes Sysomos particularly beneficial if you're targeting customers within a specific age group or gender, for instance. Discover which topics, trends and brands particularly interest your target audience, and then create marketing campaigns based around these areas. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=N2DpsHXh5rY Sysomos differs from other location-based social media tools in many ways. For one thing, it collects both real-time and previously posted content on any topic across social networks. Plus, you have the ability to capture the conversations most r...

Facebook Marketing Plan: How to Grow Your Business With Facebook

Facebook Marketing Plan: How to Grow Your Business With Facebook

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have a Facebook marketing plan? Are you wondering how to grow your business with Facebook? To learn about the important elements of a Facebook marketing plan, I interview Amy Porterfield for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Amy Porterfield, co-author of Facebook Marketing All-in-One for Dummies and host of the Online Marketing Made Easy podcast. She was also the very first Facebook community manager we ever had for Social Media Examiner. Amy shares what your Facebook marketing plan needs to succeed. You'll learn why you should create a Facebook business page and the best engagement techniques to grow your audience. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Marketing Plan The benefits of a Facebook business page  Amy states that although a lot of people get good engagement on their personal Facebook profile, she strongly recommends that you set up a Facebook business page. It's only on rare occasions that she advises to stick with your personal profile. If you have a physical or online product, program or service, a Facebook business page can be extremely beneficial. This type of page gives you permission to talk about your business on a regular basis. Once you have the foundation in place and become that go-to authority in your niche, you can talk about your business freely. It's the main reason why you need to have a business page, as well as a personal profile. You'll hear about another benefit when it comes to Facebook ads. Listen to the show to discover the reason why Amy has taken all communication over to her business page but still keeps her personal profile.   Start with a Facebook marketing plan Amy teaches how to put a Facebook marketing plan together in three phases. Attraction Promotion Sales Listen to the show to learn more about these three phases. 1. Attraction First of all, you need to build a Facebook community. It's important to grow a solid fan base so you can generate some great engagement with people. You become the go-to source in your community. In the attraction phase, you need to find different ways to grow your fan base. You need to know your audience. You'll hear why Amy advises creating a persona of your typical Facebook fan. One of the easiest ways to get the word out about your page is to have a Facebook Like button on your website. Once someone clicks the Like button to become a fan, they will remain on your website. You'll get quality fans with the Like button, because these people are already visiting your site. You want them to become Facebook fans, so you can stay top of mind when they're on Facebook. Listen to the show to hear what happened when Amy advised Michael Hyatt to install the Like button on his website. How to use your website or blog to grow a following Amy explains that it doesn't matter if you have a massive email subscriber list, these are people who have taken the time to give you their name and email address. You'll learn about techniques you can use to encourage people to become fans. If you want to attract new people, then Graph Search is very valuable. Amy says it's a hidden treasure that not many people use. You'll hear some great examples of search terms that will help you gain valuable information about your audience. When it comes to promotion, you need to turn your fans into leads. You definitely want to check out this previous podcast with Amy that goes into...

6 Productivity Tools for Twitter

6 Productivity Tools for Twitter

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you struggling to keep up with your Twitter activities? Looking for a way to streamline your Twitter marketing? The right productivity tools will help you manage your Twitter marketing more effectively and free up your time for other tasks. In this article you'll discover six tools and techniques that will boost your productivity on Twitter. Listen to this article: #1: Manage Twitter Messages With AgoraPulse Keeping on top of your Twitter mentions and messages can take a huge amount of time each day. According to research from Brandwatch, retail brands receive an average of 821 mentions per day on Twitter, but only manage to respond to 40 of them. You can do better than that by using a social media management tool like AgoraPulse. It allows you to display your mentions, direct messages, and monitoring alerts in a social inbox so you can respond as you would with an email. When you review or reply to messages, they're archived, which makes it easy to see which messages you've dealt with. The social inbox for your Twitter account is split into an Inbox tab for your incoming mentions and messages and a Monitoring tab for retweets and search queries. Whenever you reply to or review a message, it's highlighted and archived. This feature is particularly useful to archive low-value or spammy direct messages. Have you ever received one of those automated “thank you for following me” direct messages or something similar? With the Direct Messages filter, you can quickly select all direct messages that don't need a reply and review them in one go, which is a huge time-saver. Once you review or reply to all of your mentions, you'll get that lovely inbox zero feeling. Go to the Monitoring tab to view all of your retweets and searches. This tab is for less urgent messages, while the Inbox focuses on the most actionable messages. Select the Type filter to show only your recent searches or retweets. You can then reply to or like them on an individual basis, or via a bulk review if no action needs to be taken. If you work with a team or have a virtual assistant, you can assign individual messages to team members. To do so, view the message, click the Assign button, and select the relevant team member. You can easily see which messages have been assigned to which team members. If you have a social media team, using a social media management tool is important from a security standpoint. With AgoraPulse, you'll get full control over your team members and avoid having to share your Twitter password. Set aside two or three fixed times every day to attend to your Twitter engagement. Make sure you cap the time for these sessions (for example 10-15 minutes) so you can spend the rest of your day focusing on other areas of your business. AgoraPulse also integrates with Facebook and Instagram and offers reports and publishing features. #2: Automate Blog Content Shares With missinglettr When you post an article to your blog, how many times do you share it on Twitter? It's unusual for people to send just one tweet out when they publish blog content. If you want to maximize the engagement potential for your blog posts, use a tool like missinglettr to set up a drip marketing campaign for them. It allows you to publicize each individual article regularly via Twitter over the course of a year. To get started, set up your free account and connect your blog's RSS feed. Once you do that, missinglettr will start checking for new blog posts. When it detects a new article, it analyzes the content and creates a Twitter marketing campaign for that article for the year. The campaign consists of a series of tweets linking to the article and can include summaries, quotes, images, and a call to action. missinglettr will notify you when the campaign is ready so you can review it. Click the Review link to review the campaign schedule for the article.

What Is SEO / Search Engine Optimization?

What Is SEO / Search Engine Optimization?


Search Engine Land

Get started learning all about SEO from the industry's most trusted source, Search Engine Land. Review basics of search engine optimization, ranking factors & more.

3 Ways to Advertise on Twitter

3 Ways to Advertise on Twitter

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you thinking about running Twitter ads? Wondering what your options are? Twitter advertising isn't difficult to set up, and for a very small amount of money it can provide an additional stream of traffic, customers and revenue. In this article, you'll discover three cost-effective ways to advertise on Twitter. Determine Your Campaign Budget To control the cost of your campaign and minimize your risk, it's important to set a total and daily budget. This means you'll have to decide the value of a new follower, lead or click-through to your website. Listen to this article: When choosing the amount, you should pay less than the result is worth to you. Otherwise you'll lose money. Remember, though, to take into account the lifetime value of a new customer or lead, not just the initial value of that first action. When you're satisfied with the numbers, set aside the total amount of money you're prepared to spend; this is your total budget. Divide your total budget by the number of days you're going to run your campaign (say three or four days); this is your daily maximum budget. Adjust these figures as necessary, depending on your comfort level and the metrics that apply to your business. Remember, your first attempts at Twitter advertising should be viewed as an experiment. It's an investment in figuring out the winning formula for your business. When you have your budget figures ready, it's time to set up advertising for the three most effective objectives: increasing followers, traffic and leads. #1: Attract New Followers Follower campaign ads are designed to increase visibility and grow your followers. They appear as Promoted Tweets in the person's timeline, and as Promoted Accounts in the Who to Follow boxes on the Home, Profile, and Search results pages. To create a Promoted Account campaign, go to Twitter Ads. If this is your first time in Twitter Ads, you'll be prompted to enter your country, time zone and payment details. Next, choose Followers from the Select a Campaign Objective menu, and give your new campaign a name. Set the campaign dates and select the audience you want to target with your campaign. Next, enter the location, gender and language of the people you want to reach and the devices you want your ads to appear on. You can further target your audience by the people they follow, their interests, behaviors and demographics, the events they're interested in and even the pets they have. There's a wealth of options for targeting the audience for your ads, but you don't want to choose too many in one go. When you add more than one audience feature, your ads will be shown to people who fit any of the criteria, rather than all of them, thus broadening your audience instead of narrowing it. The more tightly targeted your audience is, the easier it is to see which ads are performing and which are not. If there's a number of things you want to target, it's better to split them into separate campaigns so you can measure the results more effectively. A sensible starting point for your first campaign might be simply to target people who follow a competitor, or people who have a particular interest that you can select from the list. You can also upload your own lists of people to target by their email address or Twitter ID, or retarget people who visited your website. Once you've defined your audience, choose an amount you're comfortable with to set your daily maximum budget and a total budget for the campaign. Click on Show Advanced Options to see your pricing options. I recommend you set either a target bid, or a maximum bid, depending on how much a new follower is worth to you. Next, create some tweets that will show in mobile and web timelines. In your tweets, include the words "Follow us" and tell people why they should follow you. I recommend that you don't include an image or any links,

5 Facebook Ads Changes: What Marketers Need to Know

5 Facebook Ads Changes: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you curious about the latest Facebook ad changes? Wondering how to take your Facebook ads to the next level? Facebook has gone all in to provide businesses with tools and targeting options to connect with customers and prospects in the moments that matter. In this article I'll share the five biggest things to happen with Facebook ads. Listen to this article: #1: Call Now Button Connects You to Mobile Users Facebook launched a local awareness initiative in 2014 that gave advertisers the option to add a Get Directions call-to-action button to their ads. This year Facebook took it up a notch with the Call Now button. This is an important lead generation tool for businesses of all kinds, but especially local businesses. It basically takes an entire stage right out of the funnel. Rather than send people to your website or Facebook page hoping they'll contact you, the Call Now button allows you to let people call you directly from your ad. Smart targeting on Facebook can get you in front of motivated consumers on mobile. Adding the Call Now button gives people a direct link to convert from the ad, no extra steps required. #2: Dynamic Product Ads Sync With Sales Catalogs As powerful as Google Shopping ads are, it only made sense that Facebook would enter this arena, too. Though they serve a similar purpose, Facebook’s product ads do not work in the same way as Google's product listing ads. Facebook's product ads are actually more like Google's dynamic remarketing display ads. They use Facebook's targeting parameters, or the consumer's history on your site or in your app to serve ads. The ads are template-based, meaning you don't have to spend time on new creative for each ad. The templates pull images, product names, pricing and other attributes from your catalog, based on the keywords you've provided. This catalog integration also means your ads will stop running once your product is out of stock. Best of all, these templates work for news feed and sidebar ads across all displays, so you don't need separate ads for desktop, tablet and mobile. #3: Carousel Ads Come to Mobile Facebook launched carousel ads last year, but this summer they extended the option to mobile. This format has a lot of interesting possibilities, thanks to its ability to display multiple images with different links within one ad unit. This mobile carousel ad from Tinker Crate spotlights different features and views of their product. This spring, Neiman Marcus used carousel ads to showcase shoe and handbag collections and reported three times more conversions and 85% higher click-through rates, compared to standard ad units. The average lift in conversion across early testers was 12%. Given the natural inclination to swipe sideways on mobile, carousel ads are an intuitive, seamless ad format for mobile users that gives you a creative, engaging way to tell stories. #4: Updated Ad Tools Boost Productivity A June overhaul gave Facebook Ads Manager and Power Editor facelifts, as well as added functionality. On the Power Editor side, this release offers a more logical interface, but also enhances bulk editing and advanced search capabilities. Ads Manager has a more streamlined feel, with performance metrics featured more prominently. Facebook said the update means "advertisers can quickly reference how their ads are performing in the same environment where they create and edit them." Essentially, you now create your ads and manage them in one place. What's particularly awesome about this update is that you can bulk-edit the targeting and budgets for several ads at once and use the Create Similar option to duplicate ads and campaigns. If you aren't seeing these new features yet, don't worry. They're rolling out globally in the coming months. #5: Ads Manager App Brings Campaign Management to Mobile Small- and medium-sized advertisers rejoiced earlier this year when Facebook released...

Podcasting for Business: Why Marketers Are Betting on Podcasts

Podcasting for Business: Why Marketers Are Betting on Podcasts

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Have you considered starting a podcast? Would you like to discover how to use a podcast to grow your business? To explore why marketers are placing big bets on podcasting, I interview Jay Baer and Joe Pulizzi. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Jay Baer and Joe Pulizzi. Jay is the host of the Social Pros podcast and Jay Today. He's also the man behind MarketingPodcasts.com. His company is Convince & Convert. Joe podcasts at This Old Marketing and Content Inc. He's the founder of the Content Marketing Institute and the man behind the Content Marketing World conference. Jay, Joe and I explore how podcasting has evolved since we all started. You'll discover how podcasting can help your business, how to work with sponsors and more. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Podcasting for Business Why Joe and Jay started podcasts Joe, who has been podcasting since November 2013, explains how encouragement and research led him to start a podcast. His company did a gap analysis to find out the biggest difference in tactics between the most and least effective marketing professionals. Two tactics—books and podcasts—are the factors that made the difference. He noticed the audio version of his book Epic Content Marketing really took off, so he figured there must be something to audio. Joe shares how his and Robert Rose's podcast evolved. Joe recalls how once after their weekly phone call about what was going on in content marketing, he said, "We should have recorded that." Robert asked, "Why don't we?" They launched This Old Marketing the following week. Jay started podcasting in January 2012, and just finished the third season of his Social Pros podcast, which totals about 150 episodes. Jay explains that Tristin Handy, who was director of marketing at Argyle Social at the time, said, "Did you ever think about doing a podcast? We should do a podcast." And Jay thought, "No and okay." They got together and decided to create a show that paid attention to the unsung heroes of social media. Jay says it's grown far beyond the expectations he had for it at the beginning. Listen to the show to discover which podcasts I listened to when I started the Social Media Marketing podcast. How podcasting helps their businesses When Joe looked at the behaviors of those who attend Content Marketing World, he realized his core customers engage in at least three different content vehicles, such as the newsletter, magazine and/or webinars. It's the third thing that's the tipping point, so he figured the audio content could be what gets people to the event. Jay says the Social Pros podcast allows them to spotlight their corporate clients, as well as interview potential future clients. Podcasting has become a strong lead-generation business strategy. It's also helped Jay from a personal branding and awareness perspective, because it positions him (and his company) as a leader in the field. Listen to the show to hear how podcasting builds customer loyalty. Their new ventures Joe's releasing a new book called Content Inc., which will be out in time for Content Marketing World in September. Rather than just doing a book, he's creating a platform. "If it's important enough to be a book, it's important enough to be a bigger media property," Joe explains. "You can launch an entire platform off of a podcast." The Content Inc. podcasts are 7-10 minutes long, and reuse and repurpose his other content. Jay recently launched Jay Today,

BeSearched.com’s helpful checklist, Getting to page one!

by Jack Hamilton @ Search Engine Optimization Specialists affordable search engine optimization effective search engine optimization search engine optimization

BeSearched.com’s helpful checklist, Getting to page one! Hello everybody the purpose of this page is to give all of you some free and informative and hopefully helpful information about getting your Website ranked on search engines. The process I would like to introduce today is called SEO better known as search engine optimization. Is your […]

Does Your Law Firm Have Online Reviews?

by Attorneys Online, Inc. @ Attorneys Online, Inc.

If your law firm is not concentrating on getting positive online reviews on Google+, Facebook and Yelp, your website and business will suffer. Whether you like it or not, most people looking for an attorney online will read reviews before choosing what law firm to call. A number of studies show that consumers trust online reviews as much as personal recommendations, and most consumers read online reviews before purchasing a product. Further, in addition to the consumers themselves, Google uses online reviews when its algorithms are calculating which law firm websites will be in the top spots for business listings and organic listings. This means that a lack of reviews will hurt your search engine optimization, your organic placement and ultimately, your bottom line. How Do Law Firms Get Clients to Write Positive Reviews? It’s hard to ask a client to write a review—we get it. However, when you have...
Read More »

The post Does Your Law Firm Have Online Reviews? appeared first on Attorneys Online, Inc..

10 Ways to Rank Higher in Search Engine Rankings

10 Ways to Rank Higher in Search Engine Rankings


The Balance

Top 10 factors that affect your website's search results ranking. Easy to understand explanations and practical application tips.

How to Use Pinterest to Connect With a Local Audience

How to Use Pinterest to Connect With a Local Audience

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use Pinterest to build relationships with your audience? Do you want to strengthen ties with your local community? Including a strong geographic focus in your Pinterest marketing can help you create more visibility with people who live or are interested in your locale. In this article you'll discover how to use Pinterest to connect with a local audience. Listen to this article: #1: Add Geographic Information to Your Profile Along with your keyword-rich explanation of what your business does and what you pin, be sure to mention what areas you serve or where your business is located. This helps you show up in Pinterest search results for your area, and lets people know if you're close enough for them to visit or engage your services. If your local business profile is missing this crucial bit of information, click the Edit Profile button to go to your profile. Make sure to enter your location and add more geographic cues in the About You section (think "Serving the Lakes Region of Southern North Carolina") and consider whether your followers might appreciate the extra hint. This is especially helpful if you're a franchisee. Don't limit yourself too much, though. Granite Ridge Estate, a wedding barn, lists their small-town location of Norway, Maine, but also uses "New England" so people searching a broader area have a good chance of discovering them. Adding geographic information may seem like an obvious step, but you'd be surprised how many local businesses leave it out. Suppose you're a photographer looking to attract new business. How will people know if you're close enough to hire if you don't tell them where you are and how far you'll travel? Make it easy for people to find you and buy from you. #2: Optimize Your Boards and Pins for Local Searches Adding your location to the descriptions of individual pins can help people find you when they do a search on Pinterest or Google. That's right, pins (as well as boards and profiles) can be indexed by Google. Include your town or state name in a board or two, as well as any applicable pins. If you serve several areas or your area is known by several names, have a board for any location that people might search for. It's perfectly fine to have more than one board with similar pins. Here's a Granite Ridge Estate pin that pops up in a Google Search for "Maine wedding venue Norway." The exact number of searches performed annually on Pinterest is unclear, but with 100 million users, you can be sure it's significant. VentureBeat reports that the number of Pinterest searches has been increasing by about 81% per year, so it's in your best interest to optimize for search. If you search for "barn wedding new England" on Pinterest, you'll see one of Granite Ridge Estate's boards. The combination of the board title, description, and pins on the board helped the business show up for this search. How can you use this tactic for your business? Wherever appropriate, add your location to your boards, board descriptions, and pin descriptions. If you want people from out of town to find you, think about how people would look for your area. They may not search for Norway, Maine (it's tiny), but they might search for "Southern Maine," "New England," "Maine," or "Southern New England." Using keywords strategically can help ensure your business shows up in location-centered searches. Go through your account and make sure you've used a location wherever it makes sense. For example, if you're a photographer and you pin your work, add the location to the photos in each shoot. Did you take those amazing bridal photos at Scarborough Beach, Maine? Tell people that! #3: Repin and Engage With Fellow Local Businesses Pinterest is more of a search and discovery platform than a true social network. However, there are social elements that allow you to stand out from the crowd of solitary shoppers and pin collectors.

Google AMP: What Bloggers Need to Know

Google AMP: What Bloggers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Have you heard of Google AMP? Want to know how it will impact your blog? To discover more about Google AMP and the future of blogging, I interview Leslie Samuel. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Leslie Samuel, who runs BecomeABlogger.com, where he teaches people how to blog with purpose. He's also host of the Learning With Leslie podcast and head of training for Social Media Examiner's Social Media Marketing Society. Leslie will explore Google's Accelerated Mobile Pages (AMP) project and what it means for bloggers. You'll discover how to install Google AMP and related plugins on your WordPress blog. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Google AMP What is Google AMP Google AMP stands for Accelerated Mobile Pages, and is a collaboration with a number of tech companies. Its goal is to improve the performance of websites on mobile devices, which in turn improves user experience. Kissmetrics did a study, which found that 40% of mobile users leave a page if it doesn't load in three seconds. When that happens, these users don't see the publisher's ads, products, services, or events. AMP pages load 10 times faster and use 10 times less data. Plus, when people view a website on a mobile device, pop ups (such as ads and opt-in boxes) take up the entire page. There's such a small amount of real estate on a smartphone, the pop-ups really inhibit the user experience. Google has already started placing Google AMP pages above non-Google AMP pages to mobile users in search. If you do a search for any popular topic, like politics, on your smartphone, only sites that have accelerated mobile pages enabled will show up in the top stories section. This is just the beginning. In the future AMP will be even more wide-spread. Listen to the show to learn how the Facebook Instant Articles feature is similar to Google AMP. Pros and cons of AMP In addition to the benefit of preferential treatment in search, AMP's faster load times should decrease website abandonment and increase content consumption. Before discussing the cons, Leslie noted one thing in terms of how AMP is set up. When someone clicks on an AMP enabled article on their mobile device, "/amp" is added to the URL, essentially creating a second link. (For example, a Social Media Examiner article with AMP would have the URL socialmediaexaminer.com/ARTICLE-TITLE/amp.) There are now two links: the original link from the desktop article and the second from mobile (with /amp at the end), which is what Google will show above the initial version. The AMP project is able to speed up websites because it strips away a lot of the unique elements, such as style sheets and JavaScript, that make a website look and function in a specific way. AMP sites have specific standard dimensions, and elements such as sidebars, headers and comments are gone. However, there is still a lot you can do with design, Leslie explains. For instance, you can change fonts and colors, add a logo, and more. It just will not be as extensive as what you have on your website. Articles with AMP show a single column that holds both text and images, so people won't see anything you promote in the masthead and sidebar on your regular, desktop website. Leslie says while the AP version of some sites may not be as advanced as the desktop experience, they still look pretty nice. For example, The Washington Post has a simple top with their logo. Then, when you scroll down, you see other posts, social media links, and so on.

How to Manage a Podcast: Tools and a Checklist for Marketers

How to Manage a Podcast: Tools and a Checklist for Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you interested in starting a podcast? Want tips to manage and promote your podcast effectively? Creating a successful podcast doesn't have to be a time-consuming process. Today, tools can help streamline activities such as finding guests, publishing audio, and promoting episodes. In this article you'll discover how to manage your podcast from start to finish. Listen to this article: Why a Podcast? The key to generating a goldmine of compelling and engaging content is to leverage the expertise of others and interview them on your own podcast. A podcast is a win-win platform for your content strategy, because it provides an opportunity for both you and your guest to share your knowledge, feature your respective companies, and build a quality relationship with listeners. Inviting people with knowledge and experience in your industry to share their insights frees you from relying solely on your own knowledge. It also allows you to build a collection of quality content from a network of experts. Here's how to get started with your own podcast. #1: Find Potential Guests The first step is finding potential guests for your podcast. Are you groaning at the thought? Never fear, use a tool like LeadFuze to do the work for you. It's traditionally used by sales teams for B2B lead generation, but it also works well for identifying podcast guests. LeadFuze finds prospective guests by searching LinkedIn for categories such as industry, title, role, and location. It then aggregates all of the prospects' contact information, social media accounts, and domains into a list for you. By automating the prospecting process, LeadFuze saves you the hours of research typically needed to find good guests. #2: Send Out Email Invites Once you have the names and email addresses for guests you want to feature on your show, it's time to send out cold emails. In these emails you make your initial request asking the recipient to be a guest on your podcast. Send the Initial Email There are a number of mass emailing tools out there (such as MailChimp, Infusionsoft, and AWeber), but that's not what you need at this stage in the game. You'll want to send a more personal request with a tool like QuickMail.io. QuickMail.io is unique because it lets you automatically send one-to-one emails at scale through your Gmail account. It sends emails so that they arrive in the recipient's inbox as a personal email. This increases the chances of your emails being opened and not being filtered into a spam folder. QuickMail.io also lets you set up unlimited follow-up emails, which will automatically shut off once the recipient responds. Follow Up With Interested Guests Use FollowUpThen to stay in touch with prospective guests who responded to your initial emails, but haven't yet booked a day/time for your podcast interview. With this tool, you can add a simple email address to the BCC field on any email to remind you to follow up at a later date. You include your desired time frame within the FollowUpThen email address, and the email will then boomerang back into your inbox at that date and time. Once it's back to your inbox, it's up to you to decide if you need to follow up again. #3: Plan the Podcast Once you've lined up guests for your podcast, the next step is to choose a topic and set up a time for the interview. The secret to never running out of creative and compelling content ideas is to allow your guests to choose the topic for their episode. When guests ask you about the topic, say something like this: "We encourage guests to choose the topic for their episode based on their background and experience. Is there a certain topic you'd like to discuss on the show?" Next you need to work out a time for your interview. Unfortunately, we've all experienced the email scheduling dance: "Hi, are you free on Wednesday at 1pm?" "I can't do Wednesday. How does Thursday between 2 and 5pm?"

SearchCap: Google EU appeal, goodbye fetch as Google for apps & award list

by Barry Schwartz @ SearchCap: Daily Search Engine News Recap

Below is what happened in search today, as reported on and from other places across the web.

The post SearchCap: Google EU appeal, goodbye fetch as Google for apps & award list appeared first on Search Engine Land.

How to Develop a Social Media Reporting System

How to Develop a Social Media Reporting System

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you responsible for reporting your social media results? Do you need to develop a reporting system? Knowing who you report to and what metrics they need will help you streamline the process and ensure you're delivering reports on time. In this article you'll discover how to develop a social media reporting system for your business. Listen to this article: #1: Identify Stakeholders and Goals The first step is to do a quick audit of your current reporting process and find out which stakeholders receive your reports. If you know whom you're reporting to and why, you can ensure your reports will be useful to everyone involved. Find out who receives the social media data in your organization. You may send reports to one person, but that person may then forward them on to others. Also, different teams have different needs. For example, a PR team may have different expectations than a community management team. Next, discover what actions your reports support so you don't waste time reporting on metrics no one uses. Talk to the people you report to, find out their needs (and wants) and see what you can learn about the current state of your social media reporting. You'll likely find some overlapping goals and be able to identify areas of commonality. If you're the sole owner and consumer of social media reporting in your company, identify what you need to know about your performance and what you'll do with this information. Try to distill it to a few clear goals, which will make everything easier in later steps. #2: Decide What Metrics to Track When deciding what to include in your reports, find metrics you can use in multiple situations and have some business benefit for your stakeholders. Just because you can report on something doesn't mean you should. And the more metrics you include in your reports now, the more metrics you'll have to keep supporting in the future. Here's an overview of the metrics that really matter: Reach or exposure: Measure the size of your potential audience. Volume: Track the conversation size and number of brand mentions. Engagement: Analyze the quantity and type of engagement your accounts and posts get. Audience: Learn who participates in a conversation, along with the most active users and influencers. Content: Monitor your top-performing (and worst-performing) posts. The metrics you use will depend on your needs and the social networks you're measuring, but these core concepts are a great start. In addition to the general metrics above, you'll probably have a few specific needs or requests from stakeholders you need to support. That's great, because the more relevant and targeted your reports, the more useful they'll be for your business. However, avoid creating custom metrics or anything you'll need to calculate manually, unless they're really important. You'll likely regret this later. It can take a long time to handcraft special calculations, especially if you're not entirely sure how you did it the last time. Above all, be consistent. Make sure you're reporting the same metrics in the same way each time. Add in percentage changes and other benchmarks to make it easy for your audience to interpret the results. #3: Choose the Right Tools There are many social media measurement and analytics tools you can choose from. However, only a few tools will help you get the precise information you need. Keep in mind that no tool is going to be exactly what you're looking for. There are so many ways to analyze social media that every tool has a different perspective. Plus, social data is far from perfect and the kind of information that you can pull from a particular social media channel will vary depending on the channel. However, there is a product out there for you. Ask these questions when you're researching a new tool: Where does it get its social data? What kind of relationship does it have with the social ne...

The Dental SEO Expert Advice Dentists Need

by GrowMap @ SEO Chat

When people search for a product on their mobile phones, 18% of those searches result in a sale somewhere on that very day. Fifty percent of people who use their smartphones for a local search will visit a store that day. The same is true of 34% of users who search locally on their tablets […]

The post The Dental SEO Expert Advice Dentists Need appeared first on SEO Chat.

Website Optimization Service

by link2city.com @ link2city

Is your website performing at its best? How quickly does the page load? Is it sluggish? Your website’s performance is one of the key factors in ensuring that the visitors are having a good experience with your site. Whether you run a high traffic WordPress installation, a small blog, or a Magento Storefront you should

The post Website Optimization Service appeared first on link2city.

Google+ Marketing: Why Marketers Should Not Overlook Google+

Google+ Marketing: Why Marketers Should Not Overlook Google+

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Have you given up on Google+? Are you wondering whether it is worth managing yet another social network? To address some of the benefits and misconceptions of Google+ marketing, I interview Jesse Stay for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Jesse Stay, author of several books including Google+ for Dummies and Google+ Marketing for Dummies. Jesse shares insights into Google's strategy and what this means for your business. You'll learn what's critical for a successful approach to your Google+ marketing and why Google+ may be essential to your business even if you don't think so now. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Google+ for Marketers Here are some interesting Google+ stats: 250 million Google+ accounts, 150+ million active users, 50% sign on daily (Google I/O 2012 conference) 69.4% male (Google+ Social Statistics) Most Google+ users are mobile, not desktop users (The Google+ Developers Blog) Jesse explains why you cannot compare Google+ to Facebook and why he thinks Google+ is more comparable to Twitter. You'll learn why Google+ is more than a destination site. Find out how the Google+ platform is intended to be a layer on top of all other Google products and how Google+ is becoming integrated into the entire Google experience. Listen to the show to find out why Google+ is the glue that connects all Google products together socially. How Google+ can help you Jesse explains why you first need to look at your Googlestrategy to figure out how your business can use Google+ best.  For example, your Google+ marketing can help you to: Improve your search results in Google Bring social connections into your YouTube videos Add a CRM experience into Gmail and Google Calendar Build connections through Google Hangouts When you establish a presence on Google+, build relationships there and get endorsements on the content that you share through Google+, you increase your Google search ranking. Listen to the show to learn how your Google+ marketing improves your Google strategy. The future of Google+  Jesse talks about how Google has proven rumors wrong. Google+ recently released new capabilities for notifications on the Google+ platform. Plus Google+ also has a much stronger integration into Google Apps and you're now able to restrict conversations from sharing outside of the domain. This gives Google+ more privacy and makes it more friendly for business use. Google+ is continuing to grow and add more features. Jesse shares how Google+ can help you gain an edge in Google search engine results. He explains why there is no easier way to get better ranking in search at the moment than by building a Google+ presence. Learn how to give authority to the content that Google is indexing within Google  search results. Listen to the show to find out more about the future of Google+ and what this means to you and your business. Google+ marketing tools  At this time, most third-party social media tools do not integrate with the Google+ API. This can make it challenging for busy marketers to add yet another social media network to their marketing mix. Jesse says to have patience and anticipates they will be releasing APIs at some time. You'll hear about Webmaster Tools where you can find, for example, statistics to help you track how your content is affected within search results as a result of people liking it on Google+.

Facebook Live: What Marketers Need to Know

Facebook Live: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Have you heard of Facebook Live video? Do you want to use Facebook Live for business? Facebook Live lets you connect with your fans, friends and followers by sharing real-time video of what you’re seeing and doing. In this article you'll discover how to broadcast with Facebook Live and use Live video in your marketing. What Is Facebook Live? Facebook has steadily been releasing Live over the last several months. It came out in August 2015 for verified public figures through the iOS Mentions app. Early in December, Live became available to select people on their personal profiles and then to all verified Facebook pages later in the month. Listen to this article: Facebook originally introduced Live to only an elite group of users for two primary reasons: to control the demand on the bandwidth and to hopefully set a higher standard for the videos streamed so there's less "noise" in the news feed. Facebook is controlling the reach of Live broadcasts through the news feed ranking algorithm, as with all organic posts. In the coming months Live will roll out to more Facebook profiles and pages, and will become available on Android. Live is currently available to some iPhone users only. Even if you don't yet have access, you can start planning your Facebook Live strategy or use some of these tactics on the numerous other live-streaming services such as Blab, Google+ Hangouts, Periscope and Meerkat. Regardless of whether you have or plan to use live streaming, you can still upload videos regularly to Facebook. #1: Broadcast With Facebook Live You can broadcast Facebook Live through your profile or through the Mentions app. To broadcast through your profile, tap to update your status and click the Live icon. Next, write a quick description in the status update (this is your title). The description is what will go out in the news feed and in notifications. Just like with your other personal status updates, you may also want to choose the audience before going live. Select friends only, a specific friends list or public. Then tap Go Live. You can point the camera at yourself or outward to capture your surroundings. During the broadcast, you'll see the number of live viewers, which friends are tuning in and comments in real time. While people are watching you, invite those viewers to tap the Subscribe button. This way, they'll get notified the next time you're live. After you end your live broadcast, it will be saved on your timeline like any other video you upload. If you don't already have the Follower option enabled on your personal profile, I recommend enabling it. Doing so will allow you to reach a much wider audience, as anyone on Facebook can choose to follow your public updates. To enable the Follow feature, go to your settings and click Followers in the left column. Then, next to Who Can Follow Me, select Everybody. Now, any of your friends or followers can subscribe and see when you go live. Keep in mind, if your previous post was public and you wish to share your next post with friends only, you'll need to select that option. Note: To broadcast through the Mentions app, the process is similar. Open the app, tap the Post icon and then tap Live Video. The only difference is you don't select an audience, since everything you post is public on a business page. #2: Improve Your Video Facebook recommends several best practices for Facebook Live. In addition, here are several of my own recommendations: Have a focus for your broadcast. Know what you plan to talk about ahead of time so you don't have a rambling discussion about nothing. Knowing what you plan to talk about and doing it well will do wonders for your reputation. Create a compelling title. It goes without saying that you should relate the title to the focus of your broadcast. When people get a notification that you're live, the title is the only thing they see when deciding whether they...

Snapchat Gains Momentum: New Research

Snapchat Gains Momentum: New Research

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you adding Snapchat to your social media marketing? Wondering what Snapchat's audience responds to? In this article you'll discover recent insights on Snapchat and how marketers can use the platform to reach targeted audiences with ads and other content. Listen to this article: #1: Snapchat Nears Facebook Levels for Daily Video Views In January 2016, Bloomberg News reported that Snapchat now delivers more than 7 billion videos to users each day. The news is amazing for two reasons. First, previously reported numbers of Snapchat daily video views in September 2015 was 4 billion. A leap of nearly 50% in just three or four months is certainly newsworthy. Second, Facebook reported 8 billion video views daily in October 2015. Considering that at 1.55 billion users, Facebook's audience outstrips Snapchat's by 15 times, it's clear video is Snapchat's primary content form. Key Takeaway: Snapchat's 7 billion daily video views figure is important because mobile video is rapidly gaining favor with advertisers. According to eMarketer, companies spent $7.46 billion on digital video ads in the U.S. in 2015, an increase of 42% from the year before. eMarketer also relates that in the United States, mobile video ad spend is growing faster than all other digital advertising tactics. Marketers with a video strategy in place can easily adapt their tactics to reach Snapchat's video-friendly demographic. #2: Vertical Video Rising in Popularity When Snapchat emerged on the scene, some industry pundits criticized its vertical-only display as too limiting and unfamiliar for those used to more horizontal television and movie screens. Now, after five years in business, Snapchat reviewed its own internal data to find that users are more likely to watch a vertical video than a horizontal video until the end. In some instances, the vertical video had a completion rate nine times higher than its horizontal counterpart. Minutes spent on vertical screens have increasingly been edging out those spent on horizontal screens since 2011. Key Takeaway: Of course the consumer who views a mobile video until the end is more likely to respond to the call to action. Marketers will appreciate this finding because they typically put their strongest call to action at the end. It's also worth mentioning that if Snapchat's findings are correct, it's possible that although video consumers are accustomed to videos being horizontal, they're more accustomed to their phones being vertical and staying that way should a text or call come in. Marketers should consider testing response to their own video to see which orientation their followers prefer. #3: Snapchat Users Are Engaged Every day, between 300 and 350 million photos are uploaded to Facebook. With an audience of 1.59 billion and 1.04 billion monthly active users, the portion of the audience participating by uploading photos is less than 35%. In comparison, 65% of Snapchat users upload their own photos daily. They're engaged with the platform, viewing it as an extension of their own personal brand rather than just a place to passively receive information. (Read how Facebook and Twitter users now regard those channels as news outlets.) One of Snapchat's primary sales points is frequency of use. Its 100 million users visit the platform daily. Facebook started measuring their monthly active users (MAU), implying that the number of people going to the channel even once every 30 days constituted success. Snapchat founder Evan Spiegel scoffs at that metric, stating the time frame is far too long and not much to boast about. The numbers his company measures focus on daily activity. Key Takeaway: Engagement is such a sought-after metric because marketers know that those who are interacting with a company are far more likely to share and talk up its posts, offers and products. The engaged consumer uses the company to build a portion of his or her identity....

7 Ways to Use Video to Drive Traffic and Conversions

7 Ways to Use Video to Drive Traffic and Conversions

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you using video effectively to market your business? Want to discover the best kinds of videos to make and the best times to present them? Different types of video should be used at different times to help your audience connect with your products and services. A new prospect has much different needs than an established customer. In this article I’ll share seven ways to use the right type of video at the right time to increase traffic and conversions throughout the sales cycle. Listen to this article: #1: Increase Conversions With Product Videos Since website visitors are anywhere from 64% to 85% more likely to buy a product after watching a video about it, create short promotional videos that show off the main benefits and features of your products and put them on your website. For example, if you have an apparel store, instead of just posting photos, add a video of a model wearing your clothes. If you offer a service, use video to explain what problem your service solves and how it goes about doing so. PadMapper created an animated video that explains the service well, and with a light and humorous tone. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eN8nDVGfdZM Produce the video yourself, go with an agency or use tools such as Wideo or PowToon to create an animated video. Don't be afraid to be creative and take some risks. Video doesn't necessarily mean setting up a shoot and filming. A lot of great videos are just repurposed product images. Just insert photos into a cool template with nice transitions and text, and add some background music or other audio. #2: Drive Traffic With How-to Videos How-to videos catch viewers with prime buyer intent. They have a problem they want to solve or something they want to learn. It is up to you to show them how to do it. In fact, nearly 1 in 3 Millennials say they purchased a product as a direct result of watching a tutorial or how-to video about it. Come up with and share uses of your product. For example, explain to consumers how to tie a tie or show home cooks how to make certain recipes for your ingredient. Don't try to sell your product in this type of video, just focus on instructing your audience. The Home Depot creates how-to videos for projects. Of course, after the video piques customers' interest, a shopping trip to get the supplies is in order. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=emCG1cb0n3I Videos appear in 52% of Google keyword searches and 82% of them are from YouTube, so remember to optimize your video with keywords for SEO. Write detailed meta descriptions about your video and add transcripts of your voiceover. Just like with written works, produce great content that inspires people to engage with your videos. #3: Onboard Users With Product Walkthroughs Ensure your users have a smooth, easy and fun onboarding process, and they are likely to stick with you long-term. Before you get started, put yourself in the shoes of your first-time users. Choose the most common use cases of your product and do a screen recording. If you're on a Mac, you can easily do it in QuickTime. Windows users can download something like Screenrecorder. BuzzSumo created a fantastic walkthrough video for new users to get acquainted with their product. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=gpY2mMLbnq8 Go through the use case slowly and clearly, and narrate the process. Send out the link to your onboarding video in your welcome email or direct a new user to it from the sign-up page. Onboarding is one of the most critical parts of your relationship with your users, so make the most of it. #4: Cut Down on Customer Service Cases With Screencasts Just as screencasts can help onboard your users, they may also be used to reduce the number of customer service calls you receive. Rather than use text for FAQs, create videos with answers to your customers' most common questions. It's a way to establish trust and credibility. Plus,

How to Repurpose Your Facebook Live Videos

How to Repurpose Your Facebook Live Videos

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you using Facebook Live? Do you want more mileage out of your broadcasts? Reusing your Facebook Live video can help improve your impact and visibility. In this article, you'll discover how to download and repurpose your Facebook Live videos on other social media platforms. Listen to this article: #1: Download From Your Facebook Profile Facebook Live lets you broadcast a live-stream video from your phone. If you've live-streamed a great video you'd like to keep, follow these steps to download the video file from your Facebook: First, log into Facebook.com and go to your profile. Next, locate the Videos tab below your profile's cover photo (along the bottom of the image or in the More drop-down). Now, click on Videos to see a list of videos you've posted to your profile. Next, click on the thumbnail of the Facebook Live video. After the video opens, click on Options (along the bottom of the video) to reveal the menu to download it. Once you click the Download option, your stand-alone video will open. Right-click on the video and select Save Video As to save the video as an MP4 file to your computer. #2: Download From Your Facebook Page If your Facebook page is lively, the steps below are your best route to download your Facebook Live video from your page. Note: You must be an authorized manager on the page to access the options below. Let's get started! Once you complete a Facebook Live video from your page, you have a few optimization options to increase the reach and purpose of your post. (The options below are presently only available for Facebook Live videos streamed from a Facebook page.) First, log into the Facebook page you used for your Facebook Live post. Next, click on the Publishing Tools tab along the top. In the left-hand column of tabs, click on Videos to see a list of your page's posted videos. Find and click on the Facebook Live video you wish to download. Look for the Video Details pop-up window. Along the bottom, you'll see any posts related to your video. Click on the post link to uncover additional optimization and download options for your video. In the bottom-right corner of the Post Details pop-up window, find and click on the Edit Post button. To optimize your Facebook Live video from the Basic tab, add titles, tags, and custom thumbnail images. From the Advanced Tab, you can also choose to allow or prevent your video from being embedded in an external website. In addition, you can upload a Closed Captioning file to your video for access by the hearing-impaired. Next, look for the gear icon above the top-right corner of your video's image. Click the gear icon and select which version you want to download. If you just went live from your page in the last day or two, there's a slightly faster way to find the download option. This brief video will show you how to quickly download your most recent live video. #3: Repurpose Your Facebook Live Videos The show doesn't stop once you click Finish and Post in your Facebook Live broadcast. While your video post can reach far and wide on Facebook, you can push that reach even further after the video has wrapped up. Upload Your Live Video to YouTube or Vimeo Once you've downloaded your Facebook Live video, you can upload your video to other video hosting sites or channels to reach a wider audience. If you upload it to YouTube, you can even use YouTube's simple video editing tools to trim your video down to the moment(s) you want to keep and share. Don't forget to use YouTube's features to add a branded watermark, action cards, a description, and tags. Share Your Live Video With Newsletter Subscribers If your email newsletter could use a shot in the arm, add your Facebook Live video into your next issue. Personify Leadership shot partner interviews at an international conference and later used the Facebook Live videos to inform newsletter subscribers.

Viral Videos: How to Create and Promote Videos People Love

Viral Videos: How to Create and Promote Videos People Love

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you struggle to create and promote videos? Are you wondering how to make videos that go viral? To learn about the creative process of coming up with video ideas and making them happen, I interview Mark Malkoff for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Mark Malkoff, a comedian and filmmaker. Mark shares his love and passion for creating videos and several amazing stories behind his viral videos. You'll learn about his process for creating video and how to get traction. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Video Creation and Promotion Mark has created several viral videos and has been featured on many television shows. You'll hear about the stories behind these videos and what he accomplished to get this media attention. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=CwYxuV2dVzw Mark shares how he grew up in love with comedy, the path he took before he started making videos and how he started making viral videos. Mark describes himself as a comedian at heart and the biggest comedy nerd. He feels that his love for comedy shines through in his work. The stories behind Mark's videos You'll hear the story behind Mark's first very successful video: the 171 Starbucks mentioned above. This is when he visited and consumed purchases at all 171 Starbucks locations in Manhattan in less than 24 hours. Just after this 171 Starbucks story, Mark approached IKEA with a project of living and working in an IKEA store for a week. And after 2 months of being persistent, they agreed. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Z9q0sB_Xp6A Mark's IKEA story brought the most publicity in the USA in the history of IKEA as a company. And IKEA ended up winning the PR Week of the Year Award for the campaign. But to Mark, it was all about the video content and his videos on this project got 1.8 million views. Listen to the show to discover the secrets behind his success. The goals behind Mark's videos You'll learn how Mark's goal is simply to do things that make him laugh and challenge him. Sometimes brands are involved and sometimes they aren't. Mark tells the story of when he got carried across New York City by 155 individuals, 9.4 miles in 11-degree weather. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Gi4ClspNrNs The aim of this video was to prove to the world that New Yorkers are nice. The video was a success. Sometimes brands come to him and other times he has to knock on their doors. Listen to the show to find out why Ford Motor Company was one of the best brands Mark has worked with.  The process of creating a viral video Mark shares his process to come up with ideas for the videos he makes. You'll learn how he goes from the ideas to creating a video project. And you'll probably be surprised by the amount of research and training involved behind the scenes for Mark's videos. Mark shares his experience of having hours of video and trying to tell the story in a short video for YouTube. Listen to the show to find out how he tests his videos. The story in the video Mark explains how it's his own curiosity that resonates with his audience. The story behind the Apple Store Challenge was to see what he could get away with in the Apple store. The video got over 1 million views on YouTube. Parts of the challenge included taking a goat into the store, ordering a pizza to be delivered there, dressing up as Darth Vader to get his iPhone repaired and a date night for him and his wife.

How to Improve Your Site's Search Engine Optimization

How to Improve Your Site's Search Engine Optimization


Inc.com

Search engine optimization can raise your website's profile, delivering more traffic, more customers, and bigger revenues. Here's how to make the most of this essential marketing tool.

Web Performance Metrics for Landing Pages

by Stephen Krauska @ Rigor

During an implementation call with a client few weeks ago, I was asked “What metrics should we optimize for?” It’s a question I’m asked regularly, so I decided to do some extra research into the subject and resolve it once and for all. From my experience working with customers to understand their performance problems, proven […]

The post Web Performance Metrics for Landing Pages appeared first on Rigor.

26 Creative Tips and Tools for Social Media Marketers

26 Creative Tips and Tools for Social Media Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you a busy social media marketer? Do you want better tools and tips to simplify your job? Looking for ways to increase your visibility or productivity? In this article you’ll discover the best tips and tools shared on the Social Media Marketing podcast so far this year. Listen to this article: #1: The Great Suspender If you use Google Chrome a lot and jump from tab to tab, you'll notice it can hog resources from your system. The Great Suspender is a Google Chrome extension that keeps some of those tabs from running; it suspends them. Activate the extension and you can set it up with different variables. For example, you can set it to suspend your tabs after 20 seconds, you can specify to not suspend pinned tabs or set it to auto-suspend if you're on battery. (It's kind of like TripMode, discussed in a previous podcast, that manages which programs use your data when you're connected to WiFi.) You can also set it to auto-unsuspend tabs or require a click to unsuspend. The Great Suspender is a free Google Chrome plugin. #2: Goofy App Goofy, an unofficial Facebook Messenger client for Mac, lets you use Facebook Messenger without having to go to Facebook. Using the app, you can message people on Facebook without getting into the time suck that is Facebook when you have other things to do. Keep the app in the dock. Then when you need to send a message, just open it up. It’s much less distracting than going into Facebook on desktop or checking it on your phone. Goofy is a free app. #3: TripMode TripMode is a Mac laptop tool that will give you freedom to decide which apps are able to connect to the Internet using the data on a mobile device. Perfect for when you  sync your iPhone to your laptop and use it as a mobile hotspot. After you install TripMode, an icon will appear in the menu bar that allows you to choose to launch TripMode automatically when you connect to a mobile hotspot or turn TripMode on manually. You can also see data usage for each app and manage them individually. For example, you can check or uncheck Dropbox, Google Chrome, Mail, etc. TripMode offers free and paid versions. #4: Soovle.com Soovle.com is a great tool to use when you're looking for interesting keywords to use in your blog posts or advertising. It's also an excellent way to see how different search results look across social channels and search engines. Go to Soovle, type in a phrase or keyword and you'll see what comes up on Google, YouTube, Bing, Yahoo!, Wikipedia, Answers.com, eBay, Weather Channel, Netflix and more. For example, I entered "native video." On Google, I got native video advertising examples, native video and native video advertising. On YouTube, I got Native American music and Native American flute. On Yahoo!, I got Native Americans and on Bing I got Native foods. Soovle is a free service. #5: HiddenMe HiddenMe is a Mac tool that will hide all of the icons on your desktop when you launch it. If you're about to do a screenshare or a presentation, instead of putting everything on your desktop away, you can hide it. It's the equivalent of throwing everything in the closet when you have guests coming over. HiddenMe is a free app. #6: Noisli Noisli is more than a white noise generator, it's a sound environment creator available through your web browser or the iOS app. When you need to cancel out the noise in a loud location or add noise to a quiet one, Noisli lets you choose from a variety of sounds such as rain, white noise, different oscillating fans, café sounds, library sounds and more. You can even use a single sound or a combination, and change sound environments whenever you want. Now you won't feel like you're sitting in your office all day when you're working on your projects. Noisli is a free service. #7: Facebook Paper If you don't want to install Messenger for whatever reason,

Mobilizing Your Website: What You Need to Know

Mobilizing Your Website: What You Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Is your website or blog mobile-ready? Are you wondering how to optimize it for mobile users? To learn about the opportunities available in the mobile marketing world, I interview Greg Hickman for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Greg Hickman, the founder of Mobile Mixed, a website that specializes in training marketers in mobile marketing. He also hosts The Mobile Mixed Podcast. Greg advises big brands on mobile marketing, including AT&T, Electronic Arts, Cabelas and Sony Pictures. Greg shares what businesses should do to make their mobile experience more user-friendly. You'll learn about the best tools available to build your own mobile site and how to discover the kind of devices people are using to visit your site. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Mobilizing Your Website Why it's important for businesses to think about the unique needs of mobile users Greg shares why you have to think where your customer or audience is coming from. The way we consume content today—whether it be email, social, using search or listening to podcasts—is mainly through a mobile device. The first entry point to you, your business or brand is more likely to be a mobile phone. You want the customers' experience to be very friendly and optimized to whatever device they are on. Around 53% of the US population has a smartphone. You'll discover why Greg believes email is overlooked when it comes to mobile. Listen to the show to find out why Greg believes mobile email is an opportunity for marketers. How to find out if mobile users are coming to your website Greg recommends that the first thing you should do is look at analysis software such as Google Analytics. It will show you how many people in your current audience are coming to your site from a mobile device. It will also break out the numbers by specific device. You'll probably discover that 20-50% of the overall visits to your site are coming from a mobile device. Secondly, depending on your email service provider, some will offer insights into how many of the email opens are coming from mobile. You'll find out why this is a good indicator if you're a big emailer. Greg shares how you can look to see from a social perspective if people engage with you from a mobile device on Twitter or Facebook. You'll hear how many people visited Social Media Examiner over the last 30 days via a mobile device. Listen to the show to find out why MillerCoors launched Android-specific solutions for their audience. Why we need to think differently about tablet users versus mobile phone users There's a lot of misconception about how people use their smartphones. Greg recently read a study where 68% of smartphone usage is from home. Mobile doesn't necessarily mean on the go. You have to look at your own customers and brand and see where they are interacting with you to help determine how much it's going to affect you. Greg believes with the tablet experience, you will start to see more usage in the evening hours. People use them as a second screen experience while sitting on the couch in front of the TV. Google Analytics helps you see the time of day people are hitting your site with their specific devices. You might then correlate that to the likelihood of people sitting on the couch. Listen to the show to find out how the older generation is adopting tablet devices. Where marketers should start when it comes to making a site ...

How to Partner With YouTube Influencers: 6 Tips for Success

How to Partner With YouTube Influencers: 6 Tips for Success

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is YouTube part of your marketing strategy? Do you team up with influencers for video campaigns? Potential customers turn to YouTube influencers to discover products and get reviews, tips and tutorials on everything from makeup to their next mattress purchase. In this article I'll share six tips to help you partner with influencers on YouTube to get the word out about your company. Listen to this article: #1: Find Authentic YouTubers The beauty and power of word-of-mouth marketing is in finding the right influencers for your brand, and then allowing them the creative freedom to position your product organically in their videos. When a video feels fake, forced or scripted, potential customers can't click on the Back button fast enough. Find YouTubers who already embody your brand and truly love your product, and then let them do what they do best: be themselves. Remember, most YouTubers are not actors. People don't go to YouTube to watch commercials; they go to search for information and see their favorite video personalities give advice and offer interesting information. #2: Hire by Fit, not Followers When hiring YouTubers to work on a campaign, it may seem enticing to simply go for the ones who have the largest following or view counts. While this makes sense in theory, if you don't have the right fit, your message and product will likely go unnoticed. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=H-YnOvpxHRU The YouTuber behind Secret Life of a Bionerd is a natural fit for beauty-related products and services. Brands working with small- and mid-sized influencers tend to have more success, because those personalities have a tight-knit community as the target market for the brand. In particular, smaller influencers who have a highly engaged audience around a niche subject are invaluable. They have greater impact and are often more cost-effective, due to their audience size. #3: Track Response to Links To determine the success of a campaign, create and provide a custom tracking link for each influencer, which leads back to your website, blog or product page. This may seem like common sense, but it's a mistake brands frequently make. When you track activity in this manner, you can see which influencers were most effective, and determine which ones you do and do not want to work on your future campaigns. Ask your campaign influencers to add your tracking link to the top of their video description, so viewers can easily find and click the link. YouTube allows minimal space for text before a viewer has to click Show More to see the rest of the video's description. You want your link to appear in that prime real estate. #4: Offer Coupon Codes It's notoriously difficult to track video conversions on YouTube. For example, viewers search for your company organically by opening up a new browser tab, which doesn't show up in your campaign results. Or they watch your video on certain devices, such as Apple TV, which don't allow you to click description links. A coupon code is an excellent way to track ROI and entice customers to take immediate action. If a potential customer isn't sure about your product or service, especially if your brand isn't well-known yet, a coupon code helps sway them, while giving you a video conversion to track. Since YouTubers have established relationships with their audience, when they provide a "special code" to use at checkout, it proves to their audience they're true ambassadors. YouTubers also get more excited about promoting products with special discount codes, because they want their audience to see that they're getting them a great deal. #5: Create Titles That Drive Views Come up with an interesting and catchy title for the video in your campaign, just as you would write the title of a blog post or book. Work with your influencer to create a headline that makes sense for your product and fits seamlessly with the type of titles and content the ...

AMAZON IS PLANNING TO BECOME A LOCAL SERVICE DIRECTORY FOR HOME REPAIR

by submit @ Submit Express

Amazon is planning to become a local service directory for Home Repair ,a little like Angie’s List and Craiglists, but on Amazon you can actually purchase the service, similar to Groupon. An article by our CEO Pierre Zarokian has been published on Search Engine Journal, which explains more. It is titled: “Will Amazon Become the […]

Word of Mouth: Getting Others to Talk About Your Business

Word of Mouth: Getting Others to Talk About Your Business

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want more people to talk about your brand or business? Want to discover how to get the ball rolling? To learn about word-of-mouth marketing, I interview Ted Wright. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview word-of-mouth marketer Ted Wright, author of the book, Fizz: Harness the Power of Word of Mouth Marketing to Drive Brand Growth. He's also the founder of Fizz, an agency that specializes in word-of-mouth marketing. His clients include Intuit, Pabst Blue Ribbon, Verizon, Intel and many others. In this episode Ted will explore word-of-mouth marketing. You'll discover why word-of-mouth marketing is important in the age of social media, as well as things you can do to get people talking. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Word of Mouth How Ted became interested in word-of-mouth marketing Ted talks about when he attended the University of Chicago School of Business in 1999. At that time the computer lab was basically a windowless cave with 20 rows of 20 computers each, Ted recalls. Early one morning working in the lab, he noticed the ambient light was blue. It was because the Netscape screen was mostly blue, and that's the site everyone used. After 20 minutes or so of searching fruitlessly and getting frustrated with Netscape, somebody leaned over and suggested Ted try Google, which he did. Ted's test search term was his mother's name, Dr. Lynette Wright, a fairly famous medical geneticist. However, since they share the same last name as the guys who invented airplanes, most search engines easily got confused. "Google returned my mother as the second search term, instead of eight pages deep, which was the norm for other sites," Ted shares. He kept working and 20 minutes later, Ted noticed the guy next to him getting frustrated. So Ted leaned over and explained Google to him. About four or five hours later, Ted finished working, stood up, looked around and noticed the light in the room changed from the ambient blue of Netscape to the ambient white of the Google screen. Ted, who's always trying to figure out how things work, found that very interesting. So during his second year at the University of Chicago, he blew apart the history, math, psychology and epidemiology of word-of-mouth marketing. After graduation, Ted decided to start his own business. That company, which he started 15 years ago, is now called Fizz. Listen to the show to discover the unique way in which Ted watched TiVo and Google get adopted. The importance of word-of-mouth marketing Ted defines word-of-mouth marketing as "identifying your influencers and coming up with a story that is interesting, relevant and authentic that ladders back to qualities of your brand and then sharing that story as much as possible." That's the first part. The second part, Ted says, is "creating for your influencers as many opportunities as you can as a brand or a company for them if they feel like it to share your brand's story with as many people as they would like to do so." Ted shares the word-of-mouth marketing campaign he ran for Pabst Blue Ribbon (P.B.R.) with the brand manager at the time, Neal Stewart. The goal was to get more people in America to drink P.B.R. Ted identifies the three critical components of a story being shared: Is the story interesting to influencers so they will pick it up, study it and really understand it? Is it relevant to influencers' audiences? Is it authentic the way they currently understand the brand and the category in general?

Marketing You: How to Play to Your Unique Strengths

Marketing You: How to Play to Your Unique Strengths

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you struggle when it comes to marketing yourself? Are you wondering what your unique strengths are? To learn how to promote yourself based on these strengths, I interview Sally Hogshead for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. Keep reading to discover more. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Sally Hogshead, author of Fascinate and How the World Sees You. She was an award-winning copywriter at the age of 23 and worked with brands such as Nike, Target and BMW. She's one of the few women in the Speaker Hall of Fame and a popular keynote speaker (Sally keynoted Social Media Marketing World) and a simply fascinating woman. Sally shares how you can be successful and fascinating in your work and your life. You'll discover how fascination can increase your value, put you at an advantage and enable you to get more satisfaction out of your work. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Marketing You The journey from Fascinate to How the World Sees You Sally explains that the hardest part for her when writing a book is when it goes into the print stage. When her last book Fascinate was ready to be shipped to stores, she felt at a loss and didn't know what to do with herself. She started to think about doing a personality assessment, which was based on the same system that she had created for brands. So instead of it being about how consumers see a brand, it's about how the world sees you. Once the test was ready, it was put out on social media for free and it became a huge part of her business. It surpassed Fascinate. Sally soon realized that people really wanted to know how to make themselves—not their brand—fascinating. She pivoted her entire company and started to study more about it and go deep into what makes one person perceived as valuable, and someone else perceived as a commodity. Once you have done the assessment, it becomes clear why certain people like, respect and admire you, and why you turn others off. The key here is that you don't have to change who you are; you have to become more of who you are. Listen to the show to find out why it helps to see the patterns among your work colleagues, and how it can help you communicate more effectively with them. How social media has played a part in the development of this entire concept Before the days of social media, our average attention span used to be 20 minutes. Now with social media, it's around 9 seconds. People can now form an opinion of you instantly on social media. With that in mind, you now have to find a way to front-load your value. It's your opportunity to make the most accurate and authentic first impression. You'll hear what Sally and her team discovered when they ran a one-year free beta test for about 30,000 people, and why it led them to turn it into a paid model. At present, the Fascination Advantage Assessment costs $37. However, you can get free access to an in-depth, custom report, which identifies your personality advantages. Check out the key takeaways at the end of this article to find out how to enter. Listen to the show to hear the two main things that people who took the initial assessment wanted to know. Fascination and the research behind it  Sally states that fascination is a state of intense focus. When you're fascinated by something, you are totally focused on that one particular thing. It can be a person, an idea, a movie, a book or a product. As part of the initial market research that Sally carried...

How to Impress Googlebot When What Your Site Offers Isn’t Revolutionary

by adminDdddjc @ Search Engine Placement | Search Engine Optimization Firm

You have probably heard it a hundred times. Your website has to offer something so compelling that it gets other people sharing it, bookmarking it, revisiting it over-and-over again for it to rank well on Google. Well, what if you are like the majority of site owners and what you offer is plain vanilla? There […]

The post How to Impress Googlebot When What Your Site Offers Isn’t Revolutionary appeared first on Search Engine Placement | Search Engine Optimization Firm.

Facebook Ads Strategy: How Marketers Need to Alter Their Techniques

Facebook Ads Strategy: How Marketers Need to Alter Their Techniques

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Facebook ads? Want to learn the latest strategies? To discover what's changed with Facebook ads and how to get better results, I interview Rick Mulready. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Rick Mulready, the host of the Art of Paid Traffic podcast. He's a Facebook Ads coach and has numerous courses on Facebook advertising, including the FB ADvantage. Rick will explore what's changed with Facebook ads and share new strategies that work. You'll discover best practices for video ads, carousel ads, and more. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Ads Strategy Rick's story Rick spent 12 years in the corporate online advertising space, working with big companies like AOL, Yahoo, Funny or Die, and Vibrant Media. He did everything from banner and video ads to search and text advertising. Rick got into Facebook ads around 2010, while still in the corporate world. This was when Facebook was making a name for itself as a social platform, when small businesses could post on their pages and people would see it, and when Facebook started to allow business to advertise. Rick loved Facebook advertising. He saw the power in it, and taught himself as much as he could. He started running campaigns for entrepreneur friends while still in corporate, and the rest is history. Rick left his job at the end of 2012 and has been specializing in Facebook ads ever since. For the first couple of years, Rick focused on social media in general. He hosted the Inside Social Media podcast, where he interviewed the heads of social media from some of the biggest brands around the world. That was great, yet Rick still gravitated toward the Facebook ad side. In January 2015, Rick started the Art of Paid Traffic podcast, where he covers Facebook advertising and everything else to do with paid traffic such as YouTube ads, copywriting, landing pages, metrics, analytics, and so on. It's a combination of case studies, interviews with experts, and solo shows. Listen to the show to learn why only big businesses could really utilize Facebook ads in 2010. How Facebook Ads has evolved A lot has changed in Facebook advertising – such as targeting – over the past year or so, Rick says. For instance, you can upload your email list and create a targeted audience out of them. Also, you can retarget people coming to your website or a landing page. When most people think of targeting, they think of interest targeting, which is targeting fans of another page or somebody in their space. Facebook has recently rolled out detailed targeting. Before, if you wanted to target fans of Social Media Examiner or Entrepreneur Magazine, you could only do one or the other. Now, you can set up ads to target people who have an interest in Social Media Examiner and Entrepreneur Magazine. To take it a step further, you can exclude an audience. For instance, target fans of Social Media Examiner and Entrepreneur magazine, but exclude people who like Inc. Magazine. It's a much more detailed subset of that audience. When Facebook reported its Q4 earnings, they basically said their customer is not the advertiser. While they're making money off of advertising, their customers are the 1.5 billion Facebook users. Facebook recognizes that without these users, they won't have people coming to advertise on the platform. Therefore, Facebook is protecting the user experience. They want to make sure advertisers think of value first to take care of Facebook users. While you can still run an ad to an opt-in or registration page,

6 Google+ Features to Promote Your Business

6 Google+ Features to Promote Your Business

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use Google+ for your business? Wondering which features to invest your time and effort in? While there have been recent changes to Google+, the platform has a number of features many marketers love and will continue to use. In this article you'll discover six Google+ features you can use to promote your business. Listen to this article: #1: Set Up Google+ Business Listings for Visibility Google My Business is by far the most important Google+ feature, especially if your business has a local presence. Not only can a Google+ business listing increase your visibility on local and mobile search, but it also allows potential customers to call you, get directions to your business on Google Maps and check out your verified business website. Your listing also makes your photos and YouTube videos easily findable on your business page and lets customers leave reviews for your business right on your Google+ page. It's up to you to fill in your business information with as much detail as possible. Check out this business listing for a restaurant in Pune, India. As a result of verifying their website, it now ranks #1 in the organic search results for the business name. The listing clearly shows all of the restaurant's information, including their location on Google Maps and customer reviews. As mobile search grows in importance, having a Google+ business listing will become even more vital from a local SEO point of view. If your business is a retail store, restaurant, café or hotel, your Google+ business listing will be a crucial part of your online presence in the years to come. #2: Use Circles to Segment Connections Google+ Circles are an effective way to create subsets of people you're connected to and share content and updates selectively with them. You can create circles based on friends, customers, business partners, affiliates or influencers you follow. This helps you segment your updates to particular audiences and their interests. Some people even use circles to send updates to large groups to avoid the restrictions that come with Gmail. #3: Create and Join Communities to Network Google+ Communities enable you to organize groups of people around a topic of conversation or a cause. According to Google+ evangelist Guy Kawasaki, "Communities have transformed Google+ into a more deeply connected environment, people's favorite communities have become a starting point for their Google+ activity each day. Whether you're representing a brand or are an individual with a passion, communities are a way to connect with like-minded people." You can use communities to recruit and connect with passionate advocates of your products or your cause. Or you could create a community around a passion or topic of interest, like a football club or a movie franchise. It's no surprise that the Star Wars community is one of the most popular, with more than 4 million followers. You can also join other people's communities to network with like-minded people. Peg Fitzpatrick's advice is that you don't just replicate your Facebook or LinkedIn community on Google+. Make your Google+ community unique so that it provides real value to its members. One way to do this is to organize hangouts on air exclusively for your community members. #4: Start Collections to Categorize Content Google+ Collections are a unique way to group your posts by topic. This feature allows you to categorize the content you share on Google+. Lately Google seems to have been adding features to make it easier to add posts to a collection, and they seem to be expending some effort on adding other bells and whistles. According to Google, "Posts in collections you follow will appear in your Home stream, with a link to easily jump right into the collection so you can get to similar content from that author." Ever since I started creating collections, I've noticed that Google+ users have been finding and following them...

Search Engine Optimization — Basics - Berkeley Advanced Media Institute

Search Engine Optimization — Basics - Berkeley Advanced Media Institute


Berkeley Advanced Media Institute

Search Engine Optimization is the process of structuring content so it can be easily found.

8 Ways to Optimize Facebook Ad Targeting

8 Ways to Optimize Facebook Ad Targeting

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Could your Facebook ad targeting use some refinement? Looking for new ways to reach your ideal audience with Facebook ads? Facebook's new targeting options help you improve the conversion rate of your Facebook ads. In this article you'll discover eight ways to optimize your Facebook ad targeting. Listen to this article: #1: Narrow Lookalike Audiences With Interests If you enjoy a high amount of traffic to your blog or have a wide list of existing customers, using lookalike audiences is a great tactic. Unfortunately, in many cases, lookalike audiences are too large. The minimum lookalike audience in the U.S., for example, is around 1 million users. To find a smaller and more focused audience for your ad, test your ads using different interests. When you find the right combination of lookalike audience and interest, you'll have a more targeted audience and reduce the cost per click/conversion. Here's how to combine interests with a lookalike audience. First, choose the lookalike audience you want to use. For example, in the image below I chose Lookalike (US, 1%) with 1.9M people. Then scroll down to Detailed Targeting and add interests one by one. Test the option above versus the traditional solo-flying lookalike audience, which is much broader. See if you're managing to hit the sweet spot inside what's already a well-defined audience. Refining Interests With Companies and Blogs Your options for defining an audience by their interests have changed significantly in the last year. In the early days of interests targeting, the interests you could choose were limited and usually on a high level (for example, Running, Marathons, Ironman Triathlon). Now you can define companies, blogs and even influencers as interests. Rather than use broad terms, you can choose interests like RunKeeper, Nike+ Fuelband, Jeff Galloway and Runner's World Blog. These kinds of interests typically perform much better than broad terms. If your audience is too small, try choosing dozens of companies, apps, influencers and blogs. Here's an example of an old high-level audience combination. Here's a recommended mix of smaller audiences. You can start out broad and work your way to more niche interests, or start small and expand. Whatever tactic you choose, make sure to give each method a chance to gain enough impressions to measure it accurately. #2: Expand the Age Range One common practice for defining your target audience is to choose the right ages based on your product definitions or Facebook Insights. For example, when building an ad campaign for college students, most advertisers will pick an age range of 18-22. A great way to lower your cost per conversion is to expand your age range. To test a wider age range, try one of these options: Choose an age range of 10 years (for example, 18-28) Choose an age range of 30-40 years (for example, 18-58) You may be surprised to see that Facebook still shows your ad mainly to your target audience while the cost goes down. #3: Use the Must Also Match Feature Last October, Facebook launched a new feature called Detailed Targeting. This allows you to choose "must also match" interests rather than just a group of interests. Several experiments in different categories and industries have shown that adding "must also match" interests leads to a more engaged audience and reduces click/conversion costs by up to 25%. For example, if you choose Twitter as an interest and Social Media Marketing as a "must also match" interest, it will work better than choosing both interests as usual or just one interest. To test what works for you, change the interest in the Must Also Match at Least One of the Following box. Try adding two or three interests, and keep close tabs to see if your conversion rates improve. If not, you went one interest too far. #4: Exclude Website Visitors

Search Engine Placement Services: What's Holding You Back?

Search Engine Placement Services: What's Holding You Back?


Keyword Performance, LLC.

Search engine placement is a tricky thing: Google's algorithms are immense, complex, and always changing. Learn about what ranks pages and how KP can help.